This is a modern-English version of Indian Linguistic Families of America, North of Mexico: Seventh Annual Report of the Bureau of Ethnology to the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution, 1885-1886, Government Printing Office, Washington, 1891, pages 1-142, originally written by Powell, John Wesley.
It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling,
and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If
you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.
Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.
This e-text includes characters that require UTF-8 (Unicode) file encoding:
This e-text includes characters that need UTF-8 (Unicode) file encoding:
• macron Ū ā ē ī ū
· breve Ă ă ĕ ĭ ŭ
• chi χ
• inverted letters ʇʞ, over-dot ż, combined
form e̥ (all rare)
• macron Ū ā ē ī ū
· breve Ă ă ĕ ĭ ŭ
• chi χ
• inverted letters ʇʞ, over-dot ż, combined form e̥ (all rare)
If any of these characters do not display properly—in particular, if a diacritic does not appear directly above or below its letter—you may have an incompatible browser or unavailable fonts. First, make sure that the browser’s “character set” or “file encoding” is set to Unicode (UTF-8). You may also need to change your browser’s default font.
If any of these characters aren't showing up correctly—in particular, if a diacritic isn't appearing directly above or below its letter—you might have a browser that isn't compatible or missing fonts. First, check that your browser’s “character set” or “file encoding” is set to Unicode (UTF-8). You might also need to change your browser’s default font.
Words containing some especially uncommon characters have been given mouse-hover transliterations (grey underline).
Words containing some especially uncommon characters have been given mouse-hover transliterations (grey underline).
A few typographical errors have been corrected. They have been marked in the text with mouse-hover popups (red underline).
A few typos have been fixed. They are highlighted in the text with mouse-hover popups (red underline).
Further details on transliteration and errata are given at the end of the file.
Further details on transliteration and errors are provided at the end of the file.
INDIAN LINGUISTIC FAMILIES OF AMERICA
NORTH OF MEXICO.
BY
J. W. POWELL.
CONTENTS.
Nomenclature of linguistic families | 7 |
Literature relating to the classification of Indian languages Literature about the classification of Indian languages |
12 |
Linguistic map | 25 |
Indian tribes sedentary | 30 |
Population | 33 |
Tribal land | 40 |
Village sites | 40 |
Agricultural land | 41 |
Hunting claims | 42 |
Summary of deductions | 44 |
Linguistic families | 45 |
Adaizan family | 45 |
Algonquian family | 47 |
Algonquian area | 47 |
Principal Algonquian tribes | 48 |
Population | 48 |
Athapascan family | 51 |
Boundaries | 52 |
Northern group | 53 |
Pacific group | 53 |
Southern group | 54 |
Principal tribes | 55 |
Population | 55 |
Attacapan family | 56 |
Beothuakan family | 57 |
Geographic distribution | 58 |
Caddoan family | 58 |
Northern group | 60 |
Middle group | 60 |
Southern group | 60 |
Principal tribes | 61 |
Population | 62 |
Chimakuan family | 62 |
Principal tribes | 63 |
Chimarikan family | 63 |
Principal tribes | 63 |
Chimmesyan family | 63 |
Principal tribes or villages | 64 |
Population | 64 |
Chinookan family | 65 |
Principal tribes | 66 |
Population | 66 |
4 Chitimachan family | 66 |
Chumashan family | 67 |
Population | 68 |
Coahuiltecan family | 68 |
Principal tribes | 69 |
Copehan family | 69 |
Geographic distribution | 69 |
Principal tribes | 70 |
Costanoan family | 70 |
Geographic distribution | 71 |
Population | 71 |
Eskimauan family | 71 |
Geographic distribution | 72 |
Principal tribes and villages | 74 |
Population | 74 |
Esselenian family | 75 |
Iroquoian family | 76 |
Geographic distribution | 77 |
Principal tribes | 79 |
Population | 79 |
Kalapooian family | 81 |
Principal tribes | 82 |
Population | 82 |
Karankawan family | 82 |
Keresan family | 83 |
Villages | 83 |
Population | 83 |
Kiowan family | 84 |
Population | 84 |
Kitunahan family | 85 |
Tribes | 85 |
Population | 85 |
Koluschan family | 85 |
Tribes | 87 |
Population | 87 |
Kulanapan family | 87 |
Geographic distribution | 88 |
Tribes | 88 |
Kusan family | 89 |
Tribes | 89 |
Population | 89 |
Lutuamian family | 89 |
Tribes | 90 |
Population | 90 |
Mariposan family | 90 |
Geographic distribution | 91 |
Tribes | 91 |
Population | 91 |
Moquelumnan family | 92 |
Geographic distribution | 93 |
Principal tribes | 93 |
Population | 93 |
5 Muskhogean family | 94 |
Geographic distribution | 94 |
Principal tribes | 95 |
Population | 95 |
Natchesan family | 95 |
Principal tribes | 97 |
Population | 97 |
Palaihnihan family | 97 |
Geographic distribution | 98 |
Principal tribes | 98 |
Piman family | 98 |
Principal tribes | 99 |
Population | 99 |
Pujunan family | 99 |
Geographic distribution | 100 |
Principal tribes | 100 |
Quoratean family | 100 |
Geographic distribution | 101 |
Tribes | 101 |
Population | 101 |
Salinan family | 101 |
Population | 102 |
Salishan family | 102 |
Geographic distribution | 104 |
Principal tribes | 104 |
Population | 105 |
Sastean family | 105 |
Geographic distribution | 106 |
Shahaptian family | 106 |
Geographic distribution | 107 |
Principal tribes and population | 107 |
Shoshonean family | 108 |
Geographic distribution | 109 |
Principal tribes and population | 110 |
Siouan family | 111 |
Geographic distribution | 112 |
Principal tribes | 114 |
Population | 116 |
Skittagetan family | 118 |
Geographic distribution | 120 |
Principal tribes | 120 |
Population | 121 |
Takilman family | 121 |
Geographic distribution | 121 |
Tañoan family | 121 |
Geographic distribution | 122 |
Population | 123 |
Timuquanan family | 123 |
Geographic distribution | 123 |
Principal tribes | 124 |
Tonikan family | 125 |
Geographic distribution | 125 |
6 Tonkawan family | 125 |
Geographic distribution | 126 |
Uchean family | 126 |
Geographic distribution | 126 |
Population | 127 |
Waiilatpuan family | 127 |
Geographic distribution | 127 |
Principal tribes | 127 |
Population | 128 |
Wakashan family | 128 |
Geographic distribution | 130 |
Principal Aht tribes | 130 |
Population | 130 |
Principal Haeltzuk tribes | 131 |
Population | 131 |
Washoan family | 131 |
Weitspekan family | 131 |
Geographic distribution | 132 |
Tribes | 132 |
Wishoskan family | 132 |
Geographic distribution | 133 |
Tribes | 133 |
Yakonan family | 133 |
Geographic distribution | 134 |
Tribes | 134 |
Population | 135 |
Yanan family | 135 |
Geographic distribution | 135 |
Yukian family | 135 |
Geographic distribution | 136 |
Yuman family | 136 |
Geographic distribution | 137 |
Principal tribes | 138 |
Population | 138 |
Zuñian family | 138 |
Geographic distribution | 139 |
Population | 139 |
Concluding remarks | 139 |
Footnotes Index |
ILLUSTRATION
Plate I. Map. Linguistic stocks of North America north of Mexico. In pocket at end of volume
Plate 1. Map. Language families of North America north of Mexico. In pocket at the end of the volume.
small format: 615×732 pixel
(about 9×11 in / 23×28 cm, 168K)
large format: 1521×1818 pixel
(about 22×27 in / 56×70 cm, 1MB)
small format: 615×732 pixels
(approximately 9×11 in / 23×28 cm, 168K)
large format: 1521×1818 pixels
(approximately 22×27 in / 56×70 cm, 1MB)
This map is also available in very high resolution, zoomable form at the Library of Congress (link valid at time of posting).
This map is also available in high resolution and can be zoomed in on at the Library of Congress (link valid at time of posting).
INDIAN LINGUISTIC FAMILIES.
By J. W. Powell.
NOMENCLATURE OF LINGUISTIC FAMILIES.
The languages spoken by the pre-Columbian tribes of North America were many and diverse. Into the regions occupied by these tribes travelers, traders, and missionaries have penetrated in advance of civilization, and civilization itself has marched across the continent at a rapid rate. Under these conditions the languages of the various tribes have received much study. Many extensive works have been published, embracing grammars and dictionaries; but a far greater number of minor vocabularies have been collected and very many have been published. In addition to these, the Bible, in whole or in part, and various religious books and school books, have been translated into Indian tongues to be used for purposes of instruction; and newspapers have been published in the Indian languages. Altogether the literature of these languages and that relating to them are of vast extent.
The languages spoken by the pre-Columbian tribes of North America were numerous and varied. Travelers, traders, and missionaries ventured into the areas occupied by these tribes before civilization arrived, and civilization itself quickly spread across the continent. Because of this, the languages of the different tribes have been extensively studied. Many comprehensive works, including grammars and dictionaries, have been published, along with a much larger collection of smaller vocabularies. Additionally, parts of the Bible, along with various religious texts and school materials, have been translated into Native American languages for educational purposes, and newspapers have been printed in these languages. Overall, the literature associated with these languages and that which pertains to them is vast.
While the materials seem thus to be abundant, the student of Indian languages finds the subject to be one requiring most thoughtful consideration, difficulties arising from the following conditions:
While the materials seem to be plentiful, a student of Indian languages discovers that the subject needs careful thought, with challenges arising from the following factors:
(1) A great number of linguistic stocks or families are discovered.
(1) A large number of language families or groups are discovered.
(2) The boundaries between the different stocks of languages are not immediately apparent, from the fact that many tribes of diverse stocks have had more or less association, and to some extent linguistic materials have been borrowed, and thus have passed out of the exclusive possession of cognate peoples.
(2) The lines between different language groups aren’t always clear because many tribes from various groups have interacted more or less, leading to some borrowing of linguistic elements, which means that these elements are no longer solely owned by related people.
(3) Where many peoples, each few in number, are thrown together, an intertribal language is developed. To a large extent this is gesture speech; but to a limited extent useful and important words are adopted by various tribes, and out of this material an intertribal “jargon” is established. Travelers and all others who do not thoroughly study a language are far more likely to acquire this jargon speech than the real speech of the people; and the tendency to base relationship upon such jargons has led to confusion.
(3) When many different groups of people, each being small in number, come together, an intertribal language forms. For the most part, this language relies on gestures; however, certain useful and important words are borrowed from various tribes, and from this blend, an intertribal “jargon” is created. Travelers and others who don’t take the time to really learn a language are much more likely to pick up this jargon than the actual language of the people; this reliance on jargons for communication has caused a lot of misunderstandings.
8 (4) This tendency to the establishment of intertribal jargons was greatly accelerated on the advent of the white man, for thereby many tribes were pushed from their ancestral homes and tribes were mixed with tribes. As a result, new relations and new industries, especially of trade, were established, and the new associations of tribe with tribe and of the Indians with Europeans led very often to the development of quite elaborate jargon languages. All of these have a tendency to complicate the study of the Indian tongues by comparative methods.
8 (4) The creation of intertribal jargons sped up significantly with the arrival of white settlers, as many tribes were displaced from their ancestral lands and mixed with others. This led to new relationships and industries, particularly in trade, and the interactions between tribes and Europeans often resulted in the development of quite complex jargon languages. All of this makes studying the Indian languages through comparative methods more complicated.
The difficulties inherent in the study of languages, together with the imperfect material and the complicating conditions that have arisen by the spread of civilization over the country, combine to make the problem one not readily solved.
The challenges involved in studying languages, along with the inadequate resources and the complicated circumstances caused by the spread of civilization across the country, come together to create a problem that isn't easily solved.
In view of the amount of material on hand, the comparative study of the languages of North America has been strangely neglected, though perhaps this is explained by reason of the difficulties which have been pointed out. And the attempts which have been made to classify them has given rise to much confusion, for the following reasons: First, later authors have not properly recognized the work of earlier laborers in the field. Second, the attempt has more frequently been made to establish an ethnic classification than a linguistic classification, and linguistic characteristics have been confused with biotic peculiarities, arts, habits, customs, and other human activities, so that radical differences of language have often been ignored and slight differences have been held to be of primary value.
Given the amount of available material, the comparative study of North American languages has been surprisingly overlooked, though this might be due to the difficulties that have been noted. The efforts made to classify them have led to considerable confusion for several reasons: First, later authors have not adequately acknowledged the work of earlier scholars in this area. Second, there has been a greater focus on establishing an ethnic classification rather than a linguistic one, which has led to linguistic traits being mixed up with biological features, arts, habits, customs, and other human activities, resulting in significant language differences often being overlooked while minor differences are treated as highly significant.
The attempts at a classification of these languages and a corresponding classification of races have led to the development of a complex, mixed, and inconsistent synonymy, which must first be unraveled and a selection of standard names made therefrom according to fixed principles.
The efforts to classify these languages and the corresponding races have resulted in a complicated, mixed, and inconsistent set of synonyms, which needs to be sorted out first, and from which a selection of standard names should be made based on established principles.
It is manifest that until proper rules are recognized by scholars the establishment of a determinate nomenclature is impossible. It will therefore be well to set forth the rules that have here been adopted, together with brief reasons for the same, with the hope that they will commend themselves to the judgment of other persons engaged in researches relating to the languages of North America.
It’s clear that until scholars accept proper rules, creating a definite naming system is impossible. Therefore, it’s important to outline the rules we’ve adopted here, along with some brief explanations for them, hoping that they will be found reasonable by others involved in research related to the languages of North America.
A fixed nomenclature in biology has been found not only to be advantageous, but to be a prerequisite to progress in research, as the vast multiplicity of facts, still ever accumulating, would otherwise overwhelm the scholar. In philological classification fixity of nomenclature is of corresponding importance; and while the analogies between linguistic and biotic classification are quite limited, many of the principles of nomenclature which biologists have adopted having no application in philology, still in some important particulars the requirements of all scientific classifications are alike, 9 and though many of the nomenclatural points met with in biology will not occur in philology, some of them do occur and may be governed by the same rules.
A fixed naming system in biology is not just helpful; it’s essential for advancing research, as the huge number of facts, which continues to grow, would otherwise overwhelm scholars. In the classification of language, a stable naming system is equally important; and while the similarities between language and biological classification are quite limited, many of the naming principles that biologists have adopted don’t apply to philology. Still, in some significant ways, the needs of all scientific classifications are similar, 9 and even though many of the naming issues found in biology won’t occur in philology, some do overlap and can be governed by the same rules.
Perhaps an ideal nomenclature in biology may some time be established, as attempts have been made to establish such a system in chemistry; and possibly such an ideal system may eventually be established in philology. Be that as it may, the time has not yet come even for its suggestion. What is now needed is a rule of some kind leading scholars to use the same terms for the same things, and it would seem to matter little in the case of linguistic stocks what the nomenclature is, provided it becomes denotive and universal.
Maybe one day, an ideal naming system in biology will be developed, just as there have been efforts to create such a system in chemistry; and perhaps an ideal system will eventually emerge in linguistics as well. Regardless, the time has not yet arrived even for proposing it. What we need right now is some kind of guideline that encourages scholars to use the same terms for the same concepts, and it seems not to matter much what the specific nomenclature is in terms of language families, as long as it becomes clear and universally accepted.
In treating of the languages of North America it has been suggested that the names adopted should be the names by which the people recognize themselves, but this is a rule of impossible application, for where the branches of a stock diverge very greatly no common name for the people can be found. Again, it has been suggested that names which are to go permanently into science should be simple and euphonic. This also is impossible of application, for simplicity and euphony are largely questions of personal taste, and he who has studied many languages loses speedily his idiosyncrasies of likes and dislikes and learns that words foreign to his vocabulary are not necessarily barbaric.
In discussing the languages of North America, it has been proposed that the names used should be those by which the people identify themselves. However, this is an impossible rule to apply because when the branches of a language family diverge significantly, no common name for the people can be found. Additionally, it has also been suggested that names used in science should be simple and pleasant-sounding. This is also impractical because what is considered simple and pleasant often depends on personal taste. Someone who has studied multiple languages quickly loses their personal preferences and realizes that words unfamiliar to their vocabulary aren’t necessarily uncivilized.
Biologists have decided that he who first distinctly characterizes and names a species or other group shall thereby cause the name thus used to become permanently affixed, but under certain conditions adapted to a growing science which is continually revising its classifications. This law of priority may well be adopted by philologists.
Biologists have determined that the person who first clearly defines and names a species or other group will make that name permanently established, but only under specific conditions that adapt to a constantly evolving science that is always updating its classifications. This principle of priority could also be applied by linguists.
By the application of the law of priority it will occasionally happen that a name must be taken which is not wholly unobjectionable or which could be much improved. But if names may be modified for any reason, the extent of change that may be wrought in this manner is unlimited, and such modifications would ultimately become equivalent to the introduction of new names, and a fixed nomenclature would thereby be overthrown. The rule of priority has therefore been adopted.
By applying the law of priority, there will be times when a name has to be chosen that isn't entirely suitable or could be significantly better. However, if names can be changed for any reason, the amount of change allowed would be limitless, and such modifications would basically become the same as creating new names, which would disrupt a consistent naming system. Therefore, the rule of priority has been established.
Permanent biologic nomenclature dates from the time of Linnæus simply because this great naturalist established the binominal system and placed scientific classification upon a sound and enduring basis. As Linnæus is to be regarded as the founder of biologic classification, so Gallatin may be considered the founder of systematic philology relating to the North American Indians. Before his time much linguistic work had been accomplished, and scholars owe a lasting debt of gratitude to Barton, Adelung, Pickering, and others. But Gallatin’s work marks an era in American linguistic science from the fact that he so thoroughly introduced comparative methods, and because he circumscribed the boundaries of many 10 families, so that a large part of his work remains and is still to be considered sound. There is no safe resting place anterior to Gallatin, because no scholar prior to his time had properly adopted comparative methods of research, and because no scholar was privileged to work with so large a body of material. It must further be said of Gallatin that he had a very clear conception of the task he was performing, and brought to it both learning and wisdom. Gallatin’s work has therefore been taken as the starting point, back of which we may not go in the historic consideration of the systematic philology of North America. The point of departure therefore is the year 1836, when Gallatin’s “Synopsis of Indian Tribes” appeared in vol. 2 of the Transactions of the American Antiquarian Society.
Permanent biological naming conventions started with Linnæus because this great naturalist established the binomial system and laid a solid and lasting foundation for scientific classification. Just as Linnæus is seen as the founder of biological classification, Gallatin can be considered the founder of systematic philology concerning North American Indians. Before him, a lot of linguistic work had been done, and scholars owe a significant debt of gratitude to Barton, Adelung, Pickering, and others. However, Gallatin's work marks a significant shift in American linguistic science because he effectively introduced comparative methods and defined the boundaries of many families, leaving a substantial part of his work still considered reliable today. There was no reliable foundation before Gallatin, as no scholar before him had properly utilized comparative research methods or had access to such a vast amount of material. Additionally, Gallatin had a clear understanding of the task at hand and approached it with both knowledge and insight. Therefore, Gallatin's work is regarded as the starting point in the historical consideration of the systematic philology of North America. This starting point is the year 1836, when Gallatin’s “Synopsis of Indian Tribes” was published in vol. 2 of the Transactions of the American Antiquarian Society.
It is believed that a name should be simply a denotive word, and that no advantage can accrue from a descriptive or connotive title. It is therefore desirable to have the names as simple as possible, consistent with other and more important considerations. For this reason it has been found impracticable to recognize as family names designations based on several distinct terms, such as descriptive phrases, and words compounded from two or more geographic names. Such phrases and compound words have been rejected.
It’s thought that a name should just be a straightforward word and that there’s no benefit to having a descriptive or implied title. So, it’s best to keep names as simple as possible while still considering other more important factors. Because of this, it’s been deemed unfeasible to accept family names that come from multiple distinct terms, like descriptive phrases or words made up of two or more geographic names. These phrases and compound words have been turned down.
There are many linguistic families in North America, and in a number of them there are many tribes speaking diverse languages. It is important, therefore, that some form should be given to the family name by which it may be distinguished from the name of a single tribe or language. In many cases some one language within a stock has been taken as the type and its name given to the entire family; so that the name of a language and that of the stock to which it belongs are identical. This is inconvenient and leads to confusion. For such reasons it has been decided to give each family name the termination “an” or “ian.”
There are many language families in North America, and within several of them, numerous tribes speak different languages. It's important to assign a name to each family that distinguishes it from the name of individual tribes or languages. In many cases, one language within a family has been chosen as the representative, and its name has been applied to the entire family; this means the name of a language and that of the family it belongs to are the same. This is confusing and not ideal. For these reasons, it has been decided to give each family name the suffix “an” or “ian.”
Conforming to the principles thus enunciated, the following rules have been formulated:
In line with the principles outlined, the following rules have been created:
I. The law of priority relating to the nomenclature of the systematic philology of the North American tribes shall not extend to authors whose works are of date anterior to the year 1836.
I. The law of priority concerning the naming conventions in the systematic study of the North American tribes will not apply to authors whose works were published before 1836.
II. The name originally given by the founder of a linguistic group to designate it as a family or stock of languages shall be permanently retained to the exclusion of all others.
II. The name originally given by the founder of a language group to identify it as a family or group of languages will be kept permanently, excluding all others.
III. No family name shall be recognized if composed of more than one word.
III. No last name will be recognized if it consists of more than one word.
IV. A family name once established shall not be canceled in any subsequent division of the group, but shall be retained in a restricted sense for one of its constituent portions.
IV. Once a family name is established, it cannot be canceled in any future divisions of the group, but it will be kept in a limited sense for one of its parts.
V. Family names shall be distinguished as such by the termination “an” or “ian.”
V. Family names will be recognized as such by the endings "an" or "ian."
VI. No name shall be accepted for a linguistic family unless used to designate a tribe or group of tribes as a linguistic stock.
VI. A name will only be accepted for a language family if it’s used to refer to a tribe or group of tribes as a linguistic stock.
VII. No family name shall be accepted unless there is given the habitat of tribe or tribes to which it is applied.
VII. No family name will be accepted unless the habitat of the tribe or tribes it refers to is provided.
VIII. The original orthography of a name shall be rigidly preserved except as provided for in rule III, and unless a typographical error is evident.
VIII. The original spelling of a name must be strictly maintained except as stated in rule III, and unless a typing mistake is obvious.
The terms “family” and “stock” are here applied interchangeably to a group of languages that are supposed to be cognate.
The terms “family” and “stock” are used interchangeably here to refer to a group of languages that are believed to be related.
A single language is called a stock or family when it is not found to be cognate with any other language. Languages are said to be cognate when such relations between them are found that they are supposed to have descended from a common ancestral speech. The evidence of cognation is derived exclusively from the vocabulary. Grammatic similarities are not supposed to furnish evidence of cognation, but to be phenomena, in part relating to stage of culture and in part adventitious. It must be remembered that extreme peculiarities of grammar, like the vocal mutations of the Hebrew or the monosyllabic separation of the Chinese, have not been discovered among Indian tongues. It therefore becomes necessary in the classification of Indian languages into families to neglect grammatic structure, and to consider lexical elements only. But this statement must be clearly understood. It is postulated that in the growth of languages new words are formed by combination, and that these new words change by attrition to secure economy of utterance, and also by assimilation (analogy) for economy of thought. In the comparison of languages for the purposes of systematic philology it often becomes necessary to dismember compounded words for the purpose of comparing the more primitive forms thus obtained. The paradigmatic words considered in grammatic treatises may often be the very words which should be dissected to discover in their elements primary affinities. But the comparison is still lexic, not grammatic.
A single language is referred to as a stock or family when it doesn’t have any relationship with other languages. Languages are considered cognate when they show connections that suggest they descended from a common ancestor. Evidence for cognation comes only from vocabulary. Grammar similarities aren’t seen as proof of cognation; instead, they are thought to be phenomena relating partly to cultural stages and partly coincidental. It’s important to note that extreme grammatical features, like the vowel changes in Hebrew or the monosyllabic structure in Chinese, haven’t been found in Indian languages. Thus, when classifying Indian languages into families, it's necessary to overlook grammatical structure and focus only on lexical elements. However, this needs to be clearly understood. The assumption is that as languages develop, new words are formed through combinations, and these new words change over time for efficient communication and through analogy for clarity of thought. When comparing languages for systematic linguistic study, it’s often necessary to break down compound words to analyze the more basic forms. The paradigmatic words found in grammar studies may actually be the words that should be examined to uncover their primary connections. Yet, the comparison is still based on vocabulary, not grammar.
A lexic comparison is between vocal elements; a grammatic comparison is between grammatic methods, such, for example, as gender systems. The classes into which things are relegated by distinction of gender may be animate and inanimate, and the animate may subsequently be divided into male and female, and these two classes may ultimately absorb, in part at least, inanimate things. The growth of a system of genders may take another course. The animate and inanimate may be subdivided into the standing, the sitting, and the lying, or into the moving, the erect and the reclined; or, still further, the superposed classification may be based upon the supposed constitution of things, as the fleshy, the woody, the rocky, the earthy, the watery. Thus the number of genders may increase, while further on in the history of a language the genders may 12 decrease so as almost to disappear. All of these characteristics are in part adventitious, but to a large extent the gender is a phenomenon of growth, indicating the stage to which the language has attained. A proper case system may not have been established in a language by the fixing of case particles, or, having been established, it may change by the increase or diminution of the number of cases. A tense system also has a beginning, a growth, and a decadence. A mode system is variable in the various stages of the history of a language. In like manner a pronominal system undergoes changes. Particles may be prefixed, infixed, or affixed in compounded words, and which one of these methods will finally prevail can be determined only in the later stage of growth. All of these things are held to belong to the grammar of a language and to be grammatic methods, distinct from lexical elements.
A lexical comparison looks at words and their meanings, while a grammatical comparison looks at how grammar works, like in gender systems. The categories that things are placed in through gender distinction can be living and non-living. Living things can further be split into male and female, and these two categories may eventually include some non-living things too. The development of a gender system can take different paths. Living and non-living things can be divided into standing, sitting, and lying, or into moving, upright, and reclined. Moreover, a classification could also be based on the composition of things, like fleshy, woody, rocky, earthy, or watery. So, the number of genders can increase, but later in a language's development, genders might decrease to the point of nearly vanishing. Many of these characteristics are somewhat random, but gender to a large extent shows how much a language has developed. A language might not establish a proper case system with fixed case particles, or, if it does, it might change with more or fewer cases. A tense system also has a beginning, growth, and decline. The way modes change varies throughout a language's history. Similarly, a pronoun system changes over time. Parts of words can be added at the beginning, middle, or end of compounded words, and which method will dominate can only be determined later in its development. All of these aspects belong to the grammar of a language and are grammatical methods, separate from lexical elements.
With terms thus defined, languages are supposed to be cognate when fundamental similarities are discovered in their lexical elements. When the members of a family of languages are to be classed in subdivisions and the history of such languages investigated, grammatic characteristics become of primary importance. The words of a language change by the methods described, but the fundamental elements or roots are more enduring. Grammatic methods also change, perhaps even more rapidly than words, and the changes may go on to such an extent that primitive methods are entirely lost, there being no radical grammatic elements to be preserved. Grammatic structure is but a phase or accident of growth, and not a primordial element of language. The roots of a language are its most permanent characteristics, and while the words which are formed from them may change so as to obscure their elements or in some cases even to lose them, it seems that they are never lost from all, but can be recovered in large part. The grammatic structure or plan of a language is forever changing, and in this respect the language may become entirely transformed.
With these definitions in place, languages are considered cognate when they show basic similarities in their vocabulary. When categorizing languages into subgroups and studying their history, grammatical features become crucial. The words in a language evolve as explained, but the core elements or roots tend to last longer. Grammatical methods also change, possibly even more quickly than words, and these changes can be so extensive that earlier methods are completely lost, leaving no key grammatical elements to retain. Grammatical structure is just one aspect of development and not an essential part of language. The roots of a language are its most enduring traits, and while the words built from them may change to the point of obscuring their roots or even losing them in some cases, it seems that they are never completely lost and can largely be recovered. The grammatical structure or framework of a language is always evolving, and in this way, the language can undergo a complete transformation.
LITERATURE RELATING TO THE CLASSIFICATION OF INDIAN LANGUAGES.
While the literature relating to the languages of North America is very extensive, that which relates to their classification is much less extensive. For the benefit of future students in this line it is thought best to present a concise account of such literature, or at least so much as has been consulted in the preparation of this paper.
While there's a lot of literature about the languages of North America, there's much less about their classification. To help future students in this area, it seems best to provide a brief overview of the relevant literature, or at least the parts we've looked at while preparing this paper.
1836. Gallatin (Albert).
1836. Gallatin (Albert).
A synopsis of the Indian tribes within the United States east of the Rocky Mountains, and in the British and Russian possessions in North America. In Transactions and Collections of the American Antiquarian Society (Archæologia Americana) Cambridge, 1836, vol. 2.
A summary of the Indian tribes in the United States east of the Rocky Mountains, as well as those in British and Russian territories in North America. In Transactions and Collections of the American Antiquarian Society (Archæologia Americana) Cambridge, 1836, vol. 2.
The larger part of the volume consists of Gallatin’s paper. A short chapter is devoted to general observations, including certain 13 historical data, and the remainder to the discussion of linguistic material and the affinities of the various tribes mentioned. Vocabularies of many of the families are appended. Twenty-eight linguistic divisions are recognized in the general table of the tribes. Some of these divisions are purely geographic, such as the tribes of Salmon River, Queen Charlotte’s Island, etc. Vocabularies from these localities were at hand, but of their linguistic relations the author was not sufficiently assured. Most of the linguistic families recognized by Gallatin were defined with much precision. Not all of his conclusions are to be accepted in the presence of the data now at hand, but usually they were sound, as is attested by the fact that they have constituted the basis for much classificatory work since his time.
The majority of the volume is made up of Gallatin’s paper. A brief chapter covers general observations, including some historical information, and the rest focuses on the discussion of linguistic material and the connections among the various tribes mentioned. Vocabularies from many of the families are included. The general table of tribes recognizes twenty-eight linguistic divisions. Some of these divisions are strictly geographic, like the tribes of Salmon River, Queen Charlotte’s Island, and so on. Vocabularies from these areas were available, but the author wasn’t completely confident about their linguistic relationships. Most of the linguistic families identified by Gallatin were defined quite clearly. Not all of his conclusions can be accepted in light of the current data, but generally, they were accurate, as shown by the fact that they have formed the basis for much classification work since his time.
The primary, or at least the ostensible, purpose of the colored map which accompanies Gallatin’s paper was, as indicated by its title, to show the distribution of the tribes, and accordingly their names appear upon it, and not the names of the linguistic families. Nevertheless, it is practically a map of the linguistic families as determined by the author, and it is believed to be the first attempted for the area represented. Only eleven of the twenty-eight families named in this table appear, and these represent the families with which he was best acquainted. As was to be expected from the early period at which the map was constructed, much of the western part of the United States was left uncolored. Altogether the map illustrates well the state of knowledge of the time.
The main, or at least the obvious, purpose of the colored map that comes with Gallatin’s paper was, as its title suggests, to show the distribution of the tribes, so their names are shown on it, not the names of the linguistic families. However, it's essentially a map of the linguistic families as identified by the author, and it's believed to be the first attempt for the area depicted. Only eleven of the twenty-eight families listed in this table appear, and these are the families he was most familiar with. As expected from the early period when the map was made, much of the western part of the United States was left blank. Overall, the map effectively reflects the state of knowledge at that time.
1840. Bancroft (George).
1840. Bancroft (George).
History of the colonization of the United States, Boston. 1840, vol. 3.
History of the colonization of the United States, Boston. 1840, vol. 3.
In Chapter XXII of this volume the author gives a brief synopsis of the Indian tribes east of the Mississippi, under a linguistic classification, and adds a brief account of the character and methods of Indian languages. A linguistic map of the region is incorporated, which in general corresponds with the one published by Gallatin in 1836. A notable addition to the Gallatin map is the inclusion of the Uchees in their proper locality. Though considered a distinct family by Gallatin, this tribe does not appear upon his map. Moreover, the Choctaws and Muskogees, which appear as separate families upon Gallatin’s map (though believed by that author to belong to the same family), are united upon Bancroft’s map under the term Mobilian.
In Chapter XXII of this book, the author provides a quick overview of the Indian tribes east of the Mississippi, organized by language. Additionally, there's a short description of the characteristics and methods of Indian languages. A linguistic map of the area is included, which generally matches the one published by Gallatin in 1836. A significant update to the Gallatin map is the correct placement of the Uchees. Even though Gallatin saw them as a separate family, this tribe isn't shown on his map. Furthermore, the Choctaws and Muskogees, which appear as different families on Gallatin’s map (though Gallatin believed they belonged to the same family), are combined on Bancroft’s map under the name Mobilian.
The linguistic families treated of are, I. Algonquin, II. Sioux or Dahcota, III. Huron-Iroquois, IV. Catawba, V. Cherokee, VI. Uchee, VII. Natchez, VIII. Mobilian.
The language families discussed are: I. Algonquin, II. Sioux or Dakota, III. Huron-Iroquois, IV. Catawba, V. Cherokee, VI. Uchee, VII. Natchez, VIII. Mobilian.
1841. Scouler (John).
1841. Scouler (John).
Observations of the indigenous tribes of the northwest coast of America. In Journal of the Royal Geographical Society of London. London, 1841, vol. 11.
Observations of the indigenous tribes of the northwest coast of America. In Journal of the Royal Geographical Society of London. London, 1841, vol. 11.
The chapter cited is short, but long enough to enable the author to construct a very curious classification of the tribes of which he 14 treats. In his account Scouler is guided chiefly, to use his own words, “by considerations founded on their physical character, manners and customs, and on the affinities of their languages.” As the linguistic considerations are mentioned last, so they appear to be the least weighty of his “considerations.”
The chapter referenced is brief, but it's sufficient for the author to create an intriguing classification of the tribes he discusses. In his account, Scouler is primarily guided, in his own words, “by factors based on their physical traits, behaviors and traditions, and on the relationships of their languages.” Since the language aspects are mentioned last, they seem to hold the least importance among his “factors.”
Scouler’s definition of a family is very broad indeed, and in his “Northern Family,” which is a branch of his “Insular Group,” he includes such distinct linguistic stocks as “all the Indian tribes in the Russian territory,” the Queen Charlotte Islanders, Koloshes, Ugalentzes, Atnas, Kolchans, Kenáïes, Tun Ghaase, Haidahs, and Chimmesyans. His Nootka-Columbian family is scarcely less incongruous, and it is evident that the classification indicated is only to a comparatively slight extent linguistic.
Scouler's definition of a family is quite broad, and in his “Northern Family,” which is part of his “Insular Group,” he includes distinct language groups like “all the Indian tribes in the Russian territory,” the Queen Charlotte Islanders, Koloshes, Ugalentzes, Atnas, Kolchans, Kenáïes, Tun Ghaase, Haidahs, and Chimmesyans. His Nootka-Columbian family is hardly any less mismatched, and it’s clear that the classification he provided is only somewhat based on language.
1846. Hale (Horatio).
1846. Hale (Horatio).
United States exploring expedition, during the years 1838, 1839, 1840, 1841, 1842, under the command of Charles Wilkes, U.S. Navy, vol. 6, ethnography and philology. Philadelphia, 1846.
United States exploring expedition, during the years 1838, 1839, 1840, 1841, 1842, under the command of Charles Wilkes, U.S. Navy, vol. 6, ethnography and philology. Philadelphia, 1846.
In addition to a large amount of ethnographic data derived from the Polynesian Islands, Micronesian Islands, Australia, etc., more than one-half of this important volume is devoted to philology, a large share relating to the tribes of northwestern America.
In addition to a lot of ethnographic data from the Polynesian Islands, Micronesian Islands, Australia, and so on, more than half of this important volume focuses on linguistics, with a significant portion related to the tribes of northwestern America.
The vocabularies collected by Hale, and the conclusions derived by him from study of them, added much to the previous knowledge of the languages of these tribes. His conclusions and classification were in the main accepted by Gallatin in his linguistic writings of 1848.
The vocabularies collected by Hale and the conclusions he drew from studying them greatly enhanced the existing understanding of the languages of these tribes. His conclusions and classification were largely accepted by Gallatin in his linguistic writings from 1848.
1846. Latham (Robert Gordon).
1846. Latham (Rob Gordon).
Miscellaneous contributions to the ethnography of North America. In Proceedings of the Philological Society of London. London, 1816, vol. 2.
Miscellaneous contributions to the ethnography of North America. In Proceedings of the Philological Society of London. London, 1816, vol. 2.
In this article, which was read before the Philological Society, January 24, 1845, a large number of North American languages are examined and their affinities discussed in support of the two following postulates made at the beginning of the paper: First, “No American language has an isolated position when compared with the other tongues en masse rather than with the language of any particular class;” second, “The affinities between the language of the New World, as determined by their vocabularies, is not less real than that inferred from the analogies of their grammatical structure.” The author’s conclusions are that both statements are substantiated by the evidence presented. The paper contains no new family names.
In this article, presented to the Philological Society on January 24, 1845, many North American languages are examined, and their connections are discussed in support of the two main points made at the beginning of the paper: First, “No American language stands alone when compared to other languages as a whole rather than to any specific group;” second, “The connections between the languages of the New World, based on their vocabularies, are just as significant as those inferred from their grammatical structure.” The author's conclusions are that both statements are backed by the evidence provided. The paper does not introduce any new language family names.
1847. Prichard (James Cowles).
1847. Prichard (James Cowles).
Researches into the physical history of mankind (third edition), vol. 5, containing researches into the history of the Oceanic and of the American nations. London, 1847.
Research on the physical history of humanity (third edition), vol. 5, including studies on the history of the Oceanic and American nations. London, 1847.
It was the purpose of this author, as avowed by himself, to determine whether the races of men are the cooffspring of a single stock or have descended respectively from several original families. Like 15 other authors on this subject, his theory of what should constitute a race was not clearly defined. The scope of the inquiry required the consideration of a great number of subjects and led to the accumulation of a vast body of facts. In volume 5 the author treats of the American Indians, and in connection with the different tribes has something to say of their languages. No attempt at an original classification is made, and in the main the author follows Gallatin’s classification and adopts his conclusions.
The author intended, as he stated himself, to find out whether human races come from a single origin or have evolved from multiple original families. Like other writers on this topic, he didn’t clearly define what constitutes a race. This investigation required looking into many subjects and resulted in gathering a large amount of information. In volume 5, the author discusses the American Indians and mentions their languages in relation to the different tribes. He doesn't try to create an original classification and primarily follows Gallatin’s categories and accepts his findings.
1848. Gallatin (Albert).
1848. Gallatin (Albert).
Hale’s Indians of Northwest America, and vocabularies of North America, with an introduction. In Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, New York, 1848, vol. 2.
Hale’s Indians of Northwest America, and vocabularies of North America, with an introduction. In Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, New York, 1848, vol. 2.
The introduction consists of a number of chapters, as follows: First, Geographical notices and Indian means of subsistence; second, Ancient semi-civilization of New Mexico, Rio Gila and its vicinity; third, Philology; fourth, Addenda and miscellaneous. In these are brought together much valuable information, and many important deductions are made which illustrate Mr. Gallatin’s great acumen. The classification given is an amplification of that adopted in 1836, and contains changes and additions. The latter mainly result from a consideration of the material supplied by Mr. Hale, or are simply taken from his work.
The introduction includes several chapters, as follows: First, geographical information and Indian methods of subsistence; second, the ancient semi-civilization of New Mexico, the Rio Gila, and its surroundings; third, linguistics; fourth, appendices and miscellaneous content. These chapters bring together a lot of valuable information and make several important deductions that highlight Mr. Gallatin’s exceptional insight. The classification provided is an updated version of the one used in 1836 and includes modifications and additions. Most of these changes come from the material provided by Mr. Hale or are directly taken from his work.
The groups additional to those contained in the Archæologia Americana are:
The groups, in addition to those found in the Archæologia Americana, are:
1. | Arrapahoes. |
2. | Jakon. |
3. | Kalapuya. |
4. | Kitunaha. |
5. | Lutuami. |
6. | Palainih. |
7. | Sahaptin. |
8. | Selish (Tsihaili-Selish). |
9. | Saste. |
10. | Waiilatpu. |
1848, Latham (Robert Gordon).
1848, Latham (Robert Gordon).
On the languages of the Oregon Territory. In Journal of the Ethnological Society of London, Edinburgh, 1848, vol. 1.
On the languages of the Oregon Territory. In Journal of the Ethnological Society of London, Edinburgh, 1848, vol. 1.
This paper was read before the Ethnological Society on the 11th of December. The languages noticed are those that lie between “Russian America and New California,” of which the author aims to give an exhaustive list. He discusses the value of the groups to which these languages have been assigned, viz, Athabascan and Nootka-Columbian, and finds that they have been given too high value, and that they are only equivalent to the primary subdivisions of stocks, like the Gothic, Celtic, and Classical, rather than to the stocks themselves. He further finds that the Athabascan, the Kolooch, the Nootka-Columbian, and the Cadiak groups are subordinate members of one large and important class—the Eskimo.
This paper was presented to the Ethnological Society on December 11th. The languages discussed are those found between “Russian America and New California,” and the author intends to provide a comprehensive list. He examines the classification of these languages into groups such as Athabascan and Nootka-Columbian and concludes that they have been overvalued, asserting that they should be considered as primary subdivisions of stocks, similar to Gothic, Celtic, and Classical, rather than as the stocks themselves. He also finds that the Athabascan, Kolooch, Nootka-Columbian, and Cadiak groups are subordinate members of one significant and larger class—the Eskimo.
No new linguistic groups are presented.
No new language groups are introduced.
1848. Latham (Robert Gordon).
1848. Latham (Robert Gordon).
On the ethnography of Russian America. In Journal of the Ethnological Society of London, Edinburgh, 1848, vol. 1.
On the ethnography of Russian America. In Journal of the Ethnological Society of London, Edinburgh, 1848, vol. 1.
(1) With the Athabascan tongues, and perhaps equal affinities.
(1) Along with the Athabascan languages, which may have similar connections.
(2) Each has affinities with the Oregon languages, and each perhaps equally.
(2) Each has connections to the Oregon languages, and each might be equally so.
(3) Each has definite affinities with the languages of New California, and each perhaps equal ones.
(3) Each has clear connections with the languages of New California, and each might be equally strong.
(4) Each has miscellaneous affinities with all the other tongues of North and South America.
(4) Each has various connections with all the other languages of North and South America.
1848. Berghaus (Heinrich).
1848. Berghaus (Heinrich).
Physikalischer Atlas oder Sammlung von Karten, auf denen die hauptsächlichsten erscheinungen der anorganischen und organischen Natur nach ihrer geographischen Verbreitung und Vertheilung bildlich dargestellt sind. Zweiter Band, Gotha, 1848.
Physikalischer Atlas or Collection of Maps, where the main phenomena of inorganic and organic nature are visually represented according to their geographical distribution. Volume Two, Gotha, 1848.
This, the first edition of this well known atlas, contains, among other maps, an ethnographic map of North America, made in 1845. It is based, as is stated, upon material derived from Gallatin, Humboldt, Clavigero, Hervas, Vater, and others. So far as the eastern part of the United States is concerned it is largely a duplication of Gallatin’s map of 1836, while in the western region a certain amount of new material is incorporated.
This first edition of this well-known atlas includes, among other maps, an ethnographic map of North America created in 1845. It is based, as stated, on information from Gallatin, Humboldt, Clavigero, Hervas, Vater, and others. Regarding the eastern part of the United States, it mainly replicates Gallatin’s map from 1836, while the western region features some new information.
1852. In the edition of 1852 the ethnographic map bears date of 1851. Its eastern portion is substantially a copy of the earlier edition, but its western half is materially changed, chiefly in accordance with the knowledge supplied by Hall in 1848.
1852. In the 1852 edition, the ethnographic map is dated 1851. Its eastern part is basically a copy of the earlier edition, but its western half has been significantly changed, mainly based on the information provided by Hall in 1848.
Map number 72 of the last edition of Berghaus by no means marks an advance upon the edition of 1852. Apparently the number of families is much reduced, but it is very difficult to interpret the meaning of the author, who has attempted on the same map to indicate linguistic divisions and tribal habitats with the result that confusion is made worse confounded.
Map number 72 from the latest edition of Berghaus definitely doesn't show any progress compared to the 1852 edition. It seems like the number of families has decreased, but it's quite hard to figure out what the author really means. They've tried to show linguistic divisions and tribal areas on the same map, which only makes things more confusing.
1853. Gallatin (Albert).
1853. Gallatin (Albert).
Classification of the Indian Languages; a letter inclosing a table of generic Indian Families of languages. In Information respecting the History, Condition, and Prospects of the Indian Tribes of the United States, by Henry E. Schoolcraft. Philadelphia, 1853, vol. 3.
Classification of the Indian Languages; a letter enclosing a table of generic Indian Families of languages. In Information about the History, Condition, and Prospects of the Indian Tribes of the United States, by Henry E. Schoolcraft. Philadelphia, 1853, vol. 3.
This short paper by Gallatin consists of a letter addressed to W. Medill, Commissioner of Indian Affairs, requesting his cooperation in an endeavor to obtain vocabularies to assist in a more complete study of the grammar and structure of the languages of the Indians of North America. It is accompanied by a “Synopsis of Indian Tribes,” giving the families and tribes so far as known. In the main the classification is a repetition of that of 1848, but it differs from that in a number of particulars. Two of the families of 1848 do not 17 appear in this paper, viz, Arapaho and Kinai. Queen Charlotte Island, employed as a family name in 1848, is placed under the Wakash family, while the Skittagete language, upon which the name Queen Charlotte Island was based in 1848, is here given as a family designation for the language spoken at “Sitka, bet. 52 and 59 lat.” The following families appear which are not contained in the list of 1848:
This short paper by Gallatin is a letter to W. Medill, the Commissioner of Indian Affairs, asking for his help in gathering vocabularies to support a more thorough study of the grammar and structure of the languages spoken by Native Americans in North America. It includes a “Synopsis of Indian Tribes,” detailing the families and tribes known so far. Mostly, this classification repeats the one from 1848, but it differs in several ways. Two of the families mentioned in 1848, Arapaho and Kinai, are not included in this paper. Queen Charlotte Island, listed as a family name in 1848, is categorized under the Wakash family, while the Skittagete language, which was the basis for the name Queen Charlotte Island in 1848, is now identified as the family name for the language spoken at “Sitka, bet. 52 and 59 lat.” The following families are listed that were not part of the 1848 list:
1. | Cumanches. |
2. | Gros Ventres. |
3. | Kaskaias. |
4. | Kiaways. |
5. | Natchitoches. |
6. | Pani, Towiacks. |
7. | Ugaljachmatzi. |
1853. Gibbs (George).
1853. Gibbs (George).
Observations on some of the Indian dialects of northern California. In Information respecting the History, Condition, and Prospects of the Indian tribes of the United States, by Henry E. Schoolcraft. Philadelphia, 1853, vol. 3.
Observations on some of the Indian dialects of Northern California. In Information about the History, Condition, and Prospects of the Indian tribes of the United States, by Henry E. Schoolcraft. Philadelphia, 1853, vol. 3.
The “Observations” are introductory to a series of vocabularies collected in northern California, and treat of the method employed in collecting them and of the difficulties encountered. They also contain notes on the tribes speaking the several languages as well as on the area covered. There is comparatively little of a classificatory nature, though in one instance the name Quoratem is proposed as a proper one for the family “should it be held one.”
The “Observations” serve as an introduction to a collection of vocabularies gathered in northern California, discussing the methods used to collect them and the challenges faced. They also include notes on the tribes that speak the different languages and the area they cover. There isn't much classification, but in one case, the name Quoratem is suggested as a suitable name for the family “if it is considered one.”
1854. Latham (Robert Gordon).
1854. Latham (Robert Gordon).
On the languages of New California. In Proceedings of the Philological Society of London for 1852 and 1853. London, 1854, vol. 6.
On the languages of New California. In Proceedings of the Philological Society of London for 1852 and 1853. London, 1854, vol. 6.
Read before the Philological Society, May 13, 1853. A number of languages are examined in this paper for the purpose of determining the stocks to which they belong and the mutual affinities of the latter. Among the languages mentioned are the Saintskla, Umkwa, Lutuami, Paduca, Athabascan, Dieguno, and a number of the Mission languages.
Read before the Philological Society, May 13, 1853. This paper examines several languages to determine the groups they belong to and the relationships among those groups. The languages discussed include Saintskla, Umkwa, Lutuami, Paduca, Athabascan, Dieguno, and several Mission languages.
1855. Lane (William Carr).
1855. Lane (William Carr).
Letter on affinities of dialects in New Mexico. In Information respecting the History, Condition, and Prospects of the Indian tribes of the United States, by Henry R. Schoolcraft. Philadelphia, 1855, vol. 5.
Letter on affinities of dialects in New Mexico. In Information regarding the History, Condition, and Prospects of the Indian tribes of the United States, by Henry R. Schoolcraft. Philadelphia, 1855, vol. 5.
The letter forms half a page of printed matter. The gist of the communication is in effect that the author has heard it said that the Indians of certain pueblos speak three different languages, which he has heard called, respectively, (1) Chu-cha-cas and Kes-whaw-hay; (2) E-nagh-magh; (3) Tay-waugh. This can hardly be called a classification, though the arrangement of the pueblos indicated by Lane is quoted at length by Keane in the Appendix to Stanford’s Compendium.
The letter takes up half a page of printed text. Basically, the author mentions that he's heard people say that the Indians from certain pueblos speak three different languages, which he refers to as (1) Chu-cha-cas and Kes-whaw-hay; (2) E-nagh-magh; (3) Tay-waugh. This can't really be considered a proper classification, although Lane's arrangement of the pueblos is quoted in detail by Keane in the Appendix to Stanford’s Compendium.
On the languages of Northern, Western, and Central America. In Transactions of the Philological Society of London, for 1856. London [1857?].
On the languages of Northern, Western, and Central America. In Transactions of the Philological Society of London, for 1856. London [1857?].
This paper was read before the Philological Society May 9, 1856, and is stated to be “a supplement to two well known contributions to American philology by the late A. Gallatin.”
This paper was presented to the Philological Society on May 9, 1856, and is described as “a supplement to two well-known contributions to American philology by the late A. Gallatin.”
So far as classification of North American languages goes, this is perhaps the most important paper of Latham’s, as in it a number of new names are proposed for linguistic groups, such as Copeh for the Sacramento River tribes, Ehnik for the Karok tribes, Mariposa Group and Mendocino Group for the Yokut and Pomo tribes respectively, Moquelumne for the Mutsun, Pujuni for the Meidoo, Weitspek for the Eurocs.
So far as classifying North American languages goes, this is probably Latham's most significant paper, as it proposes several new names for linguistic groups, such as Copeh for the Sacramento River tribes, Ehnik for the Karok tribes, Mariposa Group and Mendocino Group for the Yokut and Pomo tribes respectively, Moquelumne for the Mutsun, Pujuni for the Meidoo, and Weitspek for the Eurocs.
1856. Turner (William Wadden).
1856. Turner (William Wadden).
Report upon the Indian tribes, by Lieut. A. W. Whipple, Thomas Ewbank, esq., and Prof. William W. Turner, Washington, D.C., 1855. In Reports of Explorations and Surveys to ascertain the most practicable and economical route for a railroad from the Mississippi to the Pacific Ocean. Washington, 1856, vol. 3. part 3.
Report on the Indian tribes, by Lt. A. W. Whipple, Thomas Ewbank, Esq., and Prof. William W. Turner, Washington, D.C., 1855. In Reports of Explorations and Surveys to find the most practical and cost-effective route for a railroad from the Mississippi to the Pacific Ocean. Washington, 1856, vol. 3, part 3.
Chapter V of the above report is headed “Vocabularies of North American Languages,” and is by Turner, as is stated in a foot-note. Though the title page of Part III is dated 1855, the chapter by Turner was not issued till 1856, the date of the full volume, as is stated by Turner on page 84. The following are the vocabularies given, with their arrangement in families:
Chapter V of the above report is titled “Vocabularies of North American Languages,” and it's authored by Turner, as noted in a footnote. Even though the title page of Part III is dated 1855, the chapter by Turner wasn't published until 1856, which is the date of the complete volume, as Turner mentions on page 84. Here are the vocabularies presented, along with their organization into families:
I. | Delaware. | Algonkin. | |
II. | Shawnee. | ||
III. | Choctaw. | ||
IV. | Kichai. | Pawnee? | |
V. | Huéco. | ||
VI. | Caddo. | ||
VII. | Comanche. | Shoshonee. | |
VIII. | Chemehuevi. | ||
IX. | Cahuillo. | ||
X. | Kioway. | ||
XI. | Navajo. | Apache. | |
XII. | Pinal Leño. | ||
XIII. | Kiwomi. | Keres. | |
XIV. | Cochitemi. | ||
XV. | Acoma. | ||
XVI. | Zuñi. | ||
XVII. | Pima. | ||
XVIII. | Cuchan. | Yuma. | |
XIX. | Coco‑Maricopa. | ||
XX. | Mojave. | ||
XXI. | Diegeno. |
Several of the family names, viz, Keres, Kiowa, Yuma, and Zuñi, have been adopted under the rules formulated above.
Several of the family names, like Keres, Kiowa, Yuma, and Zuñi, have been adopted according to the rules outlined above.
1858. Buschmann (Johann Carl Eduard).
1858. Buschmann (Johann Carl Eduard).
Die Völker und Sprachen Neu-Mexiko’s und der Westseite des britischen Nordamerika’s, dargestellt von Hrn. Buschmann. In Abhandlungen (aus dem Jahre 1857) der königlichen Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Berlin. Berlin, 1858.
Die Völker und Sprachen von New Mexico und der Westseite von British North America, dargestellt von Herrn Buschmann. In Abhandlungen (aus dem Jahr 1857) der königlichen Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Berlin. Berlin, 1858.
This work contains a historic review of early discoveries in New Mexico and of the tribes living therein, with such vocabularies as were available at the time. On pages 315-414 the tribes of British America, from about latitude 54° to 60°, are similarly treated, the various discoveries being reviewed; also those on the North Pacific coast. Much of the material should have been inserted in the 19 volume of 1859 (which was prepared in 1854), to which cross reference is frequently made, and to which it stands in the nature of a supplement.
This work includes a historical overview of early discoveries in New Mexico and the tribes that inhabited the area, along with the vocabularies that were available at the time. On pages 315-414, the tribes of British America, covering roughly latitude 54° to 60°, are discussed in a similar manner, reviewing various discoveries from that region, including those along the North Pacific coast. Much of this material should have been included in the 19 volume from 1859 (which was prepared in 1854), and frequent references are made to it, as it serves as a sort of supplement.
1859: Buschmann (Johann Carl Eduard).
1859: Buschmann (Johann Carl Eduard).
Die Spuren der aztekischen Sprache im nördlichen Mexico und höheren amerikanischen Norden. Zugleich eine Musterung der Völker und Sprachen des nördlichen Mexico’s und der Westseite Nordamerika’s von Guadalaxara an bis zum Eismeer. In Abhandlungen aus dem Jahre 1854 der königlichen Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Berlin. Berlin, 1859.
Die Spuren der aztekischen Sprache im nördlichen Mexiko und im höheren amerikanischen Norden. Gleichzeitig eine Übersicht über die Völker und Sprachen im nördlichen Mexiko und an der Westküste Nordamerikas von Guadalajara bis zum Eismeer. In Abhandlungen aus dem Jahr 1854 der königlichen Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Berlin. Berlin, 1859.
The above, forming a second supplemental volume of the Transactions for 1854, is an extensive compilation of much previous literature treating of the Indian tribes from the Arctic Ocean southward to Guadalajara, and bears specially upon the Aztec language and its traces in the languages of the numerous tribes scattered along the Pacific Ocean and inland to the high plains. A large number of vocabularies and a vast amount of linguistic material are here brought together and arranged in a comprehensive manner to aid in the study attempted. In his classification of the tribes east of the Rocky Mountains, Buschmann largely followed Gallatin. His treatment of those not included in Gallatin’s paper is in the main original. Many of the results obtained may have been considered bold at the time of publication, but recent philological investigations give evidence of the value of many of the author’s conclusions.
The above, forming a second supplemental volume of the Transactions for 1854, is a detailed collection of much earlier literature discussing the Indian tribes from the Arctic Ocean down to Guadalajara, with a particular focus on the Aztec language and its influences on the languages of various tribes scattered along the Pacific Ocean and into the high plains. A large number of vocabularies and a significant amount of linguistic material are compiled and organized in a thorough way to support the study being undertaken. In his classification of the tribes east of the Rocky Mountains, Buschmann largely followed Gallatin. His analysis of those not included in Gallatin’s paper is mostly original. Many of the findings presented may have seemed bold when published, but recent linguistic research supports the validity of many of the author's conclusions.
1859. Kane (Paul).
1859. Kane (Paul).
Wanderings of an artist among the Indians of North America from Canada to Vancouver’s Island and Oregon through the Hudson’s Bay Company’s territory and back again. London, 1859.
Wanderings of an artist among the Indigenous people of North America from Canada to Vancouver Island and Oregon through the Hudson’s Bay Company’s territory and back again. London, 1859.
The interesting account of the author’s travels among the Indians, chiefly in the Northwest, and of their habits, is followed by a four page supplement, giving the names, locations, and census of the tribes of the Northwest coast. They are classified by language into Chymseyan, including the Nass, Chymseyans, Skeena and Sabassas Indians, of whom twenty-one tribes are given; Ha-eelb-zuk or Ballabola, including the Milbank Sound Indians, with nine tribes; Klen-ekate, including twenty tribes; Hai-dai, including the Kygargey and Queen Charlotte’s Island Indians, nineteen tribes being enumerated; and Qua-colth, with twenty-nine tribes. No statement of the origin of these tables is given, and they reappear, with no explanation, in Schoolcraft’s Indian Tribes, volume V, pp. 487-489.
The fascinating account of the author's travels among the Native Americans, mainly in the Northwest, and their customs, is followed by a four-page supplement that lists the names, locations, and census of the tribes on the Northwest coast. They are categorized by language into Chymseyan, which includes the Nass, Chymseyans, Skeena, and Sabassas Indians, totaling twenty-one tribes; Ha-eelb-zuk or Ballabola, including the Milbank Sound Indians, with nine tribes; Klen-ekate, which consists of twenty tribes; Hai-dai, including the Kygargey and Queen Charlotte’s Island Indians, with nineteen tribes listed; and Qua-colth, featuring twenty-nine tribes. There is no information provided about the origin of these tables, and they appear again, without any explanation, in Schoolcraft’s Indian Tribes, volume V, pp. 487-489.
In his Queen Charlotte Islands, 1870, Dawson publishes the part of this table relating to the Haida, with the statement that he received it from Dr. W. F. Tolmie. The census was made in 1836-’41 by the late Mr. John Work, who doubtless was the author of the more complete tables published by Kane and Schoolcraft.
In his Queen Charlotte Islands, 1870, Dawson shares the section of this table about the Haida, noting that he got it from Dr. W. F. Tolmie. The census was conducted between 1836 and 1841 by the late Mr. John Work, who was likely the creator of the more detailed tables published by Kane and Schoolcraft.
1862. Latham (Robert Gordon).
1862. Latham (Rob Gordon).
Elements of comparative philology. London, 1862.
Elements of Comparative Philology. London, 1862.
The object of this volume is, as the author states in his preface, “to lay before the reader the chief facts and the chief trains of reasoning in Comparative Philology.” Among the great mass of material accumulated for the purpose a share is devoted to the languages of North America. The remarks under these are often taken verbatim from the author’s earlier papers, to which reference has been made above, and the family names and classification set forth in them are substantially repeated.
The purpose of this book is, as the author mentions in his preface, “to present the main facts and key arguments in Comparative Philology.” Within the large amount of material gathered for this purpose, a portion is focused on the languages of North America. The comments in this section are often quoted directly from the author's previous papers, which have been referenced earlier, and the family names and classifications outlined in those papers are largely repeated.
1862. Hayden (Ferdinand Vandeveer).
1862. Hayden (Ferdinand Vandeveer).
Contributions to the ethnography and philology of the Indian tribes of the Missouri Valley. Philadelphia, 1862.
Contributions to the ethnography and philology of the Indian tribes of the Missouri Valley. Philadelphia, 1862.
This is a valuable contribution to our knowledge of the Missouri River tribes, made at a time when the information concerning them was none too precise. The tribes treated of are classified as follows:
This is a valuable addition to our understanding of the Missouri River tribes, created during a time when information about them was not very reliable. The tribes discussed are classified as follows:
I. | Knisteneaux, or Crees. | Algonkin Group, A. | |
II. | Blackfeet. | ||
III. | Shyennes. | ||
IV. | Arapohos. | Arapoho Group, B. | |
V. | Atsinas. | ||
VI. | Pawnees. | Pawnee Group, C. | |
VII. | Arikaras. | ||
VIII. | Dakotas. |
![]() |
Dakota Group, D. |
IX. | Assiniboins. | ||
X. | Crows. | ||
XI. | Minnitarees. | ||
XII. | Mandans. | ||
XIII. | Omahas. | ||
XIV. | Iowas. |
1864. Orozco y Berra (Manuel).
1864. Orozco y Berra (Manuel).
Geografía de las Lenguas y Carta Etnográfica de México Precedidas de un ensayo de clasificacion de las mismas lenguas y de apuntes para las inmigraciones de las tribus. Mexico, 1864.
Geography of Languages and Ethnographic Map of Mexico Preceded by an Essay on the Classification of the Languages and Notes for the Immigration of the Tribes. Mexico, 1864.
The work is divided into three parts. (1) Tentative classification of the languages of Mexico; (2) notes on the immigration of the tribes of Mexico; (3) geography of the languages of Mexico.
The work is divided into three parts. (1) Tentative classification of the languages of Mexico; (2) notes on the immigration of the tribes of Mexico; (3) geography of the languages of Mexico.
The author states that he has no knowledge whatever of the languages he treats of. All he attempts to do is to summarize the opinions of others. His authorities were (1) writers on native grammars; (2) missionaries; (3) persons who are reputed to be versed in such matters. He professes to have used his own judgment only when these authorities left him free to do so.
The author mentions that he has no knowledge of the languages he discusses. All he tries to do is summarize the views of others. His sources were (1) writers on native grammars; (2) missionaries; and (3) people who are considered knowledgeable in these areas. He claims to have used his own judgment only when these sources allowed him to do so.
His stated method in compiling the ethnographic map was to place before him the map of a certain department, examine all his authorities bearing on that department, and to mark with a distinctive color all localities said to belong to a particular language. When this was done he drew a boundary line around the area of that language. Examination of the map shows that he has partly expressed on it the classification of languages as given in the first part of his text, and partly limited himself to indicating the geographic boundaries 21 of languages, without, however, giving the boundaries of all the languages mentioned in his lists.
His method for creating the ethnographic map involved taking a map of a specific region, reviewing all the sources related to that region, and marking with a distinctive color all the locations identified with a particular language. Once that was completed, he drew a boundary line around the area where that language was spoken. A look at the map reveals that he has partially represented the classification of languages mentioned in the first part of his text and has mostly focused on showing the geographic boundaries of languages, although he didn’t include the boundaries for all the languages listed. 21
1865. Pimentel (Francisco).
1865. Pimentel (Francisco).
Cuadro Descriptivo y Comparativo de las Lenguas Indígenas de México. México, 1865.
Cuadro Descriptivo y Comparativo de las Lenguas Indígenas de México. México, 1865.
According to the introduction this work is divided into three parts: (1) descriptive; (2) comparative; (3) critical.
According to the introduction, this work is divided into three parts: (1) descriptive; (2) comparative; (3) critical.
The author divides the treatment of each language into (1) its mechanism; (2) its dictionary; (3) its grammar. By “mechanism” he means pronunciation and composition; by “dictionary” he means the commonest or most notable words.
The author splits the discussion of each language into (1) its structure; (2) its vocabulary; (3) its grammar. By "structure," he refers to pronunciation and composition; by "vocabulary," he means the most common or notable words.
In the case of each language he states the localities where it is spoken, giving a short sketch of its history, the explanation of its etymology, and a list of such writers on that language as he has become acquainted with. Then follows: “mechanism, dictionary, and grammar.” Next he enumerates its dialects if there are any, and compares specimens of them when he is able. He gives the Our Father when he can.
In each language, he notes the places where it's spoken, providing a brief overview of its history, an explanation of its etymology, and a list of writers he has learned about. Then he includes: "mechanism, dictionary, and grammar." After that, he lists its dialects if there are any and compares examples of them when possible. He also shares the Our Father whenever he can.
Volume I (1862) contains introduction and twelve languages. Volume II (1865) contains fourteen groups of languages, a vocabulary of the Opata language, and an appendix treating of the Comanche, the Coahuilteco, and various languages of upper California.
Volume I (1862) includes an introduction and twelve languages. Volume II (1865) includes fourteen language groups, a vocabulary for the Opata language, and an appendix about the Comanche, Coahuilteco, and various languages of northern California.
Volume III (announced in preface of Volume II) is to contain the “comparative part” (to be treated in the same “mixed” method as the “descriptive part”), and a scientific classification of all the languages spoken in Mexico.
Volume III (mentioned in the preface of Volume II) will include the “comparative part” (which will be handled in the same “mixed” method as the “descriptive part”), along with a scientific classification of all the languages spoken in Mexico.
In the “critical part” (apparently dispersed through the other two parts) the author intends to pass judgment on the merits of the languages of Mexico, to point out their good qualities and their defects.
In the “critical part” (which seems to be spread throughout the other two parts), the author plans to evaluate the strengths and weaknesses of the languages of Mexico, highlighting their positive aspects and flaws.
1870. Dall (William Healey).
1870. Dall (William Healey).
On the distribution of the native tribes of Alaska and the adjacent territory. In Proceedings of the American Association for the Advancement of Science. Cambridge, 1870, vol. 18.
On the distribution of the native tribes of Alaska and the nearby territory. In Proceedings of the American Association for the Advancement of Science. Cambridge, 1870, vol. 18.
In this important paper is presented much interesting information concerning the inhabitants of Alaska and adjacent territories. The natives are divided into two groups, the Indians of the interior, and the inhabitants of the coast, or Esquimaux. The latter are designated by the term Orarians, which are composed of three lesser groups, Eskimo, Aleutians, and Tuski. The Orarians are distinguished, first, by their language; second, by their distribution; third, by their habits; fourth, by their physical characteristics.
This important paper presents a lot of interesting information about the people living in Alaska and the surrounding areas. The natives are divided into two groups: the inland Indians and the coastal residents, known as Eskimos. The coastal groups are referred to as Orarians, which consist of three sub-groups: Eskimos, Aleutians, and Tuskis. The Orarians are distinguished by their language, their geographical distribution, their customs, and their physical traits.
1870. Dall (William Healey).
1870. Dall (William Healey).
Alaska and its Resources. Boston, 1870.
Alaska and its Resources. Boston, 1870.
The classification followed is practically the same as is given in the author’s article in the Proceedings of the American Association for the Advancement of Science.
The classification used here is basically the same as the one presented in the author's article in the Proceedings of the American Association for the Advancement of Science.
1877. Dall (William Healey).
1877. Dall (William Healey).
Tribes of the extreme northwest. In Contributions to North American Ethnology (published by United States Geographical and Geological Survey of the Rocky Mountain Region). Washington, 1877, vol. 1.
Tribes of the extreme northwest. In Contributions to North American Ethnology (published by the United States Geographical and Geological Survey of the Rocky Mountain Region). Washington, 1877, vol. 1.
This is an amplification of the paper published in the Proceedings of the American Association, as above cited. The author states that “numerous additions and corrections, as well as personal observations of much before taken at second hand, have placed it in my power to enlarge and improve my original arrangement.”
This is an expanded version of the paper published in the Proceedings of the American Association, as mentioned above. The author states that “many additions and corrections, along with personal observations previously gathered secondhand, have allowed me to broaden and enhance my original arrangement.”
In this paper the Orarians are divided into “two well marked groups,” the Innuit, comprising all the so-called Eskimo and Tuskis, and the Aleuts. The paper proper is followed by an appendix by Gibbs and Dall, in which are presented a series of vocabularies from the northwest, including dialects of the Tlinkit and Haida nations, T’sim-si-ans, and others.
In this paper, the Orarians are split into “two distinct groups”: the Innuit, which includes all the so-called Eskimo and Tuskis, and the Aleuts. The main paper is followed by an appendix by Gibbs and Dall, presenting a series of vocabularies from the northwest, including dialects of the Tlinkit and Haida nations, T’sim-si-ans, and others.
1877. Gibbs (George).
1877. Gibbs (George).
Tribes of Western Washington and Northwestern Oregon. In Contributions to North American Ethnology. Washington, 1887, vol. 1.
Tribes of Western Washington and Northwestern Oregon. In Contributions to North American Ethnology. Washington, 1887, vol. 1.
This is a valuable article, and gives many interesting particulars of the tribes of which it treats. References are here and there made to the languages of the several tribes, with, however, no attempt at their classification. A table follows the report, in which is given by Dall, after Gibbs, a classification of the tribes mentioned by Gibbs. Five families are mentioned, viz: Nūtka, Sahaptin, Tinneh, Selish, and T’sinūk. The comparative vocabularies follow Part II.
This is a valuable article that provides many interesting details about the tribes it discusses. There are occasional references to the languages of various tribes, but no effort is made to classify them. A table follows the report, where Dall presents a classification of the tribes mentioned by Gibbs, based on Gibbs' work. Five families are mentioned: Nūtka, Sahaptin, Tinneh, Selish, and T’sinūk. The comparative vocabularies follow Part II.
1877. Powers (Stephen).
1877. Powers (Stephen).
Tribes of California. In Contributions to North American Ethnology. Washington, 1877, vol. 3.
Tribes of California. In Contributions to North American Ethnology. Washington, 1877, vol. 3.
The extended paper on the Californian tribes which makes up the bulk of this volume is the most important contribution to the subject ever made. The author’s unusual opportunities for personal observation among these tribes were improved to the utmost and the result is a comparatively full and comprehensive account of their habits and character.
The lengthy paper on the Californian tribes that makes up most of this volume is the most significant contribution to the subject ever made. The author's unique chances for personal observation among these tribes were fully utilized, resulting in a detailed and comprehensive account of their habits and character.
Here and there are allusions to the languages spoken, with reference to the families to which the tribes belong. No formal classification is presented.
Here and there are references to the languages spoken, mentioning the families that the tribes belong to. No formal classification is provided.
1877. Powell (John Wesley).
1877. Powell (John Wesley).
Appendix. Linguistics edited by J. W. Powell. In Contributions to North American Ethnology. Washington, 1877, vol. 3.
Appendix. Linguistics edited by J. W. Powell. In Contributions to North American Ethnology. Washington, 1877, vol. 3.
This appendix consists of a series of comparative vocabularies collected by Powers, Gibbs and others, classified into linguistic families, as follows:
This appendix contains a collection of comparative vocabularies gathered by Powers, Gibbs, and others, organized by linguistic families, as follows:
23 | Family. | Family. | |
1. | Ká-rok. | 8. | Mūt´-sūn. |
2. | Yú-rok. | 9. | Santa Barbara. |
3. | Chim-a-rí-ko. | 10. | Yó-kuts. |
4. | Wish-osk. | 11. | Mai´-du. |
5. | Yú-ki. | 12. | A-cho-mâ´-wi. |
6. | Pómo. | 13. | Shaś-ta. |
7. | Win-tūn´. |
1877. Gatschet (Albert Samuel).
1877. Gatschet (Albert Samuel).
Indian languages of the Pacific States and Territories. In Magazine of American History. New York, 1877, vol. 1.
Indian languages of the Pacific States and Territories. In Magazine of American History. New York, 1877, vol. 1.
After some remarks concerning the nature of language and of the special characteristics of Indian languages, the author gives a synopsis of the languages of the Pacific region. The families mentioned are:
After some comments about the nature of language and the unique features of Indian languages, the author provides an overview of the languages of the Pacific region. The families mentioned are:
1. | Shóshoni. | 11. | Pomo. | 21. | Yakon. |
2. | Yuma. | 12. | Wishosk. | 22. | Cayuse. |
3. | Pima. | 13. | Eurok. | 23. | Kalapuya. |
4. | Santa Barbara. | 14. | Weits-pek. | 24. | Chinook. |
5. | Mutsun. | 15. | Cahrok. | 25. | Sahaptin. |
6. | Yocut. | 16. | Tolewa. | 26. | Selish. |
7. | Meewoc. | 17. | Shasta. | 27. | Nootka. |
8. | Meidoo. | 18. | Pit River. | 28. | Kootenai. |
9. | Wintoon. | 19. | Klamath. | ||
10. | Yuka. | 20. | Tinné. |
This is an important paper, and contains notices of several new stocks, derived from a study of the material furnished by Powers.
This is an important paper and includes information on several new stocks based on a study of the material provided by Powers.
The author advocates the plan of using a system of nomenclature similar in nature to that employed in zoology in the case of generic and specific names, adding after the name of the tribe the family to which it belongs; thus: Warm Springs, Sahaptin.
The author supports the idea of using a naming system like the one used in zoology for genus and species names, adding the family it belongs to after the tribe name; for example: Warm Springs, Sahaptin.
1878. Powell (John Wesley).
1878. Powell (John Wesley).
The nationality of the Pueblos. In the Rocky Mountain Presbyterian. Denver, November, 1878.
The nationality of the Pueblos. In the Rocky Mountain Presbyterian. Denver, November, 1878.
This is a half-column article, the object of which is to assign the several Pueblos to their proper stocks. A paragraph is devoted to contradicting the popular belief that the Pueblos are in some way related to the Aztecs. No vocabularies are given or cited, though the classification is stated to be a linguistic one.
This is a half-column article aimed at categorizing the various Pueblos into their correct cultural groups. A section is dedicated to challenging the common notion that the Pueblos are somehow related to the Aztecs. No vocabularies are provided or referenced, although it is noted that the classification is based on linguistic criteria.
1878. Keane (Augustus H).
1878. Keane (Augustus H).
Appendix. Ethnography and philology of America. In Stanford’s Compendium of Geography and Travel, edited and extended by H. W. Bates. London, 1878.
Appendix. Ethnography and philology of America. In Stanford’s Compendium of Geography and Travel, edited and updated by H. W. Bates. London, 1878.
In the appendix are given, first, some of the more general characteristics and peculiarities of Indian languages, followed by a classification of all the tribes of North America, after which is given an 24 alphabetical list of American tribes and languages, with their habitats and the stock to which they belong.
In the appendix, you'll find some of the main features and unique traits of Indian languages, followed by a classification of all the North American tribes. After that, there is an 24 alphabetical list of American tribes and languages, along with their locations and the linguistic family they belong to.
The classification is compiled from many sources, and although it contains many errors and inconsistencies, it affords on the whole a good general idea of prevalent views on the subject.
The classification is put together from various sources, and while it has many errors and inconsistencies, it still provides a decent overall idea of common opinions on the topic.
1880. Powell (John Wesley).
1880. John Wesley Powell.
Pueblo Indians. In the American Naturalist. Philadelphia, 1880, vol. 14.
Pueblo Indians. In the American Naturalist. Philadelphia, 1880, vol. 14.
This is a two-page article in which is set forth a classification of the Pueblo Indians from linguistic considerations. The Pueblos are divided into four families or stocks, viz:
This is a two-page article that presents a classification of the Pueblo Indians based on language. The Pueblos are divided into four families or groups, namely:
1. | Shínumo. |
2. | Zunian. |
3. | Kéran. |
4. | Téwan. |
Under the several stocks is given a list of those who have collected vocabularies of these languages and a reference to their publication.
Under the various stocks, there's a list of those who have gathered vocabularies of these languages along with a reference to their publication.
1880. Eells (Myron).
1880. Eells (Myron).
The Twana language of Washington Territory. In the American Antiquarian. Chicago, 1880-’81, vol. 3.
The Twana language of Washington Territory. In the American Antiquarian. Chicago, 1880-’81, vol. 3.
This is a brief article—two and a half pages—on the Twana, Clallam, and Chemakum Indians. The author finds, upon a comparison of vocabularies, that the Chemakum language has little in common with its neighbors.
This is a short article—two and a half pages—about the Twana, Clallam, and Chemakum Indians. The author discovers, when comparing vocabularies, that the Chemakum language has very little in common with its neighboring languages.
1885. Dall (William Healey).
1885. Dall (William Healey).
The native tribes of Alaska. In Proceedings of the American Association for the Advancement of Science, thirty-fourth meeting, held at Ann Arbor, Mich., August, 1885. Salem, 1886.
The native tribes of Alaska. In Proceedings of the American Association for the Advancement of Science, thirty-fourth meeting, held at Ann Arbor, Mich., August, 1885. Salem, 1886.
This paper is a timely contribution to the subject of the Alaska tribes, and carries it from the point at which the author left it in 1869 to date, briefly summarizing the several recent additions to knowledge. It ends with a geographical classification of the Innuit and Indian tribes of Alaska, with estimates of their numbers.
This paper is a relevant contribution to the topic of the Alaska tribes and brings it up to date from where the author left it in 1869, providing a brief overview of the recent advancements in knowledge. It concludes with a geographical classification of the Inuit and Indian tribes of Alaska, including estimates of their populations.
1885. Bancroft (Hubert Howe).
1885. Bancroft (Hubert Howe).
The works of Hubert Howe Bancroft, vol. 3: the native races, vol. 3, myths and languages. San Francisco, 1882.
The works of Hubert Howe Bancroft, vol. 3: the native races, vol. 3, myths and languages. San Francisco, 1882.
Vols. 1-5 collectively are “The Native Races”; vol. 3 is Myths and Languages.
Vols. 1-5 together are “The Native Races”; vol. 3 is Myths and Languages.
In the chapter on that subject the languages are classified by divisions which appear to correspond to groups, families, tribes, and dialects.
In the chapter on that topic, the languages are categorized into divisions that seem to match up with groups, families, tribes, and dialects.
The classification does not, however, follow any consistent plan, and is in parts unintelligible.
The classification doesn’t follow any clear system and is partly confusing.
1882. Gatschet (Albert Samuel).
1882. Gatschet (Albert Samuel).
Indian languages of the Pacific States and Territories and of the Pueblos of New Mexico. In the Magazine of American History. New York, 1882, vol. 8.
Indian languages of the Pacific States and Territories and of the Pueblos of New Mexico. In the Magazine of American History. New York, 1882, vol. 8.
1. | Chimariko. | ||
2. | Washo. | ||
3. | Yákona. | ||
4. | Sayúskla. | ||
5. | Kúsa. | ||
6. | Takilma. | ||
7. | Rio Grande Pueblo. | ||
8. | Kera. | ||
9. | Zuñi. |
1883. Hale (Horatio).
1883. Hale (Horatio).
Indian migrations, as evidenced by language. In The American Antiquarian and Oriental Journal. Chicago, 1888, vol. 5.
Indian migrations, as shown by language. In The American Antiquarian and Oriental Journal. Chicago, 1888, vol. 5.
In connection with the object of this paper—the study of Indian migrations—several linguistic stocks are mentioned, and the linguistic affinities of a number of tribes are given. The stocks mentioned are:
In relation to the focus of this paper—the study of Indian migrations—several language families are discussed, and the language connections of various tribes are indicated. The mentioned families are:
Huron-Cherokee. Dakota. Algonkin. Chahta-Muskoki. |
1885. Tolmie (W. Fraser) and Dawson (George M.)
1885. Tolmie (W. Fraser) and Dawson (George M.)
Comparative vocabularies of the Indian tribes of British Columbia, with a map illustrating distribution (Geological and Natural History Survey of Canada). Montreal, 1884.
Comparative vocabularies of the Indian tribes of British Columbia, with a map showing distribution (Geological and Natural History Survey of Canada). Montreal, 1884.
The vocabularies presented constitute an important contribution to linguistic science. They represent “one or more dialects of every Indian language spoken on the Pacific slope from the Columbia River north to the Tshilkat River, and beyond, in Alaska; and from the outermost sea-board to the main continental divide in the Rocky Mountains.” A colored map shows the area occupied by each linguistic family.
The vocabularies provided make a significant contribution to linguistic science. They represent "one or more dialects of every Indian language spoken on the Pacific slope from the Columbia River north to the Tshilkat River, and beyond, in Alaska; and from the farthest coastline to the main continental divide in the Rocky Mountains." A colored map illustrates the regions occupied by each language family.
LINGUISTIC MAP.
In 1836 Gallatin conferred a great boon upon linguistic students by
classifying all the existing material relating to this subject. Even in
the light of the knowledge of the present day his work is found to rest
upon a sound basis. The material of Gallatin’s time, however, was too
scanty to permit of more than an outline of the subject. Later writers
have contributed to the work, and the names of Latham, Turner, Prichard,
Buschmann, Hale, Gatschet, and others are connected with important
classificatory results.
In 1836, Gallatin provided a huge advantage to language students by organizing all the existing materials related to this topic. Even today, his work is recognized as being fundamentally solid. However, the resources available in Gallatin’s time were too limited to allow for more than a basic overview of the subject. Later authors have built on this work, with names like Latham, Turner, Prichard, Buschmann, Hale, Gatschet, and others associated with significant classification achievements.
The writer’s interest in linguistic work and the inception of a plan for a linguistic classification of Indian languages date back about 20 years, to a time when he was engaged in explorations in the West. Being brought into contact with many tribes, it was possible to collect a large amount of original material. Subsequently, when the Bureau of Ethnology was organized, this store was largely increased through the labors of others. Since then a very large body of literature published in Indian languages has been accumulated, and a great number of vocabularies have been gathered by the Bureau 26 assistants and by collaborators in various parts of the country. The results of a study of all this material, and of much historical data, which necessarily enters largely into work of this character, appear in the accompanying map.
The writer's interest in linguistic work and the beginning of a plan for classifying Indian languages goes back about 20 years, to a time when he was exploring the West. By interacting with many tribes, he was able to collect a lot of original material. Later, when the Bureau of Ethnology was established, this collection was further expanded through the efforts of others. Since then, a vast amount of literature published in Indian languages has been accumulated, and numerous vocabularies have been gathered by the Bureau assistants and collaborators from different parts of the country. The results of studying all this material, along with much historical data, which is crucial to this kind of work, are shown in the accompanying map. 26
The contributions to the subject during the last fifty years have been so important, and the additions to the material accessible to the student of Gallatin’s time have been so large, that much of the reproach which deservedly attached to American scholars because of the neglect of American linguistics has been removed. The field is a vast one, however, and the workers are comparatively few. Moreover, opportunities for collecting linguistic material are growing fewer day by day, as tribes are consolidated upon reservations, as they become civilized, and as the older Indians, who alone are skilled in their language, die, leaving, it may be, only a few imperfect vocabularies as a basis for future study. History has bequeathed to us the names of many tribes, which became extinct in early colonial times, of whose language not a hint is left and whose linguistic relations must ever remain unknown.
The contributions to the subject over the last fifty years have been so significant, and the amount of material available for students compared to Gallatin’s time has grown so much, that much of the criticism aimed at American scholars for neglecting American linguistics has diminished. However, the field is still vast, and the number of researchers is relatively small. Additionally, opportunities to collect linguistic material are decreasing every day, as tribes are consolidated onto reservations, as they become assimilated into mainstream society, and as the older generations of Native Americans, who are the only ones fluent in their languages, pass away, leaving perhaps only a few incomplete vocabularies for future study. History has left us the names of many tribes that became extinct in early colonial times, of whose languages no traces remain and whose linguistic connections will always be unknown.
It is vain to grieve over neglected opportunities unless their contemplation stimulates us to utilize those at hand. There are yet many gaps to be filled, even in so elementary a part of the study as the classification of the tribes by language. As to the detailed study of the different linguistic families, the mastery and analysis of the languages composing them, and their comparison with one another and with the languages of other families, only a beginning has been made.
It’s pointless to be upset about missed opportunities unless thinking about them encourages us to make the most of the ones we have now. There are still many gaps to fill, even in something as basic as classifying tribes by their languages. When it comes to the detailed study of different language families, understanding and analyzing the languages within them, and comparing them with each other and with languages from other families, we’ve only just started.
After the above statement it is hardly necessary to add that the accompanying map does not purport to represent final results. On the contrary, it is to be regarded as tentative, setting forth in visible form the results of investigation up to the present time, as a guide and aid to future effort.
After the above statement, it’s hardly necessary to add that the accompanying map doesn’t claim to show final results. On the contrary, it should be seen as tentative, illustrating the findings of the research so far, serving as a guide and support for future efforts.
Each of the colors or patterns upon the map represents a distinct linguistic family, the total number of families contained in the whole area being fifty-eight. It is believed that the families of languages represented upon the map can not have sprung from a common source; they are as distinct from one another in their vocabularies and apparently in their origin as from the Aryan or the Scythian families. Unquestionably, future and more critical study will result in the fusion of some of these families. As the means for analysis and comparison accumulate, resemblances now hidden will be brought to light, and relationships hitherto unsuspected will be shown to exist. Such a result may be anticipated with the more certainty inasmuch as the present classification has been made upon a conservative plan. Where relationships between families are suspected, but can not be demonstrated by convincing evidence, it has been deemed wiser not to unite them, but to keep 27 them apart until more material shall have accumulated and proof of a more convincing character shall have been brought forward. While some of the families indicated on the map may in future be united to other families, and the number thus be reduced, there seems to be no ground for the belief that the total of the linguistic families of this country will be materially diminished, at least under the present methods of linguistic analysis, for there is little reason to doubt that, as the result of investigation in the field, there will be discovered tribes speaking languages not classifiable under any of the present families; thus the decrease in the total by reason of consolidation may be compensated by a corresponding increase through discovery. It may even be possible that some of the similarities used in combining languages into families may, on further study, prove to be adventitious, and the number may be increased thereby. To which side the numerical balance will fall remains for the future to decide.
Each color or pattern on the map represents a different language family, with a total of fifty-eight families throughout the entire area. It's thought that the language families shown on the map did not come from a common origin; they are as distinct from one another in their vocabularies and likely in their roots as they are from the Aryan or Scythian families. Clearly, future and more detailed studies will lead to the merging of some of these families. As the methods for analysis and comparison improve, hidden similarities will emerge, and previously unknown relationships will be revealed. We can expect this outcome even more confidently since the current classification has been done conservatively. When relationships between families are suspected but can't be clearly proven, it's been considered wiser to keep them separate rather than combine them until more information is available and stronger evidence is presented. While some of the families shown on the map might eventually be combined with others, reducing their number, it seems unlikely that the total number of language families in this country will significantly decrease, at least with the current methods of linguistic analysis. There's little doubt that further field research will reveal tribes speaking languages that don't fit into any of the existing families; therefore, any reduction in total due to consolidation might be offset by an increase through new discoveries. It's even possible that some of the similarities used to group languages into families may turn out to be coincidental upon further study, potentially increasing the number. Whether the overall count will rise or fall remains to be seen in the future. 27
As stated above, all the families occupy the same basis of dissimilarity from one another—i.e., none of them are related—and consequently no two of them are either more or less alike than any other two, except in so far as mere coincidences and borrowed material may be said to constitute likeness and relationship. Coincidences in the nature of superficial word resemblances are common in all languages of the world. No matter how widely separated geographically two families of languages may be, no matter how unlike their vocabularies, how distinct their origin, some words may always be found which appear upon superficial examination to indicate relationship. There is not a single Indian linguistic family, for instance, which does not contain words similar in sound, and more rarely similar in both sound and meaning, to words in English, Chinese, Hebrew, and other languages. Not only do such resemblances exist, but they have been discovered and pointed out, not as mere adventitious similarities, but as proof of genetic relationship. Borrowed linguistic material also appears in every family, tempting the unwary investigator into making false analogies and drawing erroneous conclusions. Neither coincidences nor borrowed material, however, can be properly regarded as evidence of cognation.
As mentioned earlier, all the families are fundamentally different from each other—meaning none of them are related—and therefore no two families are more or less similar than any other two, except when superficial coincidences and borrowed elements might create an appearance of similarity and connection. Coincidences in the form of superficial word similarities are common across all languages worldwide. Regardless of how geographically distant two language families might be, or how different their vocabularies and origins are, there are always some words that may seem related at first glance. For instance, not a single Indian language family lacks words that sound similar, and even more rarely, ones that sound and mean the same, as words in English, Chinese, Hebrew, and other languages. These similarities not only exist but have been identified and highlighted, not merely as coincidental similarities, but as evidence of genetic relationships. Language families also contain borrowed linguistic elements, which can mislead unwary researchers into forming false analogies and reaching incorrect conclusions. However, neither coincidences nor borrowed elements can be appropriately considered as proof of a shared origin.
While occupying the same plane of genetic dissimilarity, the families are by no means alike as regards either the extent of territory occupied, the number of tribes grouped under them respectively, or the number of languages and dialects of which they are composed. Some of them cover wide areas, whose dimensions are stated in terms of latitude and longitude rather than by miles. Others occupy so little space that the colors representing them are hardly discernible upon the map. Some of them contain but a single tribe; others are represented by scores of tribes. In the case of a few, the term “family” is commensurate with language, since there is but one 28 language and no dialects. In the case of others, their tribes spoke several languages, so distinct from one another as to be for the most part mutually unintelligible, and the languages shade into many dialects more or less diverse.
While sharing the same level of genetic difference, the families are definitely not the same when it comes to the amount of territory they cover, the number of tribes under each family, or the variety of languages and dialects they include. Some families span large areas, measured in terms of latitude and longitude instead of miles. Others take up such small spaces that the colors marking them on the map are barely visible. Some families include just one tribe; others are made up of dozens of tribes. In a few cases, the term “family” is equivalent to the language itself, as there is only one language and no dialects. In other cases, the tribes spoke multiple languages that are so different from each other that they are mostly unintelligible to one another, and those languages break down into various dialects that can be quite different. 28
The map, designed primarily for the use of students who are engaged in investigating the Indians of the United States, was at first limited to this area; subsequently its scope was extended to include the whole of North America north of Mexico. Such an extension of its plan was, indeed, almost necessary, since a number of important families, largely represented in the United States, are yet more largely represented in the territory to the north, and no adequate conception of the size and relative importance of such families as the Algonquian, Siouan, Salishan, Athapascan, and others can be had without including extralimital territory.
The map, created mainly for students studying the Native Americans of the United States, was initially focused only on this area. Later on, it was expanded to cover all of North America north of Mexico. This expansion was almost essential, as many significant tribes, widely represented in the United States, are even more prominent in the surrounding territories to the north. You can't fully understand the size and importance of tribes like the Algonquian, Siouan, Salishan, Athapascan, and others without including these additional areas.
To the south, also, it happens that several linguistic stocks extend beyond the boundaries of the United States. Three families are, indeed, mainly extralimital in their position, viz: Yuman, the great body of the tribes of which family inhabited the peninsula of Lower California; Piman, which has only a small representation in southern Arizona; and the Coahuiltecan, which intrudes into southwestern Texas. The Athapascan family is represented in Arizona and New Mexico by the well known Apache and Navajo, the former of whom have gained a strong foothold in northern Mexico, while the Tañoan, a Pueblo family of the upper Rio Grande, has established a few pueblos lower down the river in Mexico. For the purpose of necessary comparison, therefore, the map is made to include all of North America north of Mexico, the entire peninsula of Lower California, and so much of Mexico as is necessary to show the range of families common to that country and to the United States. It is left to a future occasion to attempt to indicate the linguistic relations of Mexico and Central America, for which, it may be remarked in passing, much material has been accumulated.
To the south, several language families extend beyond the borders of the United States. Three groups are primarily located outside the U.S.: Yuman, which includes many tribes that lived in the Baja California peninsula; Piman, found only in small numbers in southern Arizona; and Coahuiltecan, which encroaches into southwestern Texas. The Athapascan family is represented in Arizona and New Mexico by the well-known Apache and Navajo, the former of which has established a strong presence in northern Mexico, while the Tañoan, a Pueblo family from the upper Rio Grande, has set up a few pueblos further down the river in Mexico. To facilitate necessary comparisons, the map includes all of North America north of Mexico, the entire Baja California peninsula, and portions of Mexico essential to illustrate the range of families shared by both that country and the United States. Indicating the linguistic connections of Mexico and Central America will be addressed on another occasion; much information on that topic has been gathered.
It is apparent that a single map can not be made to show the locations of the several linguistic families at different epochs; nor can a single map be made to represent the migrations of the tribes composing the linguistic families. In order to make a clear presentation of the latter subject, it would be necessary to prepare a series of maps showing the areas successively occupied by the several tribes as they were disrupted and driven from section to section under the pressure of other tribes or the vastly more potent force of European encroachment. Although the data necessary for a complete representation of tribal migration, even for the period subsequent to the advent of the European, does not exist, still a very large body of material bearing upon the subject is at hand, and exceedingly valuable results in this direction could be presented did not the amount 29 of time and labor and the large expense attendant upon such a project forbid the attempt for the present.
It’s clear that a single map can’t effectively show the locations of different language families at various times, nor can it illustrate the migrations of the tribes that make up those language families. To clearly present this topic, it would be necessary to create a series of maps that depict the areas occupied by different tribes as they were displaced and moved from one area to another under pressure from other tribes or the much stronger force of European expansion. While complete data for a full representation of tribal migration, even after the arrival of Europeans, doesn't exist, there is still a substantial amount of relevant information available, and significant insights could be shared if the time, effort, and costs required for such a project weren’t a barrier for now. 29
The map undertakes to show the habitat of the linguistic families only, and this is for but a single period in their history, viz, at the time when the tribes composing them first became known to the European, or when they first appear on recorded history. As the dates when the different tribes became known vary, it follows as a matter of course that the periods represented by the colors in one portion of the map are not synchronous with those in other portions. Thus the data for the Columbia River tribes is derived chiefly from the account of the journey of Lewis and Clarke in 1803-’05, long before which period radical changes of location had taken place among the tribes of the eastern United States. Again, not only are the periods represented by the different sections of the map not synchronous, but only in the case of a few of the linguistic families, and these usually the smaller ones, is it possible to make the coloring synchronous for different sections of the same family. Thus our data for the location of some of the northern members of the Shoshonean family goes back to 1804, a date at which absolutely no knowledge had been gained of most of the southern members of the group, our first accounts of whom began about 1850. Again, our knowledge of the eastern Algonquian tribes dates back to about 1600, while no information was had concerning the Atsina, Blackfeet, Cheyenne, and the Arapaho, the westernmost members of the family, until two centuries later.
The map aims to show the habitats of the linguistic families, but only for a specific period in their history, namely when the tribes that make them up first became known to Europeans or when they first appeared in recorded history. Since the dates when the different tribes were recognized vary, it's obvious that the time periods represented by the colors in one part of the map don't align with those in other parts. For example, the data for the Columbia River tribes comes mainly from the journey of Lewis and Clarke in 1803-’05, long before which significant changes in location had happened among the tribes in the eastern United States. Moreover, not only are the periods shown in different sections of the map not synchronous, but it's also possible to only synchronously color a few of the linguistic families, typically the smaller ones, across different sections of the same family. For instance, our information on the location of some northern members of the Shoshonean family goes back to 1804, by which time we had no knowledge of most southern members of the group, with our first records beginning around 1850. Additionally, our understanding of the eastern Algonquian tribes goes back to about 1600, while we didn't have any information about the Atsina, Blackfeet, Cheyenne, and the Arapaho, the westernmost members of the family, until two centuries later.
Notwithstanding these facts, an attempt to fix upon the areas formerly occupied by the several linguistic families, and of the pristine homes of many of the tribes composing them, is by no means hopeless. For instance, concerning the position of the western tribes during the period of early contact of our colonies and its agreement with their position later when they appear in history, it may be inferred that as a rule it was stationary, though positive evidence is lacking. When changes of tribal habitat actually took place they were rarely in the nature of extensive migration, by which a portion of a linguistic family was severed from the main body, but usually in the form of encroachment by a tribe or tribes upon neighboring territory, which resulted simply in the extension of the limits of one linguistic family at the expense of another, the defeated tribes being incorporated or confined within narrower limits. If the above inference be correct, the fact that different chronologic periods are represented upon the map is of comparatively little importance, since, if the Indian tribes were in the main sedentary, and not nomadic, the changes resulting in the course of one or two centuries would not make material differences. Exactly the opposite opinion, however, has been expressed by many writers, viz, that the North 30 American Indian tribes were nomadic. The picture presented by these writers is of a medley of ever-shifting tribes, to-day here, to-morrow there, occupying new territory and founding new homes—if nomads can be said to have homes—only to abandon them. Such a picture, however, is believed to convey an erroneous idea of the former condition of our Indian tribes. As the question has significance in the present connection it must be considered somewhat at length.
Notwithstanding these facts, trying to identify the areas once occupied by the various language families and the original homes of many of the tribes within them isn’t entirely hopeless. For example, regarding the position of the western tribes during the early contact period with our colonies and how it aligns with their later historical appearance, it can be inferred that typically it was stable, despite a lack of clear evidence. When changes in tribal territory did occur, they rarely involved extensive migrations that separated a part of a language family from the main group; instead, they usually involved a tribe or tribes encroaching on neighboring land, which resulted in one language family expanding at the expense of another, with the defeated tribes being absorbed or pushed into smaller areas. If this inference holds true, the fact that different time periods are represented on the map is relatively minor, since, if the Indian tribes were primarily settled rather than nomadic, the changes over the span of one or two centuries wouldn’t lead to significant differences. However, the opposite view has been expressed by many writers, who claim that North American Indian tribes were nomadic. These writers depict a chaotic scene of constantly moving tribes, today here, tomorrow there, taking over new territories and establishing new homes—if nomads can even be said to have homes—only to abandon them. This depiction, however, is believed to misrepresent the earlier state of our Indian tribes. Since this question is relevant to the current discussion, it must be explored in some detail.
INDIAN TRIBES SEDENTARY.
In the first place, the linguistic map, based as it is upon the earliest evidence obtainable, itself offers conclusive proof, not only that the Indian tribes were in the main sedentary at the time history first records their position, but that they had been sedentary for a very long period. In order that this may be made plain, it should be clearly understood, as stated above, that each of the colors or patterns upon the map indicates a distinct linguistic family. It will be noticed that the colors representing the several families are usually in single bodies, i.e., that they represent continuous areas, and that with some exceptions the same color is not scattered here and there over the map in small spots. Yet precisely this last state of things is what would be expected had the tribes representing the families been nomadic to a marked degree. If nomadic tribes occupied North America, instead of spreading out each from a common center, as the colors show that the tribes composing the several families actually did, they would have been dispersed here and there over the whole face of the country. That they are not so dispersed is considered proof that in the main they were sedentary. It has been stated above that more or less extensive migrations of some tribes over the country had taken place prior to European occupancy. This fact is disclosed by a glance at the present map. The great Athapascan family, for instance, occupying the larger part of British America, is known from linguistic evidence to have sent off colonies into Oregon (Wilopah, Tlatskanai, Coquille), California (Smith River tribes, Kenesti or Wailakki tribes, Hupa), and Arizona and New Mexico (Apache, Navajo). How long before European occupancy of this country these migrations took place can not be told, but in the case of most of them it was undoubtedly many years. By the test of language it is seen that the great Siouan family, which we have come to look upon as almost exclusively western, had one offshoot in Virginia (Tutelo), another in North and South Carolina (Catawba), and a third in Mississippi (Biloxi); and the Algonquian family, so important in the early history of this country, while occupying a nearly continuous area in the north and east, had yet secured a foothold, doubtless in very recent times, in Wyoming and Colorado. These and other 31 similar facts sufficiently prove the power of individual tribes or gentes to sunder relations with the great body of their kindred and to remove to distant homes. Tested by linguistic evidence, such instances appear to be exceptional, and the fact remains that in the great majority of cases the tribes composing linguistic families occupy continuous areas, and hence are and have been practically sedentary. Nor is the bond of a common language, strong and enduring as that bond is usually thought to be, entirely sufficient to explain the phenomenon here pointed out. When small in number the linguistic tie would undoubtedly aid in binding together the members of a tribe; but as the people speaking a common language increase in number and come to have conflicting interests, the linguistic tie has often proved to be an insufficient bond of union. In the case of our Indian tribes feuds and internecine conflicts were common between members of the same linguistic family. In fact, it is probable that a very large number of the dialects into which Indian languages are split originated as the result of internecine strife. Factions, divided and separated from the parent body, by contact, intermarriage, and incorporation with foreign tribes, developed distinct dialects or languages.
First, the linguistic map, which is based on the earliest available evidence, provides clear proof that the Indian tribes were mostly settled when history first recorded their locations, and that they had been settled for a long time. To clarify this, it’s important to understand, as mentioned earlier, that each color or pattern on the map represents a distinct linguistic family. You'll notice that the colors for the different families usually appear as solid areas, meaning they represent continuous regions, and with some exceptions, the same color isn’t scattered in small spots all over the map. However, this scattering would be expected if the tribes related to those families were predominantly nomadic. If nomadic tribes occupied North America, they wouldn’t have spread out from a common center as the colors show; instead, they would be scattered across the entire country. The lack of such dispersion is considered evidence that they were primarily settled. It was noted earlier that some tribes did migrate extensively across the country before European settlers arrived. This is evident from the current map. For example, the large Athapascan family, which occupies most of British America, is known from linguistic evidence to have sent colonies into Oregon (Wilopah, Tlatskanai, Coquille), California (Smith River tribes, Kenesti or Wailakki tribes, Hupa), and Arizona and New Mexico (Apache, Navajo). It’s unclear how long before European contact these migrations occurred, but for most of them, it was likely many years prior. Linguistic evidence shows that the great Siouan family, which we tend to see as mostly western, had branches in Virginia (Tutelo), North and South Carolina (Catawba), and Mississippi (Biloxi); and the Algonquian family, significant in the early history of this country, while occupying a nearly continuous area in the north and east, had also gained a foothold, probably recently, in Wyoming and Colorado. These and similar facts demonstrate the ability of individual tribes or clans to break away from their larger kin groups and move to distant areas. However, linguistic evidence suggests that such instances are exceptions, with the majority of tribes within linguistic families occupying continuous areas, showing that they have been predominantly settled. Additionally, the bond of a common language, while usually considered strong and lasting, is not entirely sufficient to explain this phenomenon. When numbers are small, the linguistic connection likely helps unite tribe members; but as speakers of a common language grow in number and develop conflicting interests, the linguistic bond often becomes inadequate. Among Indian tribes, feuds and internal conflicts were common even among members of the same linguistic family. In fact, it's likely that a significant number of dialects in Indian languages arose from internal strife. Factions that split off from the parent group, through contact, intermarriage, and incorporation with other tribes, developed distinct dialects or languages.
But linguistic evidence alone need not be relied upon to prove that the North American Indian was not nomadic.
But we don’t have to rely solely on language evidence to prove that the North American Indian wasn't nomadic.
Corroborative proof of the sedentary character of our Indian tribes is to be found in the curious form of kinship system, with mother-right as its chief factor, which prevails. This, as has been pointed out in another place, is not adapted to the necessities of nomadic tribes, which need to be governed by a patriarchal system, and, as well, to be possessed of flocks and herds.
Corroborating evidence of the stationary nature of our Indian tribes can be seen in their unique kinship system, with mother-right as its main feature. As mentioned elsewhere, this system doesn't suit the needs of nomadic tribes, which rely on a patriarchal structure and the ownership of livestock.
There is also an abundance of historical evidence to show that, when first discovered by Europeans, the Indians of the eastern United States were found living in fixed habitations. This does not necessarily imply that the entire year was spent in one place. Agriculture not being practiced to an extent sufficient to supply the Indian with full subsistence, he was compelled to make occasional changes from his permanent home to the more or less distant waters and forests to procure supplies of food. When furnished with food and skins for clothing, the hunting parties returned to the village which constituted their true home. At longer periods, for several reasons—among which probably the chief were the hostility of stronger tribes, the failure of the fuel supply near the village, and the compulsion exercised by the ever lively superstitious fancies of the Indians—the villages were abandoned and new ones formed to constitute new homes, new focal points from which to set out on their annual hunts and to which to return when these were completed. The tribes of the eastern United States had fixed and definitely bounded habitats, and their wanderings were in the nature of temporary excursions to 32 established points resorted to from time immemorial. As, however, they had not yet entered completely into the agricultural condition, to which they were fast progressing from the hunter state, they may be said to have been nomadic to a very limited extent. The method of life thus sketched was substantially the one which the Indians were found practicing throughout the eastern part of the United States, as also, though to a less degree, in the Pacific States. Upon the Pacific coast proper the tribes were even more sedentary than upon the Atlantic, as the mild climate and the great abundance and permanent supply of fish and shellfish left no cause for a seasonal change of abode.
There is also a lot of historical evidence showing that when Europeans first discovered them, the Indigenous people of the eastern United States were living in permanent homes. This doesn’t necessarily mean they stayed in one place all year round. Since agriculture wasn’t practiced enough to fully support them, they had to occasionally leave their permanent homes to find food in distant waters and forests. When they had gathered enough food and animal skins for clothing, hunting parties returned to their village, which was their true home. Over longer periods, for various reasons—likely including the hostility of stronger tribes, a lack of fuel near the village, and the influence of their superstitious beliefs—the villages would be abandoned and new ones would be established as new homes and centers for their annual hunts, where they would return after completing them. The tribes in the eastern United States had fixed and clearly defined territories, and their movements were more like temporary excursions to established locations they had been visiting for generations. However, since they hadn’t fully transitioned to an agricultural lifestyle and were still moving away from being solely hunters, they could be considered nomadic to a very limited extent. This way of life described here was generally what the Indigenous people practiced throughout the eastern part of the United States, and, to a lesser extent, in the Pacific States. On the Pacific coast, the tribes were even more settled than those on the Atlantic coast because the mild climate and the plentiful availability of fish and shellfish meant there was no need for seasonal moves.
When, however, the interior portions of the country were first visited by Europeans, a different state of affairs was found to prevail. There the acquisition of the horse and the possession of firearms had wrought very great changes in aboriginal habits. The acquisition of the former enabled the Indian of the treeless plains to travel distances with ease and celerity which before were practically impossible, and the possession of firearms stimulated tribal aggressiveness to the utmost pitch. Firearms were everywhere doubly effective in producing changes in tribal habitats, since the somewhat gradual introduction of trade placed these deadly weapons in the hands of some tribes, and of whole congeries of tribes, long before others could obtain them. Thus the general state of tribal equilibrium which had before prevailed was rudely disturbed. Tribal warfare, which hitherto had been attended with inconsiderable loss of life and slight territorial changes, was now made terribly destructive, and the territorial possessions of whole groups of tribes were augmented at the expense of those less fortunate. The horse made wanderers of many tribes which there is sufficient evidence to show were formerly nearly sedentary. Firearms enforced migration and caused wholesale changes in the habitats of tribes, which, in the natural order of events, it would have taken many centuries to produce. The changes resulting from these combined agencies, great as they were, are, however, slight in comparison with the tremendous effects of the wholesale occupancy of Indian territory by Europeans. As the acquisition of territory by the settlers went on, a wave of migration from east to west was inaugurated which affected tribes far remote from the point of disturbance, ever forcing them within narrower and narrower bounds, and, as time went on, producing greater and greater changes throughout the entire country.
When Europeans first ventured into the interior parts of the country, they discovered a very different situation. The arrival of horses and firearms brought significant changes to the native way of life. With horses, Indigenous people living on treeless plains could travel much greater distances than ever before, and firearms fueled tribal aggressiveness to unprecedented levels. Firearms were especially impactful in altering tribal territories, since their gradual introduction through trade gave some tribes access to these powerful weapons long before others could. This disrupted the previously stable tribal balance. Tribal warfare, which had previously resulted in minimal casualties and minor territorial shifts, became devastatingly destructive, expanding the land held by certain tribes at the expense of others. The horse transformed many tribes into nomadic groups that were likely more sedentary before. Firearms prompted migrations and caused sweeping changes in tribal territories that, under normal circumstances, would have taken centuries to develop. Although the changes resulting from these factors were significant, they were minor compared to the enormous impact of Europeans taking over Indian lands. As settlers continued to acquire territory, a migration wave from east to west began, affecting tribes far from the initial point of disturbance and forcing them into increasingly smaller areas, leading to larger and more profound changes throughout the entire country over time.
So much of the radical change in tribal habitats as took place in the area remote from European settlements, mainly west of the Mississippi, is chiefly unrecorded, save imperfectly in Indian tradition, and is chiefly to be inferred from linguistic evidence and from the few facts in our possession. As, however, the most important of these changes occurred after, and as a result of, European 33 occupancy, they are noted in history, and thus the map really gives a better idea of the pristine or prehistoric habitat of the tribes than at first might be thought possible.
Much of the significant change in tribal living conditions that happened in areas far from European settlements, mainly west of the Mississippi, isn't well documented, except for some bits in Native American traditions, and mostly relies on linguistic evidence and the limited facts we have. However, since the most important changes occurred after and because of European 33 settlement, they are recorded in history, which means the map actually provides a clearer picture of the original or prehistoric living conditions of the tribes than one might initially think.
Before speaking of the method of establishing the boundary lines between the linguistic families, as they appear upon the map, the nature of the Indian claim to land and the manner and extent of its occupation should be clearly set forth.
Before discussing how to establish the boundary lines between linguistic families as shown on the map, we need to clearly outline the nature of the Indian claim to land and the way and extent of its occupation.
POPULATION.
As the question of the Indian population of the country has a direct bearing upon the extent to which the land was actually occupied, a few words on the subject will be introduced here, particularly as the area included in the linguistic map is so covered with color that it may convey a false impression of the density of the Indian population. As a result of an investigation of the subject of the early Indian population, Col. Mallery long ago arrived at the conclusion that their settlements were not numerous, and that the population, as compared with the enormous territory occupied, was extremely small.1
As the question of the Indian population in the country directly affects how much land was actually occupied, it's worth saying a few things about it here, especially since the area shown on the linguistic map is so colorful that it might give a misleading impression of how dense the Indian population really is. After investigating early Indian populations, Col. Mallery concluded long ago that their settlements weren't numerous and that the population, compared to the vast territory they occupied, was very small.1
Careful examination since the publication of the above tends to corroborate the soundness of the conclusions there first formulated. The subject may be set forth as follows:
Careful examination since the publication of the above tends to confirm the validity of the conclusions first presented there. The subject can be stated as follows:
The sea shore, the borders of lakes, and the banks of rivers, where fish and shell-fish were to be obtained in large quantities, were naturally the Indians’ chief resort, and at or near such places were to be found their permanent settlements. As the settlements and lines of travel of the early colonists were along the shore, the lakes and the rivers, early estimates of the Indian population were chiefly based upon the numbers congregated along these highways, it being generally assumed that away from the routes of travel a like population existed. Again, over-estimates of population resulted from the fact that the same body of Indians visited different points during the year, and not infrequently were counted two or three times; change of permanent village sites also tended to augment estimates of population.
The shoreline, the edges of lakes, and the banks of rivers, where fish and shellfish were plentiful, were naturally the main gathering spots for the Indigenous peoples, and their permanent settlements were typically found in those areas. Since the early colonists traveled along the shorelines, lakes, and rivers, initial estimates of the Indigenous population were largely based on the numbers found along these routes, with the assumption that a similar population existed away from these travel paths. Additionally, population overestimates occurred because the same group of Indigenous people would visit various locations throughout the year and were often counted multiple times; changes in permanent village locations also contributed to inflated population estimates.
For these and other reasons a greatly exaggerated idea of the Indian population was obtained, and the impressions so derived have been dissipated only in comparatively recent times.
For these and other reasons, a much inflated view of the Indian population was formed, and those impressions have only been cleared up in relatively recent times.
As will be stated more fully later, the Indian was dependent to no small degree upon natural products for his food supply. Could it be affirmed that the North American Indians had increased to a point where they pressed upon the food supply, it would imply a very much larger population than we are justified in assuming from other considerations. But for various reasons the Malthusian law, 34 whether applicable elsewhere or not, can not be applied to the Indians of this country. Everywhere bountiful nature had provided an unfailing and practically inexhaustible food supply. The rivers teemed with fish and mollusks, and the forests with game, while upon all sides was an abundance of nutritious roots and seeds. All of these sources were known, and to a large extent they were drawn upon by the Indian, but the practical lesson of providing in the season of plenty for the season of scarcity had been but imperfectly learned, or, when learned, was but partially applied. Even when taught by dire experience the necessity of laying up adequate stores, it was the almost universal practice to waste great quantities of food by a constant succession of feasts, in the superstitious observances of which the stores were rapidly wasted and plenty soon gave way to scarcity and even to famine.
As will be explained in more detail later, Indigenous peoples relied significantly on natural resources for their food supply. If it could be said that North American Indigenous populations had grown to a level that strained food resources, it would suggest a much larger population than we can reasonably assume based on other factors. However, for various reasons, the Malthusian theory, 34 whether relevant elsewhere or not, cannot be applied to the Indigenous peoples of this country. Nature, abundant everywhere, provided a reliable and virtually limitless food supply. Rivers were filled with fish and shellfish, forests were rich with game, and there was a plentiful supply of nutritious roots and seeds all around. All these resources were known and largely utilized by Indigenous peoples, but the practical lesson of saving during times of abundance for times of scarcity was only partially learned, or when learned, only partially practiced. Even when faced with harsh lessons about the importance of storing enough food, it became a common practice to waste large amounts by holding a series of feasts, during which these resources were quickly depleted, leading to a transition from abundance to scarcity and even famine.
Curiously enough, the hospitality which is so marked a trait among our North American Indians had its source in a law, the invariable practice of which has had a marked effect in retarding the acquisition by the Indian of the virtue of providence. As is well known, the basis of the Indian social organization was the kinship system. By its provisions almost all property was possessed in common by the gens or clan. Food, the most important of all, was by no means left to be exclusively enjoyed by the individual or the family obtaining it.
Curiously, the hospitality that stands out among our North American Indians originated from a law, the consistent application of which has significantly affected the development of the Indian's sense of foresight. As is widely recognized, the foundation of the Indian social structure was the kinship system. According to this system, nearly all property was held in common by the gens or clan. Food, the most crucial resource, was definitely not meant to be enjoyed solely by the individual or the family that acquired it.
For instance, the distribution of game among the families of a party was variously provided for in different tribes, but the practical effect of the several customs relating thereto was the sharing of the supply. The hungry Indian had but to ask to receive and this no matter how small the supply, or how dark the future prospect. It was not only his privilege to ask, it was his right to demand. Undoubtedly what was originally a right, conferred by kinship connections, ultimately assumed broader proportions, and finally passed into the exercise of an almost indiscriminate hospitality. By reason of this custom, the poor hunter was virtually placed upon equality with the expert one, the lazy with the industrious, the improvident with the more provident. Stories of Indian life abound with instances of individual families or parties being called upon by those less fortunate or provident to share their supplies.
For example, the way game was shared among families at a gathering varied across different tribes, but the overall outcome of these customs was that everyone shared what they had. A hungry person only had to ask to receive help, regardless of how little food there was or how bleak the situation looked. It was not just his privilege to ask; it was his right to demand assistance. What started as a right based on family connections eventually grew into a broader practice of open hospitality. Because of this tradition, an inexperienced hunter was essentially on the same level as a skilled one, the lazy were matched with the hardworking, and the careless had the same opportunities as those who planned ahead. Stories about Indian life are filled with examples of families or groups being approached by those who were less fortunate or prepared, asking them to share their food.
The effect of such a system, admirable as it was in many particulars, practically placed a premium upon idleness. Under such communal rights and privileges a potent spur to industry and thrift is wanting.
The effect of such a system, impressive as it was in many ways, practically rewarded laziness. Under these communal rights and privileges, there’s a strong lack of motivation for hard work and saving.
There is an obverse side to this problem, which a long and intimate acquaintance with the Indians in their villages has forced upon the writer. The communal ownership of food and the great hospitality practiced by the Indian have had a very much greater influence upon his character than that indicated in the foregoing 35 remarks. The peculiar institutions prevailing in this respect gave to each tribe or clan a profound interest in the skill, ability and industry of each member. He was the most valuable person in the community who supplied it with the most of its necessities. For this reason the successful hunter or fisherman was always held in high honor, and the woman, who gathered great store of seeds, fruits, or roots, or who cultivated a good corn-field, was one who commanded the respect and received the highest approbation of the people. The simple and rude ethics of a tribal people are very important to them, the more so because of their communal institutions; and everywhere throughout the tribes of the United States it is discovered that their rules of conduct were deeply implanted in the minds of the people. An organized system of teaching is always found, as it is the duty of certain officers of the clan to instruct the young in all the industries necessary to their rude life, and simple maxims of industry abound among the tribes and are enforced in diverse and interesting ways. The power of the elder men in the clan over its young members is always very great, and the training of the youth is constant and rigid. Besides this, a moral sentiment exists in favor of primitive virtues which is very effective in molding character. This may be illustrated in two ways.
There’s another side to this issue that long-term and close interactions with the Indians in their villages have made clear to the writer. The communal sharing of food and the immense hospitality shown by the Indians have had a much bigger impact on their character than what was mentioned earlier. The unique customs surrounding this matter gave each tribe or clan a significant stake in the skills, talents, and hard work of every individual. The most valuable person in the community was the one who provided the most necessities. Because of this, successful hunters or fishermen were always highly respected, and women who collected large amounts of seeds, fruits, or roots, or who tended a flourishing cornfield, earned the respect and highest praise from the people. The straightforward and basic ethics of tribal people are crucial to them, especially due to their communal systems; and throughout the tribes of the United States, it’s clear that their rules of behavior were deeply ingrained in the community’s mindset. There is always an organized system for teaching, as certain leaders of the clan are responsible for teaching the young all the skills required for their simple way of life, and straightforward rules of work are prevalent among the tribes, enforced in various and interesting ways. The influence of elder men in the clan over younger members is always significant, and the training of the youth is continuous and strict. Additionally, there’s a moral belief in favor of primitive virtues that effectively shapes character. This can be illustrated in two ways. 35
Marriage among all Indian tribes is primarily by legal appointment, as the young woman receives a husband from some other prescribed clan or clans, and the elders of the clan, with certain exceptions, control these marriages, and personal choice has little to do with the affair. When marriages are proposed, the virtues and industry of the candidates, and more than all, their ability to properly live as married couples and to supply the clan or tribe with a due amount of subsistence, are discussed long and earnestly, and the young man or maiden who fails in this respect may fail in securing an eligible and desirable match. And these motives are constantly presented to the savage youth.
Marriage among all Indian tribes is mainly done through legal arrangements, where a young woman is given a husband from another designated clan or clans. The clan elders predominantly oversee these marriages, with a few exceptions, and personal choice plays a minimal role in the process. When marriages are suggested, the candidates' virtues and work ethic, and especially their ability to function well as married couples and provide the clan or tribe with enough resources, are discussed thoroughly. A young man or woman who doesn’t measure up in these areas might struggle to find a suitable match. These considerations are continuously emphasized to the young people in the community.
A simple democracy exists among these people, and they have a variety of tribal offices to fill. In this way the men of the tribe are graded, and they pass from grade to grade by a selection practically made by the people. And this leads to a constant discussion of the virtues and abilities of all the male members of the clan, from boyhood to old age. He is most successful in obtaining clan and tribal promotion who is most useful to the clan and the tribe. In this manner all of the ambitious are stimulated, and this incentive to industry is very great.
A straightforward democracy exists among these people, and they have various tribal positions to fill. This way, the men of the tribe are ranked and move up from one level to another based on choices made by the community. This leads to ongoing discussions about the skills and qualities of all the male members of the clan, from childhood to old age. The individual who is most successful in gaining advancement within the clan and tribe is the one who is most beneficial to them. In this way, everyone with ambition is motivated, and this drive for hard work is very strong.
When brought into close contact with the Indian, and into intimate acquaintance with his language, customs, and religious ideas, there is a curious tendency observable in students to overlook aboriginal vices and to exaggerate aboriginal virtues. It seems to 36 be forgotten that after all the Indian is a savage, with the characteristics of a savage, and he is exalted even above the civilized man. The tendency is exactly the reverse of what it is in the case of those who view the Indian at a distance and with no precise knowledge of any of his characteristics. In the estimation of such persons the Indian’s vices greatly outweigh his virtues; his language is a gibberish, his methods of war cowardly, his ideas of religion utterly puerile.
When students get closer to the Indian and become familiar with his language, customs, and religious beliefs, they often have a strange tendency to ignore the negative aspects of his culture and to overly praise the positive ones. It seems to be forgotten that, ultimately, the Indian is a savage, with the traits of a savage, and he is often placed even above the civilized person. This tendency is the opposite of how those who view the Indian from afar act, without a clear understanding of his characteristics. For these observers, the Indian's faults far outweigh his strengths; they see his language as nonsense, his methods of war as cowardly, and his religious beliefs as completely childish.
The above tendencies are accentuated in the attempt to estimate the comparative worth and position of individual tribes. No being is more patriotic than the Indian. He believes himself to be the result of a special creation by a partial deity and holds that his is the one favored race. The name by which the tribes distinguish themselves from other tribes indicates the further conviction that, as the Indian is above all created things, so in like manner each particular tribe is exalted above all others. “Men of men” is the literal translation of one name; “the only men” of another, and so on through the whole category. A long residence with any one tribe frequently inoculates the student with the same patriotic spirit. Bringing to his study of a particular tribe an inadequate conception of Indian attainments and a low impression of their moral and intellectual plane, the constant recital of its virtues, the bravery and prowess of its men in war, their generosity, the chaste conduct and obedience of its women as contrasted with the opposite qualities of all other tribes, speedily tends to partisanship. He discovers many virtues and finds that the moral and intellectual attainments are higher than he supposed; but these advantages he imagines to be possessed solely, or at least to an unusual degree, by the tribe in question. Other tribes are assigned much lower rank in the scale.
The tendencies mentioned above become even more pronounced when trying to gauge the relative value and status of individual tribes. No one is more patriotic than the Indian. He believes he is the result of a special creation by a biased deity and thinks his race is the favored one. The names that tribes use to identify themselves show their belief that, just as the Indian is superior to all created beings, each specific tribe is also above all others. One name literally translates to “Men of men,” while another means “the only men,” and so on throughout the entire list. Spending a long time with any one tribe often infects the student with the same patriotic feelings. Approaching his study of a specific tribe with a limited understanding of Indian achievements and a low opinion of their moral and intellectual levels, the frequent emphasis on its virtues, the bravery and skill of its warriors, their generosity, and the virtuous behavior and obedience of its women—especially when compared to the opposite traits of other tribes—quickly leads to bias. He discovers many virtues and realizes that their moral and intellectual achievements are higher than he thought; however, he comes to believe that these qualities are exclusive to—or at least unusually prominent in—this particular tribe. Other tribes are given a much lower status in comparison.
The above is peculiarly true of the student of language. He who studies only one Indian language and learns its manifold curious grammatic devices, its wealth of words, its capacity of expression, is speedily convinced of its superiority to all other Indian tongues, and not infrequently to all languages by whomsoever spoken.
The above is especially true for language students. Those who study just one Indian language and explore its various unique grammar features, its extensive vocabulary, and its expressive potential quickly become convinced of its superiority over all other Indian languages, and often even over all languages spoken anywhere.
If like admirable characteristics are asserted for other tongues he is apt to view them but as derivatives from one original. Thus he is led to overlook the great truth that the mind of man is everywhere practically the same, and that the innumerable differences of its products are indices merely of different stages of growth or are the results of different conditions of environment. In its development the human mind is limited by no boundaries of tribe or race.
If similar admirable qualities are claimed for other languages, he's likely to see them as just variations of one original language. In doing so, he tends to miss the important fact that the human mind is fundamentally the same everywhere, and that the countless differences in its expressions merely reflect different stages of development or the impacts of varying environments. The evolution of the human mind knows no limits based on tribe or race.
Again, a long acquaintance with many tribes in their homes leads to the belief that savage people do not lack industry so much as wisdom. They are capable of performing, and often do perform, great and continuous labor. The men and women alike toil from day to day and from year to year, engaged in those tasks that are 37 presented with the recurring seasons. In civilization, hunting and fishing are often considered sports, but in savagery they are labors, and call for endurance, patience, and sagacity. And these are exercised to a reasonable degree among all savage peoples.
Once again, a long relationship with various tribes in their environments leads to the belief that primitive people are more lacking in wisdom than in hard work. They can and often do engage in significant and ongoing labor. Both men and women work tirelessly from day to day and year to year, involved in the tasks that come with the changing seasons. In civilized society, hunting and fishing are often seen as leisure activities, but in the wild, they are jobs that require endurance, patience, and skill. And all primitive peoples exhibit these qualities to a reasonable extent. 37
It is probable that the real difficulty of purchasing quantities of food from Indians has, in most cases, not been properly understood. Unless the alien is present at a time of great abundance, when there is more on hand or easily obtainable than sufficient to supply the wants of the people, food can not be bought of the Indians. This arises from the fact that the tribal tenure is communal, and to get food by purchase requires a treaty at which all the leading members of the tribe are present and give consent.
It’s likely that the true challenge of buying large amounts of food from Native Americans hasn't been fully grasped. If outsiders aren’t around during a time of plenty, when there’s more food available than what the community needs, they can’t buy food from the tribes. This is because the ownership of resources is communal, and purchasing food requires an agreement that involves all the key members of the tribe being present and granting approval.
As an illustration of the improvidence of the Indians generally, the habits of the tribes along the Columbia River may be cited. The Columbia River has often been pointed to as the probable source of a great part of the Indian population of this country, because of the enormous supply of salmon furnished by it and its tributaries. If an abundant and readily obtained supply of food was all that was necessary to insure a large population, and if population always increased up to the limit of food supply, unquestionably the theory of repeated migratory waves of surplus population from the Columbia Valley would be plausible enough. It is only necessary, however, to turn to the accounts of the earlier explorers of this region, Lewis and Clarke, for example, to refute the idea, so far at least as the Columbia Valley is concerned, although a study of the many diverse languages spread over the United States would seem sufficiently to prove that the tribes speaking them could not have originated at a common center, unless, indeed, at a period anterior to the formation of organized language.
As an example of the lack of foresight among Native Americans in general, we can look at the habits of the tribes along the Columbia River. The Columbia River has often been seen as a major source of the Native American population in this country, due to the huge supply of salmon it and its tributaries provide. If having a plentiful and easily accessible food supply was all that was needed to ensure a large population, and if populations always grew to match food availability, then the theory of recurring waves of surplus population migrating from the Columbia Valley would seem pretty reasonable. However, we only need to refer to the accounts of early explorers in the area, like Lewis and Clarke, to challenge this idea, at least regarding the Columbia Valley. Also, a study of the many different languages spoken across the United States seems to show that the tribes speaking them could not have originated from a single center, unless, of course, it was before organized language developed.
The Indians inhabiting the Columbia Valley were divided into many tribes, belonging to several distinct linguistic families. They all were in the same culture status, however, and differed in habits and arts only in minor particulars. All of them had recourse to the salmon of the Columbia for the main part of their subsistence, and all practiced similar crude methods of curing fish and storing it away for the winter. Without exception, judging from the accounts of the above mentioned and of more recent authors, all the tribes suffered periodically more or less from insufficient food supply, although, with the exercise of due forethought and economy, even with their rude methods of catching and curing salmon, enough might here have been cured annually to suffice for the wants of the Indian population of the entire Northwest for several years.
The Indigenous people living in the Columbia Valley were made up of various tribes that belonged to several different language families. They all shared the same cultural status, though they had slight differences in their habits and skills. They relied heavily on the salmon from the Columbia River for most of their food and used similar basic methods to preserve fish and store it for the winter. According to both the previous and more recent sources, all the tribes faced periodic issues with food shortages, but with careful planning and resourcefulness, even with their basic techniques for catching and preserving salmon, they could have produced enough annually to meet the needs of the entire Indigenous population in the Northwest for several years.
In their ascent of the river in spring, before the salmon run, it was only with great difficulty that Lewis and Clarke were able to provide themselves by purchase with enough food to keep themselves from starving. Several parties of Indians from the vicinity of the 38 Dalles, the best fishing station on the river, were met on their way down in quest of food, their supply of dried salmon having been entirely exhausted.
In their journey up the river in spring, before the salmon migration, Lewis and Clark found it really hard to buy enough food to avoid starving. They encountered several groups of Native Americans from around the 38 Dalles, the best fishing spot on the river, who were heading down in search of food, as their stock of dried salmon had completely run out.
Nor is there anything in the accounts of any of the early visitors to the Columbia Valley to authorize the belief that the population there was a very large one. As was the case with all fish-stocked streams, the Columbia was resorted to in the fishing season by many tribes living at considerable distance from it; but there is no evidence tending to show that the settled population of its banks or of any part of its drainage basin was or ever had been by any means excessive.
Nor is there anything in the accounts of any of the early visitors to the Columbia Valley to support the belief that the population there was very large. Like all fish-stocked streams, the Columbia attracted many tribes from considerable distances during fishing season; however, there is no evidence to suggest that the settled population along its banks or in any part of its drainage basin was ever excessive.
The Dalles, as stated above, was the best fishing station on the river, and the settled population there may be taken as a fair index of that of other favorable locations. The Dalles was visited by Ross in July, 1811, and the following is his statement in regard to the population:
The Dalles, as mentioned earlier, was the best fishing spot on the river, and the settled population there can be seen as a good representation of other prime locations. Ross visited The Dalles in July 1811, and here’s what he said about the population:
The main camp of the Native Americans is located at the top of the narrows and can hold over 3,000 people during the salmon season. However, the permanent residents here are no more than 100 individuals, known as Wy-am-pams. The rest are outsiders from various tribes across the country who come here not primarily to catch salmon, but mainly for gambling and speculation.__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
And as it was on the Columbia with its enormous supply of fish, so was it elsewhere in the United States.
And just like it was on the Columbia with its huge supply of fish, it was the same in other parts of the United States.
Even the practice of agriculture, with its result of providing a more certain and bountiful food supply, seems not to have had the effect of materially augmenting the Indian population. At all events, it is in California and Oregon, a region where agriculture was scarcely practiced at all, that the most dense aboriginal population lived. There is no reason to believe that there ever existed within the limits of the region included in the map, with the possible exception of certain areas in California, a population equal to the natural food supply. On the contrary, there is every reason for believing that the population at the time of the discovery might have been many times more than what it actually was had a wise economy been practised.
Even the practice of farming, which resulted in a more reliable and abundant food supply, doesn't seem to have significantly increased the Native American population. In any case, it was in California and Oregon, areas where agriculture was barely practiced, that the largest Native populations lived. There’s no reason to think that there was ever a population within the boundaries of the area shown on the map, except for some parts of California, that matched the natural food supply. On the contrary, there's every reason to believe that the population at the time of discovery could have been many times larger than it actually was if wise resource management had been applied.
The effect of wars in decimating the people has often been greatly exaggerated. Since the advent of the white man on the continent, wars have prevailed to a degree far beyond that existing at an earlier time. From the contest which necessarily arose between the native tribes and invading nations many wars resulted, and their history is well known. Again, tribes driven from their ancestral homes often retreated to lands previously occupied by other tribes, and intertribal wars resulted therefrom. The acquisition of firearms and horses, through the agency of white men, also had its influence, and when a commercial value was given to furs and skins, the Indian abandoned 39 agriculture to pursue hunting and traffic, and sought new fields for such enterprises, and many new contests arose from this cause. Altogether the character of the Indian since the discovery of Columbus has been greatly changed, and he has become far more warlike and predatory. Prior to that time, and far away in the wilderness beyond such influence since that time, Indian tribes seem to have lived together in comparative peace and to have settled their difficulties by treaty methods. A few of the tribes had distinct organizations for purposes of war; all recognized it to a greater or less extent in their tribal organization; but from such study as has been given the subject, and from the many facts collected from time to time relating to the intercourse existing between tribes, it appears that the Indians lived in comparative peace. Their accumulations were not so great as to be tempting, and their modes of warfare were not excessively destructive. Armed with clubs and spears and bows and arrows, war could be prosecuted only by hand-to-hand conflict, and depended largely upon individual prowess, while battle for plunder, tribute, and conquest was almost unknown. Such intertribal wars as occurred originated from other causes, such as infraction of rights relating to hunting grounds and fisheries, and still oftener prejudices growing out of their superstitions.
The impact of wars on reducing the population has often been overstated. Since the arrival of European settlers on the continent, wars have been more frequent than in earlier times. Conflicts inevitably arose between the native tribes and invading nations, resulting in many known wars. Additionally, tribes pushed from their ancestral lands often retreated to areas previously occupied by other tribes, leading to intertribal conflicts. The introduction of firearms and horses, brought by Europeans, also played a role. As fur and skin trading gained commercial value, Native Americans shifted from agriculture to hunting and trading, seeking new opportunities, which led to even more conflicts. Overall, the character of Native Americans has significantly changed since Columbus's discovery; they have become much more warlike and aggressive. Before that time, far removed from such influences, Indian tribes seemed to live together in relative peace and resolved their issues through treaties. Some tribes had organized groups specifically for warfare; all recognized it to varying degrees within their tribal structure. However, based on the studies and various accounts gathered over time regarding interactions between tribes, it appears that they mostly lived in harmony. Their resources weren't substantial enough to attract greed, and their style of warfare wasn't excessively destructive. Armed with clubs, spears, and bows and arrows, battles could only be fought in close combat, relying heavily on individual skill, with fighting for spoils, tribute, and conquest being almost unheard of. The intertribal wars that did happen mostly stemmed from other issues, such as violations of hunting grounds and fishing rights, and often the result of superstitious beliefs. 39
That which kept the Indian population down sprang from another source, which has sometimes been neglected. The Indians had no reasonable or efficacious system of medicine. They believed that diseases were caused by unseen evil beings and by witchcraft, and every cough, every toothache, every headache, every chill, every fever, every boil, and every wound, in fact, all their ailments, were attributed to such cause. Their so-called medicine practice was a horrible system of sorcery, and to such superstition human life was sacrificed on an enormous scale. The sufferers were given over to priest doctors to be tormented, bedeviled, and destroyed; and a universal and profound belief in witchcraft made them suspicious, and led to the killing of all suspected and obnoxious people, and engendered blood feuds on a gigantic scale. It may be safely said that while famine, pestilence, disease, and war may have killed many, superstition killed more; in fact, a natural death in a savage tent is a comparatively rare phenomenon; but death by sorcery, medicine, and blood feud arising from a belief in witchcraft is exceedingly common.
What kept the Indian population down came from another source that has often been overlooked. The Indians lacked a reasonable or effective system of medicine. They believed that diseases were caused by unseen evil beings and witchcraft, attributing every cough, toothache, headache, chill, fever, boil, and wound to such causes. Their so-called medical practices were a terrible system of sorcery, and human life was sacrificed on a massive scale due to this superstition. Sufferers were handed over to priest-doctors who tormented, harassed, and ultimately harmed them; a widespread and deep belief in witchcraft made them suspicious, leading to the killing of anyone deemed suspect or troublesome, resulting in massive blood feuds. It's safe to say that while famine, disease, and war may have killed many, superstition killed even more; in fact, a natural death in a primitive tent is quite rare, but deaths caused by sorcery, misguided medicine, and blood feuds from beliefs in witchcraft are very common.
Scanty as was the population compared with the vast area teeming with natural products capable of supporting human life, it may be safely said that at the time of the discovery, and long prior thereto, practically the whole of the area included in the present map was claimed and to some extent occupied by Indian tribes; but the possession of land by the Indian by no means implies occupancy in the modern or civilized sense of the term. In the latter sense occupation means to a great extent individual control and 40 ownership. Very different was it with the Indians. Individual ownership of land was, as a rule, a thing entirely foreign to the Indian mind, and quite unknown in the culture stage to which he belonged. All land, of whatever character or however utilized, was held in common by the tribe, or in a few instances by the clan. Apparently an exception to this broad statement is to be made in the case of the Haida of the northwest coast, who have been studied by Dawson. According to him3 the land is divided among the different families and is held as strictly personal property, with hereditary rights or possessions descending from one generation to another. “The lands may be bartered or given away. The larger salmon streams are, however, often the property jointly of a number of families.” The tendency in this case is toward personal right in land.
Even though the population was small compared to the vast area filled with natural resources that could support human life, it's fair to say that at the time of the discovery, and long before that, almost the entire area shown on the current map was claimed and somewhat occupied by Indian tribes. However, the way the Indians claimed land doesn’t reflect how we think of occupancy in modern society. Nowadays, occupancy often means individual control and ownership. But for the Indians, individual ownership of land was generally a foreign concept and was completely unknown in their cultural stage. All land, regardless of its type or usage, was commonly held by the tribe or, in some cases, by the clan. An exception to this general rule seems to be the Haida of the northwest coast, studied by Dawson. According to him, the land is divided among different families and is considered strictly personal property, with hereditary rights or possessions passed down from one generation to the next. “The lands may be bartered or given away. The larger salmon streams are, however, often the property jointly of a number of families.” In this case, the trend leans towards personal rights to land. 40
TRIBAL LAND.
For convenience of discussion, Indian tribal land may be divided into three classes: First, the land occupied by the villages; second, the land actually employed in agriculture; third, the land claimed by the tribe but not occupied, except as a hunting ground.
For ease of discussion, Indian tribal land can be divided into three categories: first, the land used by the villages; second, the land actively used for farming; third, the land claimed by the tribe but not currently occupied, except for use as a hunting ground.
Village sites.—The amount of land taken up as village sites varied considerably in different parts of the country. It varied also in the same tribe at different times. As a rule, the North American Indians lived in communal houses of sufficient size to accommodate several families. In such cases the village consisted of a few large structures closely grouped together, so that it covered very little ground. When territory was occupied by warlike tribes, the construction of rude palisades around the villages and the necessities of defense generally tended to compel the grouping of houses, and the permanent village sites of even the more populous tribes covered only a very small area. In the case of confederated tribes and in the time of peace the tendency was for one or more families to establish more or less permanent settlements away from the main village, where a livelihood was more readily obtainable. Hence, in territory which had enjoyed a considerable interval of peace the settlements were in the nature of small agricultural communities, established at short distances from each other and extending in the aggregate over a considerable extent of country. In the case of populous tribes the villages were probably of the character of the Choctaw towns described by Adair.4 “The barrier towns, which are next to the Muskohge and Chikkasah countries, are compactly settled for social defense, according to the general method of other savage nations; but the rest, both in the center and toward the Mississippi, are only scattered plantations, as best suits a separate easy 41 way of living. A stranger might be in the middle of one of their populous, extensive towns without seeing half a dozen houses in the direct course of his path.” More closely grouped settlements are described by Wayne in American State Papers, 1793, in his account of an expedition down the Maumee Valley, where he states that “The margins of the Miamis of the Lake and the Au Glaize appear like one continuous village for a number of miles, nor have I ever beheld such immense fields of corn in any part of America from Canada to Florida.” Such a chain of villages as this was probably highly exceptional; but even under such circumstances the village sites proper formed but a very small part of the total area occupied.
Village sites.—The amount of land used for village sites varied greatly across different regions of the country. It also changed within the same tribe at different times. Generally, North American Indians lived in communal houses big enough for several families. In these cases, the village consisted of a few large buildings closely grouped together, covering very little land. When territories were taken by warlike tribes, the need for defense led to the construction of rough palisades around the villages, which made the houses group together even more tightly. As a result, the permanent village sites of even the larger tribes occupied only a small area. For confederated tribes and during peaceful times, one or more families often set up more or less permanent settlements away from the main village, where it was easier to make a living. Therefore, in areas that had enjoyed a long period of peace, the settlements resembled small agricultural communities, spread out at short distances from one another and covering a large area collectively. In more populous tribes, the villages were likely similar to the Choctaw towns described by Adair. 4 “The barrier towns, which are next to the Muskohge and Chikkasah countries, are compactly settled for social defense, following the general method of other primitive nations; but the rest, both in the center and toward the Mississippi, are just scattered plantations, arranged to suit an independent, easy way of living. A newcomer could find himself in the middle of one of their large, sprawling towns without seeing more than a handful of houses directly in front of him.” More closely grouped settlements are described by Wayne in American State Papers, 1793, during his expedition down the Maumee Valley, where he mentions that “The edges of the Miamis of the Lake and the Au Glaize look like one continuous village for several miles, and I have never seen such vast fields of corn anywhere in America from Canada to Florida.” This chain of villages was probably quite exceptional; however, even in those cases, the actual village sites made up only a very small portion of the total area used.
From the foregoing considerations it will be seen that the amount of land occupied as village sites under any circumstances was inconsiderable.
From the points mentioned earlier, it's clear that the amount of land used for village sites, under any circumstances, was minimal.
Agricultural land.—It is practically impossible to make an accurate estimate of the relative amount of land devoted to agricultural purposes by any one tribe or by any family of tribes. None of the factors which enter into the problem are known to us with sufficient accuracy to enable reliable estimates to be made of the amount of land tilled or of the products derived from the tillage; and only in few cases have we trustworthy estimates of the population of the tribe or tribes practicing agriculture. Only a rough approximation of the truth can be reached from the scanty data available and from a general knowledge of Indian methods of subsistence.
Agricultural land.—It is nearly impossible to accurately estimate how much land is used for farming by any single tribe or any group of tribes. None of the factors involved in this issue are known with enough precision to provide reliable estimates of the land being farmed or the products produced from that farming; and we only have trustworthy estimates of the population of the tribe or tribes engaging in agriculture in a few cases. Only a rough approximation of the truth can be reached based on the limited data available and a general understanding of Native American ways of sustaining themselves.
The practice of agriculture was chiefly limited to the region south of the St. Lawrence and east of the Mississippi. In this region it was far more general and its results were far more important than is commonly supposed. To the west of the Mississippi only comparatively small areas were occupied by agricultural tribes and these lay chiefly in New Mexico and Arizona and along the Arkansas, Platte, and Missouri Rivers. The rest of that region was tenanted by non-agricultural tribes—unless indeed the slight attention paid to the cultivation of tobacco by a few of the west coast tribes, notably the Haida, may be considered agriculture. Within the first mentioned area most of the tribes, perhaps all, practiced agriculture to a greater or less extent, though unquestionably the degree of reliance placed upon it as a means of support differed much with different tribes and localities.
The practice of farming was mainly found in the area south of the St. Lawrence and east of the Mississippi. In this region, it was much more widespread and its impact was far greater than people usually think. To the west of the Mississippi, only a few small areas were occupied by farming tribes, primarily in New Mexico and Arizona and along the Arkansas, Platte, and Missouri Rivers. Most of that region was inhabited by tribes that didn't farm—unless you count the minimal agriculture practiced by some of the west coast tribes, like the Haida, who grew a little tobacco. In the previously mentioned area, most tribes, if not all, practiced some form of agriculture, although the extent to which they relied on it for their livelihoods varied significantly between different tribes and locations.
Among many tribes agriculture was relied upon to supply an important—and perhaps in the case of a few tribes, the most important—part of the food supply. The accounts of some of the early explorers in the southern United States, where probably agriculture was more systematized than elsewhere, mention corn fields of great extent, and later knowledge of some northern tribes, as the Iroquois and some of the Ohio Valley tribes, shows that they also raised corn in great quantities. 42 The practice of agriculture to a point where it shall prove the main and constant supply of a people, however, implies a degree of sedentariness to which our Indians as a rule had not attained and an amount of steady labor without immediate return which was peculiarly irksome to them. Moreover, the imperfect methods pursued in clearing, planting, and cultivating sufficiently prove that the Indians, though agriculturists, were in the early stages of development as such—a fact also attested by the imperfect and one-sided division of labor between the sexes, the men as a rule taking but small share of the burdensome tasks of clearing land, planting, and harvesting.
Among many tribes, agriculture was essential for providing a significant—and in some cases, the most important—part of their food supply. Early explorers in the southern United States, where agriculture was likely more organized than elsewhere, reported vast cornfields. Later knowledge about some northern tribes, like the Iroquois and tribes from the Ohio Valley, shows that they also cultivated large amounts of corn. 42 However, the extent to which agriculture became the main and consistent food source for a community indicates a level of permanence that most Native Americans generally had not achieved. It also required a considerable amount of steady work without immediate rewards, which was particularly burdensome for them. Additionally, the inadequate methods used in clearing, planting, and cultivating reveal that while the Native Americans were agricultural, they were still in the early stages of development as farmers. This is further demonstrated by the unequal and limited division of labor between genders, with men usually taking on only a small part of the demanding tasks of clearing land, planting, and harvesting.
It is certain that by no tribe of the United States was agriculture pursued to such an extent as to free its members from the practice of the hunter’s or fisher’s art. Admitting the most that can be claimed for the Indian as an agriculturist, it may be stated that, whether because of the small population or because of the crude manner in which his operations were carried on, the amount of land devoted to agriculture within the area in question was infinitesimally small as compared with the total. Upon a map colored to show only the village sites and agricultural land, the colors would appear in small spots, while by far the greater part of the map would remain uncolored.
It’s clear that no tribe in the United States practiced agriculture enough to free its members from hunting or fishing. Even if we acknowledge the best of what can be said about Indigenous people as farmers, we must recognize that, whether due to a small population or the basic methods they used, the amount of land used for agriculture in that area was extremely minimal compared to the total land available. On a map highlighting only village sites and farmland, those areas would show up as tiny patches, while the majority of the map would remain blank.
Hunting claims.—The great body of the land within the area mapped which was occupied by agricultural tribes, and all the land outside it, was held as a common hunting ground, and the tribal claim to territory, independent of village sites and corn fields, amounted practically to little else than hunting claims. The community of possession in the tribe to the hunting ground was established and practically enforced by hunting laws, which dealt with the divisions of game among the village, or among the families of the hunters actually taking part in any particular hunt. As a rule, such natural landmarks as rivers, lakes, hills, and mountain chains served to mark with sufficient accuracy the territorial tribal limits. In California, and among the Haida and perhaps other tribes of the northwest coast, the value of certain hunting and fishing claims led to their definition by artificial boundaries, as by sticks or stones.5
Hunting claims.—The large area of land shown on the map that was occupied by farming tribes, along with all the land surrounding it, was regarded as a shared hunting ground. The tribal claim to territory, aside from village sites and cornfields, mainly consisted of hunting claims. The community ownership of the hunting ground within the tribe was established and actively enforced by hunting regulations, which managed how game was shared among the village or among the families of the hunters involved in any specific hunt. Typically, natural features like rivers, lakes, hills, and mountain ranges were used to clearly define the tribal boundaries. In California and among the Haida and possibly other tribes along the northwest coast, the significance of certain hunting and fishing claims led to the creation of artificial boundaries, such as markers made from sticks or stones.5
Such precautions imply a large population, and in such regions as California the killing of game upon the land of adjoining tribes was rigidly prohibited and sternly punished.
Such precautions suggest a large population, and in areas like California, hunting game on the land of neighboring tribes was strictly forbidden and harshly punished.
As stated above, every part of the vast area included in the present map is to be regarded as belonging, according to Indian ideas of land title, to one or another of the Indian tribes. To determine the several tribal possessions and to indicate the proper boundary lines between individual tribes and linguistic families is a work of great 43 difficulty. This is due more to the imperfection and scantiness of available data concerning tribal claims than to the absence of claimants or to any ambiguity in the minds of the Indians as to the boundaries of their several possessions.
As mentioned earlier, every part of the vast area shown on this map is considered, according to Indigenous concepts of land ownership, to belong to one or another of the Indian tribes. Figuring out the specific tribal lands and marking the appropriate boundary lines between different tribes and language groups is a challenging task. This is mainly because of the limited and incomplete data on tribal claims, rather than a lack of claimants or any confusion among the Indigenous people about the boundaries of their respective lands. 43
Not only is precise data wanting respecting the limits of land actually held or claimed by many tribes, but there are other tribes, which disappeared early in the history of our country, the boundaries to whose habitat is to be determined only in the most general way. Concerning some of these, our information is so vague that the very linguistic family they belonged to is in doubt. In the case of probably no one family are the data sufficient in amount and accuracy to determine positively the exact areas definitely claimed or actually held by the tribes. Even in respect of the territory of many of the tribes of the eastern United States, much of whose land was ceded by actual treaty with the Government, doubt exists. The fixation of the boundary points, when these are specifically mentioned in the treaty, as was the rule, is often extremely difficult, owing to the frequent changes of geographic names and the consequent disagreement of present with ancient maps. Moreover, when the Indian’s claim to his land had been admitted by Government, and the latter sought to acquire a title through voluntary cession by actual purchase, land assumed a value to the Indian never attaching to it before.
Not only is there a lack of accurate data regarding the land limits actually held or claimed by many tribes, but there are also other tribes that disappeared early in our country's history, and the boundaries of their habitats can only be determined in very general terms. For some of these tribes, our information is so limited that even the linguistic family they belonged to is uncertain. In probably no single family are the data sufficient in number and accuracy to definitively determine the exact areas claimed or actually held by the tribes. Even regarding the territories of many tribes in the eastern United States, much of whose land was ceded through actual treaties with the Government, there is still doubt. Fixing the boundary points, when specifically mentioned in the treaty—as was usually the case—can be extremely difficult due to the frequent changes in geographic names and the resulting discrepancies between current and historical maps. Furthermore, when the Indian’s claim to his land was recognized by the Government, and the latter sought to acquire a title through voluntary cession by actual purchase, land suddenly gained a value for the Indian that it never had before.
Under these circumstances, either under plea of immemorial occupancy or of possession by right of conquest, the land was often claimed, and the claims urged with more or less plausibility by several tribes, sometimes of the same linguistic family, sometimes of different families.
Under these circumstances, whether under the claim of long-term occupation or possession by right of conquest, the land was often claimed, and these claims were presented with varying degrees of credibility by different tribes, sometimes from the same language family and sometimes from different ones.
It was often found by the Government to be utterly impracticable to decide between conflicting claims, and not infrequently the only way out of the difficulty lay in admitting the claim of both parties, and in paying for the land twice or thrice. It was customary for a number of different tribes to take part in such treaties, and not infrequently several linguistic families were represented. It was the rule for each tribe, through its representatives, to cede its share of a certain territory, the natural boundaries of which as a whole are usually recorded with sufficient accuracy. The main purpose of the Government in treaty-making being to obtain possession of the land, comparatively little attention was bestowed to defining the exact areas occupied by the several tribes taking part in a treaty, except in so far as the matter was pressed upon attention by disputing claimants. Hence the territory claimed by each tribe taking part in the treaty is rarely described, and occasionally not all the tribes interested in the proposed cession are even mentioned categorically. The latter statement applies more particularly to the territory west of the Mississippi, the data for determining ownership 44 to which is much less precise, and the doubt and confusion respecting tribal boundary lines correspondingly greater than in the country east of that river. Under the above circumstances, it will be readily understood that to determine tribal boundaries within accurately drawn lines is in the vast majority of cases quite impossible.
It was often found by the Government to be completely impractical to decide between conflicting claims, and not infrequently the only solution to the problem was to acknowledge the claim of both parties and to pay for the land two or three times. It was common for several different tribes to participate in such treaties, and often several language families were represented. Each tribe, through its representatives, would typically cede its portion of a certain territory, the natural boundaries of which were usually recorded with enough accuracy. The main goal of the Government in treaty-making was to acquire possession of the land, so there was comparatively little focus on defining the exact areas occupied by the various tribes involved in a treaty, unless the issue was brought up by disputing claimants. As a result, the territory claimed by each tribe participating in the treaty is rarely described, and sometimes not all the tribes interested in the proposed cession are even specifically mentioned. This last point is particularly true for the territory west of the Mississippi, where the information for determining ownership is much less precise, leading to greater doubt and confusion regarding tribal boundary lines compared to the area east of that river. Given these circumstances, it’s easy to see that accurately determining tribal boundaries within clearly defined lines is impossible in the vast majority of cases.
Imperfect and defective as the terms of the treaties frequently are as regards the definition of tribal boundaries, they are by far the most accurate and important of the means at our command for fixing boundary lines upon the present map. By their aid the territorial possessions of a considerable number of tribes have been determined with desirable precision, and such areas definitely established have served as checks upon the boundaries of other tribes, concerning the location and extent of whose possessions little is known.
Imperfect and flawed as the terms of the treaties often are when it comes to defining tribal boundaries, they remain the most accurate and important tools we have for determining boundary lines on the current map. With their help, the land ownership of many tribes has been identified with notable accuracy, and these clearly defined areas have acted as references for the boundaries of other tribes, about whose land ownership we know very little.
For establishing the boundaries of such tribes as are not mentioned in treaties, and of those whose territorial possessions are not given with sufficient minuteness, early historical accounts are all important. Such accounts, of course, rarely indicate the territorial possessions of the tribes with great precision. In many cases, however, the sites of villages are accurately given. In others the source of information concerning a tribe is contained in a general statement of the occupancy of certain valleys or mountain ranges or areas at the heads of certain rivers, no limiting lines whatever being assigned. In others, still, the notice of a tribe is limited to a brief mention of the presence in a certain locality of hunting or war parties.
For determining the borders of tribes that aren’t mentioned in treaties and those whose land ownership isn’t clearly detailed, early historical accounts are crucial. These accounts typically don’t specify the territorial claims of the tribes with great accuracy. However, in many cases, the locations of villages are provided accurately. In other instances, information about a tribe is found in vague references to their occupation of specific valleys, mountain ranges, or areas near the heads of certain rivers, without any defined boundaries. In some cases, a tribe is only briefly noted as being present in a certain area with hunting or war parties.
Data of this loose character would of course be worthless in an attempt to fix boundary lines in accordance with the ideas of the modern surveyor. The relative positions of the families and the relative size of the areas occupied by them, however, and not their exact boundaries, are the chief concern in a linguistic map, and for the purpose of establishing these, and, in a rough way, the boundaries of the territory held by the tribes composing them, these data are very important, and when compared with one another and corrected by more definite data, when such are at hand, they have usually been found to be sufficient for the purpose.
Data of this kind would obviously be useless for determining boundary lines according to modern surveying standards. However, the relative positions of the families and the size of the areas they occupy—not their exact boundaries—are the main focus of a linguistic map. For the goal of establishing these details, and roughly outlining the territory held by the tribes involved, this data is quite important. When compared with one another and refined with more precise information when available, these data points have typically been sufficient for the intended purpose.
SUMMARY OF DEDUCTIONS.
In conclusion, the more important deductions derivable from the data upon which the linguistic map is based, or that are suggested by it, may be summarized as follows:
In conclusion, the key takeaways from the data that the linguistic map is based on, or that it suggests, can be summarized as follows:
First, the North American Indian tribes, instead of speaking related dialects, originating in a single parent language, in reality speak many languages belonging to distinct families, which have no apparent unity of origin.
First, the North American Indian tribes don't speak related dialects that come from a single parent language; instead, they actually speak many languages that belong to different families, which have no clear connection in their origins.
Second, the Indian population of North America was greatly exaggerated by early writers, and instead of being large was in reality small as compared with the vast territory occupied and the 45 abundant food supply; and furthermore, the population had nowhere augmented sufficiently, except possibly in California, to press upon the food supply.
Second, early writers greatly exaggerated the size of the Native American population in North America. Instead of being large, it was actually small compared to the vast territory they occupied and the abundant food supply available. Additionally, the population hadn't significantly increased anywhere, except maybe in California, to put pressure on the food supply. 45
Third, although representing a small population, the numerous tribes had overspread North America and had possessed themselves of all the territory, which, in the case of a great majority of tribes, was owned in common by the tribe.
Third, even though they represented a small population, the many tribes had spread across North America and had taken control of all the land, which, for the vast majority of tribes, was owned collectively by the tribe.
Fourth, prior to the advent of the European, the tribes were probably nearly in a state of equilibrium, and were in the main sedentary, and those tribes which can be said with propriety to have been nomadic became so only after the advent of the European, and largely as the direct result of the acquisition of the horse and the introduction of firearms.
Fourth, before the arrival of Europeans, the tribes were likely in a state of balance, primarily settled in one place. The tribes that can be considered nomadic only became so after Europeans arrived, mainly as a direct result of getting horses and the introduction of firearms.
Fifth, while agriculture was general among the tribes of the eastern United States, and while it was spreading among western tribes, its products were nowhere sufficient wholly to emancipate the Indian from the hunter state.
Fifth, while farming was common among the tribes in the eastern United States, and while it was increasing among western tribes, the crops produced were never enough to completely free the Native American from the hunting lifestyle.
LINGUISTIC FAMILIES.
Within the area covered by the map there are recognized fifty-eight distinct linguistic families.
Within the area shown on the map, there are fifty-eight distinct language families recognized.
These are enumerated in alphabetical order and each is accompanied by a table of the synonyms of the family name, together with a brief statement of the geographical area occupied by each family, so far as it is known. A list of the principal tribes of each family also is given.
These are listed in alphabetical order, and each one comes with a table of synonyms for the family name, along with a short description of the geographical area each family occupies, as far as is known. A list of the main tribes for each family is also included.
ADAIZAN FAMILY.
= Adaize, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 116, 306, 1836. Latham in Proc. Philolog. Soc., Lond., II, 31-59, 1846. Latham, Opuscula, 293, 1860. Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, xcix, 1848. Gallatin in Schoolcraft Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853. Latham, Elements Comp. Phil., 477, 1862 (referred to as one of the most isolated languages of N.A.). Keane, App. to Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 478, 1878 (or Adees).
= Adaize, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 116, 306, 1836. Latham in Proc. Philolog. Soc., Lond., II, 31-59, 1846. Latham, Opuscula, 293, 1860. Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, xcix, 1848. Gallatin in Schoolcraft Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853. Latham, Elements Comp. Phil., 477, 1862 (referred to as one of the most isolated languages of N.A.). Keane, App. to Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 478, 1878 (or Adees).
= Adaizi, Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 406, 1847.
= Adaizi, Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 406, 1847.
= Adaise, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, 77, 1848.
= Adaise, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, 77, 1848.
= Adahi, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 342, 1850. Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc., Lond., 103, 1856. Latham, Opuscula, 366, 368, 1860. Latham, Elements Comp., Phil., 473, 477, 1863 (same as his Adaize above).
= Adahi, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 342, 1850. Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc., Lond., 103, 1856. Latham, Opuscula, 366, 368, 1860. Latham, Elements Comp., Phil., 473, 477, 1863 (same as his Adaize above).
= Adaes, Buschmann, Spuren der aztekischen Sprache, 424, 1859.
= Adaes, Buschmann, traces of the Aztec language, 424, 1859.
= Adees. Keane, App. to Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.) 478, 1878 (same as his Adaize).
= Adees. Keane, App. to Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.) 478, 1878 (same as his Adaize).
= Adái, Gatschet, Creek Mig. Leg., 41, 1884.
= Adái, Gatschet, Creek Mig. Leg., 41, 1884.
Derivation: From a Caddo word hadai, sig. “brush wood.”
Derivation: From a Caddo word hadai, meaning "brush wood."
This family was based upon the language spoken by a single tribe who, according to Dr. Sibley, lived about the year 1800 near the old 46 Spanish fort or mission of Adaize, “about 40 miles from Natchitoches, below the Yattassees, on a lake called Lac Macdon, which communicates with the division of Red River that passes by Bayau Pierre.”6 A vocabulary of about two hundred and fifty words is all that remains to us of their language, which according to the collector, Dr. Sibley, “differs from all others, and is so difficult to speak or understand that no nation can speak ten words of it.”
This family was based on the language spoken by a single tribe who, according to Dr. Sibley, lived around the year 1800 near the old 46 Spanish fort or mission of Adaize, “about 40 miles from Natchitoches, below the Yattassees, on a lake called Lac Macdon, which connects to the part of Red River that runs by Bayau Pierre.” A vocabulary of about two hundred and fifty words is all that remains of their language, which, according to the collector, Dr. Sibley, “differs from all others and is so difficult to speak or understand that no nation can speak ten words of it.”
It was from an examination of Sibley’s vocabulary that Gallatin reached the conclusion of the distinctness of this language from any other known, an opinion accepted by most later authorities. A recent comparison of this vocabulary by Mr. Gatschet, with several Caddoan dialects, has led to the discovery that a considerable percentage of the Adái words have a more or less remote affinity with Caddoan, and he regards it as a Caddoan dialect. The amount of material, however, necessary to establish its relationship to Caddoan is not at present forthcoming, and it may be doubted if it ever will be, as recent inquiry has failed to reveal the existence of a single member of the tribe, or of any individual of the tribes once surrounding the Adái who remembers a word of the language.
It was by examining Sibley’s vocabulary that Gallatin concluded this language is distinct from any other known language, a view supported by most later experts. A recent comparison of this vocabulary by Mr. Gatschet with several Caddoan dialects has shown that a significant percentage of the Adái words have a more or less distant connection to Caddoan, leading him to consider it a Caddoan dialect. However, the amount of material needed to confirm its relationship to Caddoan is currently lacking, and it’s questionable whether it will ever be found, as recent investigations have not uncovered any members of the tribe or individuals from the tribes that once surrounded the Adái who remember any words from the language.
Mr. Gatschet found that some of the older Caddo in the Indian Territory remembered the Adái as one of the tribes formerly belonging to the Caddo Confederacy. More than this he was unable to learn from them.
Mr. Gatschet discovered that some of the older Caddo in the Indian Territory remembered the Adái as one of the tribes that used to be part of the Caddo Confederacy. He couldn't find out anything more from them.
Owing to their small numbers, their remoteness from lines of travel, and their unwarlike character the Adái have cut but a small figure in history, and accordingly the known facts regarding them are very meager. The first historical mention of them appears to be by Cabeça de Vaca, who in his “Naufragios,” referring to his stay in Texas, about 1530, calls them Atayos. Mention is also made of them by several of the early French explorers of the Mississippi, as d’Iberville and Joutel.
Due to their small population, isolation from travel routes, and peaceful nature, the Adái have played a minor role in history, which is why the information available about them is quite limited. The earliest historical reference to them seems to come from Cabeça de Vaca, who in his "Naufragios," in relation to his time in Texas around 1530, refers to them as Atayos. They are also mentioned by several early French explorers of the Mississippi, such as d’Iberville and Joutel.
The Mission of Adayes, so called from its proximity to the home of the tribe, was established in 1715. In 1792 there was a partial emigration of the Adái to the number of fourteen families to a site south of San Antonio de Bejar, southwest Texas, where apparently they amalgamated with the surrounding Indian population and were lost sight of. (From documents preserved at the City Hall, San Antonio, and examined by Mr. Gatschet in December, 1886.) The Adái who were left in their old homes numbered one hundred in 1802, according to Baudry de Lozieres. According to Sibley, in 1809 there were only “twenty men of them remaining, but more women.” In 1820 Morse mentions only thirty survivors.
The Mission of Adayes, named for its closeness to the tribe's home, was founded in 1715. In 1792, about fourteen families from the Adái migrated to a location south of San Antonio de Bejar, in southwest Texas, where they seemingly merged with the local Indian population and disappeared from history. (From documents preserved at City Hall, San Antonio, and reviewed by Mr. Gatschet in December 1886.) The remaining Adái in their original homes numbered one hundred in 1802, according to Baudry de Lozieres. Sibley noted that by 1809, only “twenty men of them remained, but more women.” In 1820, Morse reported just thirty survivors.
ALGONQUIAN FAMILY.
> Algonkin-Lenape, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 23, 305, 1836. Berghaus (1845), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1848. Ibid, 1852.
> Algonkin-Lenape, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 23, 305, 1836. Berghaus (1845), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1848. Ibid, 1852.
> Algonquin, Bancroft, Hist. U. S., III, 337, 1840. Prichard Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 381, 1847 (follows Gallatin).
> Algonquin, Bancroft, Hist. U. S., III, 337, 1840. Prichard Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 381, 1847 (follows Gallatin).
> Algonkins, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, xcix, 77, 1848. Gallatin in Schoolcraft Ind. Tribes, III, 401, 1853.
> Algonkins, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, xcix, 77, 1848. Gallatin in Schoolcraft Ind. Tribes, III, 401, 1853.
> Algonkin, Turner in Pac. R. R. Rept., III, pt. 3, 55, 1856 (gives Delaware and Shawnee vocabs.). Hayden, Cont. Eth. and Phil. Missouri Inds., 232, 1862 (treats only of Crees, Blackfeet, Shyennes). Hale in Am. Antiq., 112, April, 1883 (treated with reference to migration).
> Algonkin, Turner in Pac. R. R. Rept., III, pt. 3, 55, 1856 (provides Delaware and Shawnee vocabularies). Hayden, Cont. Eth. and Phil. Missouri Inds., 232, 1862 (focuses only on Crees, Blackfeet, and Cheyennes). Hale in Am. Antiq., 112, April, 1883 (discussed in relation to migration).
< Algonkin, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc., Lond., 1856 (adds to Gallatin’s list of 1836 the Bethuck, Shyenne, Blackfoot, and Arrapaho). Latham, Opuscula, 327, 1860 (as in preceding). Latham, Elements Comp. Phil, 447, 1862.
< Algonkin, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc., Lond., 1856 (adds to Gallatin’s list of 1836 the Bethuck, Shyenne, Blackfoot, and Arrapaho). Latham, Opuscula, 327, 1860 (as in preceding). Latham, Elements Comp. Phil, 447, 1862.
< Algonquin, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp., (Cent. and S. Am.), 460, 465, 1878 (list includes the Maquas, an Iroquois tribe).
< Algonquin, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp., (Cent. and S. Am.), 460, 465, 1878 (list includes the Maquas, an Iroquois tribe).
> Saskatschawiner, Berghaus, Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1848 (probably designates the Arapaho).
> Saskatschawiner, Berghaus, Physics. Atlas, map 17, 1848 (likely refers to the Arapaho).
> Arapahoes, Berghaus, Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1852.
> Arapahoes, Berghaus, Physics. Atlas, map 17, 1852.
X Algonkin und Beothuk, Berghaus, Physik. Atlas, map 72, 1887.
X Algonkin and Beothuk, Berghaus, Physics. Atlas, map 72, 1887.
Derivation: Contracted from Algomequin, an Algonkin word, signifying “those on the other side of the river,” i.e., the St. Lawrence River.
Derivation: Shortened from Algomequin, an Algonquin word, meaning “those on the other side of the river,” referring to the St. Lawrence River.
ALGONQUIAN AREA.
The area formerly occupied by the Algonquian family was more extensive than that of any other linguistic stock in North America, their territory reaching from Labrador to the Rocky Mountains, and from Churchill River of Hudson Bay as far south at least as Pamlico Sound of North Carolina. In the eastern part of this territory was an area occupied by Iroquoian tribes, surrounded on almost all sides by their Algonquian neighbors. On the south the Algonquian tribes were bordered by those of Iroquoian and Siouan (Catawba) stock, on the southwest and west by the Muskhogean and Siouan tribes, and on the northwest by the Kitunahan and the great Athapascan families, while along the coast of Labrador and the eastern shore of Hudson Bay they came in contact with the Eskimo, who were gradually retreating before them to the north. In Newfoundland they encountered the Beothukan family, consisting of but a single tribe. A portion of the Shawnee at some early period had separated from the main body of the tribe in central Tennessee and pushed their way down to the Savannah River in South Carolina, where, known as Savannahs, they carried on destructive wars with the surrounding tribes until about the beginning of the eighteenth century they were finally driven out and joined the Delaware in the north. Soon afterwards the rest of the tribe was expelled by the Cherokee and Chicasa, who thenceforward claimed all the country stretching north to the Ohio River.
The area once inhabited by the Algonquian family was larger than that of any other language group in North America, stretching from Labrador to the Rocky Mountains, and from the Churchill River in Hudson Bay all the way south to at least Pamlico Sound in North Carolina. In the eastern part of this territory, there was an area occupied by Iroquoian tribes, largely surrounded by their Algonquian neighbors. To the south, the Algonquian tribes were bordered by Iroquoian and Siouan (Catawba) tribes, to the southwest and west by Muskhogean and Siouan tribes, and to the northwest by the Kitunahan and the large Athapascan families. Along the coast of Labrador and the eastern shore of Hudson Bay, they interacted with the Eskimo, who were gradually moving northward. In Newfoundland, they encountered the Beothukan family, which consisted of just one tribe. A portion of the Shawnee had split from the main tribe in central Tennessee at an earlier time and made their way down to the Savannah River in South Carolina, where they were known as the Savannahs. They engaged in fierce wars with surrounding tribes until about the early 1700s, when they were finally pushed out and joined the Delaware in the north. Shortly after, the rest of the tribe was expelled by the Cherokee and Chicasa, who then claimed all the land stretching north to the Ohio River.
48 The Cheyenne and Arapaho, two allied tribes of this stock, had become separated from their kindred on the north and had forced their way through hostile tribes across the Missouri to the Black Hills country of South Dakota, and more recently into Wyoming and Colorado, thus forming the advance guard of the Algonquian stock in that direction, having the Siouan tribes behind them and those of the Shoshonean family in front.
48 The Cheyenne and Arapaho, two allied tribes of this heritage, had become separated from their relatives to the north and had made their way through hostile tribes across the Missouri River to the Black Hills area of South Dakota, and more recently into Wyoming and Colorado. This movement positioned them as the leading group of the Algonquian tribes in that direction, with the Siouan tribes behind them and those from the Shoshonean family ahead.
PRINCIPAL ALGONQUINIAN TRIBES.
Abnaki. Algonquin. Arapaho. Cheyenne. Conoy. Cree. Delaware. Fox. Illinois. Kickapoo. Mahican. Massachuset. |
Menominee. Miami. Micmac. Mohegan. Montagnais. Montauk. Munsee. Nanticoke. Narraganset. Nauset. Nipmuc. Ojibwa. |
Ottawa. Pamlico. Pennacook. Pequot. Piankishaw. Pottawotomi. Powhatan. Sac. Shawnee. Siksika. Wampanoag. Wappinger. |
Population.—The present number of the Algonquian stock is about 95,600, of whom about 60,000 are in Canada and the remainder in the United States. Below is given the population of the tribes officially recognized, compiled chiefly from the United States Indian Commissioner’s report for 1889 and the Canadian Indian report for 1888. It is impossible to give exact figures, owing to the fact that in many instances two or more tribes are enumerated together, while many individuals are living with other tribes or amongst the whites:
Population.—The current number of Algonquian people is around 95,600, with about 60,000 in Canada and the rest in the United States. Below is the population of the officially recognized tribes, compiled mainly from the United States Indian Commissioner’s report for 1889 and the Canadian Indian report for 1888. It’s difficult to provide exact numbers because often two or more tribes are counted together, and many individuals live with different tribes or among white communities:
ATHAPASCAN FAMILY.
> Athapascas, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 16, 305, 1836. Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 375, 1847. Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, xcix, 77, 1848. Berghaus (1845), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1848. Ibid., 1852. Turner in “Literary World,” 281, April 17, 1852 (refers Apache and Navajo to this family on linguistic evidence).
> Athapascas, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 16, 305, 1836. Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 375, 1847. Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, xcix, 77, 1848. Berghaus (1845), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1848. Ibid., 1852. Turner in “Literary World,” 281, April 17, 1852 (refers Apache and Navajo to this family on linguistic evidence).
> Athapaccas, Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 401, 1853. (Evident misprint.)
> Athapaccas, Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 401, 1853. (Evident misprint.)
> Athapascan, Turner in Pac. R. R. Rep., III, pt. 3, 84, 1856. (Mere mention of family; Apaches and congeners belong to this family, as shown by him in “Literary World.” Hoopah also asserted to be Athapascan.)
> Athapascan, Turner in Pac. R. R. Rep., III, pt. 3, 84, 1856. (A simple mention of the family; Apaches and their relatives belong to this family, as he indicated in “Literary World.” Hoopah also claimed to be Athapascan.)
> Athabaskans, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 302, 1850. (Under Northern Athabaskans, includes Chippewyans Proper, Beaver Indians, Daho-dinnis, Strong Bows, Hare Indians, Dog-ribs, Yellow Knives, Carriers. Under Southern Athabaskans, includes (p. 308) Kwalioqwa, Tlatskanai, Umkwa.)
> Athabaskans, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 302, 1850. (Under Northern Athabaskans, includes Chippewyans Proper, Beaver Indians, Daho-dinnis, Strong Bows, Hare Indians, Dog-ribs, Yellow Knives, Carriers. Under Southern Athabaskans, includes (p. 308) Kwalioqwa, Tlatskanai, Umkwa.)
= Athabaskan, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 65, 96, 1856. Buschmann (1854), Der athapaskische Sprachstamm, 250, 1856 (Hoopahs, Apaches, and Navajoes included). Latham, Opuscula, 333, 1860. Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 388, 1862. Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., II, 31-50, 1846 (indicates the coalescence of Athabascan family with Esquimaux). Latham (1844), in Jour. Eth. Soc. Lond., I, 161, 1848 (Nagail and Taculli referred to Athabascan). Scouler (1846), in Jour. Eth. Soc. Lond., I, 230, 1848. Latham, Opuscula, 257, 259, 276, 1860. Keane, App. to Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 460, 463, 1878.
= Athabaskan, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 65, 96, 1856. Buschmann (1854), Der athapaskische Sprachstamm, 250, 1856 (Hoopahs, Apaches, and Navajoes included). Latham, Opuscula, 333, 1860. Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 388, 1862. Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., II, 31-50, 1846 (indicates the merging of the Athabascan family with Eskimo). Latham (1844), in Jour. Eth. Soc. Lond., I, 161, 1848 (Nagail and Taculli referred to Athabascan). Scouler (1846), in Jour. Eth. Soc. Lond., I, 230, 1848. Latham, Opuscula, 257, 259, 276, 1860. Keane, App. to Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 460, 463, 1878.
> Kinai, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 14, 305, 1836 (Kinai and Ugaljachmutzi; considered to form a distinct family, though affirmed to have affinities with western Esquimaux and with Athapascas). Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 440-448, 1847 (follows Gallatin; also affirms a relationship to Aztec). Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, 77, 1848.
> Kinai, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 14, 305, 1836 (Kinai and Ugaljachmutzi; considered to belong to a distinct family, although said to have connections with western Eskimos and Athapascans). Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 440-448, 1847 (follows Gallatin; also asserts a link to the Aztec). Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, 77, 1848.
> Kenay, Latham in Proc. Philolog. Soc. Lond., II, 32-34, 1846. Latham, Opuscula, 275, 1860. Latham, Elements Comp. Phil., 389, 1862 (referred to Esquimaux stock).
> Kenay, Latham in Proc. Philolog. Soc. Lond., II, 32-34, 1846. Latham, Opuscula, 275, 1860. Latham, Elements Comp. Phil., 389, 1862 (referred to Esquimaux stock).
> Kinætzi, Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 441, 1847 (same as his Kinai above).
> Kinætzi, Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 441, 1847 (same as his Kinai above).
> Kenai, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, xcix, 1848 (see Kinai above). Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 695, 1856 (refers it to Athapaskan).
> Kenai, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, xcix, 1848 (see Kinai above). Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 695, 1856 (refers it to Athapaskan).
X Northern, Scouler in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc. Lond., XI, 218, 1841. (Includes Atnas, Kolchans, and Kenáïes of present family.)
X Northern, Scouler in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc. Lond., XI, 218, 1841. (Includes Atnas, Kolchans, and Kenáïes of present family.)
X Haidah, Scouler, ibid., 224 (same as his Northern family).
X Haidah, Scouler, ibid., 224 (same as his Northern family).
> Chepeyans, Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 375, 1847 (same as Athapascas above).
> Chepeyans, Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 375, 1847 (the same as Athapascas above).
> Tahkali-Umkwa, Hale in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, 198, 201, 569, 1846 (“a branch of the great Chippewyan, or Athapascan, stock;” includes Carriers, Qualioguas, Tlatskanies, Umguas). Gallatin, after Hale in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, 9, 1848.
> Tahkali-Umkwa, Hale in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, 198, 201, 569, 1846 (“a branch of the great Chippewyan, or Athapascan, stock;” includes Carriers, Qualioguas, Tlatskanies, Umguas). Gallatin, after Hale in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, 9, 1848.
> Digothi, Berghaus (1845), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1848. Digothi, Loucheux, ibid. 1852.
> Digothi, Berghaus (1845), Physics Atlas, map 17, 1848. Digothi, Loucheux, ibid. 1852.
> Lipans, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 349, 1850 (Lipans (Sipans) between Rio Arkansas and Rio Grande).
> Lipans, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 349, 1850 (Lipans (Sipans) between Rio Arkansas and Rio Grande).
> Ugaljachmutzi, Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853 (“perhaps Athapascas”).
> Ugaljachmutzi, Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853 (“maybe Athapascas”).
> Umkwa, Latham in Proc. Philolog. Soc. Lond., VI, 72, 1854 (a single tribe). Latham, Opuscula, 300, 1860.
> Umkwa, Latham in Proc. Philolog. Soc. Lond., VI, 72, 1854 (a single tribe). Latham, Opuscula, 300, 1860.
> Tahlewah. Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 422, 1853 (a single tribe). Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 76, 1856 (a single tribe). Latham. Opuscula, 342, 1860.
> Tahlewah. Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 422, 1853 (a single tribe). Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 76, 1856 (a single tribe). Latham. Opuscula, 342, 1860.
> Tolewa, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 163, 1877 (vocab. from Smith River, Oregon; affirmed to be distinct from any neighboring tongue). Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Miscellany, 438, 1877.
> Tolewa, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 163, 1877 (vocabulary from Smith River, Oregon; confirmed to be different from any nearby language). Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Miscellany, 438, 1877.
> Hoo-pah, Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 422, 1853 (tribe on Lower Trinity, California).
> Hoo-pah, Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 422, 1853 (tribe in Lower Trinity, California).
> Hoopa, Powers in Overland Monthly, 135, August, 1872.
> Hoopa, Powers in Overland Monthly, 135, August, 1872.
> Hú-pâ, Powers in Cont. N.A. Eth., III, 72, 1877 (affirmed to be Athapascan).
> Hú-pâ, Powers in Cont. N.A. Eth., III, 72, 1877 (confirmed to be Athapascan).
= Tinneh, Dall in Proc. Am. Ass. A. S., XVIII, 269, 1869 (chiefly Alaskan tribes). Dall, Alaska and its Resources, 428, 1870. Dall in Cont. N.A. Eth., I, 24, 1877. Bancroft, Native Races, III, 562, 583, 603, 1882.
= Tinneh, Dall in Proc. Am. Ass. A. S., 18, 269, 1869 (mainly Alaskan tribes). Dall, Alaska and its Resources, 428, 1870. Dall in Cont. N.A. Eth., I, 24, 1877. Bancroft, Native Races, III, 562, 583, 603, 1882.
= Tinné, Gatschet in Mag. Am, Hist., 165, 1877 (special mention of Hoopa, Rogue River, Umpqua.) Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 440, 1877. Gatschet in Geog. Surv. W. 100th M., VII, 406, 1879. Tolmie and Dawson, Comp. Vocabs., 62, 1884. Berghaus, Physik. Atlas, map 72, 1887.
= Tinné, Gatschet in Mag. Am, Hist., 165, 1877 (special mention of Hoopa, Rogue River, Umpqua.) Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 440, 1877. Gatschet in Geog. Surv. W. 100th M., VII, 406, 1879. Tolmie and Dawson, Comp. Vocabs., 62, 1884. Berghaus, Physik. Atlas, map 72, 1887.
= Tinney, Keane, App. to Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 460, 463, 1878.
= Tinney, Keane, App. to Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 460, 463, 1878.
X Klamath, Keane, App. to Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 475, 1878; or Lutuami, (Lototens and Tolewahs of his list belong here.)
X Klamath, Keane, App. to Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 475, 1878; or Lutuami, (Lototens and Tolewahs from his list belong here.)
Derivation: From the lake of the same name; signifying, according to Lacombe, “place of hay and reeds.”
Derivation: From the lake of the same name; meaning, according to Lacombe, “place of hay and reeds.”
As defined by Gallatin, the area occupied by this great family is included in a line drawn from the mouth of the Churchill or Missinippi River to its source; thence along the ridge which separates the north branch of the Saskatchewan from those of the Athapascas to the Rocky Mountains; and thence northwardly till within a hundred miles of the Pacific Ocean, in latitude 52° 30'.
As Gallatin described, the territory held by this large family stretches from the mouth of the Churchill or Missinippi River to its source; then along the ridge that separates the north branch of the Saskatchewan from the Athapascas heading towards the Rocky Mountains; and then northward until it's about a hundred miles from the Pacific Ocean, at latitude 52° 30'.
The only tribe within the above area excepted by Gallatin as of probably a different stock was the Quarrelers or Loucheux, living at the mouth of Mackenzie River. This tribe, however, has since been ascertained to be Athapascan.
The only tribe in the area mentioned that Gallatin considered to possibly be of a different origin was the Quarrelers or Loucheux, who live at the mouth of the Mackenzie River. However, it's since been confirmed that this tribe is actually Athapascan.
The Athapascan family thus occupied almost the whole of British Columbia and of Alaska, and was, with the exception of the Eskimo, by whom they were cut off on nearly all sides from the ocean, the most northern family in North America.
The Athapascan family therefore occupied nearly all of British Columbia and Alaska, and was, except for the Eskimo, who surrounded them on almost all sides from the ocean, the most northern family in North America.
Since Gallatin’s time the history of this family has been further elucidated by the discovery on the part of Hale and Turner that isolated branches of the stock have become established in Oregon, California, and along the southern border of the United States.
Since Gallatin’s time, the history of this family has been further clarified by Hale and Turner discovering that separate branches of the family have established themselves in Oregon, California, and along the southern border of the United States.
The boundaries of the Athapascan family, as now understood, are best given under three primary groups—Northern, Pacific, and Southern.
The boundaries of the Athapascan family, as we understand them today, are best categorized into three main groups—Northern, Pacific, and Southern.
53 Northern group.—This includes all the Athapascan tribes of British North America and Alaska. In the former region the Athapascans occupy most of the western interior, being bounded on the north by the Arctic Eskimo, who inhabit a narrow strip of coast; on the east by the Eskimo of Hudson’s Bay as far south as Churchill River, south of which river the country is occupied by Algonquian tribes. On the south the Athapascan tribes extended to the main ridge between the Athapasca and Saskatchewan Rivers, where they met Algonquian tribes; west of this area they were bounded on the south by Salishan tribes, the limits of whose territory on Fraser River and its tributaries appear on Tolmie and Dawson’s map of 1884. On the west, in British Columbia, the Athapascan tribes nowhere reach the coast, being cut off by the Wakashan, Salishan, and Chimmesyan families.
53 Northern group.—This includes all the Athapascan tribes in British North America and Alaska. In that area, the Athapascans occupy most of the western interior, bordered to the north by the Arctic Eskimo, who live along a narrow strip of coast; to the east by the Eskimo of Hudson’s Bay, reaching as far south as the Churchill River, south of which the land is occupied by Algonquian tribes. To the south, the Athapascan tribes stretched to the main ridge between the Athapasca and Saskatchewan Rivers, where they met Algonquian tribes; to the west of this region, they were bordered to the south by Salishan tribes, whose territory limits on the Fraser River and its tributaries are shown on Tolmie and Dawson’s map from 1884. In British Columbia, the Athapascan tribes do not reach the coast, being separated by the Wakashan, Salishan, and Chimmesyan families.
The interior of Alaska is chiefly occupied by tribes of this family. Eskimo tribes have encroached somewhat upon the interior along the Yukon, Kuskokwim, Kowak, and Noatak Rivers, reaching on the Yukon to somewhat below Shageluk Island,7 and on the Kuskokwim nearly or quite to Kolmakoff Redoubt.8 Upon the two latter they reach quite to their heads.9 A few Kutchin tribes are (or have been) north of the Porcupine and Yukon Rivers, but until recently it has not been known that they extended north beyond the Yukon and Romanzoff Mountains. Explorations of Lieutenant Stoney, in 1885, establish the fact that the region to the north of those mountains is occupied by Athapascan tribes, and the map is colored accordingly. Only in two places in Alaska do the Athapascan tribes reach the coast—the K’naia-khotana, on Cook’s Inlet, and the Ahtena, of Copper River.
The interior of Alaska is mainly occupied by tribes from this family. Eskimo tribes have moved into the interior along the Yukon, Kuskokwim, Kowak, and Noatak Rivers, reaching somewhat below Shageluk Island on the Yukon and almost to Kolmakoff Redoubt on the Kuskokwim. They extend nearly to the source of both of these rivers. A few Kutchin tribes are located north of the Porcupine and Yukon Rivers, but it wasn't until recently that it was known they were present north of the Yukon and Romanzoff Mountains. Lieutenant Stoney's explorations in 1885 confirmed that the area north of those mountains is inhabited by Athapascan tribes, and the map reflects this. Only in two places in Alaska do the Athapascan tribes reach the coast: the K’naia-khotana at Cook’s Inlet and the Ahtena of the Copper River.
Pacific group.—Unlike the tribes of the Northern group, most of those of the Pacific group have removed from their priscan habitats since the advent of the white race. The Pacific group embraces the following: Kwalhioqua, formerly on Willopah River, Washington, near the Lower Chinook;10 Owilapsh, formerly between Shoalwater Bay and the heads of the Chehalis River, Washington, the territory of these two tribes being practically continuous; Tlatscanai, formerly on a small stream on the northwest side of Wapatoo Island.11 Gibbs was informed by an old Indian that this tribe “formerly owned the prairies on the Tsihalis at the mouth of the Skukumchuck, but, on the failure of game, left the country, crossed the Columbia River, and occupied the mountains to the 54 south”—a statement of too uncertain character to be depended upon; the Athapascan tribes now on the Grande Ronde and Siletz Reservations, Oregon,12 whose villages on and near the coast extended from Coquille River southward to the California line, including, among others, the Upper Coquille, Sixes, Euchre, Creek, Joshua, Tutu tûnnĕ, and other “Rogue River” or “Tou-touten bands,” Chasta Costa, Galice Creek, Naltunne tûnnĕ and Chetco villages;13 the Athapascan villages formerly on Smith River and tributaries, California;14 those villages extending southward from Smith River along the California coast to the mouth of Klamath River;15 the Hupâ villages or “clans” formerly on Lower Trinity River, California;16 the Kenesti or Wailakki (2), located as follows: “They live along the western slope of the Shasta Mountains, from North Eel River, above Round Valley, to Hay Fork; along Eel and Mad Rivers, extending down the latter about to Low Gap; also on Dobbins and Larrabie Creeks;”17 and Saiaz, who “formerly occupied the tongue of land jutting down between Eel River and Van Dusen’s Fork.”18
Pacific group.—Unlike the tribes from the Northern group, most tribes in the Pacific group have moved away from their original habitats since the arrival of white settlers. The Pacific group includes the following: Kwalhioqua, which was once located on the Willopah River in Washington, near the Lower Chinook;10 Owilapsh, which used to be between Shoalwater Bay and the heads of the Chehalis River in Washington, with the territories of these two tribes being almost continuous; Tlatscanai, which was located on a small stream on the northwest side of Wapatoo Island.11 An old Indian informed Gibbs that this tribe “once owned the prairies on the Tsihalis at the mouth of the Skukumchuck, but, due to a lack of game, left the area, crossed the Columbia River, and moved into the mountains to the south”—a statement that is too uncertain to be reliable; the Athapascan tribes currently on the Grande Ronde and Siletz Reservations in Oregon,12 whose villages along the coast stretched from Coquille River south to the California border, including the Upper Coquille, Sixes, Euchre, Creek, Joshua, Tutu tûnnĕ, and other “Rogue River” or “Tou-touten bands,” as well as Chasta Costa, Galice Creek, Naltunne tûnnĕ, and Chetco villages;13 the Athapascan villages that were formerly located on Smith River and its tributaries in California;14 these villages extended south from Smith River along the California coast to the mouth of Klamath River;15 the Hupâ villages or “clans” that were formerly on Lower Trinity River in California;16 the Kenesti or Wailakki (2), located as follows: “They reside along the western slope of the Shasta Mountains, from North Eel River, above Round Valley, to Hay Fork; along Eel and Mad Rivers, extending down Mad River to Low Gap; also on Dobbins and Larrabie Creeks;”17 and Saiaz, who “previously occupied the peninsula of land that juts down between Eel River and Van Dusen’s Fork.”18
Southern group.—Includes the Navajo, Apache, and Lipan. Engineer José Cortez, one of the earliest authorities on these tribes, writing in 1799, defines the boundaries of the Lipan and Apache as extending north and south from 29° N. to 36° N., and east and west from 99° W. to 114° W.; in other words from central Texas nearly to the Colorado River in Arizona, where they met tribes of the Yuman stock. The Lipan occupied the eastern part of the above territory, extending in Texas from the Comanche country (about Red River) south to the Rio Grande.19 More recently both Lipan and Apache have gradually moved southward into Mexico where they extend as far as Durango.20
Southern group.—Includes the Navajo, Apache, and Lipan. Engineer José Cortez, one of the first experts on these tribes, writing in 1799, defines the boundaries of the Lipan and Apache as extending north and south from 29° N. to 36° N., and east and west from 99° W. to 114° W.; in other words, from central Texas almost to the Colorado River in Arizona, where they interacted with tribes of the Yuman stock. The Lipan occupied the eastern part of this territory, ranging in Texas from the Comanche region (around Red River) down to the Rio Grande.19 More recently, both Lipan and Apache have gradually migrated south into Mexico, where they extend as far as Durango.20
The Navajo, since first known to history, have occupied the country on and south of the San Juan River in northern New Mexico and Arizona and extending into Colorado and Utah. They were surrounded on all sides by the cognate Apache except upon the north, where they meet Shoshonean tribes.
The Navajo, since they were first recorded in history, have lived in the area around and south of the San Juan River in northern New Mexico and Arizona, extending into Colorado and Utah. They were surrounded on all sides by the related Apache tribes, except to the north, where they encountered Shoshonean tribes.
PRINCIPAL TRIBES.
A. Northern group: | ||
Ah-tena. Kaiyuh-khotana. Kcaltana. K’naia-khotana. Koyukukhotana. |
Kutchin. Montagnais. Montagnards. Nagailer. Slave. |
Sluacus-tinneh. Taculli. Tahl-tan (1). Unakhotana. |
B. Pacific group: | ||
Ătaăkût. Chasta Costa. Chetco. Dakube tede (on Applegate Creek). Dakube tede (on Applegate Creek). Hupâ. Kălts’erea tûnnĕ. Kenesti or Wailakki. |
Kwalhioqua. Kwaʇami. Micikqwûtme tûnnĕ. Mikono tûnnĕ. Owilapsh. Qwinctûnnetûn. Saiaz. Taltûctun tûde (on Galice Creek). Taltûctun tûde (Galice Creek). |
Tcêmê (Joshuas). Tcĕtlĕstcan tûnnĕ. Terwar. Tlatscanai. Tolowa. Tutu tûnnĕ. |
C. Southern group: | ||
Arivaipa. Chiricahua. Coyotero. Faraone. Gileño. Jicarilla. |
Lipan. Llanero. Mescalero. Mimbreño. Mogollon. Na-isha. |
Navajo. Pinal Coyotero. Tchĕkûn. Tchishi. |
Population.—The present number of the Athapascan family is about 32,899, of whom about 8,595, constituting the Northern group, are in Alaska and British North America, according to Dall, Dawson, and the Canadian Indian-Report for 1888; about 895, comprising the Pacific group, are in Washington, Oregon, and California; and about 23,409, belonging to the Southern group, are in Arizona, New Mexico, Colorado, and Indian Territory. Besides these are the Lipan and some refugee Apache, who are in Mexico. These have not been included in the above enumeration, as there are no means of ascertaining their number.
Population.—The current population of the Athapascan family is around 32,899, with about 8,595, making up the Northern group, located in Alaska and British North America, according to Dall, Dawson, and the Canadian Indian Report from 1888; approximately 895, part of the Pacific group, are in Washington, Oregon, and California; and about 23,409, who belong to the Southern group, are in Arizona, New Mexico, Colorado, and Indian Territory. Additionally, there are the Lipan and some displaced Apache in Mexico. These have not been counted in the total above, as there is no way to determine their number.
Northern group.—This may be said to consist of the following:
Northern group.—This can be said to consist of the following:
To the Pacific Group may be assigned the following:
To the Pacific Group can be assigned the following:
Hupa Indians, on Hoopa Valley Reservation, California Hupa Tribe, on the Hoopa Valley Reservation, California |
468 | |
Rogue River Indians at Grande Ronde Reservation, Oregon Rogue River Tribe at Grande Ronde Reservation, Oregon |
47 | |
Siletz Reservation, Oregon (about one-half the Indians thereon) Siletz Reservation, Oregon (about half of the Native Americans living there) |
300? | |
Umpqua at Grande Ronde Reservation, Oregon Umpqua at Grande Ronde Reservation, Oregon |
80 | |
895? |
Southern Group, consisting of Apache, Lipan, and Navajo:
Southern Group, made up of Apache, Lipan, and Navajo:
Apache children at Carlisle, Pennsylvania Apache kids at Carlisle, Pennsylvania |
142 | |
Apache prisoners at Mount Vernon Barracks, Alabama Apache prisoners at Mount Vernon Barracks, Alabama |
356 | |
Coyotero Apache (San Carlos Reservation) Coyotero Apache (San Carlos Rez) |
733? | |
Jicarilla Apache (Southern Ute Reservation, Colorado) Jicarilla Apache (Southern Ute Reservation, Colorado) |
808 | |
Lipan with Tonkaway on Oakland Reserve, Indian Territory Lipan with Tonkaway on Oakland Reserve, Indian Territory |
15? | |
Mescalero Apache (Mescalero Reservation, New Mexico) Mescalero Apache (Mescalero Reservation, New Mexico) |
513 | |
Na-isha Apache (Kiowa, Comanche, and Wichita Reservation, Indian Territory) Na-isha Apache (Kiowa, Comanche, and Wichita Reservation, Indian Territory) |
326 | |
Navajo (most on Navajo Reservation, Arizona and New Mexico; 4 at Carlisle, Pennsylvania) Navajo (mostly on the Navajo Reservation in Arizona and New Mexico; 4 in Carlisle, Pennsylvania) |
17,208 | |
San Carlos Apache (San Carlos Reservation, Arizona) San Carlos Apache (San Carlos Reservation, Arizona) |
1,352? | |
White Mountain Apache (San Carlos Reservation, Arizona) White Mountain Apache (San Carlos Reservation, Arizona) |
36 | |
White Mountain Apache (under military at Camp Apache, Arizona) White Mountain Apache (under military control at Camp Apache, Arizona) |
1,920 | |
23,409? |
ATTACAPAN FAMILY.
= Attacapas, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 116, 306, 1836. Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II. pt. 1, xcix, 77, 1848. Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 343, 1850 (includes Attacapas and Carankuas). Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853. Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 426, 1859.
= Attacapas, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 116, 306, 1836. Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II. pt. 1, xcix, 77, 1848. Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 343, 1850 (includes Attacapas and Carankuas). Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853. Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 426, 1859.
= Attacapa, Latham in Proc. Philolog. Soc. Lond., II, 31-50, 1846. Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 406, 1847 (or “Men eaters”). Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 105, 1856. Latham, Opuscula, 293, 1860.
= Attacapa, Latham in Proc. Philolog. Soc. Lond., II, 31-50, 1846. Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 406, 1847 (or “Men eaters”). Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 105, 1856. Latham, Opuscula, 293, 1860.
= Atákapa, Gatschet, Creek Mig. Leg., I. 45, 1884. Gatschet in Science, 414, Apr. 29, 1887.
= Atákapa, Gatschet, Creek Mig. Leg., I. 45, 1884. Gatschet in Science, 414, Apr. 29, 1887.
Derivation: From a Choctaw word meaning “man-eater.”
Derivation: From a Choctaw word that means “man-eater.”
Little is known of the tribe, the language of which forms the basis of the present family. The sole knowledge possessed by Gallatin was derived from a vocabulary and some scanty information furnished by Dr. John Sibley, who collected his material in the year 1805. Gallatin states that the tribe was reduced to 50 men. According to Dr. Sibley the Attacapa language was spoken also by another tribe, the “Carankouas,” who lived on the coast of Texas, and who conversed in their own language besides. In 1885 Mr. Gatschet visited the section formerly inhabited by the Attacapa and after much search discovered one man and two women at Lake Charles, Calcasieu Parish, Louisiana, and another woman living 10 miles to the south; he also heard of five other women then scattered in western Texas; these are thought to be the only survivors of the tribe. Mr. Gatschet collected some two thousand words and a considerable body of text. His vocabulary differs considerably from the one furnished by Dr. Sibley and published by Gallatin, and indicates that the language of the western branch of the tribe was dialectically distinct from that of their brethren farther to the east.
Little is known about the tribe whose language is the foundation of the current family. The only information Gallatin had came from a vocabulary and some limited details provided by Dr. John Sibley, who gathered his data in 1805. Gallatin notes that the tribe was down to 50 men. According to Dr. Sibley, the Attacapa language was also spoken by another tribe, the “Carankouas,” who lived on the Texas coast and spoke their own language as well. In 1885, Mr. Gatschet visited the area once inhabited by the Attacapa and, after a lot of searching, found one man and two women at Lake Charles, Calcasieu Parish, Louisiana, and another woman living 10 miles to the south; he also heard of five additional women scattered in western Texas; these are believed to be the only survivors of the tribe. Mr. Gatschet collected around two thousand words and a substantial amount of text. His vocabulary differs significantly from the one provided by Dr. Sibley and published by Gallatin, indicating that the language of the western branch of the tribe was dialectically distinct from that of their relatives further east.
The above material seems to show that the Attacapa language is distinct from all others, except possibly the Chitimachan.
The material above suggests that the Attacapa language is different from all others, except maybe the Chitimachan.
BEOTHUKAN FAMILY.
= Bethuck, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 58, 1856 (stated to be “Algonkin rather than aught else”). Latham, Opuscula, 327, 1860. Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 453, 1862.
= Bethuck, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 58, 1856 (stated to be “Algonkin rather than anything else”). Latham, Opuscula, 327, 1860. Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 453, 1862.
= Beothuk, Gatschet in Proc. Am. Philosoph. Soc., 408, Oct., 1885. Gatschet, ibid., 411, July, 1886 (language affirmed to represent a distinct linguistic family). Gatschet, ibid., 1, Jan-June, 1890.
= Beothuk, Gatschet in Proc. Am. Philosoph. Soc., 408, Oct., 1885. Gatschet, ibid., 411, July, 1886 (language confirmed to be part of a distinct linguistic family). Gatschet, ibid., 1, Jan-June, 1890.
Derivation: Beothuk signifies “Indian” or “red Indian.”
Derivation: Beothuk means "Indian" or "red Indian."
The position of the language spoken by the aborigines of Newfoundland must be considered to be doubtful.
The status of the language spoken by the indigenous people of Newfoundland is uncertain.
In 1846 Latham examined the material then accessible, and was led to the somewhat ambiguous statement that the language “was akin to those of the ordinary American Indians rather than to the Eskimo; further investigation showing that, of the ordinary American languages, it was Algonkin rather than aught else.”
In 1846, Latham looked at the available materials and concluded with a somewhat unclear statement that the language “was similar to those of the typical American Indians rather than to the Eskimo; further investigation revealed that, among the regular American languages, it was Algonquin rather than anything else.”
Since then Mr. Gatschet has been able to examine a much larger and more satisfactory body of material, and although neither in amount nor quality is the material sufficient to permit final and 58 satisfactory deductions, yet so far as it goes it shows that the language is quite distinct from any of the Algonquian dialects, and in fact from any other American tongue.
Since then, Mr. Gatschet has been able to look at a much larger and more satisfactory collection of materials, and although the quantity and quality of the material are not enough to allow for final and 58 satisfactory conclusions, it nonetheless indicates that the language is quite different from any of the Algonquian dialects and, in fact, from any other American language.
GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION.
It seems highly probable that the whole of Newfoundland at the time of its discovery by Cabot in 1497 was inhabited by Beothuk Indians.
It seems very likely that all of Newfoundland at the time of its discovery by Cabot in 1497 was populated by Beothuk Indians.
In 1534 Cartier met with Indians inhabiting the southeastern part of the island, who, very likely, were of this people, though the description is too vague to permit certain identification. A century later the southern portion of the island appears to have been abandoned by these Indians, whoever they were, on account of European settlements, and only the northern and eastern parts of the island were occupied by them. About the beginning of the eighteenth century western Newfoundland was colonized by the Micmac from Nova Scotia. As a consequence of the persistent warfare which followed the advent of the latter and which was also waged against the Beothuk by the Europeans, especially the French, the Beothuk rapidly wasted in numbers. Their main territory was soon confined to the neighborhood of the Exploits River. The tribe was finally lost sight of about 1827, having become extinct, or possibly the few survivors having crossed to the Labrador coast and joined the Nascapi with whom the tribe had always been on friendly terms.
In 1534, Cartier met with Indigenous people living in the southeastern part of the island, who were likely part of this group, although the description is too vague for certain identification. A century later, the southern part of the island seems to have been abandoned by these Indigenous people, whoever they were, due to European settlements, and only the northern and eastern parts of the island were occupied by them. Around the early 18th century, western Newfoundland was settled by the Micmac from Nova Scotia. As a result of the ongoing conflict that followed the arrival of the Micmac and the wars waged against the Beothuk by Europeans, especially the French, the Beothuk quickly declined in numbers. Their main territory soon became restricted to the area around the Exploits River. The tribe was finally lost sight of around 1827, having either become extinct or possibly the few remaining members had crossed to the Labrador coast and joined the Nascapi, with whom the tribe had always had friendly relations.
Upon the map only the small portion of the island is given to the Beothuk which is known definitely to have been occupied by them, viz., the neighborhood of the Exploits River, though, as stated above, it seems probable that the entire island was once in their possession.
Upon the map, only a small part of the island is shown as having definitely been occupied by the Beothuk, specifically the area around the Exploits River. However, as mentioned earlier, it seems likely that they once possessed the entire island.
CADDOAN FAMILY.
> Caddoes, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 116, 306, 1836 (based on Caddoes alone). Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 406, 1847. Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1858 [gives as languages Caddo, Red River, (Nandakoes, Tachies, Nabedaches)].
> Caddoes, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 116, 306, 1836 (based on Caddoes alone). Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 406, 1847. Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1858 [lists languages as Caddo, Red River, (Nandakoes, Tachies, Nabedaches)].
> Caddokies, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 116, 1836 (same as his Caddoes). Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 406, 1847.
> Caddokies, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 116, 1836 (same as his Caddoes). Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 406, 1847.
> Caddo, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., II, 31-50, 1846 (indicates affinities with Iroquois, Muskoge, Catawba, Pawnee). Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, xcix, 77, 1848, (Caddo only). Berghaus (1845), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1848 (Caddos, etc.). Ibid., 1852. Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 338, 1850 (between the Mississippi and Sabine). Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc., Lond., 101, 1856. Turner in Pac. R. R. Rep., III, pt. 3, 55, 70, 1856 (finds resemblances to Pawnee but keeps them separate). Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 426, 448, 1859. Latham, Opuscula, 290, 366, 1860.
> Caddo, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., II, 31-50, 1846 (shows connections with Iroquois, Muskoge, Catawba, Pawnee). Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, xcix, 77, 1848, (Caddo only). Berghaus (1845), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1848 (Caddos, etc.). Ibid., 1852. Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 338, 1850 (between the Mississippi and Sabine). Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc., Lond., 101, 1856. Turner in Pac. R. R. Rep., III, pt. 3, 55, 70, 1856 (notes similarities to Pawnee but distinguishes them). Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 426, 448, 1859. Latham, Opuscula, 290, 366, 1860.
> Caddo, Latham, Elements Comp. Phil., 470, 1862 (includes Pawni and Riccari).
> Caddo, Latham, Elements Comp. Phil., 470, 1862 (includes Pawni and Riccari).
> Pawnees, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 128, 306, 1836 (two nations: Pawnees proper and Ricaras or Black Pawnees). Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 408, 1847 (follows Gallatin). Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., 59 II, pt. 1, xcix, 1848. Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 344, 1850 (or Panis; includes Loup and Republican Pawnees). Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853 (gives as languages: Pawnees, Ricaras, Tawakeroes, Towekas, Wachos?). Hayden, Cont. Eth. and Phil. Missouri Indians, 232, 345, 1863 (includes Pawnees and Arikaras).
> Pawnees, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 128, 306, 1836 (two groups: Pawnees proper and Ricaras or Black Pawnees). Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 408, 1847 (follows Gallatin). Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., 59 II, pt. 1, xcix, 1848. Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 344, 1850 (or Panis; includes Loup and Republican Pawnees). Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853 (lists languages: Pawnees, Ricaras, Tawakeroes, Towekas, Wachos?). Hayden, Cont. Eth. and Phil. Missouri Indians, 232, 345, 1863 (includes Pawnees and Arikaras).
> Panis, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 117, 128, 1836 (of Red River of Texas; mention of villages; doubtfully indicated as of Pawnee family). Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 407, 1847 (supposed from name to be of same race with Pawnees of the Arkansa). Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 344, 1850 (Pawnees or). Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 403, 1853 (here kept separate from Pawnee family).
> Panis, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 117, 128, 1836 (regarding the Red River of Texas; mentions of villages; possibly linked to the Pawnee family). Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 407, 1847 (suggested from the name to be of the same race as the Pawnees of the Arkansa). Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 344, 1850 (possibly Pawnees). Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 403, 1853 (here noted separately from the Pawnee family).
> Pawnies, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, 77, 1848 (see Pawnee above).
> Pawnies, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, 77, 1848 (see Pawnee above).
> Pahnies, Berghaus (1845), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1848. Ibid., 1852.
> Pahnies, Berghaus (1845), Physics Atlas, map 17, 1848. Same source, 1852.
> Pawnee(?), Turner in Pac. R. R. Rep., III, pt. 3, 55, 65, 1856 (Kichai and Hueco vocabularies).
> Pawnee(?), Turner in Pac. R. R. Rep., III, pt. 3, 55, 65, 1856 (Kichai and Hueco vocabularies).
= Pawnee, Keane, App. to Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 478, 1878 (gives four groups, viz: Pawnees proper; Arickarees; Wichitas; Caddoes).
= Pawnee, Keane, App. to Stanford’s Comp. (Central and South America), 478, 1878 (gives four groups, namely: Pawnees proper; Arickarees; Wichitas; Caddoes).
= Pani, Gatschet, Creek Mig. Legend, I, 42, 1884. Berghaus, Physik. Atlas, map 72, 1887.
= Pani, Gatschet, Creek Mig. Legend, I, 42, 1884. Berghaus, Physik. Atlas, map 72, 1887.
> Towiaches. Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 116, 128, 1836 (same as Panis above). Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 407, 1847.
> Towiaches. Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 116, 128, 1836 (same as Panis above). Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 407, 1847.
> Towiachs, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 349, 1850 (includes Towiach, Tawakenoes, Towecas?, Wacos).
> Towiachs, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 349, 1850 (includes Towiach, Tawakenoes, Towecas?, Wacos).
> Towiacks, Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853.
> Towiacks, Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853.
> Natchitoches, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 116, 1836 (stated by Dr. Sibley to speak a language different from any other). Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 342, 1850. Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 406, 1847 (after Gallatin). Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853 (a single tribe only).
> Natchitoches, Gallatin in Transactions and Collections of the American Antiquarian Society, II, 116, 1836 (noted by Dr. Sibley as speaking a language unlike any other). Latham, Natural History of Man, 342, 1850. Prichard, Physical History of Mankind, V, 406, 1847 (following Gallatin). Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Indigenous Tribes, III, 402, 1853 (only one tribe).
> Aliche, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 349, 1850 (near Nacogdoches; not classified).
> Aliche, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 349, 1850 (near Nacogdoches; not classified).
> Yatassees, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 116, 1836 (the single tribe; said by Dr. Sibley to be different from any other; referred to as a family).
> Yatassees, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 116, 1836 (the only tribe; claimed by Dr. Sibley to be distinct from all others; referred to as a family).
> Riccarees, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 344, 1850 (kept distinct from Pawnee family).
> Riccarees, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 344, 1850 (kept separate from Pawnee family).
> Washita, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc., Lond., 103, 1856. Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 441, 1859 (revokes previous opinion of its distinctness and refers it to Pawnee family).
> Washita, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc., Lond., 103, 1856. Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 441, 1859 (withdraws earlier belief in its uniqueness and links it to the Pawnee family).
> Witchitas, Buschmann, ibid., (same as his Washita).
> Witchitas, Buschmann, same as his Washita.
Derivation: From the Caddo term ka´-ede, signifying “chief” (Gatschet).
Derivation: From the Caddo term ka´-ede, meaning “chief” (Gatschet).
The Pawnee and Caddo, now known to be of the same linguistic family, were supposed by Gallatin and by many later writers to be distinct, and accordingly both names appear in the Archæologia Americana as family designations. Both names are unobjectionable, but as the term Caddo has priority by a few pages preference is given to it.
The Pawnee and Caddo, now recognized as belonging to the same language family, were mistakenly considered distinct by Gallatin and many later authors. As a result, both names are included in the Archæologia Americana as family labels. Both terms are acceptable, but since the term Caddo is listed first in a few pages, it is preferred.
Gallatin states “that the Caddoes formerly lived 300 miles up Red River but have now moved to a branch of Red River.” He refers to the Nandakoes, the Inies or Tachies, and the Nabedaches as speaking dialects of the Caddo language.
Gallatin states "that the Caddoes used to live 300 miles up Red River but have now moved to a branch of Red River." He mentions the Nandakoes, the Inies or Tachies, and the Nabedaches as speaking dialects of the Caddo language.
Under Pawnee two tribes were included by Gallatin: The Pawnees proper and the Ricaras. The Pawnee tribes occupied the country on the Platte River adjoining the Loup Fork. The Ricara towns were on the upper Missouri in latitude 46° 30'. 60 The boundaries of the Caddoan family, as at present understood, can best be given under three primary groups, Northern, Middle, and Southern.
Under Pawnee, Gallatin included two tribes: the Pawnees and the Ricaras. The Pawnee tribes lived along the Platte River next to the Loup Fork. The Ricara towns were located on the upper Missouri at latitude 46° 30'. 60 The boundaries of the Caddoan family, as we understand them today, can best be categorized into three main groups: Northern, Middle, and Southern.
Northern group.—This comprises the Arikara or Ree, now confined to a small village (on Fort Berthold Reservation, North Dakota,) which they share with the Mandan and Hidatsa tribes of the Siouan family. The Arikara are the remains of ten different tribes of “Paneas,” who had been driven from their country lower down the Missouri River (near the Ponka habitat in northern Nebraska) by the Dakota. In 1804 they were in three villages, nearer their present location.21
Northern group.—This consists of the Arikara, or Ree, who are currently living in a small village (on the Fort Berthold Reservation in North Dakota) that they share with the Mandan and Hidatsa tribes from the Siouan family. The Arikara are the remnants of ten different tribes known as "Paneas," who were forced out of their territory further down the Missouri River (near the Ponka area in northern Nebraska) by the Dakota. In 1804, they were settled in three villages, closer to their current location.21
According to Omaha tradition, the Arikara were their allies when these two tribes and several others were east of the Mississippi River.22 Fort Berthold Reservation, their present abode, is in the northwest corner of North Dakota.
According to Omaha tradition, the Arikara were their allies when these two tribes and several others were east of the Mississippi River.22 Fort Berthold Reservation, their current home, is in the northwest corner of North Dakota.
Middle group.—This includes the four tribes or villages of Pawnee, the Grand, Republican, Tapage, and Skidi. Dunbar says: “The original hunting ground of the Pawnee extended from the Niobrara,” in Nebraska, “south to the Arkansas, but no definite boundaries can be fixed.” In modern times their villages have been on the Platte River west of Columbus, Nebraska. The Omaha and Oto were sometimes southeast of them near the mouth of the Platte, and the Comanche were northwest of them on the upper part of one of the branches of the Loup Fork.23 The Pawnee were removed to Indian Territory in 1876. The Grand Pawnee and Tapage did not wander far from their habitat on the Platte. The Republican Pawnee separated from the Grand about the year 1796, and made a village on a “large northwardly branch of the Kansas River, to which they have given their name; afterwards they subdivided, and lived in different parts of the country on the waters of Kansas River. In 1805 they rejoined the Grand Pawnee.” The Skidi (Panimaha, or Pawnee Loup), according to Omaha tradition,24 formerly dwelt east of the Mississippi River, where they were the allies of the Arikara, Omaha, Ponka, etc. After their passage of the Missouri they were conquered by the Grand Pawnee, Tapage, and Republican tribes, with whom they have remained to this day. De L’Isle25 gives twelve Panimaha villages on the Missouri River north of the Pani villages on the Kansas River.
Middle group.—This includes the four tribes or villages of the Pawnee: the Grand, Republican, Tapage, and Skidi. Dunbar states: “The original hunting grounds of the Pawnee extended from the Niobrara in Nebraska, south to the Arkansas, but no definite boundaries can be set.” Nowadays, their villages have been located on the Platte River west of Columbus, Nebraska. The Omaha and Oto were sometimes southeast of them near the mouth of the Platte, while the Comanche were northwest of them along the upper part of one of the branches of the Loup Fork.23 The Pawnee were relocated to Indian Territory in 1876. The Grand Pawnee and Tapage didn’t wander far from their habitat on the Platte. The Republican Pawnee split from the Grand around 1796 and established a village on a “large northward branch of the Kansas River, which they named; later, they subdivided and lived in different areas along the waters of the Kansas River. In 1805, they reunited with the Grand Pawnee.” The Skidi (Panimaha, or Pawnee Loup), according to Omaha tradition,24 previously lived east of the Mississippi River, where they were allies with the Arikara, Omaha, Ponca, and others. After crossing the Missouri, they were conquered by the Grand Pawnee, Tapage, and Republican tribes, with whom they have remained to this day. De L’Isle25 lists twelve Panimaha villages on the Missouri River, to the north of the Pani villages on the Kansas River.
Southern group.—This includes the Caddo, Wichita, Kichai, and other tribes or villages which were formerly in Texas, Louisiana, Arkansas, and Indian Territory.
Southern group.—This includes the Caddo, Wichita, Kichai, and other tribes or villages that used to be in Texas, Louisiana, Arkansas, and Indian Territory.
The Caddo and Kichai have undoubtedly been removed from their priscan habitats, but the Wichita, judging from the survival of local names (Washita River, Indian Territory, Wichita Falls, Texas) and the statement of La Harpe,26 are now in or near one of their early abodes. Dr. Sibley27 locates the Caddo habitat 35 miles west of the main branch of Red River, being 120 miles by land from Natchitoches, and they formerly lived 375 miles higher up. Cornell’s Atlas (1870) places Caddo Lake in the northwest corner of Louisiana, in Caddo County. It also gives both Washita and Witchita as the name of a tributary of Red River of Louisiana. This duplication of names seems to show that the Wichita migrated from northwestern Louisiana and southwestern Arkansas to the Indian Territory. After comparing the statements of Dr. Sibley (as above) respecting the habitats of the Anadarko, loni, Nabadache, and Eyish with those of Schermerhorn respecting the Kädo hadatco,28 of Le Page Du Pratz (1758) concerning the Natchitoches, of Tonti29 and La Harpe30 about the Yatasi, of La Harpe (as above) about the Wichita, and of Sibley concerning the Kichai, we are led to fix upon the following as the approximate boundaries of the habitat of the southern group of the Caddoan family: Beginning on the northwest with that part of Indian Territory now occupied by the Wichita, Chickasaw, and Kiowa and Comanche Reservations, and running along the southern border of the Choctaw Reservation to the Arkansas line; thence due east to the headwaters of Washita or Witchita River, Polk County, Arkansas; thence through Arkansas and Louisiana along the western bank of that river to its mouth; thence southwest through Louisiana striking the Sabine River near Salem and Belgrade; thence southwest through Texas to Tawakonay Creek, and along that stream to the Brazos River; thence following that stream to Palo Pinto, Texas; thence northwest to the mouth of the North Fork of Red River; and thence to the beginning.
The Caddo and Kichai have definitely been displaced from their original habitats, but the Wichita, judging by the survival of local names (Washita River, Indian Territory, Wichita Falls, Texas) and the statement of La Harpe, are currently in or near one of their early homes. Dr. Sibley locates the Caddo habitat 35 miles west of the main branch of the Red River, which is 120 miles by land from Natchitoches, and they used to live 375 miles upstream. Cornell’s Atlas (1870) places Caddo Lake in the northwest corner of Louisiana, in Caddo County. It also lists both Washita and Wichita as names of a tributary of the Red River in Louisiana. This repetition of names suggests that the Wichita migrated from northwestern Louisiana and southwestern Arkansas to the Indian Territory. After comparing the statements of Dr. Sibley regarding the habitats of the Anadarko, Ioni, Nabadache, and Eyish with those of Schermerhorn concerning the Caddo by Le Page Du Pratz (1758) about the Natchitoches, Tonti, and La Harpe regarding the Yatasi, and La Harpe again about the Wichita, as well as Sibley about the Kichai, we can outline the following as the approximate boundaries of the habitat of the southern group of the Caddoan family: Starting in the northwest with that part of Indian Territory currently occupied by the Wichita, Chickasaw, Kiowa, and Comanche Reservations, and running along the southern border of the Choctaw Reservation to the Arkansas line; then due east to the headwaters of the Washita or Wichita River in Polk County, Arkansas; then through Arkansas and Louisiana along the western bank of that river to its mouth; then southwest through Louisiana to intersect the Sabine River near Salem and Belgrade; then southwest through Texas to Tawakonay Creek, and along that stream to the Brazos River; then following that river to Palo Pinto, Texas; then northwest to the mouth of the North Fork of the Red River; and then back to the starting point.
PRINCIPAL TRIBES.
Population.—The present number of the Caddoan stock is 2,259, of whom 447 are on the Fort Berthold Reservation, North Dakota, and the rest in the Indian Territory, some on the Ponca, Pawnee, and Otoe Reservation, the others on the Kiowa, Comanche, and Wichita Reservation. Below is given the population of the tribes officially recognized, compiled chiefly from the Indian Report for 1889:
Population.—The current population of the Caddoan tribe is 2,259, with 447 residing on the Fort Berthold Reservation in North Dakota. The remainder live in Indian Territory, some on the Ponca, Pawnee, and Otoe Reservations, while others are on the Kiowa, Comanche, and Wichita Reservations. Below is the population of the officially recognized tribes, primarily compiled from the Indian Report for 1889:
Arikara | 448 | |
Pawnee | 824 | |
Wichita | 176 | |
Towakarehu | 145 | |
Waco | 64 | |
385 | ||
Kichai | 63 | |
Caddo | 539 | |
Total | 2,259 |
CHIMAKUAN FAMILY.
= Chimakum, Gibbs in Pac. R. R. Rep., I, 431, 1855 (family doubtful).
= Chimakum, Gibbs in Pac. R. R. Rep., I, 431, 1855 (family uncertain).
= Chemakum, Eells in Am. Antiquarian, 52, Oct., 1880 (considers language different from any of its neighbors).
= Chemakum, Eells in Am. Antiquarian, 52, Oct., 1880 (considers language different from any of its neighbors).
< Puget Sound Group, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 474, 1878 (Chinakum included in this group).
< Puget Sound Group, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 474, 1878 (Chinakum included in this group).
< Nootka, Bancroft, Native Races, III, 564, 1882 (contains Chimakum).
< Nootka, Bancroft, Native Races, III, 564, 1882 (contains Chimakum).
Derivation unknown.
Origin unknown.
Concerning this language Gibbs, as above cited, states as follows:
Concerning this language, Gibbs, as mentioned above, states:
The language of the Chimakum “differs materially from either that of the Clallams or the Nisqually, and is not understood by any of their neighbors. In fact, they seem to have maintained it a State secret. To what family it will ultimately be referred, cannot now be decided.”
The language of the Chimakum is significantly different from that of the Clallams or the Nisqually, and no one else around them understands it. In fact, it seems they've kept it as a kind of state secret. It's unclear which family it will eventually be classified with.
Eells also asserts the distinctness of this language from any of its neighbors. Neither of the above authors assigned the language family rank, and accordingly Mr. Gatschet, who has made a comparison of vocabularies and finds the language to be quite distinct from any other, gives it the above name.
Eells also claims that this language is different from any of its neighboring languages. Neither of the authors mentioned above classified it into a language family, so Mr. Gatschet, who compared vocabularies and found the language to be quite unique, assigned it the name mentioned above.
The Chimakum are said to have been formerly one of the largest and most powerful tribes of Puget Sound. Their warlike habits early tended to diminish their numbers, and when visited by Gibbs in 1854 they counted only about seventy individuals. This small remnant occupied some fifteen small lodges on Port Townsend Bay. According to Gibbs “their territory seems to have embraced the shore from Port Townsend to Port Ludlow.”31 In 1884 there were, according to 63 Mr. Myron Eells, about twenty individuals left, most of whom are living near Port Townsend, Washington. Three or four live upon the Skokomish Reservation at the southern end of Hood’s Canal.
The Chimakum were once one of the largest and most powerful tribes in Puget Sound. Their aggressive nature led to a decline in their population, and when Gibbs visited in 1854, they only had around seventy members left. This small group lived in about fifteen small lodges along Port Townsend Bay. According to Gibbs, “their territory seems to have embraced the shore from Port Townsend to Port Ludlow.”31 By 1884, Mr. Myron Eells reported that there were about twenty individuals remaining, mostly living near Port Townsend, Washington. Three or four were residing on the Skokomish Reservation at the southern end of Hood’s Canal.
The Quile-ute, of whom in 1889 there were 252 living on the Pacific south of Cape Flattery, belong to the family. The Hoh, a sub-tribe of the latter, number 71 and are under the Puyallup Agency.
The Quileute, who in 1889 numbered 252 and lived on the Pacific south of Cape Flattery, are part of the family. The Hoh, a sub-tribe of this group, have 71 members and are under the Puyallup Agency.
PRINCIPAL TRIBES.
The following tribes are recognized:
The following tribes are acknowledged:
Chimakum. Quile-ute. |
CHIMARIKAN FAMILY.
= Chim-a-ri´-ko, Powell in Cont. N.A. Eth., III, 474, 1877. Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 255, April, 1882 (stated to be a distinct family).
= Chim-a-ri´-ko, Powell in Cont. N.A. Eth., III, 474, 1877. Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 255, April, 1882 (said to be a separate family).
According to Powers, this family was represented, so far as known, by two tribes in California, one the Chi-mál-a-kwe, living on New River, a branch of the Trinity, the other the Chimariko, residing upon the Trinity itself from Burnt Ranch up to the mouth of North Fork, California. The two tribes are said to have been as numerous formerly as the Hupa, by whom they were overcome and nearly exterminated. Upon the arrival of the Americans only twenty-five of the Chimalakwe were left. In 1875 Powers collected a Chimariko vocabulary of about two hundred words from a woman, supposed to be one of the last three women of that tribe. In 1889 Mr. Curtin, while in Hoopa Valley, found a Chimariko man seventy or more years old, who is believed to be one of the two living survivors of the tribe. Mr. Curtin obtained a good vocabulary and much valuable information relative to the former habitat and history of the tribe. Although a study of these vocabularies reveals a number of words having correspondences with the Kulanapan (Pomo) equivalents, yet the greater number show no affinities with the dialects of the latter family, or indeed with any other. The family is therefore classed as distinct.
According to Powers, this family was represented by two tribes in California, as far as is known: one was the Chi-mál-a-kwe, living on New River, a branch of the Trinity, and the other was the Chimariko, residing along the Trinity itself from Burnt Ranch to the mouth of North Fork, California. The two tribes were said to have been as numerous in the past as the Hupa, who ultimately overcame and nearly wiped them out. When the Americans arrived, only twenty-five Chimalakwe remained. In 1875, Powers collected a Chimariko vocabulary of about two hundred words from a woman believed to be one of the last three women from that tribe. In 1889, Mr. Curtin, while in Hoopa Valley, found a Chimariko man who was over seventy years old and is thought to be one of the last two living survivors of the tribe. Mr. Curtin managed to obtain a good vocabulary and a lot of valuable information about the tribe's former habitat and history. Although studying these vocabularies reveals some words that have similarities to Kulanapan (Pomo) equivalents, most show no connections to the dialects of that family, or to any other. Therefore, the family is categorized as distinct.
PRINCIPAL TRIBES.
Chimariko. Chimalakwe. |
CHIMMESYAN FAMILY.
= Chimmesyan, Latham in Jour. Eth. Soc. Lond., I, 154, 1848 (between 53° 30' and 55° 30' N.L.). Latham, Opuscula, 250, 1860.
= Chimmesyan, Latham in Journal of the Ethnological Society of London, I, 154, 1848 (between 53° 30' and 55° 30' N.L.). Latham, Opuscula, 250, 1860.
Chemmesyan, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 300, 1850 (includes Naaskok, Chemmesyan, Kitshatlah, Kethumish). Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 72, 1856. Latham, Opuscula, 339, 1860. Latham, Elements Comp. Phil., 401, 1862.
Chemmesyan, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 300, 1850 (includes Naaskok, Chemmesyan, Kitshatlah, Kethumish). Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 72, 1856. Latham, Opuscula, 339, 1860. Latham, Elements Comp. Phil., 401, 1862.
= Chymseyans, Kane, Wanderings of an Artist, app., 1859 (a census of tribes of N.W. coast classified by languages).
= Chymseyans, Kane, Wanderings of an Artist, app., 1859 (a survey of tribes of the Northwest coast sorted by languages).
= Tshimsian, Tolmie and Dawson, Comp. Vocabs., 14-25, 1884.
= Tshimsian, Tolmie and Dawson, Comp. Vocabs., 14-25, 1884.
= Tsimpsi-an´, Dall in Proc. Am. Ass., 379, 1885 (mere mention of family).
= Tsimpsi-an, Dall in Proc. Am. Ass., 379, 1885 (just a mention of the family).
X Northern, Scouler in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc. Lond., XI, 220, 1841 (includes Chimmesyans).
X Northern, Scouler in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc. Lond., XI, 220, 1841 (includes Chimmesyans).
X Haidah, Scouler in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc. Lond., XI, 220, 1841 (same as his Northern family).
X Haidah, Scholar in Journal of the Royal Geographical Society of London, XI, 220, 1841 (same as his Northern family).
< Naas, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, c, 1848 (including Chimmesyan). Berghaus (1851), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1852.
< Naas, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, c, 1848 (including Chimmesyan). Berghaus (1851), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1852.
< Naass, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, 77, 1848. Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853.
< Naass, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, 77, 1848. Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853.
= Nasse, Dall in Cont. N.A. Eth., I, 36, 40, 1877 (or Chimsyan).
= Nasse, Dall in Cont. N.A. Eth., I, 36, 40, 1877 (or Chimsyan).
< Nass, Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 564, 606, 1882 (includes Nass and Sebassa Indians of this family, also Hailtza).
< Nass, Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 564, 606, 1882 (includes Nass and Sebassa Indians of this family, also Hailtza).
= Hydahs, Keane, App. to Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 473, 1878 (includes Tsimsheeans, Nass, Skeenas, Sebasses of present family).
= Hydahs, Keane, App. to Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 473, 1878 (includes Tsimsheeans, Nass, Skeenas, Sebasses of present family).
Derivation: From the Chimsian ts’em, “on;” kcian, “main river:” “On the main (Skeena) river.”
Derivation: From the Chimsian ts’em, “on;” kcian, “main river:” “On the main (Skeena) river.”
This name appears in a paper of Latham’s published in 1848. To it is referred a vocabulary of Tolmie’s. The area where it is spoken is said by Latham to be 50° 30' and 55° 30'. The name has become established by long usage, and it is chiefly on this account that it has been given preference over the Naas of Gallatin of the same year. The latter name was given by Gallatin to a group of languages now known to be not related, viz, Hailstla, Haceltzuk Billechola, and Chimeysan. Billechola belongs under Salishan, a family name of Gallatin’s of 1836.
This name was mentioned in a paper by Latham published in 1848. It is associated with a vocabulary from Tolmie. Latham states that the area where this language is spoken is located between 50° 30' and 55° 30'. The name has been widely used for a long time, which is why it is preferred over Gallatin's Naas from the same year. Gallatin used the latter name for a group of languages that are now known to be unrelated, namely Hailstla, Haceltzuk Billechola, and Chimeysan. Billechola falls under Salishan, a family name that Gallatin used in 1836.
Were it necessary to take Naas as a family name it would best apply to Chimsian, it being the name of a dialect and village of Chimsian Indians, while it has no pertinency whatever to Hailstla and Haceltzuk, which are closely related and belong to a family quite distinct from the Chimmesyan. As stated above, however, the term Naas is rejected in favor of Chimmesyan of the same date.
Were it necessary to use Naas as a family name, it would be most fitting for Chimsian, as it is the name of a dialect and a village of the Chimsian Indians. However, it has no relevance to Hailstla and Haceltzuk, which are closely related and belong to a distinct family separate from Chimmesyan. As mentioned earlier, the term Naas is ultimately dismissed in favor of Chimmesyan, which dates from the same period.
For the boundaries of this family the linguistic map published by Tolmie and Dawson, in 1884, is followed.
For the boundaries of this family, the linguistic map published by Tolmie and Dawson in 1884 is used.
PRINCIPAL TRIBES.
Following is a list of the Chimmesyan tribes, according to Boas:32
Following is a list of the Chimmesyan tribes, according to Boas:32
A. Nasqa´: |
Nasqa´. Gyitksa´n. |
B. Tsimshian proper: |
Ts’emsia´n. Gyits’umrä´lon. Gyits’ala´ser. Gyitqā´tla. Gyitg·ā´ata. Gyidesdzo´. |
Population.—The Canadian Indian Report for 1888 records a total for all the tribes of this family of 5,000. In the fall of 1887 about 1,000 of these Indians, in charge of Mr. William Duncan, removed 65 to Annette Island, about 60 miles north of the southern boundary of Alaska, near Port Chester, where they have founded a new settlement called New Metlakahtla. Here houses have been erected, day and industrial schools established, and the Indians are understood to be making remarkable progress in civilization.
Population.—The Canadian Indian Report for 1888 notes a total of 5,000 for all the tribes in this group. In the fall of 1887, about 1,000 of these Indians, led by Mr. William Duncan, relocated 65 to Annette Island, roughly 60 miles north of the southern border of Alaska, near Port Chester, where they established a new settlement called New Metlakahtla. Here, they built houses, set up day and industrial schools, and the Indians are reportedly making impressive progress in civilization.
CHINOOKAN FAMILY.
> Chinooks, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 134, 306, 1836 (a single tribe at mouth of Columbia).
> Chinooks, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 134, 306, 1836 (a single tribe at the mouth of the Columbia).
= Chinooks, Hale in U.S. Expl. Expd., VI, 198, 1846. Gallatin, after Hale, in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, 15, 1848 (or Tsinuk).
= Chinooks, Hale in U.S. Expl. Expd., VI, 198, 1846. Gallatin, after Hale, in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, 15, 1848 (or Tsinuk).
= Tshinuk, Hale in U. S. Expl. Expd., VI, 562, 569, 1846 (contains Watlala or Upper Chinook, including Watlala, Nihaloitih, or Echeloots; and Tshinuk, including Tshinuk, Tlatsap, Wakaikam).
= Tshinuk, Hale in U.S. Explor. Expd., VI, 562, 569, 1846 (includes Watlala or Upper Chinook, such as Watlala, Nihaloitih, or Echeloots; and Tshinuk, encompassing Tshinuk, Tlatsap, Wakaikam).
= Tsinuk, Gallatin, after Hale, in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, 15, 1848. Berghaus (1851), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1852.
= Tsinuk, Gallatin, after Hale, in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, 15, 1848. Berghaus (1851), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1852.
> Cheenook, Latham in Jour. Eth. Soc. Lond., I, 236, 1848. Latham, Opuscula, 253, 1860.
> Cheenook, Latham in Jour. Eth. Soc. Lond., I, 236, 1848. Latham, Opuscula, 253, 1860.
> Chinuk, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 317, 1850 (same as Tshinúk; includes Chinúks proper, Klatsops, Kathlamut, Wakáikam, Watlala, Nihaloitih). Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 73, 1856 (mere mention of family name). Latham, Opuscula, 340, 1860. Buschmann. Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 616-619, 1859.
> Chinuk, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 317, 1850 (same as Tshinúk; includes Chinúks proper, Klatsops, Kathlamut, Wakáikam, Watlala, Nihaloitih). Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 73, 1856 (just a mention of the family name). Latham, Opuscula, 340, 1860. Buschmann. Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 616-619, 1859.
= Tschinuk, Berghaus (1851), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1852. Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 73, 1856 (mere mention of family name). Latham, Opuscula, 340, 1860. Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 402, 1862 (cites a short vocabulary of Watlala).
= Tschinuk, Berghaus (1851), Physics. Atlas, map 17, 1852. Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 73, 1856 (just a mention of the family name). Latham, Opuscula, 340, 1860. Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 402, 1862 (references a short vocabulary of Watlala).
= Tshinook, Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853 (Chinooks, Clatsops, and Watlala). Tolmie and Dawson, Comp. Vocabs. Brit. Col., 51, 61, 1884.
= Tshinook, Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853 (Chinooks, Clatsops, and Watlala). Tolmie and Dawson, Comp. Vocabs. Brit. Col., 51, 61, 1884.
> Tshinuk, Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 616, 1859 (same as his Chinuk).
> Tshinuk, Buschmann, Traces of the Aztec Language, 616, 1859 (same as his Chinuk).
= T’sinūk, Dall, after Gibbs, in Cont. N.A. Eth., 1, 241, 1877 (mere mention of family).
= T’sinūk, Dall, after Gibbs, in Cont. N.A. Eth., 1, 241, 1877 (just a mention of family).
= Chinook, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 167, 1877 (names and gives habitats of tribes). Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 442, 1877.
= Chinook, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 167, 1877 (names and gives habitats of tribes). Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 442, 1877.
< Chinooks, Keane, App. to Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 474, 1878 (includes Skilloots, Watlalas, Lower Chinooks, Wakiakurns, Cathlamets, Clatsops, Calapooyas, Clackamas, Killamooks, Yamkally, Chimook Jargon; of these Calapooyas and Yamkally are Kalapooian, Killamooks are Salishan).
< Chinooks, Keane, App. to Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 474, 1878 (includes Skilloots, Watlalas, Lower Chinooks, Wakiakurns, Cathlamets, Clatsops, Calapooyas, Clackamas, Killamooks, Yamkally, Chimook Jargon; of these Calapooyas and Yamkally are Kalapooian, Killamooks are Salishan).
> Chinook, Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 565, 626-628, 1882 (enumerates Chinook, Wakiakum, Cathlamet, Clatsop, Multnomah, Skilloot, Watlala).
> Chinook, Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 565, 626-628, 1882 (lists Chinook, Wakiakum, Cathlamet, Clatsop, Multnomah, Skilloot, Watlala).
X Nootka-Columbian, Scouler in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc. Lond., XI, 224, 1841 (includes Cheenooks, and Cathlascons of present family).
X Nootka-Columbian, Scouler in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc. Lond., XI, 224, 1841 (includes Cheenooks and Cathlascons of the current family).
X Southern, Scouler, ibid., 234 (same as his Nootka-Columbian family above).
X Southern, Scouler, ibid., 234 (same as his Nootka-Columbian family above).
The vocabulary of the Chinook tribe, upon which the family name was based, was derived from the mouth of the Columbia. As now understood the family embraces a number of tribes, speaking allied languages, whose former homes extended from the mouth of the river for some 200 miles, or to The Dalles. According to Lewis and Clarke, our best authorities on the pristine home of this family, most of their villages were on the banks of the river, chiefly upon the northern bank, though they probably claimed the land upon either bank for several miles back. 66 Their villages also extended on the Pacific coast north nearly to the northern extreme of Shoalwater Bay, and to the south to about Tillamook Head, some 20 miles from the mouth of the Columbia.
The vocabulary of the Chinook tribe, which the family name is based on, came from the mouth of the Columbia River. As it’s understood today, the family includes several tribes that speak related languages, with their original territories stretching about 200 miles from the river's mouth to The Dalles. According to Lewis and Clark, our best sources on the original homes of this family, most of their villages were located along the riverbanks, mainly on the northern side, although they likely claimed land on both sides for several miles inland. 66 Their villages also reached along the Pacific coast, nearly up to the northern edge of Shoalwater Bay, and to the south around Tillamook Head, about 20 miles from the mouth of the Columbia.
PRINCIPAL TRIBES.
Lower Chinook: | Upper Chinook: |
Chinook. Clatsop. |
Cathlamet. Cathlapotle. Chilluckquittequaw. Clackama. Cooniac. Echeloot. Multnoma. Wahkiacum. Wasco. |
Population.—There are two hundred and eighty-eight Wasco on the Warm Springs Reservation, Oregon, and one hundred and fifty on the Yakama Reservation, Washington. On the Grande Ronde Reservation, Oregon, there are fifty-nine Clackama. From information derived from Indians by Mr. Thomas Priestly, United States Indian Agent at Yakama, it is learned that there still remain three or four families of “regular Chinook Indians,” probably belonging to one of the down-river tribes, about 6 miles above the mouth of the Columbia. Two of these speak the Chinook proper, and three have an imperfect command of Clatsop. There are eight or ten families, probably also of one of the lower river tribes, living near Freeport, Washington.
Population.—There are 288 Wasco people on the Warm Springs Reservation in Oregon and 150 on the Yakama Reservation in Washington. On the Grande Ronde Reservation in Oregon, there are 59 Clackama individuals. From information gathered from Native Americans by Mr. Thomas Priestly, the United States Indian Agent at Yakama, it is known that there are still three or four families of "regular Chinook Indians," likely part of one of the lower river tribes, located about 6 miles upstream from the mouth of the Columbia River. Two of them speak proper Chinook, while three have a limited ability to speak Clatsop. There are also about eight or ten families, possibly from one of the lower river tribes, living near Freeport, Washington.
Some of the Watlala, or Upper Chinook, live near the Cascades, about 55 miles below The Dalles. There thus remain probably between five and six hundred of the Indians of this family.
Some of the Watlala, or Upper Chinook, live near the Cascades, about 55 miles downstream from The Dalles. There are probably between five and six hundred members of this group still around.
CHITIMACHAN FAMILY.
= Chitimachas, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 114, 117, 1836. Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 407, 1847.
= Chitimachas, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 114, 117, 1836. Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 407, 1847.
= Chetimachas, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 306, 1836. Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, xcix, 1848. Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 341, 1850. Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853.
= Chetimachas, Gallatin in Transactions and Collections of the American Antiquarian Society, II, 306, 1836. Gallatin in Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, II, pt. 1, xcix, 1848. Latham, Natural History of Man, 341, 1850. Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Indian Tribes, III, 402, 1853.
= Chetimacha, Latham in Proc. Philolog. Soc. Lond., II, 31-50, 1846. Latham, Opuscula, 293, 1860.
= Chetimacha, Latham in Proc. Philolog. Soc. Lond., II, 31-50, 1846. Latham, Opuscula, 293, 1860.
= Chetemachas, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, 77, 1848 (same as Chitimachas).
= Chetemachas, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, 77, 1848 (same as Chitimachas).
= Shetimasha, Gatschet, Creek Mig. Legend, I, 44, 1884. Gatschet in Science, 414, April 29, 1887.
= Shetimasha, Gatschet, Creek Mig. Legend, I, 44, 1884. Gatschet in Science, 414, April 29, 1887.
Derivation: From Choctaw words tchúti, “cooking vessels,” másha, “they possess,” (Gatschet).
Derivation: From Choctaw words tchúti, “cooking vessels,” másha, “they possess,” (Gatschet).
This family was based upon the language of the tribe of the same name, “formerly living in the vicinity of Lake Barataria, and still existing (1836) in lower Louisiana.”
This family was based on the language of the tribe of the same name, “formerly living near Lake Barataria, and still existing (1836) in lower Louisiana.”
In 1881 Mr. Gatschet visited the remnants of this tribe in Louisiana. He found about fifty individuals, a portion of whom lived on Grand River, but the larger part in Charenton, St. Mary’s Parish. The tribal organization was abandoned in 1879 on the death of their chief.
In 1881, Mr. Gatschet visited the remaining members of this tribe in Louisiana. He found about fifty individuals, some of whom lived on Grand River, while most were in Charenton, St. Mary’s Parish. The tribal organization was disbanded in 1879 after the death of their chief.
CHUMASHAN FAMILY.
> Santa Barbara, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc., Lond., 85, 1856 (includes Santa Barbara, Santa Inez, San Luis Obispo languages). Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 531, 535, 538, 602, 1859. Latham, Opuscula, 351, 1860. Powell in Cont. N.A. Eth., III, 550, 567, 1877 (Kasuá, Santa Inez, Id. of Santa Cruz, Santa Barbara). Gatschet in U.S. Geog. Surv. W. 100th M., VII, 419, 1879 (cites La Purísima, Santa Inez, Santa Barbara, Kasuá, Mugu, Santa Cruz Id.).
> Santa Barbara, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc., Lond., 85, 1856 (includes Santa Barbara, Santa Inez, San Luis Obispo languages). Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 531, 535, 538, 602, 1859. Latham, Opuscula, 351, 1860. Powell in Cont. N.A. Eth., III, 550, 567, 1877 (Kasuá, Santa Inez, Id. of Santa Cruz, Santa Barbara). Gatschet in U.S. Geog. Surv. W. 100th M., VII, 419, 1879 (cites La Purísima, Santa Inez, Santa Barbara, Kasuá, Mugu, Santa Cruz Id.).
X Santa Barbara, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 156, 1877 (Santa Inez, Santa Barbara, Santa Cruz Id., San Luis Obispo, San Antonio).
X Santa Barbara, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 156, 1877 (Santa Inez, Santa Barbara, Santa Cruz Is., San Luis Obispo, San Antonio).
Derivation: From Chumash, the name of the Santa Rosa Islanders.
Derivation: From Chumash, the name for the Santa Rosa Islanders.
The several dialects of this family have long been known under the group or family name, “Santa Barbara,” which seems first to have been used in a comprehensive sense by Latham in 1856, who included under it three languages, viz: Santa Barbara, Santa Inez, and San Luis Obispo. The term has no special pertinence as a family designation, except from the fact that the Santa Barbara Mission, around which one of the dialects of the family was spoken, is perhaps more widely known than any of the others. Nevertheless, as it is the family name first applied to the group and has, moreover, passed into current use its claim to recognition would not be questioned were it not a compound name. Under the rule adopted the latter fact necessitates its rejection. As a suitable substitute the term Chumashan is here adopted. Chumash is the name of the Santa Rosa Islanders, who spoke a dialect of this stock, and is a term widely known among the Indians of this family.
The various dialects within this family have long been referred to as “Santa Barbara,” a term that Latham first used in a broad sense in 1856, including three languages: Santa Barbara, Santa Inez, and San Luis Obispo. The name doesn’t hold much significance as a family designation, other than the fact that the Santa Barbara Mission, where one of the dialects was spoken, is probably more famous than the others. However, since it’s the first name applied to the group and has become commonly used, its validity isn’t questioned unless it’s considered a compound name. According to the adopted rule, this fact requires its rejection. Instead, the term Chumashan is used here. Chumash refers to the Santa Rosa Islanders, who spoke a dialect from this family, and is a commonly recognized term among the Indians of this group.
The Indians of this family lived in villages, the villages as a whole apparently having no political connection, and hence there appears to have been no appellation in use among them to designate themselves as a whole people.
The members of this family of Indians lived in villages, which seemingly had no political ties to each other, so there doesn't seem to have been a name they used collectively to identify themselves as one people.
Dialects of this language were spoken at the Missions of San Buenaventura, Santa Barbara, Santa Iñez, Purísima, and San Luis Obispo. Kindred dialects were spoken also upon the Islands of Santa Rosa and Santa Cruz, and also, probably, upon such other of the Santa Barbara Islands as formerly were permanently inhabited.
Dialects of this language were spoken at the Missions of San Buenaventura, Santa Barbara, Santa Iñez, Purísima, and San Luis Obispo. Related dialects were also spoken on the Islands of Santa Rosa and Santa Cruz, and probably on other Santa Barbara Islands that were once permanently inhabited.
These dialects collectively form a remarkably homogeneous family, all of them, with the exception of the San Luis Obispo, being closely related and containing very many words in common. Vocabularies representing six dialects of the language are in possession of the Bureau of Ethnology.
These dialects together make up a surprisingly uniform family, all of them, except for the San Luis Obispo, being closely related and sharing a lot of common words. The Bureau of Ethnology has vocabularies from six dialects of the language.
Population.—In 1884 Mr. Henshaw visited the several counties formerly inhabited by the populous tribes of this family and discovered that about forty men, women, and children survived. The adults still speak their old language when conversing with each other, though on other occasions they use Spanish. The largest settlement is at San Buenaventura, where perhaps 20 individuals live near the outskirts of the town.
Population.—In 1884, Mr. Henshaw visited the various counties that were once home to the large tribes of this family and found that about forty men, women, and children were still alive. The adults continue to speak their native language when they talk to each other, but they also use Spanish at other times. The biggest settlement is in San Buenaventura, where around 20 people live on the outskirts of the town.
COAHUILTECAN FAMILY.
= Coahuilteco, Orozco y Berra, Geografía de las Lenguas de México, map, 1864.
= Coahuilteco, Orozco and Berra, Geography of the Languages of Mexico, map, 1864.
= Tejano ó Coahuilteco, Pimentel, Cuadro Descriptivo y Comparativo de las Lenguas Indígenas de México, II, 409, 1865. (A preliminary notice with example from the language derived from Garcia’s Manual, 1760.)
= Tejano or Coahuilteco, Pimentel, Descriptive and Comparative Chart of Indigenous Languages of Mexico, II, 409, 1865. (A preliminary notice with examples from the language taken from Garcia’s Manual, 1760.)
Derivation: From the name of the Mexican State Coahuila.
Derivation: From the name of the Mexican state Coahuila.
This family appears to have included numerous tribes in southwestern Texas and in Mexico. They are chiefly known through the record of the Rev. Father Bartolomé Garcia (Manual para administrar, etc.), published in 1760. In the preface to the “Manual” he enumerates the tribes and sets forth some phonetic and grammatic differences between the dialects.
This family seems to have included several tribes in southwestern Texas and Mexico. They are mainly known from the records of Rev. Father Bartolomé Garcia (Manual para administrar, etc.), published in 1760. In the preface to the “Manual,” he lists the tribes and highlights some phonetic and grammatical differences between the dialects.
On page 63 of his Geografía de las Lenguas de México, 1864, Orozco y Berra gives a list of the languages of Mexico and includes Coahuilteco, indicating it as the language of Coahuila, Nuevo Leon, and Tamaulipas. He does not, however, indicate its extension into Texas. It would thus seem that he intended the name as a general designation for the language of all the cognate tribes.
On page 63 of his *Geografía de las Lenguas de México*, 1864, Orozco y Berra provides a list of the languages spoken in Mexico and includes Coahuilteco, noting it as the language of Coahuila, Nuevo Leon, and Tamaulipas. However, he does not mention its presence in Texas. It appears that he meant this term to be a general label for the language of all the related tribes.
Upon his colored ethnographic map, also, Orozco y Berra designates the Mexican portion of the area formerly occupied by the tribes of this family Coahuilteco.33 In his statement that the language and tribes are extinct this author was mistaken, as a few Indians still survive who speak one of the dialects of this family, and in 1886 Mr. Gatschet collected vocabularies of two tribes, the Comecrudo and Cotoname, who live on the Rio Grande, at Las Prietas, State of Tamaulipas. Of the Comecrudo some twenty-five still remain, of whom seven speak the language.
On his colorful ethnographic map, Orozco y Berra also marks the Mexican section of the area that was once occupied by the tribes of this Coahuilteco family.33 In his claim that the language and tribes have gone extinct, this author was incorrect, as a few Indigenous people still exist who speak one of the dialects from this family. In 1886, Mr. Gatschet gathered vocabulary lists from two tribes, the Comecrudo and Cotoname, who live along the Rio Grande at Las Prietas in the state of Tamaulipas. About twenty-five Comecrudo remain, of whom seven still speak the language.
The Cotoname are practically extinct, although Mr. Gatschet obtained one hundred and twenty-five words from a man said to be of this blood. Besides the above, Mr. Gatschet obtained information of the existence of two women of the Pinto or Pakawá tribe who live at La Volsa, near Reynosa, Tamaulipas, on the Rio Grande, and who are said to speak their own language.
The Cotoname are nearly extinct, although Mr. Gatschet collected one hundred and twenty-five words from a man believed to be from this group. Additionally, Mr. Gatschet found out about two women from the Pinto or Pakawá tribe who live in La Volsa, near Reynosa, Tamaulipas, on the Rio Grande, and are said to speak their own language.
PRINCIPAL TRIBES.
Alasapa. Cachopostate. Casa chiquita. Chayopine. Comecrudo. Cotoname. Mano de perro. Mescal. Miakan. Orejone. Pacuâche. |
Pajalate. Pakawá. Pamaque. Pampopa. Pastancoya. Patacale. Pausane. Payseya. Sanipao. Tâcame. Venado. |
COPEHAN FAMILY.
> Cop-eh, Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 421, 1853 (mentioned as a dialect).
> Cop-eh, Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 421, 1853 (mentioned as a dialect).
= Copeh, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc., Lond., 79, 1856 (of Upper Sacramento; cites vocabs. from Gallatin and Schoolcraft). Latham, Opuscula, 345, 1860. Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 412, 1862.
= Copeh, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc., Lond., 79, 1856 (of Upper Sacramento; cites vocabularies from Gallatin and Schoolcraft). Latham, Opuscula, 345, 1860. Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 412, 1862.
= Wintoons, Powers in Overland Monthly, 530, June, 1874 (Upper Sacramento and Upper Trinity). Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 160, 1877 (defines habitat and names tribes). Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Miscellany, 434, 1877.
= Wintoons, Powers in Overland Monthly, 530, June, 1874 (Upper Sacramento and Upper Trinity). Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 160, 1877 (defines habitat and names tribes). Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Miscellany, 434, 1877.
= Win-tún, Powell in Cont. N.A. Eth., III, 518-534, 1877 (vocabularies of Wintun, Sacramento River, Trinity Indians). Gatschet in U.S. Geog. Surv. W. 100th M., VII, 418, 1879 (defines area occupied by family).
= Win-tún, Powell in Cont. N.A. Eth., III, 518-534, 1877 (vocabularies of Wintun, Sacramento River, Trinity Indians). Gatschet in U.S. Geog. Surv. W. 100th M., VII, 418, 1879 (defines area occupied by family).
X Klamath, Keane, App. to Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 475, 1878 (cited as including Copahs, Patawats, Wintoons). Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 565, 1882 (contains Copah).
X Klamath, Keane, App. to Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 475, 1878 (cited as including Copahs, Patawats, Wintoons). Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 565, 1882 (contains Copah).
> Napa, Keane, ibid., 476, 524, 1878 (includes Myacomas, Calayomanes, Caymus, Ulucas, Suscols). Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 567, 1882 (includes Napa, Myacoma, Calayomane, Caymus, Uluca, Suscol).
> Napa, Keane, ibid., 476, 524, 1878 (includes Myacomas, Calayomanes, Caymus, Ulucas, Suscols). Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 567, 1882 (includes Napa, Myacoma, Calayomane, Caymus, Uluca, Suscol).
This name was proposed by Latham with evident hesitation. He says of it: “How far this will eventually turn out to be a convenient name for the group (or how far the group itself will be real), is uncertain.” Under it he places two vocabularies, one from the Upper Sacramento and the other from Mag Redings in Shasta County. The head of Putos Creek is given as headquarters for the language. Recent investigations have served to fully confirm the validity of the family.
This name was suggested by Latham with clear hesitation. He remarks: “It’s uncertain how useful this name will be for the group (or how real the group itself will be).” He includes two vocabularies, one from the Upper Sacramento and the other from Mag Redings in Shasta County. The head of Putos Creek is noted as the headquarters for the language. Recent research has thoroughly confirmed the legitimacy of the family.
GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION.
The territory of the Copehan family is bounded on the north by Mount Shasta and the territory of the Sastean and Lutuamian families, on the east by the territory of the Palaihnihan, Yanan, and Pujunan families, and on the south by the bays of San Pablo and Suisun and the lower waters of the Sacramento.
The Copehan family's land is bordered to the north by Mount Shasta and the lands of the Sastean and Lutuamian families, to the east by the territories of the Palaihnihan, Yanan, and Pujunan families, and to the south by the bays of San Pablo and Suisun and the lower waters of the Sacramento.
The eastern boundary of the territory begins about 5 miles east of Mount Shasta, crosses Pit River a little east of Squaw Creek, and reaches to within 10 miles of the eastern bank of the Sacramento at Redding. From Redding to Chico Creek the boundary is about 10 miles east of the Sacramento. From Chico downward the Pujunan family encroaches till at the mouth of Feather River it occupies 70 the eastern bank of the Sacramento. The western boundary of the Copehan family begins at the northernmost point of San Pablo Bay, trends to the northwest in a somewhat irregular line till it reaches John’s Peak, from which point it follows the Coast Range to the tipper waters of Cottonwood Creek, whence it deflects to the west, crossing the headwaters of the Trinity and ending at the southern boundary of the Sastean family.
The eastern boundary of the territory starts about 5 miles east of Mount Shasta, crosses Pit River just east of Squaw Creek, and extends to within 10 miles of the eastern bank of the Sacramento at Redding. From Redding to Chico Creek, the boundary is about 10 miles east of the Sacramento. From Chico downward, the Pujunan family encroaches until at the mouth of Feather River, it occupies the eastern bank of the Sacramento. The western boundary of the Copehan family begins at the northernmost point of San Pablo Bay, trends northwest in a somewhat irregular line until it reaches John’s Peak, from where it follows the Coast Range to the upper waters of Cottonwood Creek, then it deflects west, crossing the headwaters of the Trinity and ending at the southern boundary of the Sastean family.
PRINCIPAL TRIBES.
A. Patwin: | B. Wintu: |
Chenposel. Gruilito. Korusi. Liwaito. Lolsel. Makhelchel. Malaka. Napa. Olelato. Olposel. Suisun. Todetabi. Topaidisel. Waikosel. Wailaksel. |
Daupom. Nomlaki. Nommuk. Norelmuk. Normuk. Waikenmuk. Wailaki. |
COSTANOAN FAMILY.
= Costano, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 82, 1856 (includes the Ahwastes, Olhones or Costanos, Romonans, Tulornos, Altatmos). Latham, Opuscula, 348, 1860.
= Costano, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 82, 1856 (includes the Ahwastes, Olhones or Costanos, Romonans, Tulornos, Altatmos). Latham, Opuscula, 348, 1860.
< Mutsun, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 157, 1877 (includes Ahwastes, Olhones, Altahmos, Romonans, Tulomos). Powell in Cont. N.A. Eth., III, 535, 1877 (includes under this family vocabs. of Costano, Mutsun, Santa Clara, Santa Cruz).
< Mutsun, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 157, 1877 (includes Ahwastes, Olhones, Altahmos, Romonans, Tulomos). Powell in Cont. N.A. Eth., III, 535, 1877 (includes under this family vocabularies of Costano, Mutsun, Santa Clara, Santa Cruz).
Derivation: From the Spanish costano, “coast-men.”
Derivation: From the Spanish costano, “coast people.”
Under this group name Latham included five tribes, given above, which were under the supervision of the Mission Dolores. He gives a few words of the Romonan language, comparing it with Tshokoyem which he finds to differ markedly. He finally expresses the opinion that, notwithstanding the resemblance of a few words, notably personal pronouns, to Tshokoyem of the Moquelumnan group, the affinities of the dialects of the Costano are with the Salinas group, with which, however, he does not unite it but prefers to keep it by itself. Later, in 1877, Mr. Gatschet,34 under the family name Mutsun, united the Costano dialects with the ones classified by Latham under Moquelumnan. This arrangement was followed by Powell in his classification of vocabularies.35 More recent comparison of all the published material by Mr. Curtin, of the Bureau, revealed very decided and apparently radical differences between the two groups of dialects. In 1888 Mr. H. W. Henshaw visited the coast to the north and south of San Francisco, and obtained a considerable body of linguistic material for further comparison. The result seems fully to justify the separation of the two groups as distinct families.
Under this group name, Latham included five tribes listed above, which were overseen by Mission Dolores. He provides a few words from the Romonan language, comparing it to Tshokoyem, which he finds to be quite different. He ultimately expresses the view that, despite the similarities of some words, especially personal pronouns, to Tshokoyem of the Moquelumnan group, the dialects of the Costano are more closely related to the Salinas group. However, he chooses not to combine them and prefers to keep them separate. Later, in 1877, Mr. Gatschet, under the family name Mutsun, merged the Costano dialects with those classified by Latham under Moquelumnan. This classification was followed by Powell in his vocabulary classification. More recent comparisons of all the published material by Mr. Curtin of the Bureau revealed clear and apparently significant differences between the two groups of dialects. In 1888, Mr. H. W. Henshaw traveled to the coast north and south of San Francisco and collected a substantial amount of linguistic material for further comparison. The findings seem to fully support the distinction of the two groups as separate families.
GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION.
The territory of the Costanoan family extends from the Golden Gate to a point near the southern end of Monterey Bay. On the south it is bounded from Monterey Bay to the mountains by the Esselenian territory. On the east side of the mountains it extends to the southern end of Salinas Valley. On the east it is bounded by a somewhat irregular line running from the southern end of Salinas Valley to Gilroy Hot Springs and the upper waters of Conestimba Creek, and, northward from the latter points by the San Joaquin River to its mouth. The northern boundary is formed by Suisun Bay, Carquinez Straits, San Pablo and San Francisco Bays, and the Golden Gate.
The Costanoan family's territory stretches from the Golden Gate to just south of Monterey Bay. To the south, it borders the Esselenian territory from Monterey Bay to the mountains. On the eastern side of the mountains, it reaches the southern end of Salinas Valley. The eastern boundary follows a somewhat irregular line from the southern end of Salinas Valley to Gilroy Hot Springs and the upper reaches of Conestimba Creek, and then northward from those points along the San Joaquin River to its mouth. The northern border is defined by Suisun Bay, Carquinez Straits, San Pablo and San Francisco Bays, and the Golden Gate.
Population.—The surviving Indians of the once populous tribes of this family are now scattered over several counties and probably do not number, all told, over thirty individuals, as was ascertained by Mr. Henshaw in 1888. Most of these are to be found near the towns of Santa Cruz and Monterey. Only the older individuals speak the language.
Population.—The remaining Native Americans from the once large tribes of this family are now spread across several counties and likely total no more than thirty people, as determined by Mr. Henshaw in 1888. Most of them can be found near the towns of Santa Cruz and Monterey. Only the older members still speak the language.
ESKIMAUAN FAMILY.
> Eskimaux, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 9, 305, 1836. Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, xcix, 77, 1848. Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 401, 1853.
> Eskimos, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 9, 305, 1836. Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, xcix, 77, 1848. Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 401, 1853.
= Eskimo, Berghaus (1845), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1848. Ibid., 1852. Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 288, 1850 (general remarks on origin and habitat). Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 689, 1859. Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 385, 1862. Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 562, 574, 1882.
= Eskimo, Berghaus (1845), Physical Atlas, map 17, 1848. Same source, 1852. Latham, Natural History of Man, 288, 1850 (general comments on origin and habitat). Buschmann, Traces of the Aztec Language, 689, 1859. Latham, Elements of Comparative Philology, 385, 1862. Bancroft, Natural Races, III, 562, 574, 1882.
> Esquimaux, Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 367-371, 1847 (follows Gallatin). Latham in Jour. Eth. Soc. Lond., I, 182-191, 1848. Latham, Opuscula, 266-274, 1860.
> Eskimo, Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 367-371, 1847 (follows Gallatin). Latham in Jour. Eth. Soc. Lond., I, 182-191, 1848. Latham, Opuscula, 266-274, 1860.
> Eskimo, Dall in Proc. Am. Ass., 266, 1869 (treats of Alaskan Eskimo and Tuski only). Berghaus, Physik. Atlas, map 72, 1887 (excludes the Aleutian).
> Eskimo, Dall in Proc. Am. Ass., 266, 1869 (discusses Alaskan Eskimo and Tuski only). Berghaus, Physik. Atlas, map 72, 1887 (excludes the Aleutian).
> Eskimos, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 460, 1878 (excludes Aleutian).
> Eskimos, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 460, 1878 (excludes Aleutian).
> Ounángan, Veniamínoff, Zapíski ob ostrovaχ Unaláshkinskago otdailo, II, 1, 1840 (Aleutians only).
> Ounángan, Veniamínoff, Notes on the Island of Unaláshkinskago, II, 1, 1840 (Aleutians only).
> Ūnŭǵŭn, Dall in Cont. N.A. Eth., I, 22, 1877 (Aleuts a division of his Orarian group).
> Ūnŭǵŭn, Dall in Cont. N.A. Eth., I, 22, 1877 (Aleuts are a division of his Orarian group).
> Unangan, Berghaus, Physik. Atlas, map 72, 1887.
> Unangan, Berghaus, Physics. Atlas, map 72, 1887.
X Northern, Scouler in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc. Lond., XI, 218, 1841 (includes Ugalentzes of present family).
X Northern, Scouler in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc. Lond., XI, 218, 1841 (includes Ugalentzes of present family).
X Haidah, Scouler, ibid., 224, 1841 (same as his Northern family).
X Haidah, Scouler, ibid., 224, 1841 (same as his Northern family).
> Ugaljachmutzi, Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853 (lat. 60°, between Prince Williams Sound and Mount St. Elias, perhaps Athapascas).
> Ugaljachmutzi, Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853 (lat. 60°, between Prince William Sound and Mount St. Elias, possibly Athapascas).
Aleuten, Holmberg, Ethnog. Skizzen d. Völker Russ. Am., 1855.
Aleuten, Holmberg, Ethnog. Sketches of the Peoples of Russian America, 1855.
> Aleutians, Dall in Proc. Am. Ass., 266, 1869. Dall, Alaska and Resources, 374, 1870 (in both places a division of his Orarian family).
> Aleutians, Dall in Proc. Am. Ass., 266, 1869. Dall, Alaska and Resources, 374, 1870 (in both cases, a division of his Orarian family).
> Aleuts, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 460, 1878 (consist of Unalaskans of mainland and of Fox and Shumagin Ids., with Akkhas of rest of Aleutian Arch.).
> Aleuts, Keane, App. Stanford's Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 460, 1878 (consist of Unalaskans from the mainland and from Fox and Shumagin Islands, along with Akkhas from the rest of the Aleutian Archipelago).
> Aleut, Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 562, 1882 (two dialects, Unalaska and Atkha).
> Aleut, Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 562, 1882 (two dialects, Unalaska and Atkha).
= Orarians, Dall in Proc. Am. Ass., 265, 1869 (group name; includes Innuit, Aleutians, Tuski). Dall, Alaska and Resources, 374, 1870. Dall in Cont. N.A. Eth., 1, 8, 9, 1877.
= Orarians, Dall in Proc. Am. Ass., 265, 1869 (group name; includes Innuit, Aleutians, Tuski). Dall, Alaska and Resources, 374, 1870. Dall in Cont. N.A. Eth., 1, 8, 9, 1877.
X Tinneb, Dall in Proc. Am. Ass., 269, 1869 (includes “Ugalense”).
X Tinneb, Dall in Proc. Am. Ass., 269, 1869 (includes “Ugalense”).
> Innuit, Dall in Cont. N.A. Eth., 1, 9, 1877 (“Major group” of Orarians: treats of Alaska Innuit only). Berghaus, Physik. Atlas, map 73, 1887 (excludes the Aleutians).
> Innuit, Dall in Cont. N.A. Eth., 1, 9, 1877 (“Major group” of Orarians: treats of Alaska Innuit only). Berghaus, Physik. Atlas, map 73, 1887 (excludes the Aleutians).
Derivation: From an Algonkin word eskimantik, “eaters of raw flesh.”
Derivation: From an Algonquin word eskimantik, “eaters of raw flesh.”
GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION.
The geographic boundaries of this family were set forth by Gallatin in 1836 with considerable precision, and require comparatively little revision and correction.
The geographic boundaries of this family were established by Gallatin in 1836 with quite a bit of accuracy, and need very few updates or corrections.
In the linear extent of country occupied, the Eskimauan is the most remarkable of the North American linguistic families. It extends coastwise from eastern Greenland to western Alaska and to the extremity of the Aleutian Islands, a distance of considerably more than 5,000 miles. The winter or permanent villages are usually situated on the coast and are frequently at considerable distances from one another, the intervening areas being usually visited in summer for hunting and fishing purposes. The interior is also visited by the Eskimo for the purpose of hunting reindeer and other animals, though they rarely penetrate farther than 50 miles. A narrow strip along the coast, perhaps 30 miles wide, will probably, on the average, represent Eskimo occupancy.
In terms of the land covered, the Eskimo language family stands out among North American linguistic groups. It stretches along the coast from eastern Greenland to western Alaska and the far end of the Aleutian Islands, a distance of over 5,000 miles. The winter or permanent villages are typically located on the coast and are often quite far apart, with the spaces in between usually visited in summer for hunting and fishing. The interior is also explored by the Eskimo for hunting reindeer and other animals, although they rarely go more than 50 miles inland. A narrow strip along the coast, around 30 miles wide, likely represents the average area occupied by the Eskimo.
Except upon the Aleutian Islands, the dialects spoken over this vast area are very similar, the unity of dialect thus observable being in marked contrast to the tendency to change exhibited in other linguistic families of North America.
Except for the Aleutian Islands, the dialects spoken across this vast region are quite similar, and this noticeable unity of dialect contrasts sharply with the changes seen in other language families in North America.
How far north the east coast of Greenland is inhabited by Eskimo is not at present known. In 1823 Capt. Clavering met with two families of Eskimo north of 74° 30'. Recent explorations (1884-’85) by Capt. Holm, of the Danish Navy, along the southeast coast reveal the presence of Eskimo between 65° and 66° north latitude. These Eskimo profess entire ignorance of any inhabitants north of themselves, which may be taken as proof that if there are fiords farther up the coast which are inhabited there has been no intercommunication in recent times at least between these tribes and those to the south. It seems probable that more or less isolated colonies of Eskimo do actually exist along the east coast of Greenland far to the north.
How far north the east coast of Greenland is inhabited by Eskimos is currently unknown. In 1823, Captain Clavering encountered two families of Eskimos north of 74° 30'. Recent explorations (1884-’85) by Captain Holm of the Danish Navy along the southeast coast show that Eskimos are present between 65° and 66° north latitude. These Eskimos claim to have no knowledge of any inhabitants north of them, which could indicate that if there are fjords further up the coast that are inhabited, there has been no recent communication between these tribes and those to the south. It seems likely that there are isolated colonies of Eskimos along the east coast of Greenland, quite far to the north.
Along the west coast of Greenland, Eskimo occupancy extends to about 74°. This division is separated by a considerable interval of uninhabited coast from the Etah Eskimo who occupy the coast from Smith Sound to Cape York, their most northerly village being in 73 78° 18'. For our knowledge of these interesting people we are chiefly indebted to Ross and Bessels.
Along the west coast of Greenland, Inuit presence reaches approximately 74°. This area is separated by a significant stretch of uninhabited coastline from the Etah Inuit, who live along the coast from Smith Sound to Cape York, with their northernmost village located at 78° 18'. We owe much of our understanding of these fascinating people to Ross and Bessels.
In Grinnell Land, Gen. Greely found indications of permanent Eskimo habitations near Fort Conger, lat. 81° 44'.
In Grinnell Land, Gen. Greely found signs of permanent Eskimo settlements near Fort Conger, lat. 81° 44'.
On the coast of Labrador the Eskimo reach as far south as Hamilton Inlet, about 55° 30'. Not long since they extended to the Straits of Belle Isle, 50° 30'.
On the coast of Labrador, the Inuit go as far south as Hamilton Inlet, around 55° 30'. Not too long ago, they reached the Straits of Belle Isle, at 50° 30'.
On the east coast of Hudson Bay the Eskimo reach at present nearly to James Bay. According to Dobbs36 in 1744 they extended as far south as east Maine River, or about 52°. The name Notaway (Eskimo) River at the southern end of the bay indicates a former Eskimo extension to that point.
On the east coast of Hudson Bay, the Inuit currently reach almost to James Bay. According to Dobbs36 in 1744, they extended as far south as the East Maine River, or about 52°. The name Notaway (Inuit) River at the southern end of the bay suggests that the Inuit once reached that point.
According to Boas and Bessels the most northern Eskimo of the middle group north of Hudson Bay reside on the southern extremity of Ellesmere Land around Jones Sound. Evidences of former occupation of Prince Patrick, Melville, and other of the northern Arctic islands are not lacking, but for some unknown cause, probably a failure of food supply, the Eskimo have migrated thence and the islands are no longer inhabited. In the western part of the central region the coast appears to be uninhabited from the Coppermine River to Cape Bathurst. To the west of the Mackenzie, Herschel Island marks the limit of permanent occupancy by the Mackenzie Eskimo, there being no permanent villages between that island and the settlements at Point Barrow.
According to Boas and Bessels, the northernmost Eskimo from the middle group north of Hudson Bay live at the southern tip of Ellesmere Land around Jones Sound. There are signs of past habitation on Prince Patrick, Melville, and other northern Arctic islands, but for some unknown reason, likely due to a lack of food, the Eskimo have moved away, and these islands are now uninhabited. In the western part of the central region, the coast seems to be deserted from the Coppermine River to Cape Bathurst. To the west of the Mackenzie River, Herschel Island marks the southern boundary of permanent settlement by the Mackenzie Eskimo, with no permanent villages located between that island and the communities at Point Barrow.
The intervening strip of coast is, however, undoubtedly hunted over more or less in summer. The Point Barrow Eskimo do not penetrate far into the interior, but farther to the south the Eskimo reach to the headwaters of the Nunatog and Koyuk Rivers. Only visiting the coast for trading purposes, they occupy an anomalous position among Eskimo.
The coastal strip in between is definitely hunted during the summer. The Point Barrow Eskimo don’t venture far into the interior, but further south, the Eskimo travel up to the headwaters of the Nunatog and Koyuk Rivers. They only visit the coast for trading, placing them in a unique position among the Eskimo.
Eskimo occupancy of the rest of the Alaska coast is practically continuous throughout its whole extent as far to the south and east as the Atna or Copper River, where begin the domains of the Koluschan family. Only in two places do the Indians of the Athapascan family intrude upon Eskimo territory, about Cook’s Inlet, and at the mouth of Copper River.
Eskimo presence along the entire Alaska coast is almost uninterrupted all the way down to the Atna or Copper River, which marks the start of the Koluschan family's territory. The Athapascan Indians only encroach on Eskimo land in two areas: around Cook’s Inlet and at the mouth of Copper River.
Owing to the labors of Dall, Petroff, Nelson, Turner, Murdoch, and others we are now pretty well informed as to the distribution of the Eskimo in Alaska.
Thanks to the efforts of Dall, Petroff, Nelson, Turner, Murdoch, and others, we now have a good understanding of the distribution of the Eskimo in Alaska.
Nothing is said by Gallatin of the Aleutian Islanders and they were probably not considered by him to be Eskimauan. They are now known to belong to this family, though the Aleutian dialects are unintelligible to the Eskimo proper. Their distribution has been entirely changed since the advent of the Russians and the introduction 74 of the fur trade, and at present they occupy only a very small portion of the islands. Formerly they were much more numerous than at present and extended throughout the chain.
Nothing was mentioned by Gallatin about the Aleutian Islanders, and he probably didn’t consider them to be part of the Eskimo group. They are now recognized as part of this family, although the Aleutian dialects are completely unintelligible to true Eskimos. Their distribution has changed dramatically since the arrival of the Russians and the start of the fur trade, and now they occupy only a very small part of the islands. In the past, they were much more numerous than they are today and spread throughout the entire chain. 74
The Eskimauan family is represented in northeast Asia by the Yuit of the Chukchi peninsula, who are to be distinguished from the sedentary Chukchi or the Tuski of authors, the latter being of Asiatic origin. According to Dall the former are comparatively recent arrivals from the American continent, and, like their brethren of America, are confined exclusively to the coast.
The Eskimauan family is represented in northeast Asia by the Yuit of the Chukchi peninsula, who are different from the sedentary Chukchi or the Tuski, the latter being of Asian descent. According to Dall, the Yuit are relatively recent arrivals from the American continent and, like their relatives in America, are found only along the coast.
PRINCIPAL TRIBES AND VILLAGES.
Greenland group—East Greenland villages: | ||
Akorninak. Aluik. Anarnitsok. Angmagsalik. Igdlolnarsuk. Ivimiut. |
Kemisak. Kikkertarsoak. Kinarbik. Maneetsuk. Narsuk. Okkiosorbik. |
Sermiligak. Sermilik. Taterat. Umanak. Umerik. |
West coast villages: | ||
Akbat. | Karsuit. | Tessuisak. |
Labrador group: | ||
Itivimiut. Kiguaqtagmiut. |
Suqinimiut. | Taqagmiut. |
Middle Group: | ||
Aggomiut. Ahaknanelet. Aivillirmiut. Akudliarmiut. Akudnirmiut. Amitormiut. Iglulingmiut. |
Kangormiut. Kinnepatu. Kramalit. Nageuktormiut. Netchillirmiut. Nugumiut. Okomiut. |
Pilinginiut. Sagdlirmiut. Sikosuilarmiut. Sinimiut. Ugjulirmiut. Ukusiksalingmiut. |
Alaska group: | ||
Chiglit. Chugachigmiut. Ikogmiut. Imahklimiut. Inguhklimiut. Kaialigmiut. Kangmaligmiut. Kaviagmiut. |
Kittegareut. Kopagmiut. Kuagmiut. Kuskwogmiut. Magemiut. Mahlemiut. Nunatogmiut. Nunivagmiut. |
Nushagagmiut. Nuwungmiut. Oglemiut. Selawigmiut. Shiwokugmiut. Ukivokgmiut. Unaligmiut. |
Aleutian group: | ||
Atka. | Unalashka. | |
Asiatic group: | ||
Yuit. |
Population.—Only a rough approximation of the population of the Eskimo can be given, since of some of the divisions next to 75 nothing is known. Dall compiles the following estimates of the Alaskan Eskimo from the most reliable figures up to 1885: Of the Northwestern Innuit 3,100 (?), including the Kopagmiut, Kangmaligmiut, Nuwukmiut, Nunatogmiut, Kuagmiut, the Inguhklimiut of Little Diomede Island 40 (?), Shiwokugmiut of St. Lawrence Island 150 (?), the Western Innuit 14,500 (?), the Aleutian Islanders (Unungun) 2,200 (?); total of the Alaskan Innuit, about 20,000.
Population.—Only a rough estimate of the Eskimo population can be provided, since for some of the groups nearby 75 little information is available. Dall compiles the following estimates of the Alaskan Eskimo from the most reliable data up to 1885: Of the Northwestern Inuit 3,100 (?), including the Kopagmiut, Kangmaligmiut, Nuwukmiut, Nunatogmiut, Kuagmiut, the Inguhklimiut of Little Diomede Island 40 (?), Shiwokugmiut of St. Lawrence Island 150 (?), the Western Inuit 14,500 (?), the Aleutian Islanders (Unungun) 2,200 (?); total of the Alaskan Inuit, about 20,000.
The Central or Baffin Land Eskimo are estimated by Boas to number about 1,100.37
The Central or Baffin Land Eskimo are estimated by Boas to number about 1,100.37
From figures given by Rink, Packard, and others, the total number of Labrador Eskimo is believed to be about 2,000.
From the figures provided by Rink, Packard, and others, the total number of Labrador Eskimo is thought to be around 2,000.
According to Holm (1884-’85) there are about 550 Eskimo on the east coast of Greenland. On the west coast the mission Eskimo numbered 10,122 in 1886, while the northern Greenland Eskimo, the Arctic Highlanders of Ross, number about 200.
According to Holm (1884-’85), there are about 550 Eskimos on the east coast of Greenland. On the west coast, the mission Eskimos numbered 10,122 in 1886, while the northern Greenland Eskimos, the Arctic Highlanders of Ross, number about 200.
Thus throughout the Arctic regions generally there is a total of about 34,000.
Thus, throughout the Arctic regions, there is a total of about 34,000.
ESSELENIAN FAMILY.
< Salinas, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 85, 1856 (includes Gioloco?, Ruslen, Soledad, Eslen, Carmel, San Antonio, and San Miguel, cited as including Eslen). Latham, Opuscula, 350, 1860.
< Salinas, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 85, 1856 (includes Gioloco?, Ruslen, Soledad, Eslen, Carmel, San Antonio, and San Miguel, cited as including Eslen). Latham, Opuscula, 350, 1860.
As afterwards mentioned under the Salinan family, the present family was included by Latham in the heterogeneous group called by him Salinas. For reasons there given the term Salinan was restricted to the San Antonio and San Miguel languages, leaving the present family without a name. It is called Esselenian, from the name of the single tribe Esselen, of which it is composed.
As mentioned later with the Salinan family, Latham grouped the current family with others he referred to as Salinas. For the reasons he stated, the term Salinan was limited to the San Antonio and San Miguel languages, leaving the current family without a name. It is called Esselenian, named after the one tribe Esselen, which it consists of.
Its history is a curious and interesting one. Apparently the first mention of the tribe and language is to be found in the Voyage de la Pérouse, Paris, 1797, page 288, where Lamanon (1786) states that the language of the Ecclemachs (Esselen) differs “absolutely from all those of their neighbors.” He gives a vocabulary of twenty-two words and by way of comparison a list of the ten numerals of the Achastlians (Costanoan family). It was a study of the former short vocabulary, published by Taylor in the California Farmer, October 24, 1862, that first led to the supposition of the distinctness of this language.
Its history is quite fascinating. The first reference to the tribe and its language appears in the Voyage de la Pérouse, Paris, 1797, page 288, where Lamanon (1786) notes that the Ecclemachs (Esselen) language is “completely different from all those of their neighbors.” He includes a vocabulary of twenty-two words and, for comparison, a list of the ten numerals of the Achastlians (Costanoan family). It was a review of this brief vocabulary, published by Taylor in the California Farmer on October 24, 1862, that first suggested this language's uniqueness.
A few years later the Esselen people came under the observation of Galiano,38 who mentions the Eslen and Runsien as two distinct nations, and notes a variety of differences in usages and customs which are of no great weight. It is of interest to note, however, that this author also appears to have observed essential differences 76 in the languages of the two peoples, concerning which he says: “The same difference as in usage and custom is observed in the languages of the two nations, as will be perceived from the following comparison with which we will conclude this chapter.”
A few years later, the Esselen people were observed by Galiano, who mentions the Eslen and Runsien as two separate nations and notes some differences in their practices and customs, though they aren't very significant. It's interesting to point out that this author seems to have noticed key differences in the languages of the two groups, stating: “The same difference in practices and customs can be seen in the languages of the two nations, as will be clear from the comparison with which we will conclude this chapter.” 76
Galiano supplies Esselen and Runsien vocabularies of thirty-one words, most of which agree with the earlier vocabulary of Lamanon. These were published by Taylor in the California Farmer under date of April 20, 1860.
Galiano provides vocabularies for Esselen and Runsien consisting of thirty-one words, most of which match the earlier vocabulary by Lamanon. These were published by Taylor in the California Farmer on April 20, 1860.
In the fall of 1888 Mr. H. W. Henshaw visited the vicinity of Monterey with the hope of discovering survivors of these Indians. Two women were found in the Salinas Valley to the south who claimed to be of Esselen blood, but neither of them was able to recall any of the language, both having learned in early life to speak the Runsien language in place of their own. An old woman was found in the Carmelo Valley near Monterey and an old man living near the town of Cayucos, who, though of Runsien birth, remembered considerable of the language of their neighbors with whom they were connected by marriage. From them a vocabulary of one hundred and ten words and sixty-eight phrases and short sentences were obtained. These serve to establish the general correctness of the short lists of words collected so long ago by Lamanon and Galiano, and they also prove beyond reasonable doubt that the Esselen language forms a family by itself and has no connection with any other known.
In the fall of 1888, Mr. H. W. Henshaw visited the area around Monterey hoping to find survivors of these Indians. Two women were discovered in the Salinas Valley to the south who claimed to have Esselen heritage, but neither could remember any of the language, as both had learned to speak Runsien instead in their early years. An old woman was found in the Carmelo Valley near Monterey, and an old man living near the town of Cayucos, who, although originally from Runsien, remembered a good amount of the language from their neighbors due to marriage ties. From them, a vocabulary of one hundred and ten words and sixty-eight phrases and short sentences were gathered. These help confirm the general accuracy of the brief lists of words collected so long ago by Lamanon and Galiano, and they also clearly show that the Esselen language is a distinct family on its own with no links to any other known languages.
The tribe or tribes composing this family occupied a narrow strip of the California coast from Monterey Bay south to the vicinity of the Santa Lucia Mountain, a distance of about 50 miles.
The tribe or tribes that make up this family lived in a narrow stretch of the California coast from Monterey Bay down to near the Santa Lucia Mountains, covering a distance of about 50 miles.
IROQUOIAN FAMILY.
> Iroquois, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 21, 23, 305, 1836 (excludes Cherokee). Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 381, 1847 (follows Gallatin). Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, xcix, 77, 1848 (as in 1836). Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 401, 1853. Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 58, 1856. Latham, Opuscula, 327, 1860. Latham, Elements Comp. Phil., 463, 1862.
> Iroquois, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 21, 23, 305, 1836 (excludes Cherokee). Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 381, 1847 (follows Gallatin). Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, xcix, 77, 1848 (as in 1836). Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 401, 1853. Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 58, 1856. Latham, Opuscula, 327, 1860. Latham, Elements Comp. Phil., 463, 1862.
> Irokesen, Berghaus (1845), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1848. Ibid., 1852.
> Irokesen, Berghaus (1845), Physics Atlas, map 17, 1848. Same source, 1852.
X Irokesen, Berghaus, Physik. Atlas, map 72, 1887 (includes Kataba and said to be derived from Dakota).
X Irokesen, Berghaus, Physics. Atlas, map 72, 1887 (includes Kataba and is said to be derived from Dakota).
> Huron-Iroquois, Bancroft, Hist. U.S., III, 243, 1840.
> Huron-Iroquois, Bancroft, Hist. U.S., III, 243, 1840.
> Wyandot-Iroquois, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 460, 468, 1878.
> Wyandot-Iroquois, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 460, 468, 1878.
> Cherokees, Gallatin in Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 89, 306, 1836 (kept apart from Iroquois though probable affinity asserted). Bancroft, Hist. U.S., III, 246, 1840. Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 401, 1847. Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, xcix, 77, 1848. Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 58, 1856 (a separate group perhaps to be classed with Iroquois and Sioux). Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 401, 1853. Latham, Opuscula, 327, 1860. Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 460, 472, 1878 (same as Chelekees or Tsalagi—“apparently entirely distinct from all other American tongues”).
> Cherokees, Gallatin in Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 89, 306, 1836 (kept separate from Iroquois although a possible connection is suggested). Bancroft, Hist. U.S., III, 246, 1840. Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 401, 1847. Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, xcix, 77, 1848. Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 58, 1856 (possibly a separate group that could be classified with Iroquois and Sioux). Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 401, 1853. Latham, Opuscula, 327, 1860. Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 460, 472, 1878 (same as Chelekees or Tsalagi—“appears completely distinct from all other American languages”).
> Tschirokies, Berghaus (1845), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1848.
> Tschirokies, Berghaus (1845), Physics Atlas, map 17, 1848.
> Cheroki, Gatschet, Creek Mig. Legend, I, 34, 1884. Gatschet in Science, 413, April 29, 1887.
> Cheroki, Gatschet, Creek Mig. Legend, I, 34, 1884. Gatschet in Science, 413, April 29, 1887.
= Huron-Cherokee, Hale in Am. Antiq., 20, Jan., 1883 (proposed as a family name instead of Huron-Iroquois; relationship to Iroquois affirmed).
= Huron-Cherokee, Hale in Am. Antiq., 20, Jan., 1883 (suggested as a family name instead of Huron-Iroquois; connection to Iroquois confirmed).
Derivation: French, adaptation of the Iroquois word hiro, used to conclude a speech, and koué, an exclamation (Charlevoix). Hale gives as possible derivations ierokwa, the indeterminate form of the verb to smoke, signifying “they who smoke;” also the Cayuga form of bear, iakwai.39 Mr. Hewitt40 suggests the Algonkin words īrīn, true, or real; ako, snake; with the French termination ois, the word becomes Irinakois.
Derivation: French, adapted from the Iroquois word hiro, which is used to wrap up a speech, and koué, an exclamation (Charlevoix). Hale mentions possible origins like ierokwa, the indefinite form of the verb to smoke, meaning “those who smoke;” and also the Cayuga version of bear, iakwai.39 Mr. Hewitt40 suggests the Algonquin words īrīn, which means true or real; and ako, meaning snake; when combined with the French ending ois, the word becomes Irinakois.
With reference to this family it is of interest to note that as early as 1798 Barton41 compared the Cheroki language with that of the Iroquois and stated his belief that there was a connection between them. Gallatin, in the Archæologia Americana, refers to the opinion expressed by Barton, and although he states that he is inclined to agree with that author, yet he does not formally refer Cheroki to that family, concluding that “We have not a sufficient knowledge of the grammar, and generally of the language of the Five Nations, or of the Wyandots, to decide that question.”42
With regard to this family, it's interesting to note that as early as 1798, Barton41 compared the Cherokee language with that of the Iroquois and expressed his belief that there was a connection between them. Gallatin, in the Archæologia Americana, mentions Barton's opinion, and although he says he mostly agrees with Barton, he doesn’t officially link Cherokee to that family, concluding that "We do not have enough knowledge of the grammar and generally of the language of the Five Nations or of the Wyandots to decide that question."42
Mr. Hale was the first to give formal expression to his belief in the affinity of the Cheroki to Iroquois.43 Recently extensive Cheroki vocabularies have come into possession of the Bureau of Ethnology, and a careful comparison of them with ample Iroquois material has been made by Mr. Hewitt. The result is convincing proof of the relationship of the two languages as affirmed by Barton so long ago.
Mr. Hale was the first to officially express his belief in the connection between the Cherokee and Iroquois. 43 Recently, the Bureau of Ethnology has acquired extensive Cherokee vocabularies, and Mr. Hewitt has conducted a thorough comparison of them with a significant amount of Iroquois material. The outcome provides convincing evidence of the relationship between the two languages, as asserted by Barton many years ago.
GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION.
Unlike most linguistic stocks, the Iroquoian tribes did not occupy a continuous area, but when first known to Europeans were settled in three distinct regions, separated from each other by tribes of other lineage. The northern group was surrounded by tribes of Algonquian stock, while the more southern groups bordered upon the Catawba and Maskoki.
Unlike most language families, the Iroquoian tribes didn't live in a continuous area. When Europeans first encountered them, they were settled in three separate regions, which were divided by tribes of different backgrounds. The northern group was surrounded by Algonquian tribes, while the southern groups bordered the Catawba and Muskogean tribes.
A tradition of the Iroquois points to the St. Lawrence region as the early home of the Iroquoian tribes, whence they gradually moved down to the southwest along the shores of the Great Lakes.
A tradition of the Iroquois indicates that the St. Lawrence area was the original home of the Iroquoian tribes, from which they slowly migrated southwest along the shores of the Great Lakes.
When Cartier, in 1534, first explored the bays and inlets of the Gulf of St. Lawrence he met a Huron-Iroquoian people on the shores of the Bay of Gaspé, who also visited the northern coast of the gulf. In the following year when he sailed up the St. Lawrence River he 78 found the banks of the river from Quebec to Montreal occupied by an Iroquoian people. From statements of Champlain and other early explorers it seems probable that the Wyandot once occupied the country along the northern shore of Lake Ontario.
When Cartier first explored the bays and inlets of the Gulf of St. Lawrence in 1534, he encountered the Huron-Iroquoian people on the shores of the Bay of Gaspé, who also visited the northern coast of the gulf. The next year, when he sailed up the St. Lawrence River, he found that the banks of the river from Quebec to Montreal were inhabited by an Iroquoian people. According to accounts from Champlain and other early explorers, it seems likely that the Wyandot once lived in the area along the northern shore of Lake Ontario.
The Conestoga, and perhaps some allied tribes, occupied the country about the Lower Susquehanna, in Pennsylvania and Maryland, and have commonly been regarded as an isolated body, but it seems probable that their territory was contiguous to that of the Five Nations on the north before the Delaware began their westward movement.
The Conestoga, along with a few allied tribes, lived in the area around the Lower Susquehanna in Pennsylvania and Maryland. They have generally been seen as a separate group, but it’s likely that their land was next to that of the Five Nations to the north before the Delaware started moving west.
As the Cherokee were the principal tribe on the borders of the southern colonies and occupied the leading place in all the treaty negotiations, they came to be considered as the owners of a large territory to which they had no real claim. Their first sale, in 1721, embraced a tract in South Carolina, between the Congaree and the South Fork of the Edisto,44 but about one-half of this tract, forming the present Lexington County, belonging to the Congaree.45 In 1755 they sold a second tract above the first and extending across South Carolina from the Savannah to the Catawba (or Wateree),46 but all of this tract east of Broad River belonged to other tribes. The lower part, between the Congaree and the Wateree, had been sold 20 years before, and in the upper part the Broad River was acknowledged as the western Catawba boundary.47 In 1770 they sold a tract, principally in Virginia and West Virginia, bounded east by the Great Kanawha,48 but the Iroquois claimed by conquest all of this tract northwest of the main ridge of the Alleghany and Cumberland Mountains, and extending at least to the Kentucky River,49 and two years previously they had made a treaty with Sir William Johnson by which they were recognized as the owners of all between Cumberland Mountains and the Ohio down to the Tennessee.50 The Cumberland River basin was the only part of this tract to which the Cherokee had any real title, having driven out the former occupants, the Shawnee, about 1721.51 The Cherokee had no villages north of the Tennessee (this probably includes the Holston as its upper part), and at a conference at Albany the Cherokee delegates presented to the Iroquois the skin of a deer, which they said belonged to the Iroquois, as the animal had been killed north of the Tennessee.52 In 1805, 1806, and 1817 they sold several tracts, mainly in 79 middle Tennessee, north of the Tennessee River and extending to the Cumberland River watershed, but this territory was claimed and had been occupied by the Chickasaw, and at one conference the Cherokee admitted their claim.53 The adjacent tract in northern Alabama and Georgia, on the headwaters of the Coosa, was not permanently occupied by the Cherokee until they began to move westward, about 1770.
As the Cherokee were the main tribe along the southern colonies' borders and played a key role in treaty negotiations, they were seen as the owners of a large area of land to which they had no actual claim. Their first sale, in 1721, included a piece of land in South Carolina between the Congaree and the South Fork of the Edisto, but about half of this area, which is now Lexington County, belonged to the Congaree. In 1755, they sold a second piece of land above the first, stretching across South Carolina from the Savannah to the Catawba (or Wateree), but all of this land east of the Broad River belonged to other tribes. The southern part, between the Congaree and the Wateree, had been sold 20 years earlier, and in the northern part, the Broad River was recognized as the western boundary of the Catawba. In 1770, they sold a tract primarily in Virginia and West Virginia, bordered on the east by the Great Kanawha, but the Iroquois claimed by conquest all of this land northwest of the main ridge of the Alleghany and Cumberland Mountains, reaching at least to the Kentucky River. Two years earlier, they had made a treaty with Sir William Johnson, acknowledging them as the owners of all the land between the Cumberland Mountains and the Ohio River down to Tennessee. The Cumberland River basin was the only part of this land that the Cherokee had any legitimate title to, having driven out the previous inhabitants, the Shawnee, around 1721. The Cherokee had no villages north of the Tennessee River (this probably includes the upstream part of the Holston), and at a meeting in Albany, Cherokee delegates presented the Iroquois with the skin of a deer, claiming it belonged to them since the animal had been killed north of the Tennessee. In 1805, 1806, and 1817, they sold several tracts mainly in middle Tennessee, north of the Tennessee River and extending to the Cumberland River watershed, but this territory was claimed and had been occupied by the Chickasaw, and at one meeting, the Cherokee admitted their claim. The nearby land in northern Alabama and Georgia, in the headwaters of the Coosa, wasn't permanently occupied by the Cherokee until they started moving westward around 1770.
The whole region of West Virginia, Kentucky, and the Cumberland River region of Tennessee was claimed by the Iroquois and Cherokee, but the Iroquois never occupied any of it and the Cherokee could not be said to occupy any beyond the Cumberland Mountains. The Cumberland River was originally held by the Shawnee, and the rest was occupied, so far as it was occupied at all, by the Shawnee, Delaware, and occasionally by the Wyandot and Mingo (Iroquoian), who made regular excursions southward across the Ohio every year to hunt and to make salt at the licks. Most of the temporary camps or villages in Kentucky and West Virginia were built by the Shawnee and Delaware. The Shawnee and Delaware were the principal barrier to the settlement of Kentucky and West Virginia for a period of 20 years, while in all that time neither the Cherokee nor the Iroquois offered any resistance or checked the opposition of the Ohio tribes.
The entire region of West Virginia, Kentucky, and the Cumberland River area of Tennessee was claimed by the Iroquois and Cherokee, but the Iroquois never actually lived there, and the Cherokee could only be said to occupy land beyond the Cumberland Mountains. The Cumberland River was originally controlled by the Shawnee, and the rest of the area was occupied, when it was occupied at all, by the Shawnee, Delaware, and occasionally by the Wyandot and Mingo (Iroquoian), who regularly traveled south across the Ohio River every year to hunt and make salt at the mineral licks. Most of the temporary camps or villages in Kentucky and West Virginia were established by the Shawnee and Delaware. For about 20 years, the Shawnee and Delaware served as the main barrier to the settlement of Kentucky and West Virginia, during which time neither the Cherokee nor the Iroquois put up any resistance or hindered the actions of the Ohio tribes.
The Cherokee bounds in Virginia should be extended along the mountain region as far at least as the James River, as they claim to have lived at the Peaks of Otter,54 and seem to be identical with the Rickohockan or Rechahecrian of the early Virginia writers, who lived in the mountains beyond the Monacan, and in 1656 ravaged the lowland country as far as the site of Richmond and defeated the English and the Powhatan Indians in a pitched battle at that place.55
The Cherokee boundaries in Virginia should be expanded along the mountain region, at least to the James River, since they claim to have lived at the Peaks of Otter,54 and they appear to be the same as the Rickohockan or Rechahecrian mentioned by early Virginia writers, who lived in the mountains beyond the Monacan, and in 1656 invaded the lowland area all the way to what is now Richmond, defeating both the English and the Powhatan Indians in a significant battle at that location.55
The language of the Tuscarora, formerly of northeastern North Carolina, connect them directly with the northern Iroquois. The Chowanoc and Nottoway and other cognate tribes adjoining the Tuscarora may have been offshoots from that tribe.
The language of the Tuscarora, who used to live in northeastern North Carolina, links them directly to the northern Iroquois. The Chowanoc, Nottoway, and other related tribes near the Tuscarora might have descended from that tribe.
PRINCIPAL TRIBES.
Cayuga. Cherokee. Conestoga. Erie. Mohawk. Neuter. Nottoway. |
Oneida. Onondaga. Seneca. Tionontate. Tuscarora. Wyandot. |
Population.—The present number of the Iroquoian stock is about 43,000, of whom over 34,000 (including the Cherokees) are in the United States while nearly 9,000 are in Canada. Below is given the population of the different tribes, compiled chiefly from the 80 Canadian Indian Report for 1888, and the United States Census Bulletin for 1890:
Population.—The current number of the Iroquoian stock is around 43,000, with over 34,000 (including the Cherokees) located in the United States, while nearly 9,000 are in Canada. Below is the population of the different tribes, gathered mainly from the 80 Canadian Indian Report for 1888, and the United States Census Bulletin for 1890:
The Iroquois of St. Regis, Caughnawaga, Lake of Two Mountains (Oka), and Gibson speak a dialect mainly Mohawk and Oneida, but are a mixture of all the tribes of the original Five Nations.
The Iroquois of St. Regis, Caughnawaga, Lake of Two Mountains (Oka), and Gibson speak a dialect primarily composed of Mohawk and Oneida, but they are a blend of all the tribes from the original Five Nations.
KALAPOOIAN FAMILY.
= Kalapooiah, Scouler in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc. Lond., XI, 335, 1841 (includes Kalapooiah and Yamkallie; thinks the Umpqua and Cathlascon languages are related). Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 599, 617, 1859, (follows Scouler).
= Kalapooiah, Scouler in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc. Lond., XI, 335, 1841 (includes Kalapooiah and Yamkallie; believes the Umpqua and Cathlascon languages are related). Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 599, 617, 1859, (follows Scouler).
= Kalapuya, Hale in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, 3217, 584, 1846 (of Willamet Valley above Falls). Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., I pt. 1, c, 17, 77, 1848. Berghaus (1851), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1853. Gallatin in Sohoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853. Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 73, 1856. Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 617, 1859. Latham, Opuscula, 340, 1860. Gatschet in Mag. Arn. Hist., 167, 1877. Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 443, 1877.
= Kalapuya, Hale in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, 3217, 584, 1846 (of Willamet Valley above Falls). Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., I pt. 1, c, 17, 77, 1848. Berghaus (1851), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1853. Gallatin in Sohoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853. Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 73, 1856. Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 617, 1859. Latham, Opuscula, 340, 1860. Gatschet in Mag. Arn. Hist., 167, 1877. Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 443, 1877.
> Calapooya, Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 565, 639, 1883.
> Calapooya, Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 565, 639, 1883.
X Chinooks, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent, and So. Am.), 474, 1878 (includes Calapooyas and Yamkally).
X Chinooks, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent, and So. Am.), 474, 1878 (includes Calapooyas and Yamkally).
> Yamkally, Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 565, 630, 1883 (bears a certain relationship to Calapooya).
> Yamkally, Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 565, 630, 1883 (has a specific connection to Calapooya).
Under this family name Scouler places two tribes, the Kalapooiah, inhabiting “the fertile Willamat plains” and the Yamkallie, who live “more in the interior, towards the sources of the Willamat River.” Scouler adds that the Umpqua “appear to belong to this Family, although their language is rather more remote from the Kalapooiah than the Yamkallie is.” The Umpqua language is now placed under the Athapascan family. Scouler also asserts the intimate relationship of the Cathlascon tribes to the Kalapooiah family. They are now classed as Chinookan.
Under this family name, Scouler identifies two tribes: the Kalapooiah, who live in "the fertile Willamat plains," and the Yamkallie, who reside "more in the interior, towards the sources of the Willamat River." Scouler notes that the Umpqua "seem to belong to this family, although their language is somewhat more distant from the Kalapooiah than the Yamkallie." The Umpqua language is now classified under the Athapascan family. Scouler also claims a close relationship between the Cathlascon tribes and the Kalapooiah family. They are now categorized as Chinookan.
The tribes of the Kalapooian family inhabited the valley of Willamette River, Oregon, above the falls, and extended well up to the 82 headwaters of that stream. They appear not to have reached the Columbia River, being cut off by tribes of the Chinookan family, and consequently were not met by Lewis and Clarke, whose statements of their habitat were derived solely from natives.
The tribes of the Kalapooian family lived in the valley of the Willamette River in Oregon, above the falls, and stretched up into the headwaters of that river. They didn't seem to reach the Columbia River because they were blocked by tribes from the Chinookan family, so Lewis and Clarke didn't encounter them. Their descriptions of their habitat came entirely from local natives.
PRINCIPAL TRIBES.
Ahántchuyuk (Pudding River Indians). Atfálati. Calapooya. Chelamela. Lákmiut. Santiam. Yámil. |
Population.—So far as known the surviving Indians of this family are all at the Grande Ronde Agency, Oregon.
Population.—Currently, the surviving members of this family are all located at the Grande Ronde Agency in Oregon.
The following is a census for 1890:
The following is a census for 1890:
Atfálati | 28 |
Calapooya | 22 |
Lákmiut | 29 |
Mary’s River | 28 |
Santiam | 27 |
Yámil | 30 |
Yonkalla | 7 |
Total | 171 |
KARANKAWAN FAMILY.
= Karánkawa, Gatschet in Globus, XLIX, No. 8, 123, 1886 (vocabulary of 25 terms; distinguished as a family provisionally). Gatschet in Science, 414, April 9, 1887.
= Karánkawa, Gatschet in Globus, XLIX, No. 8, 123, 1886 (vocabulary of 25 terms; noted as a family temporarily). Gatschet in Science, 414, April 9, 1887.
The Karankawa formerly dwelt upon the Texan coast, according to Sibley, upon an island or peninsula in the Bay of St. Bernard (Matagorda Bay). In 1804 this author, upon hearsay evidence, stated their number to be 500 men.56 In several places in the paper cited it is explicitly stated that the Karankawa spoke the Attakapa language; the Attakapa was a coast tribe living to the east of them. In 1884 Mr. Gatschet found a Tonkawe at Fort Griffin, Texas, who claimed to have formerly lived among the Karankawa. From him a vocabulary of twenty-five terms was obtained, which was all of the language he remembered.
The Karankawa once lived along the Texas coast, according to Sibley, on an island or peninsula in the Bay of St. Bernard (Matagorda Bay). In 1804, this author, based on hearsay, estimated their population to be around 500 men. In several parts of the referenced paper, it's clearly stated that the Karankawa spoke the Attakapa language; the Attakapa was a coastal tribe that lived to their east. In 1884, Mr. Gatschet met a Tonkawe at Fort Griffin, Texas, who claimed to have previously lived among the Karankawa. From him, a vocabulary of twenty-five words was gathered, which was all he could remember of the language.
The vocabulary is unsatisfactory, not only because of its meagerness, but because most of the terms are unimportant for comparison. Nevertheless, such as it is, it represents all of the language that is extant. Judged by this vocabulary the language seems to be distinct not only from the Attakapa but from all others. Unsatisfactory as the linguistic evidence is, it appears to be safer to class the language provisionally as a distinct family upon the strength of it than to accept Sibley’s statement of its identity with Attakapa, especially as we know nothing of the extent of his information or whether indeed his statement was based upon a personal knowledge of the language.
The vocabulary is lacking, not just because it's limited, but also because most of the terms aren't significant for comparison. However, what we have represents all the existing language. Based on this vocabulary, the language seems to be different not only from Attakapa but also from all others. Despite the inadequacies of the linguistic evidence, it seems more prudent to tentatively classify the language as a distinct family based on this than to accept Sibley’s claim of its similarity to Attakapa, especially since we don't know how much information he had or if his statement was based on actual knowledge of the language.
KERESAN FAMILY.
> Keres, Turner in Pac. R. R. Rep., III, pt. 3, 55, 86-90, 1856 (includes Kiwomi, Cochitemi, Acoma).
> Keres, Turner in Pac. R. R. Rep., III, pt. 3, 55, 86-90, 1856 (includes Kiwomi, Cochitemi, Acoma).
= Kera, Powell in Rocky Mt. Presbyterian, Nov., 1878 (includes San Felipe, Santo Domingo, Cóchiti, Santa Aña, Cia, Acoma, Laguna, Povate, Hasatch, Mogino). Gratschet in U.S. Geog. Surv. W. 100th M., VII, 417, 1879. Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist. 259, 1883.
= Kera, Powell in Rocky Mt. Presbyterian, Nov., 1878 (includes San Felipe, Santo Domingo, Cóchiti, Santa Aña, Cia, Acoma, Laguna, Povate, Hasatch, Mogino). Gratschet in U.S. Geog. Surv. W. 100th M., VII, 417, 1879. Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist. 259, 1883.
= Keran, Powell in Am. Nat., 604, Aug., 1880 (enumerates pueblos and gives linguistic literature).
= Keran, Powell in Am. Nat., 604, Aug., 1880 (lists pueblos and provides linguistic literature).
= Queres, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Ana.), 479, 1878.
= Queres, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Ana.), 479, 1878.
= Chu-cha-cas, Lane in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, V, 689, 1855 (includes Laguna, Acoma, Santo Domingo, San Felipe, Santa Ana, Cochite, Sille).
= Chu-cha-cas, Lane in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, V, 689, 1855 (includes Laguna, Acoma, Santo Domingo, San Felipe, Santa Ana, Cochite, Sille).
= Chu-cha-chas, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 479, 1878 (misprint; follows Lane).
= Chu-cha-chas, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 479, 1878 (misprint; follows Lane).
= Kes-whaw-hay, Lane in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, V, 689, 1855 (same as Chu-cha-cas above). Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 479, 1878 (follows Lane).
= Kes-whaw-hay, Lane in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, V, 689, 1855 (same as Chu-cha-cas above). Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 479, 1878 (follows Lane).
Derivation unknown. The name is pronounced with an explosive initial sound, and Ad. F. Bandelier spells it Qq’uêres, Quéra, Quéris.
Derivation unknown. The name is pronounced with a strong initial sound, and Ad. F. Bandelier spells it Qq’uêres, Quéra, Quéris.
Under this name Turner, as above quoted, includes the vocabularies of Kiwomi, Cochitemi, and Acoma.
Under this name, Turner, as quoted above, includes the vocabularies of Kiwomi, Cochitemi, and Acoma.
The full list of pueblos of Keresan stock is given below. They are situated in New Mexico on the upper Rio Grande, on several of its small western affluents, and on the Jemez and San José, which also are tributaries of the Rio Grande.
The complete list of Keresan pueblos is provided below. They are located in New Mexico along the upper Rio Grande, on several of its smaller western tributaries, as well as on the Jemez and San José rivers, which are also tributaries of the Rio Grande.
VILLAGES.
Acoma. Acomita.57 Cochití. Hasatch. Laguna. Paguate. Pueblito.57 Punyeestye. Punyekia. |
Pusityitcho. San Felipe. Santa Ana. Santo Domingo. Seemunah. Sia. Wapuchuseamma. Ziamma. |
Population.—According to the census of 1890 the total population of the villages of the family is 3,560, distributed as follows:
Population.—According to the 1890 census, the total population of the family villages is 3,560, distributed as follows:
Acoma58 | 566 |
Cochití | 268 |
Laguna59 | 1,143 |
Santa Ana | 253 |
San Felipe | 554 |
Santo Domingo | 670 |
Sia | 106 |
KIOWAN FAMILY.
= Kiaways, Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853 (on upper waters Arkansas).
= Kiaways, Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853 (on the upper waters of the Arkansas River).
= Kioway, Turner in Pac. R. R. Rep., III, pt. 3, 55, 80, 1856 (based on the (Caigua) tribe only). Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 432, 433, 1859. Latham, EL. Comp. Phil., 444, 1862 (“more Paduca than aught else”).
= Kioway, Turner in Pac. R. R. Rep., III, pt. 3, 55, 80, 1856 (based on the (Caigua) tribe only). Buschmann, Traces of the Aztec Language, 432, 433, 1859. Latham, EL. Comp. Phil., 444, 1862 (“more Paduca than anything else”).
= Kayowe, Gatschet in Am. Antiq., 280, Oct., 1882 (gives phonetics of).
= Kayowe, Gatschet in Am. Antiq., 280, Oct., 1882 (provides phonetics of).
Derivation: From the Kiowa word Kó-i, plural Kó-igu, meaning “Káyowe man.” The Comanche term káyowe means “rat.”
Derivation: From the Kiowa word Kó-i, plural Kó-igu, meaning “Káyowe man.” The Comanche term káyowe means “rat.”
The author who first formally separated this family appears to have been Turner. Gallatin mentions the tribe and remarks that owing to the loss of Dr. Say’s vocabularies “we only know that both the Kiowas and Kaskaias languages were harsh, guttural, and extremely difficult.”60 Turner, upon the strength of a vocabulary furnished by Lieut. Whipple, dissents from the opinion expressed by Pike and others to the effect that the language is of the same stock as the Comanche, and, while admitting that its relationship to Camanche is greater than to any other family, thinks that the likeness is merely the result of long intercommunication. His opinion that it is entirely distinct from any other language has been indorsed by Buschmann and other authorities. The family is represented by the Kiowa tribe.
The author who first officially separated this family seems to have been Turner. Gallatin mentions the tribe and notes that due to the loss of Dr. Say’s vocabularies, “we only know that both the Kiowa and Kaskaias languages were harsh, guttural, and really tough.” Turner, based on a vocabulary provided by Lieut. Whipple, disagrees with the views expressed by Pike and others that the language is related to Comanche. While he acknowledges that its connection to Comanche is stronger than to any other family, he believes that the similarity is simply a result of long-term interactions. His view that it is completely distinct from any other language has been supported by Buschmann and other experts. The family is represented by the Kiowa tribe.
So intimately associated with the Comanches have the Kiowa been since known to history that it is not easy to determine their pristine home. By the Medicine Creek treaty of October 18, 1867, they and the Comanches were assigned their present reservation in the Indian Territory, both resigning all claims to other territory, especially their claims and rights in and to the country north of the Cimarron River and west of the eastern boundary of New Mexico.
So closely linked to the Comanches have the Kiowa been throughout history that it's hard to figure out where they originally came from. With the Medicine Creek treaty on October 18, 1867, they and the Comanches were given their current reservation in the Indian Territory, both giving up all claims to other land, especially their rights to the area north of the Cimarron River and west of the eastern border of New Mexico.
The terms of the cession might be taken to indicate a joint ownership of territory, but it is more likely that the Kiowa territory adjoined the Comanche on the northwest. In fact Pope61 definitely locates the Kiowa in the valley of the Upper Arkansas, and of its tributary, the Purgatory (Las Animas) River. This is in substantial accord with the statements of other writers of about the same period. Schermerhorn (1812) places the Kiowa on the heads of the Arkansas and Platte. Earlier still they appear upon the headwaters of the Platte, which is the region assigned them upon the map.62 This region was occupied later by the Cheyenne and Arapaho of Algonquian stock.
The terms of the agreement could suggest a shared ownership of land, but it's more likely that the Kiowa territory was located to the northwest of the Comanche. In fact, Pope61 clearly identifies the Kiowa in the valley of the Upper Arkansas and its tributary, the Purgatory (Las Animas) River. This aligns well with what other authors from that time period have said. Schermerhorn (1812) places the Kiowa in the headwaters of the Arkansas and Platte Rivers. Even earlier, they are noted on the headwaters of the Platte, which is the area marked for them on the map.62 This area was later inhabited by the Cheyenne and Arapaho, who are of Algonquian descent.
Population.—According to the United States census for 1890 there are 1,140 Kiowa on the Kiowa, Comanche, and Wichita Reservation, Indian Territory.
Population.—According to the United States census for 1890, there are 1,140 Kiowa on the Kiowa, Comanche, and Wichita Reservation in Indian Territory.
KITUNAHAN FAMILY.
= Kitunaha, Hale in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, 204, 535, 1846 (between the forks of the Columbia). Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, c, 10, 77, 1848 (Flatbow). Berghaus (1851), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1853. Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 70, 1856. Latham, Opuscula, 388, 1860. Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 395, 1862 (between 52° and 48° N.L., west of main ridge of Rocky Mountains). Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 170, 1877 (on Kootenay River).
= Kitunaha, Hale in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, 204, 535, 1846 (between the forks of the Columbia). Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, c, 10, 77, 1848 (Flatbow). Berghaus (1851), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1853. Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 70, 1856. Latham, Opuscula, 388, 1860. Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 395, 1862 (between 52° and 48° N.L., west of main ridge of Rocky Mountains). Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 170, 1877 (on Kootenay River).
= Coutanies, Hale in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, 204, 1846 (= Kitunaha).
= Coutanies, Hale in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, 204, 1846 (= Kitunaha).
= Kútanis, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man., 316, 1850 (Kitunaha).
= Kútanis, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man., 316, 1850 (Kitunaha).
= Kituanaha, Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853 (Coutaria or Flatbows, north of lat. 49°).
= Kituanaha, Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853 (Coutaria or Flatbows, north of lat. 49°).
= Kootanies, Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 661, 1859.
= Kootanies, Buschmann, Traces of the Aztec Language, 661, 1859.
= Kutani, Latham, El. Comp. Phil, 395, 1862 (or Kitunaha).
= Kutani, Latham, El. Comp. Phil, 395, 1862 (or Kitunaha).
= Cootanie, Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 395, 1862 (synonymous with Kitunaha).
= Cootanie, Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 395, 1862 (also known as Kitunaha).
= Kootenai, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 170, 1877 (defines area occupied). Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 446, 1877. Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 565, 1882.
= Kootenai, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 170, 1877 (defines area occupied). Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 446, 1877. Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 565, 1882.
= Kootenuha, Tolmie and Dawson, Comp. Vocabs., 79-87, 1884 (vocabulary of Upper Kootenuha).
= Kootenuha, Tolmie and Dawson, Comp. Vocabs., 79-87, 1884 (vocabulary of Upper Kootenuha).
= Flatbow, Hale in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, 204, 1846 (= Kitunaha). Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, 10, 77, 1848 (after Hale). Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 661, 1859. Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 395, 1862 (or Kitunaha). Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 170, 1877.
= Flatbow, Hale in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, 204, 1846 (= Kitunaha). Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, 10, 77, 1848 (after Hale). Buschmann, Traces of the Aztec Language, 661, 1859. Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 395, 1862 (or Kitunaha). Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 170, 1877.
= Flachbogen, Berghaus (1851), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1852.
= Flachbogen, Berghaus (1851), Physics Atlas, map 17, 1852.
X Shushwaps, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 460, 474, 1878 (includes Kootenais (Flatbows or Skalzi)).
X Shushwaps, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 460, 474, 1878 (includes Kootenais (Flatbows or Skalzi)).
This family was based upon a tribe variously termed Kitunaha, Kutenay, Cootenai, or Flatbow, living on the Kootenay River, a branch of the Columbia in Oregon.
This family was based on a tribe known as Kitunaha, Kutenay, Cootenai, or Flatbow, living along the Kootenay River, a branch of the Columbia in Oregon.
Mr. Gatschet thinks it is probable that there are two dialects of the language spoken respectively in the extreme northern and southern portions of the territory occupied, but the vocabularies at hand are not sufficient to definitely settle the question.
Mr. Gatschet believes that it's likely there are two dialects of the language spoken in the far northern and southern areas of the territory, but the available vocabularies are not enough to conclusively determine this.
The area occupied by the Kitunahan tribes is inclosed between the northern fork of the Columbia River, extending on the south along the Cootenay River. By far the greater part of the territory occupied by these tribes is in British Columbia.
The area occupied by the Kitunahan tribes is enclosed between the northern fork of the Columbia River, extending south along the Cootenay River. The majority of the territory occupied by these tribes is in British Columbia.
TRIBES.
The principal divisions or tribes are Cootenai, or Upper Cootenai; Akoklako, or Lower Cootenai; Klanoh-Klatklam, or Flathead Cootenai; Yaketahnoklatakmakanay, or Tobacco Plains Cootenai.
The main groups or tribes are Cootenai, or Upper Cootenai; Akoklako, or Lower Cootenai; Klanoh-Klatklam, or Flathead Cootenai; Yaketahnoklatakmakanay, or Tobacco Plains Cootenai.
Population.—There are about 425 Cootenai at Flathead Agency, Montana, and 539 at Kootenay Agency, British Columbia; total, 964.
Population.—There are about 425 Cootenai at Flathead Agency, Montana, and 539 at Kootenay Agency, British Columbia; total, 964.
KOLUSCHAN FAMILY.
= Koluschen, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 14, 1836 (islands and adjacent coast from 60° to 55° N.L.).
= Koluschen, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 14, 1836 (islands and nearby coast from 60° to 55° N.L.).
= Koulischen, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 306, 1836. Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, c, 77, 1848, (Koulischen and Sitka languages). Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853 (Sitka, bet. 52° and 59° lat.).
= Koulischen, Gallatin in Transactions and Collections of the American Antiquarian Society, II, 306, 1836. Gallatin in Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, II, pt. 1, c, 77, 1848, (Koulischen and Sitka languages). Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Indian Tribes, III, 402, 1853 (Sitka, between 52° and 59° latitude).
= Koluschians, Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 433, 1847 (follows Gallatin). Scouler (1846) in Jour. Eth. Soc. Lond., I, 231, 1848.
= Koluschians, Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 433, 1847 (follows Gallatin). Scouler (1846) in Jour. Eth. Soc. Lond., I, 231, 1848.
< Kolúch, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 294, 1850 (more likely forms a subdivision of Eskimo than a separate class; includes Kenay of Cook’s Inlet, Atna of Copper River, Koltshani, Ugalents, Sitkans, Tungaas, Inkhuluklait, Magimut, Inkalit; Digothi and Nehanni are classed as “doubtful Kolúches”).
< Kolúch, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 294, 1850 (more likely forms a subdivision of Eskimo than a separate group; includes Kenay of Cook’s Inlet, Atna of Copper River, Koltshani, Ugalents, Sitkans, Tungaas, Inkhuluklait, Magimut, Inkalit; Digothi and Nehanni are classified as “doubtful Kolúches”).
= Koloschen, Berghaus (1845), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1848. Ibid., 1852. Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 680, 1859. Berghaus, Physik. Atlas, map 72, 1887.
= Koloschen, Berghaus (1845), Physics Atlas, map 17, 1848. Same source, 1852. Buschmann, Traces of the Aztec Language, 680, 1859. Berghaus, Physics Atlas, map 72, 1887.
= Kolush, Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 401, 1862 (mere mention of family with short vocabulary).
= Kolush, Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 401, 1862 (just a brief mention of family with a short vocabulary).
= Kaloshians, Dall in Proc. Am. Ass., 375, 1885 (gives tribes and population).
= Kaloshians, Dall in Proc. Am. Ass., 375, 1885 (provides information on tribes and population).
X Northern, Scouler in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc. Lond., XI, 218, 1841 (includes Koloshes and Tun Ghasse).
X Northern, Scouler in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc. Lond., XI, 218, 1841 (includes Koloshes and Tun Ghasse).
X Haidah, Scouler, ibid, 219, 1841 (same as his Northern).
X Haidah, Scouler, same source, 219, 1841 (same as his Northern).
= Klen-ee-kate, Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, V, 489, 1855.
= Klen-ee-kate, Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, V, 489, 1855.
= Klen-e-kate, Kane, Wanderings of an Artist, app., 1859 (a census of N.W. coast tribes classified by language).
= Klen-e-kate, Kane, Wanderings of an Artist, app., 1859 (a survey of N.W. coast tribes categorized by language).
= Thlinkithen, Holmberg in Finland Soc., 284, 1856 (fide Buschmann, 676, 1859).
= Thlinkithen, Holmberg in Finland Soc., 284, 1856 (cited in Buschmann, 676, 1859).
= Thl’nkets, Dall in Proc. Am. Ass., 268, 269, 1869 (divided into Sitka-kwan, Stahkin-kwan, “Yakutats”).
= Thl’nkets, Dall in Proc. Am. Ass., 268, 269, 1869 (divided into Sitka-kwan, Stahkin-kwan, “Yakutats”).
= T’linkets, Dall in Cont. N.A. Eth., I, 36, 1877 (divided into Yăk´ūtăts, Chilkāht’-kwan, Sitka-kwan, Stākhin´-kwān, Kygāh´ni).
= T’linkets, Dall in Cont. N.A. Eth., I, 36, 1877 (divided into Yăk´ūtăts, Chilkāht’-kwan, Sitka-kwan, Stākhin´-kwān, Kygāh´ni).
= Thlinkeet, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent, and So. Am.), 460, 462, 1878 (from Mount St. Elias to Nass River; includes Ugalenzes, Yakutats, Chilkats, Hoodnids, Hoodsinoos, Takoos, Auks, Kakas, Stikines, Eeliknûs, Tungass, Sitkas). Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 562, 579, 1882.
= Thlinkeet, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent, and So. Am.), 460, 462, 1878 (from Mount St. Elias to Nass River; includes Ugalenzes, Yakutats, Chilkats, Hoodnids, Hoodsinoos, Takoos, Auks, Kakas, Stikines, Eeliknûs, Tungass, Sitkas). Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 562, 579, 1882.
= Thlinkit, Tolmie and Dawson, Comp. Vocabs., 14, 1884 (vocab. of Skutkwan Sept; also map showing distribution of family). Berghaus, Physik. Atlas, map 72, 1887.
= Thlinkit, Tolmie and Dawson, Comp. Vocabs., 14, 1884 (vocab. of Skutkwan Sept; also map showing distribution of family). Berghaus, Physik. Atlas, map 72, 1887.
= Tlinkit, Dall in Proc. Am. Ass., 375, 1885 (enumerates tribes and gives population).
= Tlinkit, Dall in Proc. Am. Ass., 375, 1885 (lists tribes and provides population data).
Derivation: From the Aleut word kolosh, or more properly, kaluga, meaning “dish,” the allusion being to the dish-shaped lip ornaments.
Derivation: From the Aleut word kolosh, or more accurately, kaluga, meaning “dish,” referring to the dish-shaped lip ornaments.
This family was based by Gallatin upon the Koluschen tribe (the Tshinkitani of Marchand), “who inhabit the islands and the adjacent coast from the sixtieth to the fifty-fifth degree of north latitude.”
This family was established by Gallatin based on the Koluschen tribe (the Tshinkitani of Marchand), “who live on the islands and the nearby coast from the sixtieth to the fifty-fifth degree of north latitude.”
In the Koluschan family, Gallatin observes that the remote analogies to the Mexican tongue to be found in several of the northern tribes, as the Kinai, are more marked than in any other.
In the Koluschan family, Gallatin notes that the similarities to the Mexican language found in several northern tribes, like the Kinai, are more pronounced than in any others.
The boundaries of this family as given by Gallatin are substantially in accordance with our present knowledge of the subject. The southern boundary is somewhat indeterminate owing to the fact, ascertained by the census agents in 1880, that the Haida tribes extend somewhat farther north than was formerly supposed and occupy the southeast half of Prince of Wales Island. About latitude 56°, or the mouth of Portland Canal, indicates the southern limit of the family, and 60°, or near the mouth of Atna River, the northern limit. Until recently they have been supposed to be exclusively 87 an insular and coast people, but Mr. Dawson has made the interesting discovery63 that the Tagish, a tribe living inland on the headwaters of the Lewis River, who have hitherto been supposed to be of Athapascan extraction, belong to the Koluschan family. This tribe, therefore, has crossed the coast range of mountains, which for the most part limits the extension of this people inland and confines them to a narrow coast strip, and have gained a permanent foothold in the interior, where they share the habits of the neighboring Athapascan tribes.
The boundaries of this family, as outlined by Gallatin, mostly align with what we currently know about the topic. The southern boundary is a bit unclear because, as found by census agents in 1880, the Haida tribes reach further north than previously thought and inhabit the southeast half of Prince of Wales Island. About latitude 56°, or the mouth of Portland Canal, marks the southern edge of the family, while 60°, or near the mouth of Atna River, represents the northern edge. Until recently, it was believed they were only an insular and coastal people, but Mr. Dawson has made the intriguing discovery that the Tagish, a tribe living inland near the headwaters of the Lewis River, who were thought to be of Athapascan descent, actually belong to the Koluschan family. This means that this tribe has moved across the coastal mountain range, which usually restricts this group’s expansion inland and confines them to a narrow coastal area, and has established a permanent presence in the interior, adopting the practices of the neighboring Athapascan tribes. 87
TRIBES.
Auk. Chilcat. Hanega. Hoodsunu. Hunah. Kek. |
Sitka. Stahkin. Tagish. Taku. Tongas. Yakutat. |
Population.—The following figures are from the census of 1880.64 The total population of the tribes of this family, exclusive of the Tagish, is 6,437, distributed as follows:
Population.—The following figures are from the census of 1880.64 The total population of the tribes in this family, excluding the Tagish, is 6,437, distributed as follows:
Auk | 640 | |
Chilcat | 988 | |
Hanega (including Kouyon and Klanak) | 587 | |
Hoodsunu | 666 | |
Hunah | 908 | |
Kek | 568 | |
Sitka | 721 | |
Stahkin | 317 | |
Taku | 269 | |
Tongas | 273 | |
Yakutat | 500 |
KULANAPAN FAMILY.
X Kula-napo, Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 431, 1853 (the name of one of the Clear Lake bands).
X Kula-napo, Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 431, 1853 (the name of one of the Clear Lake bands).
> Mendocino (?), Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 77, 1856 (name suggested for Choweshak, Batemdaikai, Kulanapo, Yukai, Khwaklamayu languages). Latham, Opuscula, 343, 1860. Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 410, 1863 (as above).
> Mendocino (?), Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 77, 1856 (name suggested for Choweshak, Batemdaikai, Kulanapo, Yukai, Khwaklamayu languages). Latham, Opuscula, 343, 1860. Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 410, 1863 (as above).
> Pomo, Powers in Overland Monthly, IX, 498, Dec., 1873 (general description of habitat and of family). Powers in Cont. N.A. Eth., III, 146, 1877. Powell, ibid., 491 (vocabularies of Gal-li-no-mé-ro, Yo-kai´-a, Ba-tem-da-kaii, Chau-i-shek, Yu-kai, Ku-la-na-po, H’hana, Venaambakaiia, Ka´-bi-na-pek, Chwachamaju). Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 16, 1877 (gives habitat and enumerates tribes of family). Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 436, 1877. Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent, and So. Am.), 476, 1878 (includes Castel Pomos, Ki, Cahto, Choam, Chadela, Matomey Ki, Usal or Calamet, Shebalne Pomos, Gallinomeros, Sanels, Socoas, Lamas, Comachos).
> Pomo, Powers in Overland Monthly, IX, 498, Dec., 1873 (general description of habitat and of family). Powers in Cont. N.A. Eth., III, 146, 1877. Powell, ibid., 491 (vocabularies of Gal-li-no-mé-ro, Yo-kai´-a, Ba-tem-da-kaii, Chau-i-shek, Yu-kai, Ku-la-na-po, H’hana, Venaambakaiia, Ka´-bi-na-pek, Chwachamaju). Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 16, 1877 (gives habitat and lists tribes of family). Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 436, 1877. Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent, and So. Am.), 476, 1878 (includes Castel Pomos, Ki, Cahto, Choam, Chadela, Matomey Ki, Usal or Calamet, Shebalne Pomos, Gallinomeros, Sanels, Socoas, Lamas, Comachos).
< Pomo, Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 566, 1882 (includes Ukiah, Gallinomero, Masallamagoon, Gualala, Matole, Kulanapo, Sanél, Yonios, Choweshak, Batemdakaie, Chocuyem, Olamentke, Kainamare, Chwachamaju. Of these, Chocuyem and Olamentke are Moquelumnan).
< Pomo, Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 566, 1882 (includes Ukiah, Gallinomero, Masallamagoon, Gualala, Matole, Kulanapo, Sanél, Yonios, Choweshak, Batemdakaie, Chocuyem, Olamentke, Kainamare, Chwachamaju. Of these, Chocuyem and Olamentke are Moquelumnan).
GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION.
The main territory of the Kulanapan family is bounded on the west by the Pacific Ocean, on the east by the Yukian and Copehan territories, on the north by the watershed of the Russian River, and on the south by a line drawn from Bodega Head to the southwest corner of the Yukian territory, near Santa Rosa, Sonoma County, California. Several tribes of this family, viz, the Kastel Pomo, Kai Pomo, and Kato Pomo, are located in the valley between the South Fork of Eel River and the main river, and on the headwaters of the South Fork, extending thence in a narrow strip to the ocean. In this situation they were entirely cut off from the main body by the intrusive Yuki tribes, and pressed upon from the north by the warlike Wailakki, who are said to have imposed their language and many of their customs upon them and as well doubtless to have extensively intermarried with them.
The main land of the Kulanapan family is bordered on the west by the Pacific Ocean, on the east by the Yukian and Copehan territories, on the north by the watershed of the Russian River, and on the south by a line drawn from Bodega Head to the southwest corner of the Yukian territory, near Santa Rosa, Sonoma County, California. Several tribes of this family, specifically the Kastel Pomo, Kai Pomo, and Kato Pomo, are situated in the valley between the South Fork of the Eel River and the main river, and on the headwaters of the South Fork, extending in a narrow strip to the ocean. In this location, they were completely cut off from the main group by the invading Yuki tribes and pressured from the north by the aggressive Wailakki, who are said to have influenced their language and many of their customs and likely intermarried with them extensively.
TRIBES.
KUSAN FAMILY.
= Kúsa, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 257, 1883.
= Kúsa, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 257, 1883.
Derivation: Milhau, in a manuscript letter to Gibbs (Bureau of Ethnology), states that “Coos in the Rogue River dialect is said to mean lake, lagoon or inland bay.”
Derivation: Milhau, in a manuscript letter to Gibbs (Bureau of Ethnology), states that “Coos in the Rogue River dialect is said to mean lake, lagoon, or inland bay.”
The “Kaus or Kwokwoos” tribe is merely mentioned by Hale as living on a river of the same name between the Umqua and the Clamet.65 Lewis and Clarke66 also mention them in the same location as the Cookkoo-oose. The tribe was referred to also under the name Kaus by Latham,67 who did not attempt its classification, having in fact no material for the purpose.
The “Kaus or Kwokwoos” tribe is briefly mentioned by Hale as living on a river of the same name between the Umqua and the Clamet.65 Lewis and Clarke66 also refer to them in the same area as the Cookkoo-oose. Latham also called the tribe Kaus,67 but he didn’t try to classify it, as he actually had no materials for that purpose.
Mr. Gatschet, as above, distinguishes the language as forming a distinct stock. It is spoken on the coast of middle Oregon, on Coos River and Bay, and at the mouth of Coquille River, Oregon.
Mr. Gatschet, as mentioned above, identifies the language as a separate stock. It is spoken along the coast of central Oregon, at Coos River and Bay, and at the mouth of Coquille River, Oregon.
TRIBES.
Anasitch. Melukitz. Mulluk or Lower Coquille. Nacu?. |
Population.—Most of the survivors of this family are gathered upon the Siletz Reservation, Oregon, but their number can not be stated as the agency returns are not given by tribes.
Population.—Most of the survivors of this family are gathered on the Siletz Reservation in Oregon, but their number cannot be specified because the agency reports do not provide figures by tribe.
LUTUAMIAN FAMILY.
= Lutuami, Hale in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, 199, 569, 1846 (headwaters Klamath River and lake). Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, c, 17, 77, 1848 (follows Hale). Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 325, 1850 (headwaters Clamet River). Berghaus (1851), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1852. Latham in Proc. Philolog. Soc. Lond., VI, 82, 1854. Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 74, 1856. Latham, Opuscula, 300, 310, 1860. Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 407, 1862.
= Lutuami, Hale in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, 199, 569, 1846 (headwaters Klamath River and lake). Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, c, 17, 77, 1848 (follows Hale). Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 325, 1850 (headwaters Clamet River). Berghaus (1851), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1852. Latham in Proc. Philolog. Soc. Lond., VI, 82, 1854. Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 74, 1856. Latham, Opuscula, 300, 310, 1860. Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 407, 1862.
= Luturim, Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853 (misprint for Lutuami; based on Clamets language).
= Luturim, Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853 (typo for Lutuami; derived from Clamets language).
= Lutumani, Latham, Opuscula, 341, 1860 (misprint for Lutuami).
= Lutumani, Latham, Opuscula, 341, 1860 (incorrect spelling for Lutuami).
= Tlamatl, Hale in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, 218, 569, 1846 (alternative of Lutuami). Berghaus (1851), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1852.
= Tlamatl, Hale in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, 218, 569, 1846 (alternative of Lutuami). Berghaus (1851), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1852.
= Clamets, Hale in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, 218, 569, 1846 (alternative of Lutuami).
= Clamets, Hale in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, 218, 569, 1846 (alternative of Lutuami).
< Klamath, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 460, 475, 1878 (a geographic group rather than a linguistic family; includes, in addition to the Klamath proper or Lutuami, the Yacons, Modocs, Copahs, Shastas, Palaiks, Wintoons, Eurocs, Cahrocs, Lototens, Weeyots, Wishosks, Wallies, Tolewahs, Patawats, Yukas, “and others between Eel River and Humboldt Bay.” The list thus includes several distinct families). Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 565, 640, 1882 (includes Lutuami or Klamath, Modoc and Copah, the latter belonging to the Copehan family).
< Klamath, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 460, 475, 1878 (a geographic group rather than a linguistic family; includes, besides the Klamath proper or Lutuami, the Yacons, Modocs, Copahs, Shastas, Palaiks, Wintoons, Eurocs, Cahrocs, Lototens, Weeyots, Wishosks, Wallies, Tolewahs, Patawats, Yukas, “and others between Eel River and Humboldt Bay.” The list thus includes several distinct families). Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 565, 640, 1882 (includes Lutuami or Klamath, Modoc and Copah, the latter belonging to the Copehan family).
= Klamath Indians of Southwestern Oregon, Gatschet in Cont, N.A. Eth., II, pt. 1, XXXIII, 1890.
= Klamath Indians of Southwestern Oregon, Gatschet in Cont, N.A. Eth., II, pt. 1, XXXIII, 1890.
Derivation: From a Pit River word meaning “lake.”
Derivation: From a Pit River word that means “lake.”
The tribes of this family appear from time immemorial to have occupied Little and Upper Klamath Lakes, Klamath Marsh, and Sprague River, Oregon. Some of the Modoc have been removed to the Indian Territory, where 84 now reside; others are in Sprague River Valley.
The tribes of this family have seemingly occupied Little and Upper Klamath Lakes, Klamath Marsh, and Sprague River, Oregon, for a very long time. Some of the Modoc have been relocated to the Indian Territory, where 84 now live; others are in Sprague River Valley.
The language is a homogeneous one and, according to Mr. Gatschet who has made a special study of it, has no real dialects, the two divisions of the family, Klamath and Modoc, speaking an almost identical language.
The language is consistent and, according to Mr. Gatschet, who has studied it extensively, doesn’t have any true dialects, with the two branches of the family, Klamath and Modoc, speaking nearly the same language.
The Klamaths’ own name is É-ukshikni, “Klamath Lake people.” The Modoc are termed by the Klamath Módokni, “Southern people.”
The Klamaths call themselves É-ukshikni, which means “Klamath Lake people.” The Klamath refer to the Modoc as Módokni, meaning “Southern people.”
TRIBES.
Klamath. Modoc. |
Population.—There were 769 Klamath and Modoc on the Klamath Reservation in 1889. Since then they have slightly decreased.
Population.—There were 769 Klamath and Modoc people on the Klamath Reservation in 1889. Since then, their numbers have slightly decreased.
MARIPOSAN FAMILY.
> Mariposa, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 84, 1856 (Coconoons language, Mariposa County). Latham, Opuscula, 350, 1860. Latham, El. Comp. Philology, 416, 1862 (Coconoons of Mercede River).
> Mariposa, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 84, 1856 (Coconoons language, Mariposa County). Latham, Opuscula, 350, 1860. Latham, El. Comp. Philology, 416, 1862 (Coconoons of Mercede River).
= Yo´-kuts, Powers in Cont. N.A. Eth., III, 369, 1877. Powell, ibid., 570 (vocabularies of Yo´-kuts, Wi´-chi-kik, Tin´-lin-neh, King’s River, Coconoons, Calaveras County).
= Yo'kuts, Powers in Cont. N.A. Eth., III, 369, 1877. Powell, ibid., 570 (vocabularies of Yo'kuts, Wi'chi-kik, Tin'lin-neh, King's River, Coconoons, Calaveras County).
= Yocut, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 158, 1877 (mentions Taches, Chewenee, Watooga, Chookchancies, Coconoons and others). Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 432, 1877.
= Yocut, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 158, 1877 (mentions Taches, Chewenee, Watooga, Chookchancies, Coconoons, and others). Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 432, 1877.
Derivation: A Spanish word meaning “butterfly,” applied to a county in California and subsequently taken for the family name.
Derivation: A Spanish word meaning “butterfly,” used for a county in California and later adopted as a family name.
Latham mentions the remnants of three distinct bands of the Coconoon, each with its own language, in the north of Mariposa County. These are classed together under the above name. More recently the tribes speaking languages allied to the Coconūn have been treated of under the family name Yokut. As, however, the stock was established by Latham on a sound basis, his name is here restored.
Latham talks about the remains of three separate groups of the Coconoon, each with its own language, in the northern part of Mariposa County. They are grouped together under this name. Recently, the tribes that speak languages related to the Coconūn have been referred to by the family name Yokut. However, since Latham's classification was founded on solid evidence, his name is restored here.
GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION.
The territory of the Mariposan family is quite irregular in outline. On the north it is bounded by the Fresno River up to the point of its junction with the San Joaquin; thence by a line running to the northeast corner of the Salinan territory in San Benito County, California; on the west by a line running from San Benito to Mount Pinos. From the middle of the western shore of Tulare Lake to the ridge at Mount Pinos on the south, the Mariposan area is merely a narrow strip in and along the foothills. Occupying one-half of the western and all the southern shore of Tulare Lake, and bounded on the north by a line running from the southeast corner of Tulare Lake due east to the first great spur of the Sierra Nevada range is the territory of the intrusive Shoshoni. On the east the secondary range of the Sierra Nevada forms the Mariposan boundary.
The Mariposan family's territory has a pretty irregular shape. To the north, it is bordered by the Fresno River up to where it meets the San Joaquin; then it extends along a line to the northeast corner of the Salinan territory in San Benito County, California. To the west, it follows a line from San Benito to Mount Pinos. From the middle of the western shore of Tulare Lake to the ridge at Mount Pinos in the south, the Mariposan area is just a narrow strip in the foothills. It covers half of the western shore and the entire southern shore of Tulare Lake, and to the north, it is bordered by a line running from the southeast corner of Tulare Lake straight east to the first major spur of the Sierra Nevada range. The eastern boundary of the Mariposan territory is defined by the secondary range of the Sierra Nevada.
In addition to the above a small strip of territory on the eastern bank of the San Joaquin is occupied by the Cholovone division of the Mariposan family, between the Tuolumne and the point where the San Joaquin turns to the west before entering Suisun Bay.
In addition to the above, a small area of land on the eastern bank of the San Joaquin is occupied by the Cholovone division of the Mariposan family, between the Tuolumne and the spot where the San Joaquin bends west before entering Suisun Bay.
TRIBES.
Ayapaì (Tule River). Chainímaini (lower King’s River). Chukaímina (Squaw Valley). Chūk’chansi (San Joaquin River above Millerton). Ćhunut (Kaweah River at the lake). Coconūn´ (Merced River). Ititcha (King’s River). Kassovo (Day Creek). Kau-í-a (Kaweah River; foothills). Kiawétni (Tule River at Porterville). Mayáyu (Tule River, south fork). Notoánaiti (on the lake). |
Ochíngita (Tule River). Pitkachì (extinct; San Joaquin River below Millerton). Pohállin Tinleh (near Kern lake). Sawákhtu (Tule River, south fork). Táchi (Kingston). Télumni (Kaweah River below Visalia). Tínlinneh (Fort Tejon). Tisèchu (upper King’s River). Wíchikik (King’s River). Wikchúmni (Kaweah River; foothills). Wíksachi (upper Kaweah Valley). Yúkol (Kaweah River plains). |
Population.—There are 145 of the Indians of this family now attached to the Mission Agency, California.
Population.—There are 145 members of this family of Indians currently affiliated with the Mission Agency in California.
MOQUELUMNAN FAMILY.
> Tcho-ko-yem, Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 421, 1853 (mentioned as a band and dialect).
> Tcho-ko-yem, Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 421, 1853 (noted as a group and dialect).
> Moquelumne, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 81, 1856 (includes Hale’s Talatui, Tuolumne from Schoolcraft, Mumaltachi, Mullateco, Apangasi, Lapappu, Siyante or Typoxi, Hawhaw’s band of Aplaches, San Rafael vocabulary, Tshokoyem vocabulary, Cocouyem and Yonkiousme Paternosters, Olamentke of Kostromitonov, Paternosters for Mission de Santa Clara and the Vallee de los Tulares of Mofras, Paternoster of the Langue Guiloco de la Mission de San Francisco). Latham, Opuscula, 347, 1860. Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 414, 1862 (same as above).
> Moquelumne, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 81, 1856 (includes Hale’s Talatui, Tuolumne from Schoolcraft, Mumaltachi, Mullateco, Apangasi, Lapappu, Siyante or Typoxi, Hawhaw’s band of Aplaches, San Rafael vocabulary, Tshokoyem vocabulary, Cocouyem and Yonkiousme Paternosters, Olamentke of Kostromitonov, Paternosters for Mission de Santa Clara and the Vallee de los Tulares of Mofras, Paternoster of the Langue Guiloco de la Mission de San Francisco). Latham, Opuscula, 347, 1860. Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 414, 1862 (same as above).
= Meewoc, Powers in Overland Monthly, 322, April, 1873 (general account of family with allusions to language). Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 159, 1877 (gives habitat and bands of family). Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 433, 1877.
= Meewoc, Powers in Overland Monthly, 322, April, 1873 (general account of family with allusions to language). Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 159, 1877 (gives habitat and bands of family). Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 433, 1877.
= Mí-wok, Powers in Cont. N.A. Eth., III, 346, 1877 (nearly as above).
= Mí-wok, Powers in Contemporary North American Ethnography, III, 346, 1877 (nearly as above).
< Mutsun, Powell in Cont. N.A. Eth., III, 535, 1877 (vocabs. of Mi´-wok, Tuolumne, Costano, Tcho-ko-yem, Mūtsūn, Santa Clara, Santa Cruz, Chum-te´-ya, Kawéya, San Raphael Mission, Talatui, Olamentke). Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 157, 1877 (gives habitat and members of family). Gatschet, in Beach, Ind. Misc., 430, 1877.
< Mutsun, Powell in Cont. N.A. Eth., III, 535, 1877 (vocabularies of Mi’Wok, Tuolumne, Costano, Tcho-ko-yem, Mūtsūn, Santa Clara, Santa Cruz, Chum-te’ya, Kawéya, San Raphael Mission, Talatui, Olamentke). Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 157, 1877 (provides habitat and family members). Gatschet, in Beach, Ind. Misc., 430, 1877.
X Runsiens, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent, and So. Am.), 476, 1878 (includes Olhones, Eslenes, Santa Cruz, San Miguel, Lopillamillos, Mipacmacs, Kulanapos, Yolos, Suisunes, Talluches, Chowclas, Waches, Talches, Poowells).
X Runsiens, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent, and So. Am.), 476, 1878 (includes Olhones, Eslenes, Santa Cruz, San Miguel, Lopillamillos, Mipacmacs, Kulanapos, Yolos, Suisunes, Talluches, Chowclas, Waches, Talches, Poowells).
Derivation: From the river and hill of same name in Calaveras County, California; according to Powers the Meewoc name for the river is Wakalumitoh.
Derivation: From the river and hill of the same name in Calaveras County, California; according to Powers, the Meewoc name for the river is Wakalumitoh.
The Talatui mentioned by Hale68 as on the Kassima (Cosumnes) River belong to the above family. Though this author clearly distinguished the language from any others with which he was acquainted, he nowhere expressed the opinion that it is entitled to family rank or gave it a family name. Talatui is mentioned as a tribe from which he obtained an incomplete vocabulary.
The Talatui mentioned by Hale68 as being on the Kassima (Cosumnes) River are part of the above family. Although this author clearly identified the language as distinct from others he knew, he never stated that it deserves family status or assigned it a family name. Talatui is noted as a tribe from which he collected a partial vocabulary.
It was not until 1856 that the distinctness of the linguistic family was fully set forth by Latham. Under the head of Moquelumne, this author gathers several vocabularies representing different languages and dialects of the same stock. These are the Talatui of Hale, the Tuolumne from Schoolcraft, the Sonoma dialects as represented by the Tshokoyem vocabulary, the Chocuyem and Youkiousme paternosters, and the Olamentke of Kostromitonov in Bäer’s Beiträge. He also places here provisionally the paternosters from the Mission de Santa Clara and the Vallee de los Tulares of Mofras; also the language Guiloco de la Mission de San Francisco. The Costano containing the five tribes of the Mission of Dolores, viz., the Ahwastes, Olhones or Costanos of the coast, Romonans, Tulomos and the Altahmos seemed to Latham to differ from the Moquelumnan language. Concerning them he states “upon the whole, however, the affinities seem to run in the direction of the languages of the next 93 group, especially in that of the Ruslen.” He adds: “Nevertheless, for the present I place the Costano by itself, as a transitional form of speech to the languages spoken north, east, and south of the Bay of San Francisco.” Recent investigation by Messrs. Curtin and Henshaw have confirmed the soundness of Latham’s views and, as stated under head of the Costanoan family, the two groups of languages are considered to be distinct.
It wasn't until 1856 that Latham clearly outlined the uniqueness of this language family. Under the category of Moquelumne, he compiled several vocabularies from different languages and dialects that belong to the same family. These include the Talatui from Hale, the Tuolumne noted by Schoolcraft, the Sonoma dialects represented by the Tshokoyem vocabulary, the Chocuyem and Youkiousme paternosters, and the Olamentke from Kostromitonov in Bäer’s Beiträge. He also provisionally includes the paternosters from the Mission de Santa Clara and the Vallee de los Tulares of Mofras, along with the Guiloco language from the Mission de San Francisco. Latham believed that the Costano language, which covers the five tribes of the Mission of Dolores—namely the Ahwastes, Olhones or Costanos from the coast, Romonans, Tulomos, and Altahmos—differed from the Moquelumnan language. He stated, “overall, however, the similarities seem to align with the languages of the next 93 group, especially with that of the Ruslen.” He added, “For now, I’ll classify the Costano separately as a transitional speech form leading to the languages spoken north, east, and south of the Bay of San Francisco.” Recent research by Messrs. Curtin and Henshaw has confirmed Latham’s insights, and as noted in the context of the Costanoan family, these two groups of languages are considered distinct.
GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION.
The Moquelumnan family occupies the territory bounded on the north by the Cosumne River, on the south by the Fresno River, on the east by the Sierra Nevada, and on the west by the San Joaquin River, with the exception of a strip on the east bank occupied by the Cholovone. A part of this family occupies also a territory bounded on the south by San Francisco Bay and the western half of San Pablo Bay; on the west by the Pacific Ocean from the Golden Gate to Bodega Head; on the north by a line running from Bodega Head to the Yukian territory northeast of Santa Rosa, and on the east by a line running from the Yukian territory to the northernmost point of San Pablo Bay.
The Moquelumnan family lives in the area bordered to the north by the Cosumne River, to the south by the Fresno River, to the east by the Sierra Nevada, and to the west by the San Joaquin River, except for a section on the east bank that is occupied by the Cholovone. Part of this family also inhabits an area bordered to the south by San Francisco Bay and the western half of San Pablo Bay; to the west by the Pacific Ocean from the Golden Gate to Bodega Head; to the north by a line running from Bodega Head to the Yukian territory northeast of Santa Rosa; and to the east by a line running from the Yukian territory to the northernmost point of San Pablo Bay.
PRINCIPAL TRIBES.
Miwok division: | |
Awani. Chauchila. Chumidok. Chumtiwa. Chumuch. Chumwit. Hettitoya. Kani. Lopolatimne. Machemni. Mokelumni. Newichumni. |
Olowidok. Olowit. Olowiya. Sakaiakumni. Seroushamne. Talatui. Tamoleka. Tumidok. Tumun. Walakumni. Yuloni. |
Olamentke division: | |
Bollanos. Chokuyem. Guimen. Likatuit. Nicassias. Numpali. |
Olamentke. Olumpali. Sonomi. Tamal. Tulare. Utchium. |
Population.—Comparatively few of the Indians of this family survive, and these are mostly scattered in the mountains and away from the routes of travel. As they were never gathered on reservations, an accurate census has not been taken.
Population.—There are relatively few members of this family of Indians left, and most of them live scattered in the mountains, far from travel routes. Since they were never grouped together on reservations, an accurate count hasn't been conducted.
In the detached area north of San Francisco Bay, chiefly in Marin County, formerly inhabited by the Indians of this family, almost none remain. There are said to be none living about the mission of San Rafael, and Mr. Henshaw, in 1888, succeeded in locating only six at Tomales Bay, where, however, he obtained a very good vocabulary from a woman.
In the remote area north of San Francisco Bay, mostly in Marin County, there are almost no members of this Indian family left. It’s reported that none live near the mission of San Rafael, and Mr. Henshaw, in 1888, was able to find only six individuals at Tomales Bay, where he did manage to collect a solid vocabulary from a woman.
MUSKHOGEAN FAMILY.
> Muskhogee, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 94, 306, 1836 (based upon Muskhogees, Hitchittees, Seminoles). Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 402, 1847 (includes Muskhogees, Seminoles, Hitchittees).
> Muskhogee, Gallatin in Transactions and Collections of the American Antiquarian Society, II, 94, 306, 1836 (based on Muskhogees, Hitchittees, Seminoles). Prichard, Physical History of Mankind, V, 402, 1847 (includes Muskhogees, Seminoles, Hitchittees).
> Muskhogies, Berghaus (1845), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1848. Ibid., 1852.
> Muskhogies, Berghaus (1845), Physical Atlas, map 17, 1848. Same source, 1852.
> Muscogee, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 460, 471, 1878 (includes Muscogees proper, Seminoles, Choctaws, Chickasaws, Hitchittees, Coosadas or Coosas, Alibamons, Apalaches).
> Muscogee, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 460, 471, 1878 (includes the proper Muscogees, Seminoles, Choctaws, Chickasaws, Hitchittees, Coosadas or Coosas, Alibamons, Apalaches).
= Maskoki, Gatschet, Creek Mig. Legend, I, 50, 1884 (general account of family; four branches, Maskoki, Apalachian, Alibamu, Chahta). Berghaus, Physik. Atlas, map 72, 1887.
= Maskoki, Gatschet, Creek Mig. Legend, I, 50, 1884 (general account of family; four branches, Maskoki, Apalachian, Alibamu, Chahta). Berghaus, Physik. Atlas, map 72, 1887.
> Choctaw Muskhogee, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 119, 1836.
> Choctaw Muskhogee, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 119, 1836.
> Chocta-Muskhog, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, xcix, 77, 1848. Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 401, 1853.
> Chocta-Muskhog, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, xcix, 77, 1848. Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 401, 1853.
= Chata-Muskoki, Hale in Am. Antiq., 108, April, 1883 (considered with reference to migration).
= Chata-Muskoki, Hale in Am. Antiq., 108, April, 1883 (discussed in relation to migration).
> Chahtas, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 100, 306, 1836 (or Choctaws).
> Chahtas, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 100, 306, 1836 (or Choctaws).
> Chahtahs, Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 403, 1847 (or Choktahs or Flatheads).
> Chahtahs, Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 403, 1847 (or Choktahs or Flatheads).
> Tschahtas, Berghaus (1845), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1848. Ibid., 1852.
> Tschahtas, Berghaus (1845), Physics Atlas, map 17, 1848. Same source, 1852.
> Choctah, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 337, 1850 (includes Choctahs, Muscogulges, Muskohges). Latham in Trans. Phil. Soc. Lond., 103, 1856. Latham, Opuscula, 366, 1860.
> Choctah, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 337, 1850 (includes Choctahs, Muscogulges, Muskohges). Latham in Trans. Phil. Soc. Lond., 103, 1856. Latham, Opuscula, 366, 1860.
> Mobilian, Bancroft, Hist. U.S., 349, 1840.
> Mobilian, Bancroft, Hist. U.S., 349, 1840.
> Flat-heads, Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 403, 1847 (Chahtahs or Choktahs).
> Flat-heads, Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 403, 1847 (Chahtahs or Choktahs).
> Coshattas, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 349, 1850 (not classified).
> Coshattas, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 349, 1850 (not classified).
> Humas, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 341, 1850 (east of Mississippi above New Orleans).
> Humas, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 341, 1850 (east of Mississippi above New Orleans).
Derivation: From the name of the principal tribe of the Creek Confederacy.
Derivation: From the name of the main tribe in the Creek Confederacy.
In the Muskhogee family Gallatin includes the Muskhogees proper, who lived on the Coosa and Tallapoosa Rivers; the Hitchittees, living on the Chattahoochee and Flint Rivers; and the Seminoles of the peninsula of Florida. It was his opinion, formed by a comparison of vocabularies, that the Choctaws and Chickasaws should also be classed under this family. In fact, he called69 the family Choctaw Muskhogee. In deference, however, to established usage, the two tribes were kept separate in his table and upon the colored map. In 1848 he appears to be fully convinced of the soundness of the view doubtfully expressed in 1836, and calls the family the Chocta-Muskhog.
In the Muskhogee family, Gallatin includes the Muskhogees proper, who lived on the Coosa and Tallapoosa Rivers; the Hitchittees, who lived on the Chattahoochee and Flint Rivers; and the Seminoles from the peninsula of Florida. He believed, based on vocabulary comparisons, that the Choctaws and Chickasaws should also be considered part of this family. In fact, he referred to the family as Choctaw Muskhogee. However, out of respect for established usage, he kept the two tribes separate in his table and on the colored map. By 1848, he seemed to be fully convinced of the validity of the idea he had expressed doubtfully in 1836 and referred to the family as Chocta-Muskhog.
GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION.
The area occupied by this family was very extensive. It may be described in a general way as extending from the Savannah River and the Atlantic west to the Mississippi, and from the Gulf of Mexico north to the Tennessee River. All of this territory was held by Muskhogean tribes except the small areas occupied by the Yuchi, Ná’htchi, and some small settlements of Shawni.
The area this family occupied was quite large. It can be generally described as stretching from the Savannah River and the Atlantic Ocean west to the Mississippi River, and from the Gulf of Mexico north to the Tennessee River. All of this land was held by Muskhogean tribes, except for the small regions occupied by the Yuchi, Ná’htchi, and a few small settlements of Shawni.
95 Upon the northeast Muskhogean limits are indeterminate. The Creek claimed only to the Savannah River; but upon its lower course the Yamasi are believed to have extended east of that river in the sixteenth to the eighteenth century.70 The territorial line between the Muskhogean family and the Catawba tribe in South Carolina can only be conjectured.
95 The northeastern boundaries of the Muskhogean territory are unclear. The Creek claimed land only up to the Savannah River, but during the sixteenth to eighteenth centuries, the Yamasi are thought to have extended east of that river along its lower stretch.70 The border between the Muskhogean group and the Catawba tribe in South Carolina can only be guessed at.
It seems probable that the whole peninsula of Florida was at one time held by tribes of Timuquanan connection; but from 1702 to 1708, when the Apalachi were driven out, the tribes of northern Florida also were forced away by the English. After that time the Seminole and the Yamasi were the only Indians that held possession of the Floridian peninsula.
It seems likely that the entire Florida peninsula was once inhabited by tribes connected to the Timuquanan culture; however, from 1702 to 1708, when the Apalachi were pushed out, the tribes of northern Florida were also displaced by the English. After that period, the Seminole and the Yamasi were the only Native American groups that remained in control of the Florida peninsula.
PRINCIPAL TRIBES.
Alibamu. Apalachi. Chicasa. Choctaw. Creek or Maskoki proper. Koasáti. Seminole. Yamacraw. Yamasi. |
Population.—There is an Alibamu town on Deep Creek, Indian Territory, an affluent of the Canadian, Indian Territory. Most of the inhabitants are of this tribe. There are Alibamu about 20 miles south of Alexandria, Louisiana, and over one hundred in Polk County, Texas.
Population.—There is an Alibamu town on Deep Creek, Indian Territory, a tributary of the Canadian River in Indian Territory. Most of the residents belong to this tribe. There are Alibamu people about 20 miles south of Alexandria, Louisiana, and over one hundred in Polk County, Texas.
So far as known only three women of the Apalachi survived in 1886, and they lived at the Alibamu town above referred to. The United States Census bulletin for 1890 gives the total number of pureblood Choctaw at 9,996, these being principally at Union Agency, Indian Territory. Of the Chicasa there are 3,464 at the same agency; Creek 9,291; Seminole 2,539; of the latter there are still about 200 left in southern Florida.
So far as is known, only three Apalachi women survived in 1886, and they lived at the Alibamu town mentioned earlier. The United States Census bulletin for 1890 reports the total number of pureblood Choctaw as 9,996, primarily located at Union Agency, Indian Territory. There are 3,464 Chicasa at the same agency; Creek 9,291; Seminole 2,539; of the Seminole, about 200 still remain in southern Florida.
There are four families of Koasáti, about twenty-five individuals, near the town of Shepherd, San Jacinto County, Texas. Of the Yamasi none are known to survive.
There are four families of Koasáti, about twenty-five people, near the town of Shepherd, San Jacinto County, Texas. None of the Yamasi are known to be alive.
NATCHESAN FAMILY.
> Natches, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 95, 806, 1836 (Natches only). Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 402, 403, 1847.
> Natches, Gallatin in Transactions and Collections of the American Antiquarian Society, II, 95, 806, 1836 (Natches only). Prichard, Physical History of Mankind, V, 402, 403, 1847.
> Natsches, Berghaus (1845), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1848. Ibid., 1852.
> Natsches, Berghaus (1845), Physics Atlas, map 17, 1848. Ibid., 1852.
> Natchez, Bancroft, Hist. U.S., 248, 1840. Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, xcix, 77, 1848 (Natchez only). Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 340, 1850 (tends to include Taensas, Pascagoulas, Colapissas, Biluxi in same family). Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 401, 1853 (Natchez only). Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent, and So. Am.), 460, 473, 1878 (suggests that it may include the Utchees).
> Natchez, Bancroft, Hist. U.S., 248, 1840. Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, xcix, 77, 1848 (Natchez only). Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 340, 1850 (tends to include Taensas, Pascagoulas, Colapissas, Biluxi in the same family). Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 401, 1853 (Natchez only). Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent, and So. Am.), 460, 473, 1878 (suggests that it may include the Utchees).
> Naktche, Gatschet, Creek Mig. Legend, I, 34, 1884. Gatschet in Science, 414, April 29, 1887.
> Naktche, Gatschet, Creek Mig. Legend, I, 34, 1884. Gatschet in Science, 414, April 29, 1887.
The Na’htchi, according to Gallatin, a residue of the well-known nation of that name, came from the banks of the Mississippi, and joined the Creek less than one hundred years ago.71 The seashore from Mobile to the Mississippi was then inhabited by several small tribes, of which the Na’htchi was the principal.
The Na’htchi, according to Gallatin, a remnant of the well-known nation of that name, came from the banks of the Mississippi and joined the Creek less than a hundred years ago.71 The coastline from Mobile to the Mississippi was then home to several small tribes, with the Na’htchi being the main one.
Before 1730 the tribe lived in the vicinity of Natchez, Miss., along St. Catherine Creek. After their dispersion by the French in 1730 most of the remainder joined the Chicasa and afterwards the Upper Creek. They are now in Creek and Cherokee Nations, Indian Territory.
Before 1730, the tribe lived near Natchez, Mississippi, along St. Catherine Creek. After the French scattered them in 1730, most of the rest joined the Chickasaw and later the Upper Creek. They are now part of the Creek and Cherokee Nations in Indian Territory.
The linguistic relations of the language spoken by the Taensa tribe have long been in doubt, and it is probable that they will ever remain so. As no vocabulary or text of this language was known to be in existence, the “Grammaire et vocabulaire de la langue Taensa, avec textes traduits et commentés par J.-D. Haumonté, Parisot, L. Adam,” published in Paris in 1882, was received by American linguistic students with peculiar interest. Upon the strength of the linguistic material embodied in the above Mr. Gatschet (loc. cit.) was led to affirm the complete linguistic isolation of the language.
The language spoken by the Taensa tribe has been a subject of uncertainty for a long time, and it likely will remain that way. Since there hasn't been any known vocabulary or text of this language, the publication of “Grammaire et vocabulaire de la langue Taensa, avec textes traduits et commentés par J.-D. Haumonté, Parisot, L. Adam,” released in Paris in 1882, caught the attention of American linguistics students. Based on the linguistic information presented in this work, Mr. Gatschet (loc. cit.) claimed that the language is completely isolated linguistically.
Grave doubts of the authenticity of the grammar and vocabulary have, however, more recently been brought forward.72 The text contains internal evidences of the fraudulent character, if not of the whole, at least of a large part of the material. So palpable and gross are these that until the character of the whole can better be understood by the inspection of the original manuscript, alleged to be in Spanish, by a competent expert it will be far safer to reject both the vocabulary and grammar. By so doing we are left without any linguistic evidence whatever of the relations of the Taensa language.
Grave doubts about the authenticity of the grammar and vocabulary have, however, recently been raised. The text shows clear signs of being fraudulent, if not in its entirety, then at least in a significant portion of the material. These signs are so obvious that until a knowledgeable expert can examine the original manuscript, which is said to be in Spanish, it’s much safer to dismiss both the vocabulary and grammar. As a result, we are left without any linguistic evidence regarding the relationships of the Taensa language.
D’Iberville, it is true, supplies us with the names of seven Taensa towns which were given by a Taensa Indian who accompanied him; but most of these, according to Mr. Gatschet, were given, in the Chicasa trade jargon or, as termed by the French, the “Mobilian trade jargon,” which is at least a very natural supposition. Under these circumstances we can, perhaps, do no better than rely upon the statements of several of the old writers who appear to be unanimous in regarding the language of the Taensa as of Na’htchi connection. Du Pratz’s statement to that effect is weakened from the fact that the statement also includes the Shetimasha, the language of which is known from a vocabulary to be totally distinct not only from the Na’htchi but from any other. To supplement Du Pratz’s testimony, such as it is, we have the statements of M. de Montigny, the 97 missionary who affirmed the affinity of the Taensa language to that of the Na’htchi, before he had visited the latter in 1699, and of Father Gravier, who also visited them. For the present, therefore, the Taensa language is considered to be a branch of the Na’htchi.
D’Iberville indeed provides us with the names of seven Taensa towns, given by a Taensa Indian who was with him; however, according to Mr. Gatschet, most of these names were in the Chicasa trade jargon, or what the French call “Mobilian trade jargon,” which seems like a reasonable assumption. Given this, we might as well rely on the accounts of several old writers who all agree that the Taensa language is connected to Na’htchi. Du Pratz’s claim on this is weakened because it also includes the Shetimasha, whose language is known from a vocabulary to be entirely different from Na’htchi and any other language. To back up Du Pratz’s testimony, such as it is, we have the assertions of M. de Montigny, the missionary who claimed the Taensa language was similar to Na’htchi before he visited them in 1699, as well as Father Gravier, who also visited them. For now, the Taensa language is considered a branch of Na’htchi.
The Taensa formerly dwelt upon the Mississippi, above and close to the Na’htchi. Early in the history of the French settlements a portion of the Taensa, pressed upon by the Chicasa, fled and were settled by the French upon Mobile Bay.
The Taensa used to live on the Mississippi, near the Na’htchi. Early on in the French settlements, some of the Taensa, forced out by the Chicasa, escaped and were settled by the French in Mobile Bay.
PRINCIPAL TRIBES.
Na’htchi. Taensa. |
Population.—There still are four Na’htchi among the Creek in Indian Territory and a number in the Cheroki Hills near the Missouri border.
Population.—There are still four Na’htchi among the Creek in Indian Territory and several in the Cheroki Hills near the Missouri border.
PALAIHNIHAN FAMILY.
= Palaihnih, Hale in U.S. Expl. Expd., VI, 218, 569, 1846 (used in family sense).
= Palaihnih, Hale in U.S. Expl. Expd., VI, 218, 569, 1846 (used in family sense).
= Palaik, Hale in U.S. Expl. Expd., VI, 199, 218, 569, 1846 (southeast of Lutuami in Oregon), Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, 18, 77, 1848. Latham, Nat. Hist. Man., 325, 1850 (southeast of Lutuami). Berghaus (1851), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1852. Latham in Proc. Philolog. Soc. Lond., VI, 82, 1854 (cites Hale’s vocab). Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 74, 1856 (has Shoshoni affinities). Latham, Opuscula, 310, 341, 1860. Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 407, 1862.
= Palaik, Hale in U.S. Expl. Expd., VI, 199, 218, 569, 1846 (southeast of Lutuami in Oregon), Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, 18, 77, 1848. Latham, Nat. Hist. Man., 325, 1850 (southeast of Lutuami). Berghaus (1851), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1852. Latham in Proc. Philolog. Soc. Lond., VI, 82, 1854 (cites Hale’s vocab). Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 74, 1856 (has Shoshoni affinities). Latham, Opuscula, 310, 341, 1860. Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 407, 1862.
= Palainih, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, c, 1848. (after Hale). Berghaus (1851), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1852.
= Palainih, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, c, 1848. (after Hale). Berghaus (1851), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1852.
= Pulairih, Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853 (obvious typographical error; quotes Hale’s Palaiks).
= Pulairih, Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853 (clear typographical error; quotes Hale’s Palaiks).
= Pit River, Powers in Overland Monthly, 412, May, 1874 (three principal tribes: Achomáwes, Hamefcuttelies, Astakaywas or Astakywich). Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 164, 1877 (gives habitat; quotes Hale for tribes). Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 439, 1877.
= Pit River, Powers in Overland Monthly, 412, May, 1874 (three main tribes: Achomáwes, Hamefcuttelies, Astakaywas or Astakywich). Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 164, 1877 (provides location; cites Hale for tribes). Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 439, 1877.
= A-cho-mâ´-wi, Powell in Cont. N.A. Eth., III, 601, 1877 (vocabs. of A-cho-mâ´-wi and Lutuami). Powers in ibid., 267 (general account of tribes; A-cho-mâ´-wi, Hu-mâ´-whi, Es-ta-ke´-wach, Han-te´-wa, Chu-mâ´-wa, A-tu-a´-mih, Il-mâ´-wi).
= A-cho-mâ´-wi, Powell in Cont. N.A. Eth., III, 601, 1877 (vocabularies of A-cho-mâ´-wi and Lutuami). Powers in ibid., 267 (overview of tribes; A-cho-mâ´-wi, Hu-mâ´-whi, Es-ta-ke´-wach, Han-te´-wa, Chu-mâ´-wa, A-tu-a´-mih, Il-mâ´-wi).
< Klamath, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So.Am.), 460, 475, 1878 (includes Palaiks).
< Klamath, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So.Am.), 460, 475, 1878 (includes Palaiks).
< Shasta, Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 565, 1882 (contains Palaik of present family).
< Shasta, Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 565, 1882 (includes Palaik of current family).
Derivation: From the Klamath word p’laikni, signifying “mountaineers” or “uplanders” (Gatschet).
Derivation: From the Klamath word p’laikni, meaning "mountaineers" or "uplanders" (Gatschet).
In two places73 Hale uses the terms Palaihnih and Palaiks interchangeably, but inasmuch as on page 569, in his formal table of linguistic families and languages, he calls the family Palaihnih, this is given preference over the shorter form of the name.
In two places73 Hale uses the terms Palaihnih and Palaiks interchangeably, but since on page 569, in his formal table of linguistic families and languages, he refers to the family as Palaihnih, that version is preferred over the shorter name.
Though here classed as a distinct family, the status of the Pit River dialects can not be considered to be finally settled. Powers speaks of the language as “hopelessly consonantal, harsh, and sesquipedalian,” * * * “utterly unlike the sweet and simple 98 languages of the Sacramento.” He adds that the personal pronouns show it to be a true Digger Indian tongue. Recent investigations by Mr. Gatschet lead him, however, to believe that ultimately it will be found to be linguistically related to the Sastean languages.
Though classified here as a separate family, the status of the Pit River dialects is not considered to be definitively settled. Powers describes the language as “hopelessly consonantal, harsh, and overly complex,” * * * “completely unlike the sweet and simple 98 languages of the Sacramento.” He adds that the personal pronouns indicate it is a true Digger Indian language. Recent research by Mr. Gatschet, however, leads him to believe that in the end, it will be found to be linguistically related to the Sastean languages.
GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION.
The family was located by Hale to the southeast of the Lutuami (Klamath). They chiefly occupied the area drained by the Pit River in extreme northeastern California. Some of the tribe were removed to Round Valley Reservation, California.
The family was found by Hale in the southeast part of the Lutuami (Klamath). They mainly lived in the area drained by the Pit River in far northeastern California. Some members of the tribe were moved to the Round Valley Reservation, California.
PRINCIPAL TRIBES.
Powers, who has made a special study of the tribe, recognizes the following principal tribal divisions:74
Powers, who has done extensive research on the tribe, identifies the following main tribal divisions:74
Achomâ´wi. Atua´mih. Chumâ´wa. Estake´wach. Hante´wa. Humâ´whi. Ilmâ´wi. Pakamalli? |
PIMAN FAMILY.
= Pima, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 898, 1850 (cites three languages from the Mithridates, viz, Pima proper, Opata, Eudeve). Turner in Pac. R. R. Rep., III, pt. 3, 55, 1856 (Pima proper). Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 92, 1856 (contains Pima proper, Opata, Eudeve, Papagos). Latham, Opuscula, 356, 1860. Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 427, 1862 (includes Pima proper, Opata, Eudeve, Papago, Ibequi, Hiaqui, Tubar, Tarahumara, Cora). Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 156, 1877 (includes Pima, Névome, Pápago). Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 429, 1877 (defines area and gives habitat).
= Pima, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 898, 1850 (lists three languages from the Mithridates: Pima proper, Opata, Eudeve). Turner in Pac. R. R. Rep., III, pt. 3, 55, 1856 (Pima proper). Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 92, 1856 (includes Pima proper, Opata, Eudeve, Papagos). Latham, Opuscula, 356, 1860. Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 427, 1862 (includes Pima proper, Opata, Eudeve, Papago, Ibequi, Hiaqui, Tubar, Tarahumara, Cora). Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 156, 1877 (includes Pima, Névome, Pápago). Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 429, 1877 (describes the area and gives habitat).
Latham used the term Pima in 1850, citing under it three dialects or languages. Subsequently, in 1856, he used the same term for one of the five divisions into which he separates the languages of Sonora and Sinaloa.
Latham used the term Pima in 1850, referring to three dialects or languages. Later, in 1856, he applied the same term to one of the five groups into which he categorizes the languages of Sonora and Sinaloa.
The same year Turner gave a brief account of Pima as a distinct language, his remarks applying mainly to Pima proper of the Gila River, Arizona. This tribe had been visited by Emory and Johnston and also described by Bartlett. Turner refers to a short vocabulary in the Mithridates, another of Dr. Coulter’s in Royal Geological Society Journal, vol. XI, 1841, and a third by Parry in Schoolcraft, Indian Tribes, vol. III, 1853. The short vocabulary he himself published was collected by Lieut. Whipple.
The same year, Turner provided a brief overview of Pima as a separate language, mainly focusing on the Pima spoken along the Gila River in Arizona. This tribe had been visited by Emory and Johnston and also described by Bartlett. Turner mentions a short vocabulary in the Mithridates, another one by Dr. Coulter in the Royal Geological Society Journal, vol. XI, 1841, and a third by Parry in Schoolcraft, Indian Tribes, vol. III, 1853. The short vocabulary he published himself was collected by Lieut. Whipple.
Only a small portion of the territory occupied by this family is included within the United States, the greater portion being in Mexico where it extends to the Gulf of California. The family is represented in the United States by three tribes, Pima alta, Sobaipuri, and Papago. The former have lived for at least two centuries with the 99 Maricopa on the Gila River about 160 miles from the mouth. The Sobaipuri occupied the Santa Cruz and San Pedro Rivers, tributaries of the Gila, but are no longer known. The Papago territory is much more extensive and extends to the south across the border. In recent times the two tribes have been separated, but the Pima territory as shown upon the map was formerly continuous to the Gila River.
Only a small part of the land occupied by this family is within the United States, while the majority is in Mexico, reaching down to the Gulf of California. The family is represented in the U.S. by three tribes: Pima alta, Sobaipuri, and Papago. The Pima alta have lived alongside the Maricopa on the Gila River for at least two centuries, about 160 miles from the mouth. The Sobaipuri inhabited the Santa Cruz and San Pedro Rivers, which are tributaries of the Gila, but they are no longer known. The Papago territory is much larger and extends south across the border. Recently, the two tribes have been separated, but the Pima territory, as shown on the map, was once continuous to the Gila River.
According to Buschmann, Gatschet, Brinton, and others the Pima language is a northern branch of the Nahuatl, but this relationship has yet to be demonstrated.75
According to Buschmann, Gatschet, Brinton, and others, the Pima language is a northern branch of Nahuatl, but this connection has not been proven yet. 75
PRINCIPAL TRIBES.
Northern group: |
Opata. Papago. Pima. |
Southern group: |
Cahita. Cora. Tarahumara. Tepeguana. |
Population.—Of the above tribes the Pima and Papago only are within our boundaries. Their numbers under the Pima Agency, Arizona,76 are Pima, 4,464; Papago, 5,163.
Population.—Of the tribes mentioned, only the Pima and Papago are within our borders. Their populations under the Pima Agency, Arizona, are Pima, 4,464; Papago, 5,163.
PUJUNAN FAMILY.
> Pujuni, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 80, 1856 (contains Pujuni, Secumne, Tsamak of Hale, Cushna of Schoolcraft). Latham, Opuscula, 346, 1860.
> Pujuni, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 80, 1856 (includes Pujuni, Secumne, Tsamak of Hale, Cushna of Schoolcraft). Latham, Opuscula, 346, 1860.
> Meidoos, Powers in Overland Monthly, 420, May, 1874.
> Meidoos, Powers in Overland Monthly, 420, May, 1874.
= Meidoo, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 159, 1877 (gives habitat and tribes). Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 433, 1877.
= Meidoo, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 159, 1877 (provides details on habitat and tribes). Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 433, 1877.
> Mai´-du, Powers in Cont. N.A. Eth., III, 282, 1877 (same as Mai´-deh; general account of; names the tribes). Powell, ibid., 586 (vocabs. of Kon´-kau, Hol-o´-lu-pai, Na´-kum, Ni´-shi-nam, “Digger,” Cushna, Nishinam, Yuba or Nevada, Punjuni, Sekumne, Tsamak).
> Mai´-du, Powers in Cont. N.A. Eth., III, 282, 1877 (same as Mai´-deh; general account of; names the tribes). Powell, ibid., 586 (vocabularies of Kon´-kau, Hol-o´-lu-pai, Na´-kum, Ni´-shi-nam, “Digger,” Cushna, Nishinam, Yuba or Nevada, Punjuni, Sekumne, Tsamak).
> Neeshenams, Powers in Overland Monthly, 21, Jan., 1874 (considers this tribe doubtfully distinct from Meidoo family).
> Neeshenams, Powers in Overland Monthly, 21, Jan., 1874 (questions whether this tribe is really separate from the Meidoo family).
> Ni-shi-nam, Powers in Cont. N.A. Eth., III, 313, 1877 (distinguishes them from Maidu family).
> Ni-shi-nam, Powers in Cont. N.A. Eth., III, 313, 1877 (distinguishes them from the Maidu family).
X Sacramento Valley, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 476, 1878 (Ochecumne, Chupumne, Secumne, Cosumne, Sololumne, Puzlumne, Yasumne, etc.; “altogether about 26 tribes”).
X Sacramento Valley, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 476, 1878 (Ochecumne, Chupumne, Secumne, Cosumne, Sololumne, Puzlumne, Yasumne, etc.; “altogether about 26 tribes”).
The following tribes were placed in this group by Latham: Pujuni, Secumne, Tsamak of Hale, and the Cushna of Schoolcraft. The name adopted for the family is the name of a tribe given by Hale.77 This was one of the two races into which, upon the information of Captain Sutter as derived by Mr. Dana, all the Sacramento tribes 100 were believed to be divided. “These races resembled one another in every respect but language.”
The following tribes were grouped together by Latham: Pujuni, Secumne, Tsamak from Hale, and the Cushna from Schoolcraft. The name chosen for the family comes from a tribe named by Hale.77 This was one of the two groups into which, based on information from Captain Sutter as relayed by Mr. Dana, all the Sacramento tribes 100 were thought to be divided. “These groups were similar in every way except for their language.”
Hale gives short vocabularies of the Pujuni, Sekumne, and Tsamak. Hale did not apparently consider the evidence as a sufficient basis for a family, but apparently preferred to leave its status to be settled later.
Hale provides brief word lists for the Pujuni, Sekumne, and Tsamak. He didn't seem to think the evidence was enough to establish a family, but he apparently preferred to let its status be determined at a later time.
GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION.
The tribes of this family have been carefully studied by Powers, to whom we are indebted for most all we know of their distribution. They occupied the eastern bank of the Sacramento in California, beginning some 80 or 100 miles from its mouth, and extended northward to within a short distance of Pit River, where they met the tribes of the Palaihnihan family. Upon the east they reached nearly to the border of the State, the Palaihnihan, Shoshonean, and Washoan families hemming them in in this direction.
The tribes in this family have been thoroughly researched by Powers, who is responsible for much of what we know about their distribution. They lived on the eastern bank of the Sacramento River in California, starting about 80 to 100 miles from its mouth, and extended northward close to Pit River, where they encountered the tribes of the Palaihnihan family. To the east, they nearly reached the state border, with the Palaihnihan, Shoshonean, and Washoan families surrounding them in that direction.
PRINCIPAL TRIBES.
Bayu. Boka. Eskin. Hélto. Hoak. Hoankut. Hololúpai. Koloma. Konkau. |
Kū´lmeh. Kulomum. Kwatóa. Nakum. Olla. Otaki. Paupákan. Pusúna. Taitchida. |
Tíshum. Toámtcha. Tosikoyo. Toto. Ustóma. Wapúmni. Wima. Yuba. |
QUORATEAN FAMILY.
> Quoratem, Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 422, 1853 (proposed as a proper name of family “should it be held one”).
> Quoratem, Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 422, 1853 (suggested as a family name “if it is considered one”).
> Eh-nek, Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 423, 1853 (given as name of a band only; but suggests Quoratem as a proper family name).
> Eh-nek, Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 423, 1853 (given as the name of a band only; but suggests Quoratem as a proper family name).
> Ehnik, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 76, 1856 (south of Shasti and Lutuami areas). Latham, Opuscula, 342, 1860.
> Ehnik, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 76, 1856 (south of Shasti and Lutuami areas). Latham, Opuscula, 342, 1860.
= Cahrocs, Powers in Overland Monthly, 328, April, 1872 (on Klamath and Salmon Rivers).
= Cahrocs, Powers in Overland Monthly, 328, April, 1872 (on Klamath and Salmon Rivers).
= Cahrok, Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 438, 1877.
= Cahrok, Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 438, 1877.
= Ka´-rok, Powers in Cont. N.A. Eth., III, 19, 1877. Powell in ibid., 447, 1877 (vocabularies of Ka´-rok, Arra-Arra, Peh´-tsik, Eh-nek).
= Ka´-rok, Powers in Cont. N.A. Eth., III, 19, 1877. Powell in ibid., 447, 1877 (vocabularies of Ka´-rok, Arra-Arra, Peh´-tsik, Eh-nek).
< Klamath, Keane, App. to Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 475, 1878 (cited as including Cahrocs).
< Klamath, Keane, App. to Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 475, 1878 (cited as including Cahrocs).
Derivation: Name of a band at mouth of Salmon River, California. Etymology unknown.
Derivation: Name of a band at the mouth of the Salmon River, California. Etymology unknown.
This family name is equivalent to the Cahroc or Karok of Powers and later authorities.
This family name is the same as the Cahroc or Karok mentioned by Powers and later sources.
In 1853, as above cited, Gibbs gives Eh-nek as the titular heading of his paragraphs upon the language of this family, with the remark 101 that it is “The name of a band at the mouth of the Salmon, or Quoratem river.” He adds that “This latter name may perhaps be considered as proper to give to the family, should it be held one.” He defines the territory occupied by the family as follows: “The language reaches from Bluff creek, the upper boundary of the Pohlik, to about Clear creek, thirty or forty miles above the Salmon; varying, however, somewhat from point to point.”
In 1853, as mentioned earlier, Gibbs uses Eh-nek as the main title for his sections about this language family, noting that it is “the name of a group at the mouth of the Salmon, or Quoratem river.” He adds that “this latter name could possibly be seen as the appropriate name for the family, if it is considered one.” He describes the territory occupied by the family as follows: “The language stretches from Bluff creek, the upper boundary of the Pohlik, to around Clear creek, thirty or forty miles upstream from the Salmon; though it does vary a bit from one point to another.”
The presentation of the name Quoratem, as above, seems sufficiently formal, and it is therefore accepted for the group first indicated by Gibbs.
The way the name Quoratem is presented above seems formal enough, so it is accepted for the group first mentioned by Gibbs.
In 1856 Latham renamed the family Ehnik, after the principal band, locating the tribe, or rather the language, south of the Shasti and Lutuami areas.
In 1856, Latham renamed the family Ehnik, after the main band, placing the tribe, or more accurately the language, south of the Shasti and Lutuami areas.
GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION.
The geographic limits of the family are somewhat indeterminate, though the main area occupied by the tribes is well known. The tribes occupy both banks of the lower Klamath from a range of hills a little above Happy Camp to the junction of the Trinity, and the Salmon River from its mouth to its sources. On the north, Quoratean tribes extended to the Athapascan territory near the Oregon line.
The geographic boundaries of the family are a bit unclear, but the main area where the tribes live is well established. The tribes are located on both sides of the lower Klamath, from a range of hills just above Happy Camp to where it meets the Trinity, and along the Salmon River from its mouth to its sources. To the north, the Quoratean tribes reached into Athapascan territory near the Oregon border.
TRIBES.
Ehnek. Karok. Pehtsik. |
Population.—According to a careful estimate made by Mr. Curtin in the region in 1889, the Indians of this family number about 600.
Population.—According to a detailed estimate by Mr. Curtin in the area in 1889, the members of this tribe number around 600.
SALINAN FAMILY.
< Salinas, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 85, 1856 (includes Gioloco, Ruslen, Soledad of Mofras, Eslen, Carmel, San Antonio, San Miguel). Latham, Opuscula, 350, 1860.
< Salinas, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 85, 1856 (includes Gioloco, Ruslen, Soledad of Mofras, Eslen, Carmel, San Antonio, San Miguel). Latham, Opuscula, 350, 1860.
> San Antonio, Powell in Cont. N.A. Eth., III, 568, 1877 (vocabulary of; not given as a family, but kept by itself).
> San Antonio, Powell in Cont. N.A. Eth., III, 568, 1877 (vocabulary of; not listed as a family, but maintained separately).
< Santa Barbara, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 157, 1877 (cited here as containing San Antonio). Gatschet in U.S. Geog. Surv. W. 100th M., VII, 419, 1879 (contains San Antonio, San Miguel).
< Santa Barbara, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 157, 1877 (cited here as containing San Antonio). Gatschet in U.S. Geog. Surv. W. 100th M., VII, 419, 1879 (contains San Antonio, San Miguel).
X Runsiens, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 476, 1878 (San Miguel of his group belongs here).
X Runsiens, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 476, 1878 (San Miguel of his group belongs here).
Derivation: From river of same name.
Derivation: From the river of the same name.
The language formerly spoken at the Missions of San Antonio and San Miguel in Monterey County, California, have long occupied a doubtful position. By some they have been considered distinct, not only from each other, but from all other languages. Others have held that they represent distinct dialects of the Chumashan (Santa Barbara) group of languages. Vocabularies collected in 1884 by Mr. Henshaw show clearly that the two are closely connected dialects and that they are in no wise related to any other family.
The language that was once spoken at the Missions of San Antonio and San Miguel in Monterey County, California, has long been viewed with uncertainty. Some people believe they are distinct, not only from one another but also from all other languages. Others argue that they are separate dialects of the Chumashan (Santa Barbara) language group. Vocabularies collected in 1884 by Mr. Henshaw clearly demonstrate that the two are closely related dialects and are not connected to any other language family.
102 The group established by Latham under the name Salinas is a heterogeneous one, containing representatives of no fewer than four distinct families. Gioloco, which he states “may possibly belong to this group, notwithstanding its reference to the Mission of San Francisco,” really is congeneric with the vocabularies assigned by Latham to the Mendocinan family. The “Soledad of Mofras” belongs to the Costanoan family mentioned on page 348 of the same essay, as also do the Ruslen and Carmel. Of the three remaining forms of speech, Eslen, San Antonio, and San Miguel, the two latter are related dialects, and belong within the drainage of the Salinas River. The term Salinan is hence applied to them, leaving the Eslen language to be provided with a name.
102 The group that Latham named Salinas is quite diverse, including representatives from at least four different families. Gioloco, which he mentions “might belong to this group, even though it’s associated with the Mission of San Francisco,” is actually closely related to the vocabularies that Latham assigned to the Mendocinan family. The “Soledad of Mofras” is part of the Costanoan family mentioned on page 348 of the same essay, as are the Ruslen and Carmel. Of the three other languages, Eslen, San Antonio, and San Miguel, the latter two are related dialects and are within the area drained by the Salinas River. Therefore, the term Salinan is applied to them, while a name still needs to be assigned to the Eslen language.
Population.—Though the San Antonio and San Miguel were probably never very populous tribes, the Missions of San Antonio and San Miguel, when first established in the years 1771 and 1779, contained respectively 1,400 and 1,300 Indians. Doubtless the larger number of these converts were gathered in the near vicinity of the two missions and so belonged to this family. In 1884 when Mr. Henshaw visited the missions he was able to learn of the existence of only about a dozen Indians of this family, and not all of these could speak their own language.
Population.—Although the San Antonio and San Miguel tribes were probably never very large, the Missions of San Antonio and San Miguel, when they were first established in 1771 and 1779, had about 1,400 and 1,300 Indians, respectively. Most of these converts likely came from the nearby area and were part of this family. When Mr. Henshaw visited the missions in 1884, he found out that only around a dozen Indians from this family still existed, and not all of them were able to speak their native language.
SALISHAN FAMILY.
> Salish, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 134, 306, 1836 (or Flat Heads only). Latham in Proc. Philolog. Soc. Lond., II, 31-50, 1846 (of Duponceau. Said to be the Okanagan of Tolmie).
> Salish, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 134, 306, 1836 (or Flat Heads only). Latham in Proc. Philolog. Soc. Lond., II, 31-50, 1846 (of Duponceau. Said to be the Okanagan of Tolmie).
X Salish, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 460, 474, 1878 (includes Flatheads, Kalispelms, Skitsuish, Colvilles, Quarlpi, Spokanes, Pisquouse, Soaiatlpi).
X Salish, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 460, 474, 1878 (includes Flatheads, Kalispelms, Skitsuish, Colvilles, Quarlpi, Spokanes, Pisquouse, Soaiatlpi).
= Salish, Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 565, 618, 1882.
= Salish, Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 565, 618, 1882.
> Selish, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc. II, pt. 1, 77, 1848 (vocab. of Nsietshaws). Tolmie and Dawson, Comp. Vocabs., 63, 78, 1884 (vocabularies of Lillooet and Kullēspelm).
> Selish, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc. II, pt. 1, 77, 1848 (vocab. of Nsietshaws). Tolmie and Dawson, Comp. Vocabs., 63, 78, 1884 (vocabularies of Lillooet and Kullēspelm).
> Jelish, Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 403, 1853 (obvious misprint for Selish; follows Hale as to tribes).
> Jelish, Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 403, 1853 (obvious misprint for Selish; follows Hale regarding tribes).
= Selish, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 169, 1877 (gives habitat and tribes of family). Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 444, 1877.
= Selish, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 169, 1877 (provides habitat and tribes of the family). Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 444, 1877.
< Selish, Dall, after Gibbs, in Cont. N.A. Eth., 1, 241, 1877 (includes Yakama, which is Shahaptian).
< Selish, Dall, after Gibbs, in Cont. N.A. Eth., 1, 241, 1877 (includes Yakama, which is Shahaptian).
> Tsihaili-Selish, Hale in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, 205, 535, 569, 1846 (includes Shushwaps. Selish or Flatheads, Skitsuish, Piskwaus, Skwale, Tsihailish, Kawelitsk, Nsietshawus). Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, c, 10, 1848 (after Hale). Berghaus (1851), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1852. Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 658-661, 1859. Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 399, 1862 (contains Shushwap or Atna Proper, Kuttelspelm or Pend d’Oreilles, Selish, Spokan, Okanagan, Skitsuish, Piskwaus, Nusdalum, Kawitchen, Cathlascou, Skwali, Chechili, Kwaintl, Kwenaiwtl, Nsietshawus, Billechula).
> Tsihaili-Selish, Hale in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, 205, 535, 569, 1846 (includes Shushwaps, Selish or Flatheads, Skitsuish, Piskwaus, Skwale, Tsihailish, Kawelitsk, Nsietshawus). Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, c, 10, 1848 (after Hale). Berghaus (1851), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1852. Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 658-661, 1859. Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 399, 1862 (contains Shushwap or Atna Proper, Kuttelspelm or Pend d’Oreilles, Selish, Spokan, Okanagan, Skitsuish, Piskwaus, Nusdalum, Kawitchen, Cathlascou, Skwali, Chechili, Kwaintl, Kwenaiwtl, Nsietshawus, Billechula).
> Atnahs, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 134, 135, 306, 1836 (on Fraser River). Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 427, 1847 (on Fraser River).
> Atnahs, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 134, 135, 306, 1836 (on Fraser River). Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 427, 1847 (on Fraser River).
X Nootka-Columbian, Scouler in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc. Lond., XI, 224, 1841 (includes, among others, Billechoola, Kawitchen, Noosdalum, Squallyamish of present family).
X Nootka-Columbian, Scouler in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc. Lond., XI, 224, 1841 (includes, among others, Billechoola, Kawitchen, Noosdalum, Squallyamish of present family).
X Insular, Scouler, ibid., (same as Nootka-Columbian family).
X Insular, Scouler, same source, (same as Nootka-Columbian family).
X Shahaptan, Scouler, ibid., 225 (includes Okanagan of this family).
X Shahaptan, Scouler, ibid., 225 (includes Okanagan from this family).
X Southern, Scouler, ibid., 224 (same as Nootka-Columbian family).
X Southern, Scouler, ibid., 224 (same as Nootka-Columbian family).
> Billechoola, Latham in Jour. Eth. Soc. Lond., I, 154, 1848 (assigns Friendly Village of McKenzie here). Latham, Opuscula, 250, 1860 (gives Tolmie’s vocabulary).
> Billechoola, Latham in Jour. Eth. Soc. Lond., I, 154, 1848 (assigns Friendly Village of McKenzie here). Latham, Opuscula, 250, 1860 (gives Tolmie’s vocabulary).
> Billechula, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 300, 1850 (mouth of Salmon River). Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 72, 1856 (same). Latham, Opuscula, 339, 1860.
> Billechula, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 300, 1850 (mouth of Salmon River). Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 72, 1856 (same). Latham, Opuscula, 339, 1860.
> Bellacoola, Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 564, 607, 1882 (Bellacoolas only; specimen vocabulary).
> Bellacoola, Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 564, 607, 1882 (only Bellacoolas; sample vocabulary).
> Bilhoola, Tolmie and Dawson, Comp. Vocabs., 62, 1884 (vocab. of Noothlākimish).
> Bilhoola, Tolmie and Dawson, Comp. Vocabs., 62, 1884 (vocab. of Noothlākimish).
> Bilchula, Boas in Petermann’s Mitteilungen, 130, 1887 (mentions Sātsq, Nūte̥´l, Nuchalkmχ, Taleómχ).
> Bilchula, Boas in Petermann’s Mitteilungen, 130, 1887 (mentions Sātsq, Nūte̥´l, Nuchalkmχ, Taleómχ).
X Naass, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc. II, pt. 1, c, 77, 1848 (cited as including Billechola).
X Naass, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc. II, pt. 1, c, 77, 1848 (cited as including Billechola).
> Tsihaili, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 310, 1850 (chiefly lower part of Fraser River and between that and the Columbia; includes Shuswap, Salish, Skitsuish, Piskwaus, Kawitchen, Skwali, Checheeli, Kowelits, Noosdalum, Nsietshawus).
> Tsihaili, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 310, 1850 (mainly the lower part of Fraser River and the area between that and the Columbia; includes Shuswap, Salish, Skitsuish, Piskwaus, Kawitchen, Skwali, Checheeli, Kowelits, Noosdalum, Nsietshawus).
X Wakash, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 301, 1850 (cited as including Klallems).
X Wakash, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 301, 1850 (cited as including Klallems).
X Shushwaps, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 460, 474, 1878 (quoted as including Shewhapmuch and Okanagans).
X Shushwaps, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 460, 474, 1878 (quoted as including Shewhapmuch and Okanagans).
X Hydahs, Keane, ibid., 473 (includes Bellacoolas of present family).
X Hydahs, Keane, ibid., 473 (includes Bellacoolas of current family).
X Nootkahs, Keane, ibid., 473 (includes Komux, Kowitchans, Klallums, Kwantlums, Teets of present family).
X Nootkahs, Keane, ibid., 473 (includes Komux, Kowitchans, Klallums, Kwantlums, Teets of current family).
X Nootka, Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 564, 1882 (contains the following Salishan tribes: Cowichin, Soke, Comux, Noosdalum, Wickinninish, Songhie, Sanetch, Kwantlum, Teet, Nanaimo, Newchemass, Shimiahmoo, Nooksak, Samish, Skagit, Snohomish, Clallam, Toanhooch).
X Nootka, Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 564, 1882 (includes the following Salishan tribes: Cowichin, Soke, Comux, Noosdalum, Wickinninish, Songhie, Sanetch, Kwantlum, Teet, Nanaimo, Newchemass, Shimiahmoo, Nooksak, Samish, Skagit, Snohomish, Clallam, Toanhooch).
< Puget Sound Group, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 474, 1878 (comprises Nooksahs, Lummi, Samish, Skagits, Nisqually, Neewamish, Sahmamish, Snohomish, Skeewamish, Squanamish, Klallums, Classets, Chehalis, Cowlitz, Pistchin, Chinakum; all but the last being Salishan).
< Puget Sound Group, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 474, 1878 (includes Nooksack, Lummi, Samish, Skagit, Nisqually, Neewahmish, Sahmamah, Snohomish, Skeewamish, Squamish, Klallam, Classet, Chehalis, Cowlitz, Pistchin, Chinakum; all except the last being Salishan).
> Flatheads, Keane, ibid., 474, 1878 (same as his Salish above).
> Flatheads, Keane, ibid., 474, 1878 (same as his Salish above).
> Kawitshin, Tolmie and Dawson, Comp. Vocabs., 39, 1884 (vocabs. of Songis and Kwantlin Sept and Kowmook or Tlathool).
> Kawitshin, Tolmie and Dawson, Comp. Vocabs., 39, 1884 (vocabularies of Songis and Kwantlin Sept and Kowmook or Tlathool).
> Qauitschin, Boas in Petermann’s Mitteilungen, 131, 1887.
> Qauitschin, Boas in Petermann’s Mitteilungen, 131, 1887.
> Niskwalli, Tolmie and Dawson, Comp. Vocabs., 50, 121, 1884 (or Skwalliamish vocabulary of Sinahomish).
> Niskwalli, Tolmie, and Dawson, Comp. Vocabs., 50, 121, 1884 (or Skwalliamish vocabulary of Sinahomish).
The extent of the Salish or Flathead family was unknown to Gallatin, as indeed appears to have been the exact locality of the tribe of which he gives an anonymous vocabulary from the Duponceau collection. The tribe is stated to have resided upon one of the branches of the Columbia River, “which must be either the most southern branch of Clarke’s River or the most northern branch of Lewis’s River.” The former supposition was correct. As employed by Gallatin the family embraced only a single tribe, the Flathead tribe proper. The Atnah, a Salishan tribe, were considered by Gallatin to be distinct, and the name would be eligible as the family 104 name; preference, however, is given to Salish. The few words from the Friendly Village near the sources of the Salmon River given by Gallatin in Archæologia Americana, II, 1836, pp. 15, 306, belong under this family.
The full extent of the Salish or Flathead family was unknown to Gallatin, and so was the exact location of the tribe from which he provided an anonymous vocabulary from the Duponceau collection. It’s noted that this tribe lived along one of the branches of the Columbia River, “which must be either the southernmost branch of Clarke’s River or the northernmost branch of Lewis’s River.” The first assumption was correct. When Gallatin referred to the family, he included only one tribe, the Flathead tribe itself. The Atnah, a Salishan tribe, were seen by Gallatin as distinct, and their name could potentially serve as the family name; however, the preference is for Salish. The few words from the Friendly Village near the sources of the Salmon River mentioned by Gallatin in Archæologia Americana, II, 1836, pp. 15, 306, fall under this family. 104
GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION.
Since Gallatin’s time, through the labors of Riggs, Hale, Tolmie, Dawson, Boas, and others, our knowledge of the territorial limits of this linguistic family has been greatly extended. The most southern outpost of the family, the Tillamook and Nestucca, were established on the coast of Oregon, about 50 miles to the south of the Columbia, where they were quite separated from their kindred to the north by the Chinookan tribes. Beginning on the north side of Shoalwater Bay, Salishan tribes held the entire northwestern part of Washington, including the whole of the Puget Sound region, except only the Macaw territory about Cape Flattery, and two insignificant spots, one near Port Townsend, the other on the Pacific coast to the south of Cape Flattery, which were occupied by Chimakuan tribes. Eastern Vancouver Island to about midway of its length was also held by Salishan tribes, while the great bulk of their territory lay on the mainland opposite and included much of the upper Columbia. On the south they were hemmed in mainly by the Shahaptian tribes. Upon the east Salishan tribes dwelt to a little beyond the Arrow Lakes and their feeder, one of the extreme north forks of the Columbia. Upon the southeast Salishan tribes extended into Montana, including the upper drainage of the Columbia. They were met here in 1804 by Lewis and Clarke. On the northeast Salish territory extended to about the fifty-third parallel. In the northwest it did not reach the Chilcat River.
Since Gallatin’s time, thanks to the efforts of Riggs, Hale, Tolmie, Dawson, Boas, and others, our understanding of the geographical boundaries of this linguistic family has greatly expanded. The southernmost representatives of the family, the Tillamook and Nestucca, were located on the Oregon coast, about 50 miles south of the Columbia River, where they were quite isolated from their relatives to the north by the Chinookan tribes. Starting on the north side of Shoalwater Bay, Salishan tribes occupied the entire northwestern part of Washington, including the whole Puget Sound region, except for the Macaw territory around Cape Flattery and two small areas, one near Port Townsend and another on the Pacific coast south of Cape Flattery, that were inhabited by Chimakuan tribes. Eastern Vancouver Island to about its midpoint was also occupied by Salishan tribes, while most of their territory was on the mainland across from it, including much of the upper Columbia River. To the south, they were mostly bordered by the Shahaptian tribes. To the east, Salishan tribes lived just beyond the Arrow Lakes and one of the extreme north forks of the Columbia. To the southeast, Salishan tribes extended into Montana, covering the upper drainage of the Columbia. They encountered Lewis and Clark here in 1804. To the northeast, Salish territory reached about the fifty-third parallel. In the northwest, it did not extend to the Chilcat River.
Within the territory thus indicated there is considerable diversity of customs and a greater diversity of language. The language is split into a great number of dialects, many of which are doubtless mutually unintelligible.
Within the indicated area, there is a significant variety of customs and an even greater variety of languages. The language is divided into many dialects, many of which are likely completely unintelligible to one another.
The relationship of this family to the Wakashan is a very interesting problem. Evidences of radical affinity have been discovered by Boas and Gatschet, and the careful study of their nature and extent now being prosecuted by the former may result in the union of the two, though until recently they have been considered quite distinct.
The connection between this family and the Wakashan is a fascinating issue. Boas and Gatschet have found evidence of a strong relationship, and Boas is currently conducting a detailed study on its nature and extent. This research may lead to a merger of the two, even though they have been seen as quite separate until now.
PRINCIPAL TRIBES.
Population.—The total Salish population of British Columbia is 12,325, inclusive of the Bellacoola, who number, with the Hailtzuk, 2,500, and those in the list of unclassified, who number 8,522, distributed as follows:
Population.—The total Salish population in British Columbia is 12,325, including the Bellacoola, who number 2,500 along with the Hailtzuk, and the unclassified group, which has 8,522 individuals, distributed as follows:
Under the Fraser River Agency, 4,986; Kamloops Agency, 2,579; Cowichan Agency, 1,852; Okanagan Agency, 942; Williams Lake Agency, 1,918; Kootenay Agency, 48.
Under the Fraser River Agency, 4,986; Kamloops Agency, 2,579; Cowichan Agency, 1,852; Okanagan Agency, 942; Williams Lake Agency, 1,918; Kootenay Agency, 48.
Most of the Salish in the United States are on reservations. They number about 5,500, including a dozen small tribes upon the Yakama Reservation, which have been consolidated with the Clickatat (Shahaptian) through intermarriage. The Salish of the United States are distributed as follows (Indian Affairs Report, 1889, and U.S. Census Bulletin, 1890):
Most of the Salish people in the United States live on reservations. Their population is around 5,500, which includes a dozen small tribes on the Yakama Reservation that have merged with the Clickatat (Shahaptian) through intermarriage. The Salish in the United States are spread out as follows (Indian Affairs Report, 1889, and U.S. Census Bulletin, 1890):
Colville Agency, Washington, Coeur d’ Alene, 422; Lower Spokane, 417; Lake, 303; Colville, 247; Okinagan, 374; Kespilem, 67; San Pueblo (Sans Puell), 300; Calispel, 200; Upper Spokane, 170.
Colville Agency, Washington, Coeur d’Alene, 422; Lower Spokane, 417; Lake, 303; Colville, 247; Okanagan, 374; Kespilem, 67; San Pueblo (Sans Puell), 300; Calispel, 200; Upper Spokane, 170.
Puyallup Agency, Washington, Quaitso, 82; Quinaielt (Queniut), 101; Humptulip, 19; Puyallup, 563; Chehalis, 135; Nisqually, 94; Squaxon, 60; Clallam, 351; Skokomish, 191; Oyhut, Hoquiam, Montesano, and Satsup, 29.
Puyallup Agency, Washington, Quaitso, 82; Quinaielt (Queniut), 101; Humptulip, 19; Puyallup, 563; Chehalis, 135; Nisqually, 94; Squaxon, 60; Clallam, 351; Skokomish, 191; Oyhut, Hoquiam, Montesano, and Satsup, 29.
Tulalip Agency, Washington, Snohomish, 443; Madison, 144; Muckleshoot, 103; Swinomish, 227; Lummi, 295.
Tulalip Agency, Washington, Snohomish, 443; Madison, 144; Muckleshoot, 103; Swinomish, 227; Lummi, 295.
Grande Ronde Agency, Oregon, Tillamook, 5.
Grande Ronde Agency, Oregon, Tillamook, 5.
SASTEAN FAMILY.
= Saste, Hale in U. S. Expl. Exp., VI, 218, 569, 1846. Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, c, 77, 1848. Berghaus (1851), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1852. Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 572, 1859.
= Saste, Hale in U. S. Expl. Exp., VI, 218, 569, 1846. Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, c, 77, 1848. Berghaus (1851), Physics Atlas, map 17, 1852. Buschmann, Traces of the Aztec Language, 572, 1859.
= Shasties, Hale in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, 199, 569, 1846 (= Saste). Berghaus (1851), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1852.
= Shasties, Hale in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, 199, 569, 1846 (= Saste). Berghaus (1851), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1852.
= Shasti, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 325, 1850 (southwest of Lutuami). Latham in Proc. Philolog. Soc., Lond., VI, 82, 1854. Latham, ibid, 74, 1856. Latham, Opuscula, 310, 341, 1860 (allied to both Shoshonean and Shahaptian families). Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 407, 1862.
= Shasti, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 325, 1850 (southwest of Lutuami). Latham in Proc. Philolog. Soc., Lond., VI, 82, 1854. Latham, ibid, 74, 1856. Latham, Opuscula, 310, 341, 1860 (related to both Shoshonean and Shahaptian families). Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 407, 1862.
= Shaste, Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 422, 1853 (mentions Watsa-he’-wa, a Scott’s River band).
= Shaste, Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 422, 1853 (mentions Watsa-he’-wa, a Scott’s River band).
= Sasti, Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853 (= Shasties).
= Sasti, Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853 (= Shasties).
= Shasta, Powell in Cont. N.A. Eth., III, 607, 1877. Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 164, 1877. Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 438, 1877.
= Shasta, Powell in Cont. N.A. Eth., III, 607, 1877. Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 164, 1877. Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 438, 1877.
= Shas-ti-ka, Powers in Cont. N.A. Eth., III, 243, 1877.
= Shas-ti-ka, Powers in Cont. N.A. Eth., III, 243, 1877.
= Shasta, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 164, 1877 (= Shasteecas).
= Shasta, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 164, 1877 (= Shasteecas).
< Shasta, Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 565, 1882 (includes Palaik, Watsahewah, Shasta).
< Shasta, Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 565, 1882 (includes Palaik, Watsahewah, Shasta).
< Klamath, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 475, 1878 (contains Shastas of present family).
Klamath, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 475, 1878 (contains Shastas of present family).
Derivation: The single tribe upon the language of which Hale based his name was located by him to the southwest of the Lutuami or Klamath tribes. He calls the tribe indifferently Shasties or Shasty, but the form applied by him to the family (see pp. 218, 569) is Saste, which accordingly is the one taken.
Derivation: The single tribe that Hale based his name on was found by him to the southwest of the Lutuami or Klamath tribes. He refers to the tribe as Shasties or Shasty, but the name he used for the family (see pp. 218, 569) is Saste, which is the one adopted.
GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION.
The former territory of the Sastean family is the region drained by the Klamath River and its tributaries from the western base of the Cascade range to the point where the Klamath flows through the ridge of hills east of Happy Camp, which forms the boundary between the Sastean and the Quoratean families. In addition to this region of the Klamath, the Shasta extended over the Siskiyou range northward as far as Ashland, Oregon.
The area once owned by the Sastean family is the region drained by the Klamath River and its tributaries, stretching from the western base of the Cascade range to where the Klamath runs through the ridge of hills east of Happy Camp, which marks the boundary between the Sastean and Quoratean families. Besides this part of the Klamath, the Shasta extended over the Siskiyou range all the way north to Ashland, Oregon.
SHAHAPTIAN FAMILY.
X Shahaptan, Scouler in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc., XI, 225, 1841 (three tribes, Shahaptan or Nez-percés, Kliketat, Okanagan; the latter being Salishan).
X Shahaptan, Scouler in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc., XI, 225, 1841 (three tribes: Shahaptan or Nez-percés, Kliketat, Okanagan; the last one being Salishan).
< Shahaptan, Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 428, 1847 (two classes, Nez-perces proper of mountains, and Polanches of plains; includes also Kliketat and Okanagan).
< Shahaptan, Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 428, 1847 (two groups, Nez Perce proper from the mountains, and Palouse from the plains; also includes Klikitat and Okanagan).
> Sahaptin, Hale in U.S. Expl. Expd., VI, 198, 212, 542, 1846 (Shahaptin or Nez-percés, Wallawallas, Pelooses, Yakemas, Klikatats). Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, c, 14, 1848 (follows Hale). Gallatin, ibid., II, pt. 1, c, 77, 1848 (Nez-percés only). Berghaus (1851), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1852. Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853 (Nez-perces and Wallawallas). Dall, after Gibbs, in Cont. N.A. Eth., 1, 241, 1877 (includes Taitinapam and Kliketat).
> Sahaptin, Hale in U.S. Expl. Expd., VI, 198, 212, 542, 1846 (Shahaptin or Nez Percés, Wallawallas, Pelooses, Yakemas, Klikitats). Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, c, 14, 1848 (follows Hale). Gallatin, ibid., II, pt. 1, c, 77, 1848 (Nez Percés only). Berghaus (1851), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1852. Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853 (Nez Percés and Wallawallas). Dall, after Gibbs, in Cont. N.A. Eth., 1, 241, 1877 (includes Taitinapam and Kliketat).
> Saptin, Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 428, 1847 (or Shahaptan).
> Saptin, Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 428, 1847 (or Shahaptan).
< Sahaptin, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 323, 1850 (includes Wallawallas, Kliketat, Proper Sahaptin or Nez-percés, Pelús, Yakemas, Cayús?). Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 73, 1856 (includes Waiilatpu). Buschmann, Spuren der 107 aztek. Sprache, 614, 615, 1859. Latham, Opuscula, 340, 1860 (as in 1856). Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 440, 1862 (vocabularies Sahaptin, Wallawalla, Kliketat). Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent, and So. Am.), 460, 474, 1878 (includes Palouse, Walla Wallas, Yakimas, Tairtlas, Kliketats or Pshawanwappams, Cayuse, Mollale; the two last are Waiilatpuan).
< Sahaptin, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 323, 1850 (includes Wallawallas, Kliketat, Proper Sahaptin or Nez-percés, Pelús, Yakemas, Cayús?). Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 73, 1856 (includes Waiilatpu). Buschmann, Spuren der 107 aztek. Sprache, 614, 615, 1859. Latham, Opuscula, 340, 1860 (as in 1856). Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 440, 1862 (vocabularies Sahaptin, Wallawalla, Kliketat). Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent, and So. Am.), 460, 474, 1878 (includes Palouse, Walla Wallas, Yakimas, Tairtlas, Kliketats or Pshawanwappams, Cayuse, Mollale; the two last are Waiilatpuan).
= Sahaptin, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 168, 1877 (defines habitat and enumerates tribes of). Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 443, 1877. Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 565, 620, 1882.
= Sahaptin, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 168, 1877 (defines habitat and enumerates tribes of). Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 443, 1877. Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 565, 620, 1882.
> Shahaptani, Tolmie and Dawson, Comp. Vocabs., 78, 1884 (Whulwhaipum tribe).
> Shahaptani, Tolmie and Dawson, Comp. Vocabs., 78, 1884 (Whulwhaipum tribe).
< Nez-percés, Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 428, 1847 (see Shahaptan). Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent, and So. Am.), 474, 1878 (see his Sahaptin).
< Nez-percés, Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 428, 1847 (see Shahaptan). Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent, and So. Am.), 474, 1878 (see his Sahaptin).
X Seliah, Dall, after Gibbs, in Cont. N.A. Eth., I, 241, 1877 (includes Yakama which belongs here).
X Seliah, Dall, after Gibbs, in Cont. N.A. Eth., I, 241, 1877 (includes Yakama which belongs here).
Derivation: From a Selish word of unknown significance.
Derivation: From a Selish word with an unknown meaning.
The Shahaptan family of Scouler comprised three tribes—the Shahaptan or Nez Percés, the Kliketat, a scion of the Shahaptan, dwelling near Mount Ranier, and the Okanagan, inhabiting the upper part of Fraser River and its tributaries; “these tribes were asserted to speak dialects of the same language.” Of the above tribes the Okinagan are now known to be Salishan.
The Shahaptan family of Scouler consisted of three tribes—the Shahaptan or Nez Percés, the Kliketat, a branch of the Shahaptan living near Mount Rainier, and the Okanagan, who lived in the upper part of the Fraser River and its tributaries; “these tribes are said to speak dialects of the same language.” Of the tribes mentioned, the Okanagan are now known to be Salishan.
The vocabularies given by Scouler were collected by Tolmie. The term “Sahaptin” appears on Gallatin’s map of 1836, where it doubtless refers only to the Nez Percé tribe proper, with respect to whose linguistic affinities Gallatin apparently knew nothing at the time. At all events the name occurs nowhere in his discussion of the linguistic families.
The vocabularies provided by Scouler were gathered by Tolmie. The term “Sahaptin” shows up on Gallatin’s map from 1836, where it likely only refers to the Nez Percé tribe itself, about which Gallatin apparently had no knowledge regarding their linguistic connections at that time. In any case, the name doesn’t appear anywhere in his discussion of linguistic families.
GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION.
The tribes of this family occupied a large section of country along the Columbia and its tributaries. Their western boundary was the Cascade Mountains; their westernmost bands, the Klikitat on the north, the Tyigh and Warm Springs on the south, enveloping for a short distance the Chinook territory along the Columbia which extended to the Dalles. Shahaptian tribes extended along the tributaries of the Columbia for a considerable distance, their northern boundary being indicated by about the forty-sixth parallel, their southern by about the forty-fourth. Their eastern extension was interrupted by the Bitter Root Mountains.
The tribes of this family lived in a large area along the Columbia River and its tributaries. Their western boundary was the Cascade Mountains, with their most western groups being the Klikitat to the north and the Tyigh and Warm Springs to the south, briefly surrounding the Chinook territory along the Columbia that reached the Dalles. Shahaptian tribes extended along the tributaries of the Columbia for quite a distance, with their northern boundary around the forty-sixth parallel and their southern boundary near the forty-fourth. Their eastern expansion was blocked by the Bitter Root Mountains.
PRINCIPAL TRIBES AND POPULATION.
Chopunnish (Nez Percé), 1,515 on Nez Percé Reservation, Idaho.
Chopunnish (Nez Perce), 1,515 on Nez Perce Reservation, Idaho.
Klikitat, say one-half of 330 natives, on Yakama Reservation, Washington.
Klikitat, which is about half of the 330 natives on the Yakama Reservation in Washington.
Paloos, Yakama Reservation, number unknown.
Paloos, Yakama Reservation, unknown number.
Tenaino, 69 on Warm Springs Reservation, Oregon.
Tenaino, 69, on the Warm Springs Reservation in Oregon.
Tyigh, 430 on Warm Springs Reservation, Oregon.
Tyigh, 430 on the Warm Springs Reservation, Oregon.
Umatilla, 179 on Umatilla Reservation, Oregon.
Umatilla, 179 on the Umatilla Reservation, Oregon.
Walla Walla, 405 on Umatilla Reservation, Oregon.
Walla Walla, 405 on Umatilla Reservation, Oregon.
SHOSHONEAN FAMILY.
> Shoshonees, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 120, 133, 306, 1836 (Shoshonee or Snake only). Hale in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, 218, 1846 (Wihinasht, Pánasht, Yutas, Sampiches, Comanches). Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, c, 77, 1848 (as above). Gallatin, ibid., 18, 1848 (follows Hale; see below). Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853. Turner in Pac. R. R. Rep., III, pt. 3, 55, 71, 76, 1856 (treats only of Comanche, Chemehuevi, Cahuillo). Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 553, 649, 1859.
> Shoshonees, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 120, 133, 306, 1836 (Shoshonee or Snake only). Hale in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, 218, 1846 (Wihinasht, Pánasht, Yutas, Sampiches, Comanches). Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, c, 77, 1848 (as above). Gallatin, ibid., 18, 1848 (follows Hale; see below). Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853. Turner in Pac. R. R. Rep., III, pt. 3, 55, 71, 76, 1856 (discusses only Comanche, Chemehuevi, Cahuillo). Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 553, 649, 1859.
> Shoshoni, Hale in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, 199, 218, 569, 1846 (Shóshoni, Wihinasht, Pánasht, Yutas, Sampiches, Comanches). Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 73, 1856. Latham, Opuscula, 340, 1860.
> Shoshoni, Hale in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, 199, 218, 569, 1846 (Shóshoni, Wihinasht, Pánasht, Yutas, Sampiches, Comanches). Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 73, 1856. Latham, Opuscula, 340, 1860.
> Schoschonenu Kamantschen, Berghaus (1845), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1848. Ibid., 1852.
> Schoschonenu Kamantschen, Berghaus (1845), Physics Atlas, map 17, 1848. Ibid., 1852.
> Shoshones, Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 429, 1847 (or Snakes; both sides Rocky Mountains and sources of Missouri).
> Shoshones, Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 429, 1847 (or Snakes; both sides of the Rocky Mountains and the sources of the Missouri River).
= Shoshóni, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist. 154, 1877. Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 426, 1877.
= Shoshóni, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist. 154, 1877. Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 426, 1877.
< Shoshone, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 460, 477, 1878 (includes Washoes of a distinct family). Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 567, 661, 1882.
< Shoshone, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 460, 477, 1878 (includes Washoes of a distinct family). Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 567, 661, 1882.
> Snake, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 120, 133, 1836 (or Shoshonees). Hale in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, 218, 1846 (as under Shoshonee). Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 429, 1847 (as under Shoshones). Turner in Pac. R. R. Rep., III, pt. 3, 76, 1856 (as under Shoshonees). Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 552, 649, 1859 (as under Shoshonees).
> Snake, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 120, 133, 1836 (also known as Shoshonees). Hale in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, 218, 1846 (listed as Shoshonee). Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 429, 1847 (listed as Shoshones). Turner in Pac. R. R. Rep., III, pt. 3, 76, 1856 (listed as Shoshonees). Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 552, 649, 1859 (listed as Shoshonees).
< Snake, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 477, 1878 (contains Washoes in addition to Shoshonean tribes proper).
< Snake, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 477, 1878 (contains Washoes in addition to Shoshonean tribes proper).
> Kizh, Hale in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, 569, 1846 (San Gabriel language only).
> Kizh, Hale in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, 569, 1846 (San Gabriel language only).
> Netela, Hale, ibid., 569, 1846 (San Juan Capestrano language).
> Netela, Hale, same source, 569, 1846 (San Juan Capestrano language).
> Paduca, Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 415, 1847 (Cumanches, Kiawas, Utas). Latham, Nat. Hist., Man., 310, 326, 1850. Latham (1853) in Proc. Philolog. Soc. Lond., VI, 73, 1854 (includes Wihinast, Shoshoni, Uta). Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 96, 1856. Latham, Opuscula, 300, 360, 1860.
> Paduca, Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 415, 1847 (Cumanches, Kiawas, Utas). Latham, Nat. Hist., Man., 310, 326, 1850. Latham (1853) in Proc. Philolog. Soc. Lond., VI, 73, 1854 (includes Wihinast, Shoshoni, Uta). Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 96, 1856. Latham, Opuscula, 300, 360, 1860.
< Paduca, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man., 346, 1850 (Wihinast, Bonaks, Diggers, Utahs, Sampiches, Shoshonis, Kiaways, Kaskaias?, Keneways?, Bald-heads, Cumanches, Navahoes, Apaches, Carisos). Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 440, 1862 (defines area of; cites vocabs. of Shoshoni, Wihinasht, Uta, Comanch, Piede or Pa-uta, Chemuhuevi, Cahuillo, Kioway, the latter not belonging here).
< Paduca, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man., 346, 1850 (Wihinast, Bonaks, Diggers, Utahs, Sampiches, Shoshonis, Kiaways, Kaskaias?, Keneways?, Bald-heads, Cumanches, Navahoes, Apaches, Carisos). Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 440, 1862 (defines area of; cites vocabularies of Shoshoni, Wihinasht, Uta, Comanch, Piede or Pa-uta, Chemuhuevi, Cahuillo, Kioway, the latter not belonging here).
> Cumanches, Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853.
> Cumanches, Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853.
> Netela-Kij, Latham (1853) in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., VI, 76, 1854 (composed of Netela of Hale, San Juan Capistrano of Coulter, San Gabriel of Coulter, Kij of Hale).
> Netela-Kij, Latham (1853) in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., VI, 76, 1854 (made up of Netela of Hale, San Juan Capistrano of Coulter, San Gabriel of Coulter, Kij of Hale).
> Capistrano, Latham in Proc. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 85, 1856 (includes Netela, of San Luis Rey and San Juan Capistrano, the San Gabriel or Kij of San Gabriel and San Fernando).
> Capistrano, Latham in Proc. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 85, 1856 (includes Netela, of San Luis Rey and San Juan Capistrano, the San Gabriel or Kij of San Gabriel and San Fernando).
In his synopsis of the Indian tribes78 Gallatin’s reference to this great family is of the most vague and unsatisfactory sort. He speaks of “some bands of Snake Indians or Shoshonees, living on the waters of the river Columbia” (p. 120), which is almost the only allusion to them to be found. The only real claim he possesses to the authorship of the family name is to be found on page 306, where, in his list 109 of tribes and vocabularies, he places “Shoshonees” among his other families, which is sufficient to show that he regarded them as a distinct linguistic group. The vocabulary he possessed was by Say.
In his overview of the Indian tribes78 Gallatin’s mention of this large family is quite vague and unsatisfactory. He talks about “some bands of Snake Indians or Shoshonees, living by the Columbia River” (p. 120), which is nearly the only reference to them found. The only real evidence he has for the authorship of the family name is on page 306, where, in his list 109 of tribes and vocabularies, he includes “Shoshonees” among his other families, indicating that he saw them as a distinct linguistic group. The vocabulary he had came from Say.
Buschmann, as above cited, classes the Shoshonean languages as a northern branch of his Nahuatl or Aztec family, but the evidence presented for this connection is deemed to be insufficient.
Buschmann, as mentioned above, categorizes the Shoshonean languages as a northern branch of his Nahuatl or Aztec family, but the evidence provided for this connection is considered inadequate.
GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION.
This important family occupied a large part of the great interior basin of the United States. Upon the north Shoshonean tribes extended far into Oregon, meeting Shahaptian territory on about the forty-fourth parallel or along the Blue Mountains. Upon the northeast the eastern limits of the pristine habitat of the Shoshonean tribes are unknown. The narrative of Lewis and Clarke79 contains the explicit statement that the Shoshoni bands encountered upon the Jefferson River, whose summer home was upon the head waters of the Columbia, formerly lived within their own recollection in the plains to the east of the Rocky Mountains, whence they were driven to their mountain retreats by the Minnetaree (Atsina), who had obtained firearms. Their former habitat thus given is indicated upon the map, although the eastern limit is of course quite indeterminate. Very likely much of the area occupied by the Atsina was formerly Shoshonean territory. Later a division of the Bannock held the finest portion of southwestern Montana,80 whence apparently they were being pushed westward across the mountains by Blackfeet.81 Upon the east the Tukuarika or Sheepeaters held the Yellowstone Park country, where they were bordered by Siouan territory, while the Washaki occupied southwestern Wyoming. Nearly the entire mountainous part of Colorado was held by the several bands of the Ute, the eastern and southeastern parts of the State being held respectively by the Arapaho and Cheyenne (Algonquian), and the Kaiowe (Kiowan). To the southeast the Ute country included the northern drainage of the San Juan, extending farther east a short distance into New Mexico. The Comanche division of the family extended farther east than any other. According to Crow tradition the Comanche formerly lived northward in the Snake River region. Omaha tradition avers that the Comanche were on the Middle Loup River, probably within the present century. Bourgemont found a Comanche tribe on the upper Kansas River in 1724.82 According to Pike the Comanche territory bordered the Kaiowe on the north, the former occupying the head waters of the upper Red River, Arkansas, and Rio Grande.83 How 110 far to the southward Shoshonean tribes extended at this early period is not known, though the evidence tends to show that they raided far down into Texas to the territory they have occupied in more recent years, viz, the extensive plains from the Rocky Mountains eastward into Indian Territory and Texas to about 97°. Upon the south Shoshonean territory was limited generally by the Colorado River. The Chemehuevi lived on both banks of the river between the Mohave on the north and the Cuchan on the south, above and below Bill Williams Fork.84 The Kwaiantikwoket also lived to the east of the river in Arizona about Navajo Mountain, while the Tusayan (Moki) had established their seven pueblos, including one founded by people of Tañoan stock, to the east of the Colorado Chiquito. In the southwest Shoshonean tribes had pushed across California, occupying a wide band of country to the Pacific. In their extension northward they had reached as far as Tulare Lake, from which territory apparently they had dispossessed the Mariposan tribes, leaving a small remnant of that linguistic family near Fort Tejon.85
This important family occupied a large part of the vast interior basin of the United States. To the north, Shoshonean tribes extended deep into Oregon, meeting Shahaptian territory roughly at the forty-fourth parallel along the Blue Mountains. To the northeast, the eastern limits of the Shoshonean tribes' original habitat remain unknown. The narrative of Lewis and Clark 79 explicitly states that the Shoshoni bands encountered on the Jefferson River, whose summer home was in the headwaters of the Columbia, remembered living in the plains east of the Rocky Mountains before being pushed into their mountain retreats by the Minnetaree (Atsina), who had acquired firearms. Their former habitat is indicated on the map, although the eastern boundary is quite uncertain. Much of the area previously occupied by the Atsina was likely once Shoshonean territory. Later, a faction of the Bannock controlled the best part of southwestern Montana, 80 from where they seemed to be pushed westward across the mountains by the Blackfeet. 81 To the east, the Tukuarika or Sheepeaters held the Yellowstone Park area, bordered by Siouan territory, while the Washaki occupied southwestern Wyoming. Nearly all of the mountainous section of Colorado was held by various bands of the Ute, with the eastern and southeastern parts of the state respectively held by the Arapaho and Cheyenne (Algonquian), and the Kaiowe (Kiowan). To the southeast, Ute lands included the northern drainage of the San Juan, extending a short distance eastward into New Mexico. The Comanche branch of the family extended further east than any other. According to Crow tradition, the Comanche used to live north in the Snake River region. Omaha tradition says that the Comanche were on the Middle Loup River, likely within the past century. Bourgemont found a Comanche tribe on the upper Kansas River in 1724. 82 According to Pike, the Comanche territory bordered the Kaiowe to the north, with the former occupying the headwaters of the upper Red River, Arkansas, and Rio Grande. 83 How far south the Shoshonean tribes extended during this early period is not known, but evidence suggests they raided deep into Texas, in territories they have occupied in more recent years, specifically the extensive plains from the Rocky Mountains eastward into Indian Territory and Texas up to about 97°. To the south, Shoshonean territory was generally limited by the Colorado River. The Chemehuevi lived along both banks of the river, between the Mohave to the north and the Cuchan to the south, both above and below Bill Williams Fork. 84 The Kwaiantikwoket also lived to the east of the river in Arizona around Navajo Mountain, while the Tusayan (Moki) established their seven pueblos, including one founded by people of Tañoan ancestry, to the east of the Colorado Chiquito. In the southwest, Shoshonean tribes pushed across California, occupying a broad strip of land all the way to the Pacific. In their northward expansion, they reached as far as Tulare Lake, from which it seems they had displaced the Mariposan tribes, leaving a small remnant of that linguistic family near Fort Tejon. 85
A little farther north they had crossed the Sierras and occupied the heads of San Joaquin and Kings Rivers. Northward they occupied nearly the whole of Nevada, being limited on the west by the Sierra Nevada. The entire southeastern part of Oregon was occupied by tribes of Shoshoni extraction.
A bit farther north, they had crossed the Sierras and taken over the sources of the San Joaquin and Kings Rivers. Going north, they occupied almost all of Nevada, with the Sierra Nevada to the west. The entire southeastern part of Oregon was inhabited by tribes of Shoshoni descent.
PRINCIPAL TRIBES AND POPULATION.
Bannock, 514 on Fort Hall Reservation and 75 on the Lemhi Reservation, Idaho.
Bannock, 514 on Fort Hall Reservation and 75 on the Lemhi Reservation, Idaho.
Chemehuevi, about 202 attached to the Colorado River Agency, Arizona.
Chemehuevi, about 202 connected to the Colorado River Agency, Arizona.
Comanche, 1,598 on the Kiowa, Comanche and Wichita Reservation, Indian Territory.
Comanche, 1,598 on the Kiowa, Comanche, and Wichita Reservation, Indian Territory.
Gosiute, 256 in Utah at large.
Gosiute, 256 in Utah overall.
Pai Ute, about 2,300 scattered in southeastern California and southwestern Nevada.
Pai Ute, around 2,300 located throughout southeastern California and southwestern Nevada.
Paviotso, about 3,000 scattered in western Nevada and southern Oregon.
Paviotso, around 3,000 people spread out in western Nevada and southern Oregon.
Saidyuka, 145 under Klamath Agency.
Saidyuka, 145 at Klamath Agency.
Shoshoni, 979 under Fort Hall Agency and 249 at the Lemhi Agency.
Shoshoni, 979 under Fort Hall Agency and 249 at the Lemhi Agency.
Tobikhar, about 2,200, under the Mission Agency, California.
Tobikhar, about 2,200, under the Mission Agency, California.
Tukuarika, or Sheepeaters, 108 at Lemhi Agency.
Tukuarika, or Sheepeaters, 108 at Lemhi Agency.
Tusayan (Moki), 1,996 (census of 1890).
Tusayan (Moki), 1,996 (census of 1890).
Uta, 2,839 distributed as follows: 985 under Southern Ute Agency, Colorado; 1,021 on Ouray Reserve, Utah; 833 on Uintah Reserve, Utah.
Uta, 2,839 distributed as follows: 985 under Southern Ute Agency, Colorado; 1,021 on Ouray Reserve, Utah; 833 on Uintah Reserve, Utah.
SIOUAN FAMILY.
X Sioux, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 121, 306, 1836 (for tribes included see text below). Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 408, 1847 (follows Gallatin). Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, xcix, 77, 1848 (as in 1836). Berghaus (1845), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1848. Ibid., 1852. Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853. Berghaus, Physik. Atlas, map 72, 1887.
X Sioux, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 121, 306, 1836 (for included tribes see text below). Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 408, 1847 (follows Gallatin). Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, xcix, 77, 1848 (as in 1836). Berghaus (1845), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1848. Ibid., 1852. Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853. Berghaus, Physik. Atlas, map 72, 1887.
> Sioux, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 333, 1850 (includes Winebagoes, Dakotas, Assineboins, Upsaroka, Mandans, Minetari, Osage). Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 58, 1856 (mere mention of family). Latham, Opuscula, 327, 1860. Latham, El. Comp. Phil, 458, 1862.
> Sioux, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 333, 1850 (includes Winnebagoes, Dakotas, Assiniboine, Uprising, Mandans, Minetar, Osage). Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 58, 1856 (just a mention of the family). Latham, Opuscula, 327, 1860. Latham, El. Comp. Phil, 458, 1862.
> Catawbas, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 87, 1836 (Catawbas and Woccons). Bancroft, Hist. U.S., III, 245, et map, 1840. Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 399, 1847. Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, xcix, 77, 1848. Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 460, 473, 1878.
> Catawbas, Gallatin in Transactions and Collections of the American Antiquarian Society, II, 87, 1836 (Catawbas and Woccons). Bancroft, History of the United States, III, 245, and map, 1840. Prichard, Physical History of Mankind, V, 399, 1847. Gallatin in Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, II, pt. 1, xcix, 77, 1848. Keane, Appendix to Stanford’s Compendium (Central and South America), 460, 473, 1878.
> Catahbas, Berghaus (1845), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1848. Ibid., 1852.
> Catahbas, Berghaus (1845), Physics Atlas, map 17, 1848. Same source, 1852.
> Catawba, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man., 334, 1850 (Woccoon are allied). Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 401, 1853.
> Catawba, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man., 334, 1850 (Woccoon are related). Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 401, 1853.
> Kataba, Gatschet in Am. Antiquarian, IV, 238, 1882. Gatschet, Creek Mig. Legend, I, 15, 1884. Gatschet in Science, 413, April 29, 1887.
> Kataba, Gatschet in Am. Antiquarian, IV, 238, 1882. Gatschet, Creek Mig. Legend, I, 15, 1884. Gatschet in Science, 413, April 29, 1887.
> Woccons, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 306, 1836 (numbered and given as a distinct family in table, but inconsistently noted in foot-note where referred to as Catawban family.)
> Woccons, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 306, 1836 (numbered and listed as a separate family in the table, but mentioned inconsistently in the footnote where it's referred to as Catawban family.)
> Dahcotas, Bancroft, Hist. U.S., III, 243, 1840.
> Dahcotas, Bancroft, Hist. U.S., III, 243, 1840.
> Dakotas, Hayden, Cont. Eth. and Phil. Missouri Ind., 232, 1862 (treats of Dakotas, Assiniboins, Crows, Minnitarees, Mandans, Omahas, Iowas).
> Dakotas, Hayden, Cont. Eth. and Phil. Missouri Ind., 232, 1862 (talks about Dakotas, Assiniboins, Crows, Minnitarees, Mandans, Omahas, Iowas).
> Dacotah, Keane, App. to Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 460, 470, 1878. (The following are the main divisions given: Isaunties, Sissetons, Yantons, Teetons, Assiniboines, Winnebagos, Punkas, Omahas, Missouris, Iowas, Otoes, Kaws, Quappas, Osages, Upsarocas, Minnetarees.)
> Dacotah, Keane, App. to Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 460, 470, 1878. (The following are the main groups listed: Isaunties, Sissetons, Yantons, Teetons, Assiniboines, Winnebagos, Punkas, Omahas, Missouris, Iowas, Otoes, Kaws, Quappas, Osages, Upsarocas, Minnetarees.)
> Dakota, Berghaus, Physik. Atlas, map 72, 1887.
> Dakota, Berghaus, Physics. Atlas, map 72, 1887.
Derivation: A corruption of the Algonkin word “nadowe-ssi-wag,” “the snake-like ones,” “the enemies” (Trumbull).
Derivation: A corruption of the Algonquin word “nadowe-ssi-wag,” “the snake-like ones,” “the enemies” (Trumbull).
Under the family Gallatin makes four subdivisions, viz, the Winnebagos, the Sioux proper and the Assiniboins, the Minnetare group, and the Osages and southern kindred tribes. Gallatin speaks of the distribution of the family as follows: The Winnebagoes have their principal seats on the Fox River of Lake Michigan and towards the heads of the Rock River of the Mississippi; of the Dahcotas proper, the Mendewahkantoan or “Gens du Lac” lived east of the Mississippi from Prairie du Chien north to Spirit Lake. The three others, Wahkpatoan, Wahkpakotoan and Sisitoans inhabit the country between the Mississippi and the St. Peters, and that on the southern tributaries of this river and on the headwaters of the Red River of Lake Winnipek. The three western tribes, the Yanktons, the Yanktoanans and the Tetons wander between the Mississippi and the Missouri, extending southerly to 43° of north latitude and some distance west of the Missouri, between 43° and 47° of latitude. 112 The “Shyennes” are included in the family but are marked as doubtfully belonging here.
Under the Gallatin family, there are four subdivisions: the Winnebagos, the Sioux proper and the Assiniboins, the Minnetare group, and the Osages with their southern relatives. Gallatin describes the distribution of the family as follows: The Winnebagoes primarily settle along the Fox River in Lake Michigan and near the headwaters of the Rock River, which flows into the Mississippi. Among the Dakotas, the Mendewahkantoan, also known as "Gens du Lac," lived east of the Mississippi from Prairie du Chien to Spirit Lake. The three other groups—Wahkpatoan, Wahkpakotoan, and Sisitoans—reside in the area between the Mississippi and the St. Peters River, as well as in the southern tributaries of this river and the headwaters of the Red River leading to Lake Winnipeg. The three western tribes, the Yanktons, Yanktoanans, and Tetons, roam the lands between the Mississippi and the Missouri Rivers, extending southward to 43° north latitude and some distance west of the Missouri, between 43° and 47° latitude. 112 The “Shyennes” are included in the family but are noted as potentially uncertain in their classification.
Owing to the fact that “Sioux” is a word of reproach and means snake or enemy, the term has been discarded by many later writers as a family designation, and “Dakota,” which signifies friend or ally, has been employed in its stead. The two words are, however, by no means properly synonymous. The term “Sioux” was used by Gallatin in a comprehensive or family sense and was applied to all the tribes collectively known to him to speak kindred dialects of a widespread language. It is in this sense only, as applied to the linguistic family, that the term is here employed. The term “Dahcota” (Dakota) was correctly applied by Gallatin to the Dakota tribes proper as distinguished from the other members of the linguistic family who are not Dakotas in a tribal sense. The use of the term with this signification should be perpetuated.
Because “Sioux” is a derogatory term that means snake or enemy, many later writers have moved away from using it as a family label and instead have adopted “Dakota,” which means friend or ally. However, the two terms are not truly synonymous. Gallatin used “Sioux” in a broad, family sense to refer to all the tribes he knew that spoke related dialects of a widespread language. Here, we use the term only in that context, as it applies to the linguistic family. Gallatin correctly used “Dakota” to refer specifically to the Dakota tribes, distinguishing them from other groups within the linguistic family that are not Dakotas in a tribal sense. We should continue to use the term in this specific way.
It is only recently that a definite decision has been reached respecting the relationship of the Catawba and Woccon, the latter an extinct tribe known to have been linguistically related to the Catawba. Gallatin thought that he was able to discern some affinities of the Catawban language with “Muskhogee and even with Choctaw,” though these were not sufficient to induce him to class them together. Mr. Gatschet was the first to call attention to the presence in the Catawba language of a considerable number of words having a Siouan affinity.
It has only been recently that a clear decision has been made regarding the connection between the Catawba and Woccon tribes, the latter being an extinct group that was known to be linguistically linked to the Catawba. Gallatin believed he could see some similarities between the Catawban language and “Muskhogee and even Choctaw,” although these similarities were not enough for him to categorize them together. Mr. Gatschet was the first to point out that the Catawba language contains a significant number of words with a Siouan connection.
Recently Mr. Dorsey has made a critical examination of all the Catawba linguistic material available, which has been materially increased by the labors of Mr. Gatschet, and the result seems to justify its inclusion as one of the dialects of the widespread Siouan family.
Recently, Mr. Dorsey has conducted a thorough review of all the Catawba language material available, which has been significantly expanded by Mr. Gatschet's work, and the findings suggest it should be considered one of the dialects of the extensive Siouan family.
GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION.
The pristine territory of this family was mainly in one body, the only exceptions being the habitats of the Biloxi, the Tutelo, the Catawba and Woccon.
The untouched land of this family was mostly a single piece, with the only exceptions being the territories of the Biloxi, the Tutelo, the Catawba, and Woccon.
Contrary to the popular opinion of the present day, the general trend of Siouan migration has been westward. In comparatively late prehistoric times, probably most of the Siouan tribes dwelt east of the Mississippi River.
Contrary to what most people think today, the overall trend of Siouan migration has been westward. In relatively recent prehistoric times, most of the Siouan tribes probably lived east of the Mississippi River.
The main Siouan territory extended from about 53° north in the Hudson Bay Company Territory, to about 33°, including a considerable part of the watershed of the Missouri River and that of the Upper Mississippi. It was bounded on the northwest, north, northeast, and for some distance on the east by Algonquian territory. South of 45° north the line ran eastward to Lake Michigan, as the Green Bay region belonged to the Winnebago.86
The main Siouan territory stretched from around 53° north in the Hudson Bay Company Territory down to about 33°, covering a large part of the Missouri River watershed and the Upper Mississippi. It was bordered on the northwest, north, northeast, and for a stretch on the east by Algonquian territory. South of 45° north, the boundary extended east to Lake Michigan, as the Green Bay area was part of the Winnebago. 86
113 It extended westward from Lake Michigan through Illinois, crossing the Mississippi River at Prairie du Chien. At this point began the Algonquian territory (Sac, etc.) on the west side of the Mississippi, extending southward to the Missouri, and crossing that river it returned to the Mississippi at St. Louis. The Siouan tribes claimed all of the present States of Iowa and Missouri, except the parts occupied by Algonquian tribes. The dividing line between the two for a short distance below St. Louis was the Mississippi River. The line then ran west of Dunklin, New Madrid, and Pemiscot Counties, in Missouri, and Mississippi County and those parts of Craighead and Poinsett Counties, Arkansas, lying east of the St. Francis River. Once more the Mississippi became the eastern boundary, but in this case separating the Siouan from the Muskhogean territory. The Quapaw or Akansa were the most southerly tribe in the main Siouan territory. In 167387 they were east of the Mississippi. Joutel (1687) located two of their villages on the Arkansas and two on the Mississippi one of the latter being on the east bank, in our present State of Mississippi, and the other being on the opposite side, in Arkansas. Shea says88 that the Kaskaskias were found by De Soto in 1540 in latitude 36°, and that the Quapaw were higher up the Mississippi. But we know that the southeast corner of Missouri and the northeast corner of Arkansas, east of the St. Francis River, belonged to Algonquian tribes. A study of the map of Arkansas shows reason for believing that there may have been a slight overlapping of habitats, or a sort of debatable ground. At any rate it seems advisable to compromise, and assign the Quapaw and Osage (Siouan tribes) all of Arkansas up to about 36° north.
113 It stretched west from Lake Michigan through Illinois, crossing the Mississippi River at Prairie du Chien. At this point, the Algonquian territory (such as the Sac) began on the west side of the Mississippi, extending south to the Missouri River and crossing it to return to the Mississippi at St. Louis. The Siouan tribes claimed all of present-day Iowa and Missouri, except for the areas occupied by Algonquian tribes. The dividing line between the two was the Mississippi River for a short distance just below St. Louis. The line then ran west of Dunklin, New Madrid, and Pemiscot Counties in Missouri, as well as Mississippi County and parts of Craighead and Poinsett Counties in Arkansas that were east of the St. Francis River. Once again, the Mississippi served as the eastern boundary, this time separating the Siouan tribes from the Muskhogean territory. The Quapaw or Akansa were the southernmost tribe in the main Siouan territory. In 167387, they were located east of the Mississippi. Joutel (1687) identified two of their villages on the Arkansas and two on the Mississippi, one of which was on the east bank in what is now Mississippi, and the other across the river in Arkansas. Shea states88 that the Kaskaskias were encountered by De Soto in 1540 at latitude 36°, and that the Quapaw were located further up the Mississippi. However, we know that the southeast corner of Missouri and the northeast corner of Arkansas, east of the St. Francis River, belonged to Algonquian tribes. A review of the Arkansas map suggests that there may have been some overlapping of habitats or a sort of disputed territory. In any case, it seems reasonable to make a compromise and assign the Quapaw and Osage (Siouan tribes) all of Arkansas up to around 36° north.
On the southwest of the Siouan family was the Southern Caddoan group, the boundary extending from the west side of the Mississippi River in Louisiana, nearly opposite Vicksburg, Mississippi, and running northwestwardly to the bend of Red River between Arkansas and Louisiana; thence northwest along the divide between the watersheds of the Arkansas and Red Rivers. In the northwest corner of Indian Territory the Osages came in contact with the Comanche (Shoshonean), and near the western boundary of Kansas the Kiowa, Cheyenne, and Arapaho (the two latter being recent Algonquian intruders?) barred the westward march of the Kansa or Kaw.
On the southwest side of the Siouan family was the Southern Caddoan group, with the boundary starting from the west side of the Mississippi River in Louisiana, nearly across from Vicksburg, Mississippi, and extending northwest to the bend of Red River between Arkansas and Louisiana; then continuing northwest along the divide between the watersheds of the Arkansas and Red Rivers. In the northwest corner of Indian Territory, the Osages encountered the Comanche (Shoshonean), and near the western edge of Kansas, the Kiowa, Cheyenne, and Arapaho (the last two being recent Algonquian newcomers?) blocked the westward movement of the Kansa or Kaw.
The Pawnee group of the Caddoan family in western Nebraska and northwestern Kansas separated the Ponka and Dakota on the north from the Kansa on the south, and the Omaha and other Siouan tribes on the east from Kiowa and other tribes on the west. The Omaha and cognate peoples occupied in Nebraska the lower part of the Platte River, most of the Elkhorn Valley, and the Ponka claimed the region watered by the Niobrara in northern Nebraska.
The Pawnee group of the Caddoan family in western Nebraska and northwestern Kansas separated the Ponca and Dakota to the north from the Kansa to the south, and the Omaha and other Siouan tribes to the east from the Kiowa and other tribes to the west. The Omaha and related peoples occupied the lower section of the Platte River in Nebraska, most of the Elkhorn Valley, while the Ponca claimed the area around the Niobrara in northern Nebraska.
114 There seems to be sufficient evidence for assigning to the Crows (Siouan) the northwest corner of Nebraska (i.e., that part north of the Kiowan and Caddoan habitats) and the southwest part of South Dakota (not claimed by Cheyenne89), as well as the northern part of Wyoming and the southern part of Montana, where they met the Shoshonean stock.90
114 There appears to be enough evidence to assign the Crows (Siouan) to the northwest corner of Nebraska (specifically, the area north of the Kiowan and Caddoan territories) and the southwestern part of South Dakota (which is not claimed by the Cheyenne), along with the northern part of Wyoming and the southern part of Montana, where they interacted with the Shoshonean group.90
The Biloxi habitat in 1699 was on the Pascogoula river,91 in the southeast corner of the present State of Mississippi. The Biloxi subsequently removed to Louisiana, where a few survivors were found by Mr. Gatschet in 1886.
The Biloxi habitat in 1699 was on the Pascagoula River, 91 in the southeast corner of what is now Mississippi. The Biloxi later moved to Louisiana, where Mr. Gatschet found a few survivors in 1886.
The Tutelo habitat in 1671 was in Brunswick County, southern Virginia, and it probably included Lunenburgh and Mecklenburg Counties.92 The Earl of Bellomont (1699) says93 that the Shateras were “supposed to be the Toteros, on Big Sandy River, Virginia,” and Pownall, in his map of North America (1776), gives the Totteroy (i.e., Big Sandy) River. Subsequently to 1671 the Tutelo left Virginia and moved to North Carolina.94 They returned to Virginia (with the Sapona), joined the Nottaway and Meherrin, whom they and the Tuscarora followed into Pennsylvania in the last century; thence they went to New York, where they joined the Six Nations, with whom they removed to Grand River Reservation, Ontario, Canada, after the Revolutionary war. The last full-blood Tutelo died in 1870. For the important discovery of the Siouan affinity of the Tutelo language we are indebted to Mr. Hale.
The Tutelo habitat in 1671 was in Brunswick County, southern Virginia, and it likely included Lunenburg and Mecklenburg Counties.92 The Earl of Bellomont (1699) mentions93 that the Shateras were “thought to be the Toteros, on the Big Sandy River, Virginia,” and Pownall, in his map of North America (1776), identifies the Totteroy (i.e., Big Sandy) River. After 1671, the Tutelo left Virginia and moved to North Carolina.94 They returned to Virginia (with the Sapona), joined the Nottaway and Meherrin, whom they and the Tuscarora followed into Pennsylvania in the last century; then they went to New York, where they joined the Six Nations, with whom they moved to the Grand River Reservation, Ontario, Canada, after the Revolutionary War. The last full-blood Tutelo died in 1870. We owe the important discovery of the Siouan connection of the Tutelo language to Mr. Hale.
The Catawba lived on the river of the same name on the northern boundary of South Carolina. Originally they were a powerful tribe, the leading people of South Carolina, and probably occupied a large part of the Carolinas. The Woccon were widely separated from kinsmen living in North Carolina in the fork of the Cotentnea and Neuse Rivers.
The Catawba lived along the river that shares their name on the northern border of South Carolina. They were originally a strong tribe, the dominant people in South Carolina, and likely inhabited a significant portion of the Carolinas. The Woccon were located far away from their relatives in North Carolina at the fork of the Cotentnea and Neuse Rivers.
The Wateree, living just below the Catawba, were very probably of the same linguistic connection.
The Wateree, residing just below the Catawba, were likely of the same linguistic background.
PRINCIPAL TRIBES.
I. Dakota.
I. Dakota.
(A) Santee: include Mde´-wa-kan-ton-wan (Spirit Lake village, Santee Reservation, Nebraska), and Wa-qpe´-ku-te (Leaf Shooters); some on Fort Peck Reservation, Montana.
(A) Santee: include Mde´-wa-kan-ton-wan (Spirit Lake village, Santee Reservation, Nebraska), and Wa-qpe´-ku-te (Leaf Shooters); some on Fort Peck Reservation, Montana.
(B) Sisseton (Si-si´-ton-wan), on Sisseton Reservation, South Dakota, and part on Devil’s Lake Reservation, North Dakota.
(B) Sisseton (Si-si'ton-wan), located on the Sisseton Reservation in South Dakota, and partially on the Devil’s Lake Reservation in North Dakota.
(C) Wahpeton (Wa-qpe´-ton-wan, Wa-hpe-ton-wan); Leaf village. Some on Sisseton Reservation; most on Devil’s Lake Reservation.
(C) Wahpeton (Wa-qpe´-ton-wan, Wa-hpe-ton-wan); Leaf village. Some are on the Sisseton Reservation; most are on the Devil’s Lake Reservation.
(D) Yankton (I-hañk´-ton-wan), at Yankton Reservation, South Dakota.
(D) Yankton (I-hañk´-ton-wan), at Yankton Reservation, South Dakota.
(E) Yanktonnais (I-hañk´-ton-wan´-na); divided into Upper and Lower. Of the Upper Yanktonnais, there are some of the Cut-head band (Pa´-ba-ksa gens) on Devil’s Lake Reservation. Upper Yanktonnais, most are on Standing Rock Reservation, North Dakota; Lower Yanktonnais, most are on Crow Creek Reservation, South Dakota, some are on Standing Rock Reservation, and some on Fort Peck Reservation, Montana.
(E) Yanktonnais (I-hañk´-ton-wan´-na); divided into Upper and Lower. Among the Upper Yanktonnais, some of the Cut-head band (Pa´-ba-ksa gens) are located on Devil’s Lake Reservation. The majority of the Upper Yanktonnais are on Standing Rock Reservation in North Dakota; the majority of the Lower Yanktonnais are on Crow Creek Reservation in South Dakota, with some on Standing Rock Reservation and some on Fort Peck Reservation in Montana.
(F) Teton (Ti-ton-wan); some on Fort Peck Reservation, Montana.
(F) Teton (Ti-ton-wan); some on Fort Peck Reservation, Montana.
(a) Brulé (Si-tcan´-xu); some are on Standing Rock Reservation. Most of the Upper Brulé (Highland Sitcanxu) are on Rosebud Reservation, South Dakota. Most of the Lower Brulé (Lowland Sitcanxu) are on Lower Brulé Reservation, South Dakota.
(a) Brulé (Si-tcan´-xu); some are on Standing Rock Reservation. Most of the Upper Brulé (Highland Sitcanxu) are on the Rosebud Reservation in South Dakota. Most of the Lower Brulé (Lowland Sitcanxu) are located on the Lower Brulé Reservation in South Dakota.
(b) Sans Arcs (I-ta´-zip-tco´, Without Bows). Most are on Cheyenne Reservation. South Dakota; some on Standing Rock Reservation.
(b) Sans Arcs (I-ta´-zip-tco´, Without Bows). Most are on the Cheyenne Reservation in South Dakota; some are on the Standing Rock Reservation.
(c) Blackfeet (Si-ha´sa´-pa). Most are on Cheyenne Reservation; some on Standing Rock Reservation.
(c) Blackfeet (Si-ha´sa´-pa). Most are on the Cheyenne Reservation; some are on the Standing Rock Reservation.
(d) Minneconjou (Mi´-ni-ko´-o-ju). Most are on Cheyenne Reservation, some are on Rosebud Reservation, and some on Standing Rock Reservation.
(d) Minneconjou (Mi´-ni-ko´-o-ju). Most are located on the Cheyenne Reservation, some are on the Rosebud Reservation, and a few are on the Standing Rock Reservation.
(e) Two Kettles (O-o´-he-non´-pa, Two Boilings), on Cheyenne Reservation.
(e) Two Kettles (O-o´-he-non´-pa, Two Boilings), on Cheyenne Reservation.
(f) Ogalalla (O-gla´-la). Most on Pine Ridge Reservation, South Dakota; some on Standing Rock Reservation. Wa-ża-ża (Wa-ja-ja, Wa-zha-zha), a gens of the Oglala (Pine Ridge Reservation); Loafers (Wa-glu-xe, In-breeders), a gens of the Oglala; most on Pine Ridge Reservation; some on Rosebud Reservation.
(f) Ogalalla (O-gla´-la). Mostly on Pine Ridge Reservation, South Dakota; some on Standing Rock Reservation. Wa-ża-ża (Wa-ja-ja, Wa-zha-zha), a group of the Oglala (Pine Ridge Reservation); Loafers (Wa-glu-xe, In-breeders), a group of the Oglala; mostly on Pine Ridge Reservation; some on Rosebud Reservation.
(g) Uncpapa (1862-’63), Uncapapa (1880-’81), (Huñ´-kpa-pa), on Standing Rock Reservation.
(g) Uncpapa (1862-’63), Uncapapa (1880-’81), (Huñ´-kpa-pa), on Standing Rock Reservation.
II. Assinaboin (Hohe, Dakota name); most in British North America; some on Fort Peck Reservation, Montana.
II. Assinaboin (Hohe, Dakota name); mostly in Canada; some on the Fort Peck Reservation in Montana.
III. Omaha (U-man´-han), on Omaha Reservation, Nebraska.
III. Omaha (U-man´-han), on Omaha Reservation, Nebraska.
IV. Ponca (formerly Ponka on maps; Ponka); 605 on Ponca Reservation, Indian Territory; 217 at Santee Agency, Nebraska.
IV. Ponca (formerly Ponka on maps; Ponka); 605 on Ponca Reservation, Indian Territory; 217 at Santee Agency, Nebraska.
[K] and [S] represent inverted K and S.
[K] and [S] stand for flipped K and S.
V. Kaw ([K]an´-ze; the Kansa Indians); on the Kansas Reservation. Indian Territory.
V. Kaw ([K]an´-ze; the Kansa Indians); on the Kansas Reservation. Indian Territory.
VI. Osage; Big Osage (Pa-he´-tsi, Those on a Mountain); Little Osage (Those at the foot of the Mountain); Arkansas Band ([S]an-ʇsu-ʞ¢in, Dwellers in a Highland Grove), Osage Reservation, Indian Territory.
VI. Osage; Big Osage (Pa-he´-tsi, Those on a Mountain); Little Osage (Those at the foot of the Mountain); Arkansas Band ([S]an-ʇsu-ʞ¢in, Dwellers in a Highland Grove), Osage Reservation, Indian Territory.
VII. Quapaw (U-ʞa´-qpa; Kwapa). A few are on the Quapaw Reserve, but about 200 are on the Osage Reserve, Oklahoma. (They are the Arkansa of early times.)
VII. Quapaw (U-ʞa´-qpa; Kwapa). A few are on the Quapaw Reserve, but around 200 are on the Osage Reserve in Oklahoma. (They are the Arkansa from earlier times.)
VIII. Iowa, on Great Nemaha Reserve, Kansas and Nebraska, and 86 on Sac and Fox Reserve, Indian Territory.
VIII. Iowa, on the Great Nemaha Reserve, Kansas and Nebraska, and 86 on the Sac and Fox Reserve, Indian Territory.
IX. Otoe (Wa-to´-qta-ta), on Otoe Reserve, Indian Territory.
IX. Otoe (Wa-to´-qta-ta), located on the Otoe Reserve, Indian Territory.
X. Missouri or Missouria (Ni-u´-t’a-tci), on Otoe Reserve.
X. Missouri or Missouria (Ni-u´-t’a-tci), on Otoe Reserve.
XI. Winnebago (Ho-tcañ´-ga-ra); most in Nebraska, on their reserve: some are in Wisconsin; some in Michigan, according to Dr. Reynolds.
XI. Winnebago (Ho-tcañ´-ga-ra); mostly in Nebraska, on their reservation: some are in Wisconsin; some in Michigan, based on Dr. Reynolds' info.
XII. Mandan, on Fort Berthold Reserve, North Dakota.
XII. Mandan, on the Fort Berthold Reserve, North Dakota.
XIII. Gros Ventres (a misleading name; syn. Minnetaree; Hi-da´-tsa); on the same reserve.
XIII. Gros Ventres (a misleading name; syn. Minnetaree; Hi-da´-tsa); on the same reserve.
XIV. Crow (Absáruqe, Aubsároke, etc.), Crow Reserve, Montana.
XIV. Crow (Absáruqe, Aubsároke, etc.), Crow Reserve, Montana.
XV. Tutelo (Ye-san´); among the Six Nations, Grand River Reserve, Province of Ontario, Canada.
XV. Tutelo (Ye-san´); among the Six Nations, Grand River Reserve, Province of Ontario, Canada.
XVI. Biloxi (Ta´-neks ha´-ya), part on the Red River, at Avoyelles, Louisiana; part in Indian Territory, among the Choctaw and Caddo.
XVI. Biloxi (Ta´-neks ha´-ya), part on the Red River, at Avoyelles, Louisiana; part in Indian Territory, among the Choctaw and Caddo.
XVII. Catawba.
XVII. Catawba.
XVIII. Woccon.
XVIII. Woccon.
Population.—The present number of the Siouan family is about 43,400, of whom about 2,204 are in British North America, the rest being in the United States. Below is given the population of the tribes officially recognized, compiled chiefly from the Canadian Indian Report for 1888, the United States Indian Commissioner’s Report for 1889, and the United States Census Bulletin for 1890:
Population.—The current number of the Siouan family is about 43,400, with around 2,204 in British North America and the rest in the United States. Below is the population of the officially recognized tribes, compiled mainly from the Canadian Indian Report for 1888, the United States Indian Commissioner’s Report for 1889, and the United States Census Bulletin for 1890:
SKITTAGETAN FAMILY.
> Skittagets, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, c, 1848 (the equivalent of his Queen Charlotte’s Island group, p. 77).
> Skittagets, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, c, 1848 (the equivalent of his Queen Charlotte’s Island group, p. 77).
> Skittagetts, Berghaus, Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1852.
> Skittagetts, Berghaus, Physics. Atlas, map 17, 1852.
> Skidegattz, Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 403, 1853 (obvious typographical error; Queen Charlotte Island).
> Skidegattz, Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 403, 1853 (obvious typo; Queen Charlotte Island).
X Haidah, Scouler in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc. Lond., XI, 224, 1841 (same as his Northern family; see below).
X Haidah, Scholar in Journal of the Royal Geographical Society of London, XI, 224, 1841 (same as his Northern family; see below).
119 = Haidah, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 300, 1850 (Skittegats, Massets, Kumshahas, Kyganie). Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 72, 1856 (includes Skittigats, Massetts, Kumshahas, and Kyganie of Queen Charlotte’s Ids. and Prince of Wales Archipelago). Latham, Opuscula, 339, 1860. Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 673, 1859. Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 401, 1862 (as in 1856). Dall in Proc. Am. Ass’n. 269, 1869 (Queen Charlotte’s Ids. and southern part of Alexander Archipelago). Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 564, 604, 1882.
119 = Haidah, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 300, 1850 (Skittegats, Massets, Kumshahas, Kyganie). Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 72, 1856 (includes Skittigats, Massetts, Kumshahas, and Kyganie of Queen Charlotte’s Islands and Prince of Wales Archipelago). Latham, Opuscula, 339, 1860. Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 673, 1859. Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 401, 1862 (as in 1856). Dall in Proc. Am. Ass’n. 269, 1869 (Queen Charlotte’s Islands and southern part of Alexander Archipelago). Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 564, 604, 1882.
> Hai-dai, Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, V, 489, 1855. Kane, Wanderings of an Artist, app., 1859, (Work’s census, 1836-’41, of northwest coast tribes, classified by language).
> Hai-dai, Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, V, 489, 1855. Kane, Wanderings of an Artist, app., 1859, (Work’s census, 1836-’41, of northwest coast tribes, classified by language).
= Haida, Gibbs in Cont. N.A. Eth., I, 135, 1877. Tolmie and Dawson, Comp. Vocabs., 15, 1884 (vocabs. of Kaigani Sept, Masset, Skidegate, Kumshiwa dialects; also map showing distribution). Dall in Proc. Am. Ass’n, 375, 1885 (mere mention of family).
= Haida, Gibbs in Cont. N.A. Eth., I, 135, 1877. Tolmie and Dawson, Comp. Vocabs., 15, 1884 (vocabularies of Kaigani Sept, Masset, Skidegate, Kumshiwa dialects; also a map showing distribution). Dall in Proc. Am. Ass’n, 375, 1885 (just a mention of the family).
< Hydahs, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 460, 473, 1878 (enumerates Massets, Klue, Kiddan, Ninstance, Skid-a-gate, Skid-a-gatees, Cum-she-was, Kaiganies, Tsimsheeans, Nass, Skeenas, Sebasses, Hailtzas, Bellacoolas).
< Hydahs, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 460, 473, 1878 (lists Massets, Klue, Kiddan, Ninstance, Skid-a-gate, Skid-a-gatees, Cum-she-was, Kaiganies, Tsimsheeans, Nass, Skeenas, Sebasses, Hailtzas, Bellacoolas).
> Queen Charlotte’s Island, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 15, 306, 1836 (no tribe indicated). Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, 77, 1848 (based on Skittagete language). Latham in Jour. Eth. Soc. Lond., 1, 154, 1848. Latham, Opuscula, 349, 1860.
> Queen Charlotte’s Island, Gallatin in Transactions and Collections of the American Antiquarian Society, II, 15, 306, 1836 (no tribe indicated). Gallatin in Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, II, pt. 1, 77, 1848 (based on Skittagete language). Latham in Journal of the Ethnological Society of London, 1, 154, 1848. Latham, Opuscula, 349, 1860.
X Northern, Scouler in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc. Lond., XI, 219, 1841 (includes Queen Charlotte’s Island and tribes on islands and coast up to 60° N.L.; Haidas, Massettes, Skittegás, Cumshawás). Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 433, 1847 (follows Scouler).
X Northern, Scouler in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc. Lond., XI, 219, 1841 (covers Queen Charlotte’s Island and the tribes on the islands and coast up to 60° N.L.; Haidas, Massettes, Skittegás, Cumshawás). Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 433, 1847 (follows Scouler).
= Kygáni, Dall in Proc. Am. Ass’n, 269, 1869 (Queen Charlotte’s Ids. or Haidahs).
= Kygáni, Dall in Proc. Am. Ass’n, 269, 1869 (Queen Charlotte’s Ids. or Haidahs).
X Nootka, Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 564, 1882 (contains Quane, probably of present family; Quactoe, Saukaulutuck).
X Nootka, Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 564, 1882 (includes Quane, likely from the current family; Quactoe, Saukaulutuck).
The vocabulary referred by Gallatin95 to “Queen Charlotte’s Islands” unquestionably belongs to the present family. In addition to being a compound word and being objectionable as a family name on account of its unwieldiness, the term is a purely geographic one and is based upon no stated tribe; hence it is not eligible for use in systematic nomenclature. As it appears in the Archæologia Americana it represents nothing but the locality whence the vocabulary of an unknown tribe was received.
The vocabulary mentioned by Gallatin95 as “Queen Charlotte’s Islands” definitely belongs to the current family. Besides being a compound word and unsuitable as a family name because of its awkwardness, the term is purely geographic and doesn’t refer to any specific tribe; therefore, it can't be used in systematic naming. As it shows up in the Archæologia Americana, it only indicates the location from which the vocabulary of an unknown tribe was obtained.
The family name to be considered as next in order of date is the Northern (or Haidah) of Scouler, which appears in volume XI, Royal Geographical Society, page 218, et seq. The term as employed by Scouler is involved in much confusion, and it is somewhat difficult to determine just what tribes the author intended to cover by the designation. Reduced to its simplest form, the case stands as follows: Scouler’s primary division of the Indians of the Northwest was into two groups, the insular and the inland. The insular (and coast tribes) were then subdivided into two families, viz, Northern or Haidah family (for the terms are interchangeably used, as on page 224) and the Southern or Nootka-Columbian family. Under the Northern or Haidah family the author classes all the Indian tribes 120 in the Russian territory, the Kolchians (Athapascas of Gallatin, 1836), the Koloshes, Ugalentzes, and Tun Ghaase (the Koluscans of Gallatin, 1836); the Atnas (Salish of Gallatin, 1836); the Kenaians (Athapascas, Gallatin, 1836); the Haidah tribes proper of Queen Charlotte Island, and the Chimesyans.
The next family name to consider chronologically is the Northern (or Haidah) of Scouler, which appears in volume XI, Royal Geographical Society, page 218, et seq. The way Scouler uses the term is quite confusing, making it hard to pinpoint exactly which tribes he meant to include. Simply put, Scouler divided the Indians of the Northwest into two groups: the insular and the inland. The insular (and coastal tribes) were further divided into two families: the Northern or Haidah family (the terms are used interchangeably, as mentioned on page 224) and the Southern or Nootka-Columbian family. Under the Northern or Haidah family, the author includes all the Indian tribes 120 in Russian territory, the Kolchians (Athapascas of Gallatin, 1836), the Koloshes, Ugalentzes, and Tun Ghaase (the Koluscans of Gallatin, 1836); the Atnas (Salish of Gallatin, 1836); the Kenaians (Athapascas, Gallatin, 1836); the true Haidah tribes of Queen Charlotte Island, and the Chimesyans.
It will appear at a glance that such a heterogeneous assemblage of tribes, representing as they do several distinct stocks, can not have been classed together on purely linguistic evidence. In point of fact, Scouler’s remarkable classification seems to rest only in a very slight degree upon a linguistic basis, if indeed it can be said to have a linguistic basis at all. Consideration of “physical character, manners, and customs” were clearly accorded such weight by this author as to practically remove his Northern or Haidah family from the list of linguistic stocks.
At first glance, it might seem that such a diverse mix of tribes, representing several distinct lineages, couldn't be grouped together solely based on language. In reality, Scouler’s impressive classification appears to rely only a little on linguistic evidence, if it can even be considered to have a linguistic foundation at all. This author clearly gave significant importance to "physical characteristics, traditions, and customs," which effectively excluded his Northern or Haidah family from the list of linguistic categories.
The next family name which was applied in this connection is the Skittagets of Gallatin as above cited. This name is given to designate a family on page c, volume II, of Transactions of the Ethnological Society, 1848. In his subsequent list of vocabularies, page 77, he changes his designation to Queen Charlotte Island, placing under this family name the Skittagete tribe. His presentation of the former name of Skittagets in his complete list of families is, however, sufficiently formal to render it valid as a family designation, and it is, therefore, retained for the tribes of the Queen Charlotte Archipelago which have usually been called Haida.
The next family name mentioned in this context is the Skittagets of Gallatin, as cited above. This name is used to identify a family on page c, volume II, of the Transactions of the Ethnological Society, 1848. In his later list of vocabularies, on page 77, he changes the name to Queen Charlotte Island, categorizing the Skittagete tribe under this family name. However, his earlier mention of the Skittagets in his complete list of families is formal enough to be valid as a family designation, and it is, therefore, kept for the tribes of the Queen Charlotte Archipelago, which are usually referred to as Haida.
From a comparison of the vocabularies of the Haida language with others of the neighboring Koluschan family, Dr. Franz Boas is inclined to consider that the two are genetically related. The two languages possess a considerable number of words in common, but a more thorough investigation is requisite for the settlement of the question than has yet been given. Pending this the two families are here treated separately.
From comparing the vocabularies of the Haida language with those of the nearby Koluschan family, Dr. Franz Boas believes that the two are genetically related. Both languages share a significant number of common words, but a more in-depth investigation is needed to settle this question than what has been done so far. In the meantime, the two families are discussed separately here.
GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION.
The tribes of this family occupy Queen Charlotte Islands, Forrester Island to the north of the latter, and the southeastern part of Prince of Wales Island, the latter part having been ascertained by the agents of the Tenth Census.96
The tribes of this family live on the Queen Charlotte Islands, Forrester Island to the north of those, and the southeastern part of Prince of Wales Island, the latter area confirmed by the agents of the Tenth Census.96
PRINCIPAL TRIBES.
The following is a list of the principal villages:
The following is a list of the main villages:
Haida: | ||
Aseguang. Cumshawa. Kayung. Kung. Kunχit. Massett. |
New Gold Harbor. Skedan. Skiteiget. Tanu. Tartanee. Uttewas. |
|
121 Kaigani: | ||
Chatcheeni. Clickass. Howakan. Quiahanless. Shakan. |
Population.—The population of the Haida is 2,500, none of whom are at present under an agent.
Population.—The population of the Haida is 2,500, and none of them currently have an agent.
TAKILMAN FAMILY.
= Takilma, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 1882 (Lower Rogue River).
= Takilma, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 1882 (Lower Rogue River).
This name was proposed by Mr. Gatschet for a distinct language spoken on the coast of Oregon about the lower Rogue River. Mr. Dorsey obtained a vocabulary in 1884 which he has compared with Athapascan, Kusan, Yakonan, and other languages spoken in the region without finding any marked resemblances. The family is hence admitted provisionally. The language appears to be spoken by but a single tribe, although there is a manuscript vocabulary in the Bureau of Ethnology exhibiting certain differences which may be dialectic.
This name was suggested by Mr. Gatschet for a specific language spoken along the Oregon coast near the lower Rogue River. In 1884, Mr. Dorsey collected a vocabulary and compared it with Athapascan, Kusan, Yakonan, and other regional languages but found no significant similarities. Therefore, the family is tentatively recognized. The language seems to be spoken by only one tribe, although there is a manuscript vocabulary in the Bureau of Ethnology showing some differences that might be dialectal.
GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION.
The Takilma formerly dwelt in villages along upper Rogue River, Oregon, all the latter, with one exception, being on the south side, from Illinois River on the southwest, to Deep Rock, which was nearer the head of the stream. They are now included among the “Rogue River Indians,” and they reside to the number of twenty-seven on the Siletz Reservation, Tillamook County, Oregon, where Dorsey found them in 1884.
The Takilma used to live in villages along the upper Rogue River in Oregon, mostly on the south side, stretching from the Illinois River in the southwest to Deep Rock, which is closer to the source of the river. Now, they are considered part of the "Rogue River Indians" and currently live with a population of twenty-seven on the Siletz Reservation in Tillamook County, Oregon, where Dorsey found them in 1884.
TAÑOAN FAMILY.
> Tay-waugh, Lane (1854) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, V. 689, 1855 (Pueblos of San Juan, Santa Clara, Pojuaque, Nambe. San Il de Conso, and one Moqui pueblo). Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent, and So. Am.), 479, 1878.
> Tay-waugh, Lane (1854) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, V. 689, 1855 (Pueblos of San Juan, Santa Clara, Pojuaque, Nambe. San Il de Conso, and one Moqui pueblo). Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent, and So. Am.), 479, 1878.
> Taño, Powell in Rocky Mountain Presbyterian, Nov., 1878 (includes Sandia, Téwa, San Ildefonso, San Juan, Santa Clara, Pojoaque, Nambé, Tesuque, Sinecú, Jemez, Taos, Picuri).
> Taño, Powell in Rocky Mountain Presbyterian, Nov., 1878 (includes Sandia, Téwa, San Ildefonso, San Juan, Santa Clara, Pojoaque, Nambé, Tesuque, Sinecú, Jemez, Taos, Picuri).
> Tegna, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent, and So. Am.), 479, 1878 (includes S. Juan, Sta. Clara, Pojuaque, Nambe, Tesugue, S. Ildefonso, Haro).
> Tegna, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent, and So. Am.), 479, 1878 (includes S. Juan, Sta. Clara, Pojuaque, Nambe, Tesugue, S. Ildefonso, Haro).
= Téwan, Powell in Am. Nat., 605, Aug., 1880 (makes five divisions: 1. Taño (Isleta, Isleta near El Paso, Sandía); 2. Taos (Taos, Picuni); 3. Jemes (Jemes); 4. Tewa or Tehua (San Ildefonso, San Juan, Pojoaque, Nambe, Tesuque, Santa Clara, and one Moki pueblo); 5. Piro).
= Téwan, Powell in Am. Nat., 605, Aug., 1880 (makes five divisions: 1. Taño (Isleta, Isleta near El Paso, Sandía); 2. Taos (Taos, Picuni); 3. Jemes (Jemes); 4. Tewa or Tehua (San Ildefonso, San Juan, Pojoaque, Nambe, Tesuque, Santa Clara, and one Moki pueblo); 5. Piro).
> E-nagh-magh, Lane (1854) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, V, 689, 1855 (includes Taos, Vicuris, Zesuqua, Sandia, Ystete, and two pueblos near El Paso, Texas). Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent, and So. Am.), 479, 1878 (follows Lane, but identifies Texan pueblos with Lentis? and Socorro?).
> E-nagh-magh, Lane (1854) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, V, 689, 1855 (includes Taos, Vicuris, Zesuqua, Sandia, Ystete, and two pueblos near El Paso, Texas). Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent, and So. Am.), 479, 1878 (follows Lane, but identifies Texan pueblos with Lentis? and Socorro?).
> Picori, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent, and So. Am.), 479, 1878 (or Enaghmagh).
> Picori, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent, and So. Am.), 479, 1878 (or Enaghmagh).
= Stock of Rio Grande Pueblos, Gatschet in U.S. Geog. Surv. W. 100th M., vii, 415, 1879.
= Stock of Rio Grande Pueblos, Gatschet in U.S. Geog. Surv. W. 100th M., vii, 415, 1879.
= Rio Grande Pueblo, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 258, 1882.
= Rio Grande Pueblo, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 258, 1882.
In a letter97 from Wm. Carr Lane to H. R. Schoolcraft, appear some remarks on the affinities of the Pueblo languages, based in large part on hearsay evidence. No vocabularies are given, nor does any real classification appear to be attempted, though referring to such of his remarks as apply in the present connection, Lane states that the Indians of “Taos, Vicuris, Zesuqua, Sandia, and Ystete, and of two pueblos of Texas, near El Paso, are said to speak the same language, which I have heard called E-nagh-magh,” and that the Indians of “San Juan, Santa Clara, Pojuaque, Nambe, San Il de Conso, and one Moqui pueblo, all speak the same language, as it is said: this I have heard called Tay-waugh.” The ambiguous nature of his reference to these pueblos is apparent from the above quotation.
In a letter97 from Wm. Carr Lane to H. R. Schoolcraft, there are some comments on the connections between Pueblo languages, mostly based on what he heard. No vocabularies are provided, and there doesn't seem to be any real attempt at classification. However, Lane mentions that the Indians of “Taos, Vicuris, Zesuqua, Sandia, and Ystete, along with two pueblos in Texas near El Paso, are said to speak the same language, which I've heard called E-nagh-magh.” He also notes that the Indians of “San Juan, Santa Clara, Pojuaque, Nambe, San Il de Conso, and one Moqui pueblo all supposedly speak the same language, which I've heard called Tay-waugh.” The unclear nature of his reference to these pueblos is evident from the quotation above.
The names given by Lane as those he had “heard” applied to certain groups of pueblos which “it is said” speak the same language, rest on too slender a basis for serious consideration in a classificatory sense.
The names Lane mentioned that he had “heard” used for certain groups of pueblos that “supposedly” speak the same language are based on too weak a foundation for serious classification.
Keane in the appendix to Stanford’s Compendium (Central and South America), 1878, p. 479, presents the list given by Lane, correcting his spelling in some cases and adding the name of the Tusayan pueblo as Haro (Hano). He gives the group no formal family name, though they are classed together as speaking “Tegua or Tay-waugh.”
Keane in the appendix to Stanford’s Compendium (Central and South America), 1878, p. 479, presents the list provided by Lane, correcting his spelling in some instances and adding the name of the Tusayan pueblo as Haro (Hano). He doesn’t give the group a formal family name, but they are categorized together as speaking “Tegua or Tay-waugh.”
The Taño of Powell (1878), as quoted, appears to be the first name formally given the family, and is therefore accepted. Recent investigations of the dialect spoken at Taos and some of the other pueblos of this group show a considerable body of words having Shoshonean affinities, and it is by no means improbable that further research will result in proving the radical relationship of these languages to the Shoshonean family. The analysis of the language has not yet, however, proceeded far enough to warrant a decided opinion.
The Taño of Powell (1878), as noted, seems to be the first name officially assigned to the family and is thus accepted. Recent studies of the dialect spoken in Taos and some of the other pueblos in this group reveal a significant number of words with Shoshonean connections, and it's quite possible that further research will confirm a fundamental relationship between these languages and the Shoshonean family. However, the analysis of the language has not yet advanced enough to justify a definitive opinion.
GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION.
The tribes of this family in the United States resided exclusively upon the Rio Grande and its tributary valleys from about 33° to about 36°. A small body of these people joined the Tusayan in northern Arizona, as tradition avers to assist the latter against attacks by the Apache—though it seems more probable that they fled from the Rio Grande during the pueblo revolt of 1680—and remained to found the permanent pueblo of Hano, the seventh pueblo of the group. A smaller section of the family lived upon the Rio Grande in Mexico and Texas, just over the New Mexico border.
The tribes of this family in the United States lived exclusively along the Rio Grande and its tributary valleys from about 33° to about 36°. A small group of these people joined the Tusayan in northern Arizona, as tradition says, to help them against attacks by the Apache—though it seems more likely that they escaped from the Rio Grande during the pueblo revolt of 1680—and stayed to establish the permanent pueblo of Hano, the seventh pueblo of the group. A smaller section of the family lived along the Rio Grande in Mexico and Texas, just over the New Mexico border.
Hano (of the Tusayan group) | 132 | |
Isleta (New Mexico) | 1,059 | |
Isleta (Texas) | few | |
Jemez | 428 | |
Nambé | 79 | |
Picuris | 100 | |
Pojoaque | 20 | |
Sandia | 140 | |
San Ildefonso | 148 | |
San Juan | 406 | |
Santa Clara | 225 | |
Senecú (below El Paso) | few | |
Taos | 409 | |
Tesuque | 91 |
TIMUQUANAN FAMILY.
= Timuquana, Smith in Hist. Magazine, II, 1, 1858 (a notice of the language with vocabulary; distinctness of the language affirmed). Brinton. Floridian Peninsula, 134, 1859 (spelled also Timuaca, Timagoa, Timuqua).
= Timuquana, Smith in Hist. Magazine, II, 1, 1858 (a notice of the language with vocabulary; distinctness of the language affirmed). Brinton. Floridian Peninsula, 134, 1859 (also spelled Timuaca, Timagoa, Timuqua).
= Timucua, Gatschet in Proc. Am. Phil. Soc., XVI, April 6, 1877 (from Cape Cañaveral to mouth of St. John’s River). Gatschet, Creek Mig. Legend I, 11-13, 1884. Gatschet in Science, 413, April 29, 1887.
= Timucua, Gatschet in Proc. Am. Phil. Soc., XVI, April 6, 1877 (from Cape Cañaveral to the mouth of St. John’s River). Gatschet, Creek Mig. Legend I, 11-13, 1884. Gatschet in Science, 413, April 29, 1887.
= Atimuca, Gatschet in Science, ibid, (proper name).
= Atimuca, Gatschet in Science, ibid, (proper name).
Derivation: From ati-muca, “ruler,” “master;” literally, “servants attend upon him.”
Derivation: From ati-muca, “ruler,” “master;” literally, “servants attend to him.”
In the Historical Magazine as above cited appears a notice of the Timuquana language by Buckingham Smith, in which is affirmed its distinctness upon the evidence of language. A short vocabulary is appended, which was collated from the “Confessionario” by Padre Pareja, 1613. Brinton and Gatschet have studied the Timuquana language and have agreed as to the distinctness of the family from any other of the United States. Both the latter authorities are inclined to take the view that it has affinities with the Carib family to the southward, and it seems by no means improbable that ultimately the Timuquana language will be considered an offshoot of the Carib linguistic stock. At the present time, however, such a conclusion would not be justified by the evidence gathered and published.
In the Historical Magazine mentioned above, there is a note on the Timuquana language by Buckingham Smith, which states that it is a distinct language based on linguistic evidence. A short vocabulary is included, compiled from the “Confessionario” by Padre Pareja in 1613. Brinton and Gatschet have studied the Timuquana language and agree that it is distinct from other languages in the United States. Both of these researchers believe it may have connections to the Carib language family to the south, and it’s quite possible that the Timuquana language will eventually be recognized as a branch of the Carib linguistic stock. However, at this time, such a conclusion isn't supported by the evidence that has been collected and published.
GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION.
It is impossible to assign definite limits to the area occupied by the tribes of this family. From documentary testimony of the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries the limits of the family domain appear to have been about as follows: In general terms the present northern limits of the State of Florida may be taken as the northern frontier, although upon the Atlantic side Timuquanan territory may have extended into Georgia. Upon the northwest the boundary line was formed in De Soto’s time by the Ocilla River. Lake Okeechobee on the south, or as it was then called Lake Sarrape or Mayaimi, may be taken as the boundary between the Timuquanan tribes proper and the Calusa province upon the Gulf coast and the Tegesta province upon the Atlantic side. Nothing whatever of the languages 124 spoken in these two latter provinces is available for comparison. A number of the local names of these provinces given by Fontanedo (1559) have terminations similar to many of the Timuquanan local names. This slender evidence is all that we have from which to infer the Timuquanan relationship of the southern end of the peninsula.
It’s impossible to define the exact area occupied by the tribes of this family. Based on documents from the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries, the boundaries of their domain seem to have been roughly as follows: Generally, the current northern boundaries of the State of Florida can be considered the northern limit, although on the Atlantic side, the Timuquanan territory might have extended into Georgia. To the northwest, the boundary during De Soto’s time was marked by the Ocilla River. Lake Okeechobee, which was then called Lake Sarrape or Mayaimi, can be seen as the boundary between the Timuquanan tribes and the Calusa province on the Gulf coast, as well as the Tegesta province on the Atlantic side. There’s no information available for comparison regarding the languages spoken in these two latter provinces. Several of the local names from these provinces, recorded by Fontanedo (1559), have endings similar to many Timuquanan local names. This limited evidence is all we have to suggest the Timuquanan connection at the southern end of the peninsula.
PRINCIPAL TRIBES.
The following settlements appear upon the oldest map of the regions we possess, that of De Bry (Narratio; Frankf. a.M. 15, 1590):
The following settlements are shown on the oldest map of the regions we have, that of De Bry (Narratio; Frankf. a.M. 15, 1590):
TONIKAN FAMILY.
= Tunicas, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 115, 116, 1836 (quotes Dr. Sibley, who states they speak a distinct language). Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 341, 1850 (opposite mouth of Red River; quotes Dr. Sibley as to distinctness of language).
= Tunicas, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 115, 116, 1836 (quotes Dr. Sibley, who states they speak a distinct language). Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 341, 1850 (opposite mouth of Red River; quotes Dr. Sibley as to distinctness of language).
= Tonica, Gatschet, Creek Mig. Legend, I, 39, 1884 (brief account of tribe).
= Tonica, Gatschet, Creek Mig. Legend, I, 39, 1884 (short summary of the tribe).
= Tonika, Gatschet in Science, 412, April 29, 1887 (distinctness as a family asserted; the tribe calls itself Túniχka).
= Tonika, Gatschet in Science, 412, April 29, 1887 (distinctness as a family claimed; the tribe identifies itself as Túniχka).
Derivation: From the Tonika word óni, “man,” “people;” t- is a prefix or article; -ka, -χka a nominal suffix.
Derivation: From the Tonika word óni, “man,” “people;” t- is a prefix or article; -ka, -χka a nominal suffix.
The distinctness of the Tonika language, has long been suspected, and was indeed distinctly stated by Dr. Sibley in 1806.98 The statement to this effect by Dr. Sibley was quoted by Gallatin in 1836, but as the latter possessed no vocabulary of the language he made no attempt to classify it. Latham also dismisses the language with the same quotation from Sibley. Positive linguistic proof of the position of the language was lacking until obtained by Mr. Gatschet in 1886, who declared it to form a family by itself.
The uniqueness of the Tonika language has been suspected for a long time, and Dr. Sibley clearly stated this back in 1806. 98 Dr. Sibley's statement was quoted by Gallatin in 1836, but since Gallatin didn't have a vocabulary of the language, he didn't try to classify it. Latham also dismissed the language using the same quote from Sibley. There was no solid linguistic evidence supporting the language's classification until Mr. Gatschet provided it in 1886, when he declared that it formed its own language family.
GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION.
The Tonika are known to have occupied three localities: First, on the Lower Yazoo River (1700); second, east shore of Mississippi River (about 1704); third, in Avoyelles Parish, Louisiana (1817). Near Marksville, the county seat of that parish, about twenty-five are now living.
The Tonika are known to have lived in three places: First, on the Lower Yazoo River (1700); second, on the east shore of the Mississippi River (around 1704); third, in Avoyelles Parish, Louisiana (1817). Near Marksville, which is the county seat of that parish, about twenty-five of them are currently living.
TONKAWAN FAMILY.
= Tonkawa, Gatschet, Zwölf Sprachen aus dem Südwesten Nordamerikas, 76, 1876 (vocabulary of about 300 words and some sentences). Gatschet, Die Sprache der Tonkawas, in Zeitschrift für Ethnologie, 64, 1877. Gatschet (1876), in Proc. Am. Philosoph. Soc., XVI, 318, 1877.
= Tonkawa, Gatschet, Twelve Languages from the Southwest of North America, 76, 1876 (vocabulary of about 300 words and some sentences). Gatschet, The Language of the Tonkawas, in Journal of Ethnology, 64, 1877. Gatschet (1876), in Proc. Am. Philosoph. Soc., 16, 318, 1877.
Derivation: the full form is the Caddo or Wako term tonkawéya, “they all stay together” (wéya, “all”).
Derivation: the full form is the Caddo or Wako term tonkawéya, “they all stay together” (wéya, “all”).
After a careful examination of all the linguistic material available for comparison, Mr. Gatschet has concluded that the language spoken by the Tonkawa forms a distinct family.
After closely reviewing all the available linguistic material for comparison, Mr. Gatschet has determined that the language spoken by the Tonkawa is part of a unique language family.
GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION.
The Tónkawa were a migratory people and a colluvies gentium, whose earliest habitat is unknown. Their first mention occurs in 1719; at that time and ever since they roamed in the western and southern parts of what is now Texas. About 1847 they were engaged as scouts in the United States Army, and from 1860-’62 (?) were in the Indian Territory; after the secession war till 1884 they lived in temporary camps near Fort Griffin, Shackelford County, Texas, and in October, 1884, they removed to the Indian Territory (now on Oakland Reserve). In 1884 there were seventy-eight individuals living; associated with them were nineteen Lipan Apache, who had lived in their company for many years, though in a separate camp. They have thirteen divisions (partly totem-clans) and observe mother-right.
The Tónkawa were a nomadic group and a colluvies gentium, with their earliest home being unknown. They were first mentioned in 1719; at that time, and since, they wandered in the western and southern areas of what is now Texas. Around 1847, they served as scouts for the United States Army, and from 1860 to 1862, they were in the Indian Territory; after the Civil War, they lived in temporary camps near Fort Griffin in Shackelford County, Texas, until 1884, when they moved to the Indian Territory (now known as Oakland Reserve). In 1884, there were seventy-eight individuals living; along with them were nineteen Lipan Apache, who had lived alongside them for many years, though in a separate camp. They have thirteen divisions (partly totem-clans) and follow matrilineal descent.
UCHEAN FAMILY.
= Uchees, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II., 95, 1836 (based upon the Uchees alone). Bancroft, Hist. U.S., III., 247, 1840. Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc. II., pt. 1, xcix, 77, 1848. Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 472, 1878 (suggests that the language may have been akin to Natchez).
= Uchees, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II., 95, 1836 (based upon the Uchees alone). Bancroft, Hist. U.S., III., 247, 1840. Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc. II., pt. 1, xcix, 77, 1848. Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 472, 1878 (suggests that the language may have been similar to Natchez).
= Utchees, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II., 306, 1836. Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III., 401, 1853. Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 472, 1878.
= Utchees, Gallatin in Transactions and Collections of the American Antiquarian Society, II., 306, 1836. Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Indian Tribes, III., 401, 1853. Keane, Appendix Stanford’s Compendium (Central and South America), 472, 1878.
= Utschies, Berghaus (1845), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1848. Ibid., 1852.
= Utschies, Berghaus (1845), Physics. Atlas, map 17, 1848. Ibid., 1852.
= Uché, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 338, 1850 (Coosa River). Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., II., 31-50, 1846. Latham, Opuscula, 293, 1860.
= Uché, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 338, 1850 (Coosa River). Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., II., 31-50, 1846. Latham, Opuscula, 293, 1860.
= Yuchi, Gatschet, Creek Mig. Legend, I, 17, 1884. Gatschet in Science, 413, April 29, 1887.
= Yuchi, Gatschet, Creek Mig. Legend, I, 17, 1884. Gatschet in Science, 413, April 29, 1887.
The following is the account of this tribe given by Gallatin (probably derived from Hawkins) in Archæologia Americana, page 95:
The following is the account of this tribe provided by Gallatin (likely sourced from Hawkins) in Archæologia Americana, page 95:
The original homes of the Uchees were east of Coosa and probably near the Chatahoochee, and they see themselves as the most ancient people of the area. They may be the same group referred to as Apalaches in the records of De Soto’s expedition, and their towns were mainly located along Flint River until recently.
GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION.
The pristine homes of the Yuchi are not now traceable with any degree of certainty. The Yuchi are supposed to have been visited by De Soto during his memorable march, and the town of Cofitachiqui chronicled by him, is believed by many investigators to have stood at Silver Bluff, on the left bank of the Savannah, about 25 miles below Augusta. If, as is supposed by some authorities, Cofitachiqui was a Yuchi town, this would locate the Yuchi in a section which, when first known to the whites, was occupied by the Shawnee. Later the Yuchi appear to have lived somewhat farther down the Savannah, on the eastern and also the western side, as far as the Ogeechee River, and also upon tracts above and below Augusta, Georgia. These tracts were claimed by them as late as 1736.
The exact locations of the Yuchi homes today are hard to pinpoint. It's believed that De Soto visited the Yuchi during his famous journey, and the town of Cofitachiqui that he wrote about is thought by many researchers to have been located at Silver Bluff, on the left bank of the Savannah River, about 25 miles downstream from Augusta. If, as some scholars suggest, Cofitachiqui was a Yuchi town, this would place the Yuchi in an area that, when first explored by Europeans, was inhabited by the Shawnee. Later on, the Yuchi seem to have lived a bit further down the Savannah River, on both the eastern and western banks, stretching as far as the Ogeechee River, and also on lands above and below Augusta, Georgia. They claimed these lands as late as 1736.
127 In 1739 a portion of the Yuchi left their old seats and settled among the Lower Creek on the Chatahoochee River; there they established three colony villages in the neighborhood, and later on a Yuchi settlement is mentioned on Lower Tallapoosa River, among the Upper Creek.99 Filson100 gives a list of thirty Indian tribes and a statement concerning Yuchi towns, which he must have obtained from a much earlier source: “Uchees occupy four different places of residence—at the head of St. John’s, the fork of St. Mary’s, the head of Cannouchee, and the head of St. Tillis” (Satilla), etc.101
127 In 1739, a group of Yuchi moved from their old territory and settled among the Lower Creek on the Chattahoochee River. There, they founded three village colonies nearby, and later a Yuchi settlement is noted on the Lower Tallapoosa River, among the Upper Creek. 99 Filson 100 provides a list of thirty Indian tribes along with information about Yuchi towns, which he must have sourced from a much earlier document: “Uchees live in four different locations—at the head of St. John’s, the fork of St. Mary’s, the head of Cannouchee, and the head of St. Tillis” (Satilla), etc. 101
Population.—More than six hundred Yuchi reside in northeastern Indian Territory, upon the Arkansas River, where they are usually classed as Creek. Doubtless the latter are to some extent intermarried with them, but the Yuchi are jealous of their name and tenacious of their position as a tribe.
Population.—More than six hundred Yuchi live in the northeastern Indian Territory along the Arkansas River, where they are often considered part of the Creek tribe. While it's true that there may be some intermarriage with the Creek, the Yuchi are protective of their identity and firmly hold onto their status as a distinct tribe.
WAIILATPUAN.
= Waiilatpu, Hale, in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, 199, 214, 569, 1846 (includes Cailloux or Cayuse or Willetpoos, and Molele). Gallatin, after Hale, in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, c, 14, 56, 77, 1848 (after Hale). Berghaus (1851), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1852. Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 628, 1859. Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 565, 1882 (Cayuse and Mollale).
= Waiilatpu, Hale, in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, 199, 214, 569, 1846 (includes Cailloux or Cayuse or Willetpoos, and Molele). Gallatin, after Hale, in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, c, 14, 56, 77, 1848 (after Hale). Berghaus (1851), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1852. Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 628, 1859. Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 565, 1882 (Cayuse and Mollale).
= Wailatpu, Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853 (Cayuse and Molele).
= Wailatpu, Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853 (Cayuse and Molele).
X Sahaptin, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 323, 1850 (cited as including Cayús?).
X Sahaptin, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 323, 1850 (mentioned as including Cayús?).
X Sahaptins, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 474, 1878 (cited because it includes Cayuse and Mollale).
X Sahaptins, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 474, 1878 (cited because it includes Cayuse and Mollale).
= Molele, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 324, 1850 (includes Molele, Cayús?).
= Molele, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 324, 1850 (includes Molele, Cayús?).
> Cayús?, Latham, ibid.
> Cayús?, Latham, same source.
= Cayuse, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 166, 1877 (Cayuse and Moléle). Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 442, 1877.
= Cayuse, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 166, 1877 (Cayuse and Moléle). Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 442, 1877.
Derivation: Wayíletpu, plural form of Wa-ílet, “one Cayuse man” (Gatschet).
Derivation: Wayíletpu, the plural form of Wa-ílet, “one Cayuse man” (Gatschet).
Hale established this family and placed under it the Cailloux or Cayuse or Willetpoos, and the Molele. Their headquarters as indicated by Hale are the upper part of the Walla Walla River and the country about Mounts Hood and Vancouver.
Hale set up this family and included the Cailloux, Cayuse, or Willetpoos, and the Molele. Their main base, as noted by Hale, is in the upper part of the Walla Walla River and the surrounding area of Mount Hood and Vancouver.
GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION.
The Cayuse lived chiefly near the mouth of the Walla Walla River, extending a short distance above and below on the Columbia, between the Umatilla and Snake Rivers. The Molále were a mountain tribe and occupied a belt of mountain country south of the Columbia River, chiefly about Mounts Hood and Jefferson.
The Cayuse mostly lived near the mouth of the Walla Walla River, stretching a short distance above and below on the Columbia, between the Umatilla and Snake Rivers. The Molále were a mountain tribe and inhabited a stretch of mountainous area south of the Columbia River, mainly around Mounts Hood and Jefferson.
PRINCIPAL TRIBES.
Cayuse. Molále. |
128 Population.—There are 31 Molále now on the Grande Ronde Reservation, Oregon,102 and a few others live in the mountains west of Klamath Lake. The Indian Affairs Report for 1888 credits 401 and the United States Census Bulletin for 1890, 415 Cayuse Indians to the Umatilla Reservation, but Mr. Henshaw was able to find only six old men and women upon the reservation in August, 1888, who spoke their own language. The others, though presumably of Cayuse blood, speak the Umatilla tongue.
128 Population.—There are 31 Molále living now on the Grande Ronde Reservation in Oregon, and a few others reside in the mountains west of Klamath Lake. The Indian Affairs Report for 1888 states there were 401, and the United States Census Bulletin for 1890 lists 415 Cayuse Indians at the Umatilla Reservation, but Mr. Henshaw could only find six elderly men and women on the reservation in August 1888 who spoke their own language. The others, while presumably of Cayuse descent, speak the Umatilla language.
WAKASHAN FAMILY.
> Wakash, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 15, 306, 1836 (of Nootka Sound; gives Jewitt’s vocab.). Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, 77, 1848 (based on Newittee). Berghaus (1851), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1852. Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853 (includes Newittee and Nootka Sound). Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 73, 1856 (of Quadra and Vancouver’s Island). Latham, Opuscula, 340, 1860. Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 403, 1862 (Tlaoquatsh and Wakash proper; Nutka and congeners also referred here).
> Wakash, Gallatin in Transactions and Collections of the American Antiquarian Society, II, 15, 306, 1836 (regarding Nootka Sound; includes Jewitt’s vocabulary). Gallatin in Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, II, pt. 1, 77, 1848 (based on Newittee). Berghaus (1851), Physical Atlas, map 17, 1852. Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Indian Tribes, III, 402, 1853 (features Newittee and Nootka Sound). Latham in Transactions of the Philological Society of London, 73, 1856 (on Quadra and Vancouver’s Island). Latham, Opuscula, 340, 1860. Latham, Elements of Comparative Philology, 403, 1862 (Tlaoquatsh and Wakash proper; Nutka and related languages also mentioned here).
X Wakash, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 301. 1850 (includes Naspatle, proper Nutkans, Tlaoquatsh, Nittenat, Klasset, Klallems; the last named is Salishan).
X Wakash, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 301. 1850 (includes Naspatle, proper Nutkans, Tlaoquatsh, Nittenat, Klasset, Klallems; the last one is Salishan).
X Nootka-Columbian, Scouler in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc., XI, 221, 1841 (includes Quadra and Vancouver Island, Haeeltzuk, Billechoola, Tlaoquatch, Kawitchen, Noosdalum, Squallyamish, Cheenooks). Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 435, 1847 (follows Scouler). Latham in Jour. Eth. Soc. Lond., I, 162, 1848 (remarks upon Scouler’s group of this name). Latham, Opuscula, 257, 1860 (the same).
X Nootka-Columbian, Scouler in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc., XI, 221, 1841 (includes Quadra and Vancouver Island, Haeeltzuk, Billechoola, Tlaoquatch, Kawitchen, Noosdalum, Squallyamish, Cheenooks). Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 435, 1847 (follows Scouler). Latham in Jour. Eth. Soc. Lond., I, 162, 1848 (comments on Scouler’s group of this name). Latham, Opuscula, 257, 1860 (the same).
< Nootka, Hale in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, 220, 569, 1846 (proposes family to include tribes of Vancouver Island and tribes on south side of Fuca Strait).
< Nootka, Hale in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, 220, 569, 1846 (suggests a family that includes tribes from Vancouver Island and tribes on the south side of the Fuca Strait).
> Nutka, Buschmann, Neu-Mexico, 329, 1858.
> Nutka, Buschmann, New Mexico, 329, 1858.
> Nootka, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 170, 1877 (mentions only Makah, and Classet tribes of Cape Flattery). Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 446. 1877.
> Nootka, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 170, 1877 (mentions only Makah and Classet tribes of Cape Flattery). Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 446. 1877.
X Nootkahs, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 473, 1878 (includes Muchlahts, Nitinahts, Ohyahts, Manosahts, and Quoquoulths of present family, together with a number of Salishan tribes).
X Nootkahs, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 473, 1878 (includes Muchlahts, Nitinahts, Ohyahts, Manosahts, and Quoquoulths of present family, along with several Salishan tribes).
X Nootka, Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 564, 607, 1882 (a heterogeneous group, largely Salishan, with Wakashan, Skittagetan, and other families represented).
X Nootka, Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 564, 607, 1882 (a diverse group, mostly Salishan, along with Wakashan, Skittagetan, and other families included).
> Straits of Fuca, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 134, 306, 1836 (vocabulary of, referred here with doubt; considered distinct by Gallatin).
> Straits of Fuca, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 134, 306, 1836 (vocabulary of, mentioned here with uncertainty; seen as separate by Gallatin).
X Southern, Scouler in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc., XI, 224, 1841 (same as his Noctka-Columbian above).
X Southern, Scouler in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc., XI, 224, 1841 (same as his Noctka-Columbian above).
X Insular, Scouler ibid. (same as his Nootka-Columbian above).
X Insular, Scouler same as his Nootka-Columbian above.
X Haeltzuk, Latham in Jour. Eth. Soc. Lond., I, 155, 1848 (cities Tolmie’s vocab. Spoken from 50°30' to 53°30' N.L.). Latham, Opuscula, 251, 1860 (the same).
X Haeltzuk, Latham in Journal of the Ethnological Society of London, I, 155, 1848 (cities Tolmie’s vocabulary. Spoken from 50°30' to 53°30' N.L.). Latham, Opuscula, 251, 1860 (the same).
> Haeeltsuk and Hailtsa, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 300, 1850 (includes Hyshalla, Hyhysh, Esleytuk, Weekenoch, Nalatsenoch, Quagheuil, Tlatla-Shequilla, Lequeeltoch).
> Haeeltsuk and Hailtsa, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 300, 1850 (includes Hyshalla, Hyhysh, Esleytuk, Weekenoch, Nalatsenoch, Quagheuil, Tlatla-Shequilla, Lequeeltoch).
> Hailtsa, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 72, 1856. Buschmann, Neu-Mexico, 322, 1858. Latham, Opuscula, 339, 1860. Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 401, 1862 (includes coast dialects between Hawkesbury Island, Broughton’s Archipelago, and northern part of Vancouver Island).
> Hailtsa, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 72, 1856. Buschmann, Neu-Mexico, 322, 1858. Latham, Opuscula, 339, 1860. Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 401, 1862 (includes coastal dialects between Hawkesbury Island, Broughton’s Archipelago, and northern Vancouver Island).
> Ha-eelb-zuk, Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, V, 487, 1855. Kane, Wand. of an Artist, app., 1859 (or Ballabola; a census of N.W. tribes classified by language).
> Ha-eelb-zuk, Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, V, 487, 1855. Kane, Wand. of an Artist, app., 1859 (or Ballabola; a census of N.W. tribes classified by language).
< Nass, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt 1, c, 1848.
< Nass, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt 1, c, 1848.
< Naass, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, 77, 1848 (includes Hailstla, Haceltzuk, Billechola, Chimeysan). Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853 (includes Huitsla).
< Naass, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, 77, 1848 (includes Hailstla, Haceltzuk, Billechola, Chimeysan). Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853 (includes Huitsla).
X Nass, Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 564, 606, 1882 (includes Hailtza of present family).
X Nass, Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 564, 606, 1882 (includes Hailtza of the current family).
> Aht, Sproat, Savage Life, app., 312, 1868 (name suggested for family instead of Nootka-Columbian).
> Aht, Sproat, Savage Life, app., 312, 1868 (name proposed for the family instead of Nootka-Columbian).
> Aht, Tolmie and Dawson, Comp. Vocabs., 50, 1884 (vocab. of Kaiookwāht).
> Aht, Tolmie and Dawson, Comp. Vocabs., 50, 1884 (vocab. of Kaiookwāht).
X Puget Sound Group, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 460, 474, 1878.
X Puget Sound Group, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 460, 474, 1878.
X Hydahs, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 473, 1878 (includes Hailtzas of the present family).
X Hydahs, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 473, 1878 (includes Hailtzas of the current family).
> Kwakiool, Tolmie and Dawson, Comp. Vocabs., 27-48, 1884 (vocabs. of Haishilla, Hailtzuk, Kwiha, Likwiltoh, Septs; also map showing family domain).
> Kwakiool, Tolmie and Dawson, Comp. Vocabs., 27-48, 1884 (vocabularies of Haishilla, Hailtzuk, Kwiha, Likwiltoh, Septs; also a map showing family territory).
> Kwā´kiūtl, Boas in Petermann’s Mitteilungen, 130, 1887 (general account of family with list of tribes).
> Kwā´kiūtltl, Boas in Petermann’s Mitteilungen, 130, 1887 (general account of family with list of tribes).
Derivation: Waukash, waukash, is the Nootka word “good” “good.” When heard by Cook at Friendly Cove, Nootka Sound, it was supposed to be the name of the tribe.
Derivation: Waukash, waukash is the Nootka word “good” “good.” When Cook heard it at Friendly Cove, Nootka Sound, it was thought to be the name of the tribe.
Until recently the languages spoken by the Aht of the west coast of Vancouver Island and the Makah of Cape Flattery, congeneric tribes, and the Haeltzuk and Kwakiutl peoples of the east coast of Vancouver Island and the opposite mainland of British Columbia, have been regarded as representing two distinct families. Recently Dr. Boas has made an extended study of these languages, has collected excellent vocabularies of the supposed families, and as a result of his study it is now possible to unite them on the basis of radical affinity. The main body of the vocabularies of the two languages is remarkably distinct, though a considerable number of important words are shown to be common to the two.
Until recently, the languages spoken by the Aht of the west coast of Vancouver Island and the Makah of Cape Flattery, closely related tribes, as well as the Haeltzuk and Kwakiutl peoples of the east coast of Vancouver Island and the adjacent mainland of British Columbia, were thought to belong to two different families. Recently, Dr. Boas conducted an in-depth study of these languages, gathering comprehensive vocabularies for the supposed families. As a result of his research, we can now connect them based on fundamental similarities. While the core vocabularies of the two languages are quite different, there are a significant number of important words that are shown to be shared by both.
Dr. Boas, however, points out that in both languages suffixes only are used in forming words, and a long list of these shows remarkable similarity.
Dr. Boas, however, points out that in both languages, only suffixes are used to form words, and a long list of these shows remarkable similarity.
The above family name was based upon a vocabulary of the Wakash Indians, who, according to Gallatin, “inhabit the island on which Nootka Sound is situated.” The short vocabulary given was collected by Jewitt. Gallatin states103 that this language is the one “in that quarter, which, by various vocabularies, is best known to us.” In 1848104 Gallatin repeats his Wakash family, and again gives the vocabulary of Jewitt. There would thus seem to be no doubt of his intention to give it formal rank as a family.
The family name mentioned above is derived from the vocabulary of the Wakash Indians, who, according to Gallatin, “live on the island where Nootka Sound is located.” The brief vocabulary provided was gathered by Jewitt. Gallatin states103 that this language is the one “in that region, which, through various vocabularies, is best known to us.” In 1848104 Gallatin reiterates his Wakash family classification and again presents Jewitt's vocabulary. It seems clear that he intends to formally recognize it as a family.
The term “Wakash” for this group of languages has since been generally ignored, and in its place Nootka or Nootka-Columbian has been adopted. “Nootka-Columbian” was employed by Scouler in 1841 for a group of languages, extending from the mouth of Salmon 130 River to the south of the Columbia River, now known to belong to several distinct families. “Nootka family” was also employed by Hale105 in 1846, who proposed the name for the tribes of Vancouver Island and those along the south side of the Straits of Fuca.
The term “Wakash” for this group of languages has largely been overlooked, and in its place, Nootka or Nootka-Columbian has become the standard. “Nootka-Columbian” was used by Scouler in 1841 to describe a group of languages that stretched from the mouth of Salmon 130 River to the south of the Columbia River, which we now know belong to several distinct families. “Nootka family” was also used by Hale105 in 1846, who suggested the name for the tribes of Vancouver Island and those along the south side of the Straits of Fuca.
The term “Nootka-Columbian” is strongly condemned by Sproat.106 For the group of related tribes on the west side of Vancouver Island this author suggests Aht, “house, tribe, people,” as a much more appropriate family appellation.
The term “Nootka-Columbian” is strongly criticized by Sproat.106 For the group of related tribes on the west side of Vancouver Island, this author suggests Aht, “house, tribe, people,” as a much more fitting family name.
Though by no means as appropriate a designation as could be found, it seems clear that for the so-called Wakash, Newittee, and other allied languages usually assembled under the Nootka family, the term Wakash of 1836 has priority and must be retained.
Though not the most suitable label available, it’s clear that for the languages known as Wakash, Newittee, and other related languages typically grouped under the Nootka family, the term Wakash from 1836 takes precedence and should be kept.
GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION.
The tribes of the Aht division of this family are confined chiefly to the west coast of Vancouver Island. They range to the north as far as Cape Cook, the northern side of that cape being occupied by Haeltzuk tribes, as was ascertained by Dr. Boas in 1886. On the south they reached to a little above Sooke Inlet, that inlet being in possession of the Soke, a Salishan tribe.
The Aht tribes of this family are mainly located on the west coast of Vancouver Island. They extend northward to Cape Cook, with the northern side of the cape being occupied by the Haeltzuk tribes, as confirmed by Dr. Boas in 1886. To the south, they stretched just above Sooke Inlet, which is inhabited by the Soke, a Salishan tribe.
The neighborhood of Cape Flattery, Washington, is occupied by the Makah, one of the Wakashan tribes, who probably wrested this outpost of the family from the Salish (Clallam) who next adjoin them on Puget Sound.
The Cape Flattery neighborhood in Washington is home to the Makah, one of the Wakashan tribes, who likely took this area from the Salish (Clallam), who are next to them on Puget Sound.
The boundaries of the Haeltzuk division of this family are laid down nearly as they appear on Tolmie and Dawson’s linguistic map of 1884. The west side of King Island and Cascade Inlet are said by Dr. Boas to be inhabited by Haeltzuk tribes, and are colored accordingly.
The borders of the Haeltzuk division of this family are established almost exactly as they show on Tolmie and Dawson’s linguistic map from 1884. Dr. Boas mentions that the west side of King Island and Cascade Inlet are inhabited by Haeltzuk tribes, and they are marked accordingly.
PRINCIPAL AHT TRIBES.
Ahowsaht. Ayhuttisaht. Chicklesaht. Clahoquaht. Hishquayquaht. Howchuklisaht. Kitsmaht. Kyoquaht. Macaw. Manosaht. |
Mowachat. Muclaht. Nitinaht. Nuchalaht. Ohiaht. Opechisaht. Pachenaht. Seshaht. Toquaht. Yuclulaht. |
Population.—There are 457 Makah at the Neah Bay Agency, Washington.107 The total population of the tribes of this family under the West Coast Agency, British Columbia, is 3,160.108 The grand total for this division of the family is thus 3,617.
Population.—There are 457 Makah at the Neah Bay Agency, Washington.107 The total population of the tribes in this family under the West Coast Agency, British Columbia, is 3,160.108 So, the overall total for this division of the family is 3,617.
PRINCIPAL HAELTZUK TRIBES.
Aquamish. Belbellah. Clowetsus. Hailtzuk. Haishilla. Kakamatsis. Keimanoeitoh. Kwakiutl. Kwashilla. |
Likwiltoh. Mamaleilakitish. Matelpa. Nakwahtoh. Nawiti. Nimkish. Quatsino. Tsawadinoh. |
Population.—There are 1,898 of the Haeltzuk division of the family under the Kwawkewlth Agency, British Columbia. Of the Bellacoola (Salishan family) and Haeltzuk, of the present family, there are 2,500 who are not under agents. No separate census of the latter exists at present.
Population.—There are 1,898 members of the Haeltzuk division of the family under the Kwawkewlth Agency in British Columbia. Among the Bellacoola (Salishan family) and Haeltzuk of the current family, there are 2,500 who are not under agents. Currently, there isn't a separate census for the latter group.
WASHOAN FAMILY.
= Washo, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 255, April, 1882.
= Washo, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 255, April, 1882.
< Shoshone, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 477, 1878 (contains Washoes).
< Shoshone, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 477, 1878 (contains Washoes).
< Snake, Keane, ibid. (Same as Shoshone, above.)
< Snake, Keane, ibid. (Same as Shoshone, above.)
This family is represented by a single well known tribe, whose range extended from Reno, on the line of the Central Pacific Railroad, to the lower end of the Carson Valley.
This family is represented by a single well-known tribe, whose territory stretched from Reno, along the Central Pacific Railroad, to the southern part of the Carson Valley.
On the basis of vocabularies obtained by Stephen Powers and other investigators, Mr. Gatschet was the first to formally separate the language. The neighborhood of Carson is now the chief seat of the tribe, and here and in the neighboring valleys there are about 200 living a parasitic life about the ranches and towns.
Based on the vocabularies collected by Stephen Powers and other researchers, Mr. Gatschet was the first to officially classify the language. The Carson area is now the main hub of the tribe, and here, as well as in the nearby valleys, around 200 people live a parasitic lifestyle around the ranches and towns.
WEITSPEKAN FAMILY.
= Weits-pek, Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 422, 1853 (a band and language on Klamath at junction of Trinity). Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 410, 1862 (junction of Klamath and Trinity Rivers). Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 163, 1877 (affirmed to be distinct from any neighboring tongue). Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 438, 1877.
= Weits-pek, Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 422, 1853 (a group and language on Klamath at the junction of Trinity). Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 410, 1862 (junction of Klamath and Trinity Rivers). Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 163, 1877 (confirmed to be different from any nearby language). Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 438, 1877.
< Weitspek, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 77, 1856 (junction of Klamath and Trinity Rivers; Weyot and Wishosk dialects). Latham, Opuscula, 343, 1860.
< Weitspek, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 77, 1856 (junction of Klamath and Trinity Rivers; Weyot and Wishosk dialects). Latham, Opuscula, 343, 1860.
= Eurocs, Powers in Overland Monthly, VII, 530, June, 1872 (of the Lower Klamath and coastwise; Weitspek, a village of).
= Eurocs, Powers in Overland Monthly, VII, 530, June, 1872 (of the Lower Klamath and coastwise; Weitspek, a village of).
= Eurok, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 163, 1877. Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 437, 1877.
= Eurok, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 163, 1877. Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 437, 1877.
= Yu´-rok, Powers in Cont. N.A. Eth., III, 45, 1877 (from junction of Trinity to mouth and coastwise). Powell, ibid., 460 (vocabs. of Al-i-kwa, Klamath, Yu´-rok.)
= Yu´-rok, Powers in Cont. N.A. Eth., III, 45, 1877 (from the junction of Trinity to the mouth and along the coast). Powell, ibid., 460 (vocabularies of Al-i-kwa, Klamath, Yu´-rok.)
X Klamath, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 475, 1878 (Eurocs belong here).
X Klamath, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 475, 1878 (Eurocs belong here).
Derivation: Weitspek is the name of a tribe or village of the family situated on Klamath River. The etymology is unknown.
Derivation: Weitspek is the name of a tribe or village of the family located on the Klamath River. The origin of the name is unclear.
Gibbs was the first to employ this name, which he did in 1853, as 132 above cited. He states that it is “the name of the principal band on the Klamath, at the junction of the Trinity,” adding that “this language prevails from a few miles above that point to the coast, but does not extend far from the river on either side.” It would thus seem clear that in this case, as in several others, he selected the name of a band to apply to the language spoken by it. The language thus defined has been accepted as distinct by later authorities except Latham, who included as dialects under the Weitspek language, the locality of which he gives as the junction of the Klamath and Trinity Rivers, the Weyot and Wishosk, both of which are now classed under the Wishoskan family.
Gibbs was the first to use this name, which he did in 1853, as 132 mentioned above. He explains that it is “the name of the main band on the Klamath, at the junction of the Trinity,” adding that “this language is spoken from a few miles above that point to the coast, but doesn’t extend far from the river on either side.” It seems clear that, in this instance as in several others, he chose the name of a band to apply to the language it spoke. This language has been recognized as distinct by later experts, except Latham, who classified the Weyot and Wishosk as dialects under the Weitspek language, whose location he cites as the junction of the Klamath and Trinity Rivers, both of which are now categorized under the Wishoskan family.
By the Karok these tribes are called Yurok, “down” or “below,” by which name the family has recently been known.
By the Karok, these tribes are called Yurok, meaning “down” or “below,” which is the name the family has recently been known by.
GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION.
For our knowledge of the range of the tribes of this family we are chiefly indebted to Stephen Powers.109 The tribes occupy the lower Klamath River, Oregon, from the mouth of the Trinity down. Upon the coast, Weitspekan territory extends from Gold Bluff to about 6 miles above the mouth of the Klamath. The Chillúla are an offshoot of the Weitspek, living to the south of them, along Redwood Creek to a point about 20 miles inland, and from Gold Bluff to a point about midway between Little and Mad Rivers.
For our understanding of the range of the tribes in this family, we mainly owe it to Stephen Powers.109 The tribes are located along the lower Klamath River in Oregon, from the mouth of the Trinity River down. Along the coast, Weitspekan territory stretches from Gold Bluff to about 6 miles upstream from the mouth of the Klamath. The Chillúla are a branch of the Weitspek, living south of them, along Redwood Creek to around 20 miles inland, and from Gold Bluff to a point roughly halfway between Little and Mad Rivers.
PRINCIPAL TRIBES.
Chillúla, Redwood Creek. Mita, Klamath River. Pekwan, Klamath River. Rikwa, Regua, fishing village at outlet of Klamath River. Sugon, Shragoin, Klamath River. Weitspek, Klamath River (above Big Bend). |
WISHOSKAN FAMILY.
> Wish-osk, Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 422, 1853 (given as the name of a dialect on Mad River and Humboldt Bay).
> Wish-osk, Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 422, 1853 (listed as the name of a dialect spoken in Mad River and Humboldt Bay).
= Wish-osk, Powell in Cont. N.A. Eth., III, 478, 1877 (vocabularies of Wish-osk, Wi-yot, and Ko-wilth). Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 162, 1877 (indicates area occupied by family). Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 437, 1877.
= Wish-osk, Powell in Cont. N.A. Eth., III, 478, 1877 (vocabularies of Wish-osk, Wi-yot, and Ko-wilth). Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 162, 1877 (shows the area occupied by the family). Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 437, 1877.
> Wee-yot, Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 422, 1853 (given as the name of a dialect on Eel River and Humboldt Bay).
> Wee-yot, Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 422, 1853 (listed as the name of a dialect on Eel River and Humboldt Bay).
X Weitspek, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 77, 1856 (includes Weyot and Wishosk). Latham, Opuscula, 343, 1860.
X Weitspek, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 77, 1856 (includes Weyot and Wishosk). Latham, Opuscula, 343, 1860.
< Klamath, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 475, 1878 (cited as including Patawats, Weeyots, Wishosks).
< Klamath, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 475, 1878 (cited as including Patawats, Weeyots, Wishosks).
Derivation: Wish-osk is the name given to the Bay and Mad River Indians by those of Eel River.
Derivation: Wish-osk is the name used by the Eel River people for the Bay and Mad River Indians.
Gibbs110 mentions Wee-yot and Wish-osk as dialects of a general language extending “from Cape Mendocino to Mad River and as far back into the interior as the foot of the first range of mountains,” but does not distinguish the language by a family name.
Gibbs110 mentions Wee-yot and Wish-osk as dialects of a broader language that extends “from Cape Mendocino to Mad River and as far back into the interior as the foothills of the first mountain range,” but does not identify the language by a family name.
Latham considered Weyot and Wishosk to be mere dialects of the same language, i.e., the Weitspek, from which, however, they appeared to him to differ much more than they do from each other. Both Powell and Gatschet have treated the language represented by these dialects as quite distinct from any other, and both have employed the same name.
Latham thought of Weyot and Wishosk as just different dialects of the same language, namely Weitspek, although he believed they varied more from each other than from other languages. Both Powell and Gatschet regarded the language represented by these dialects as entirely separate from any others and both used the same name.
GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION.
The area occupied by the tribes speaking dialects of this language was the coast from a little below the mouth of Eel River to a little north of Mad River, including particularly the country about Humboldt Bay. They also extended up the above-named rivers into the mountain passes.
The area where the tribes spoke dialects of this language stretched from just south of the Eel River's mouth to just north of Mad River, especially around Humboldt Bay. They also reached up those rivers into the mountain passes.
TRIBES.
Patawat, Lower Mad River and Humboldt Bay as far south as Arcata.
Patawat, Lower Mad River, and Humboldt Bay all the way down to Arcata.
Weeyot, mouth of Eel River.
Weeyot, mouth of Eel River.
Wishosk, near mouth of Mad River and north part of Humboldt Bay.
Wishosk, located near the mouth of the Mad River and the northern part of Humboldt Bay.
YAKONAN FAMILY.
> Yakones, Hale in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, 198, 218, 1846 (or Iakon, coast of Oregon). Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 612, 1859.
> Yakones, Hale in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, 198, 218, 1846 (or Iakon, coast of Oregon). Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 612, 1859.
> Iakon, Hale in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, 218, 569, 1846 (or Lower Killamuks). Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 612, 1859.
> Iakon, Hale in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, 218, 569, 1846 (or Lower Killamuks). Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 612, 1859.
> Jacon, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, c, 77, 1848.
> Jacon, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, c, 77, 1848.
> Jakon, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, 17, 1848. Berghaus (1851), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1852. Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853 (language of Lower Killamuks). Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 78, 1856. Latham, Opuscula, 340, 1860.
> Jakon, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, 17, 1848. Berghaus (1851), Phys. Atlas, map 17, 1852. Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853 (language of Lower Killamuks). Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 78, 1856. Latham, Opuscula, 340, 1860.
> Yakon, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 324, 1850. Gatschet, in Mag. Am. Hist., 166, 1877. Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 441, 1877. Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 565, 640, 1882.
> Yakon, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 324, 1850. Gatschet, in Mag. Am. Hist., 166, 1877. Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 441, 1877. Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 565, 640, 1882.
> Yákona, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 256, 1882.
> Yákona, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 256, 1882.
> Southern Killamuks, Hale in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, 218, 569, 1846 (or Yakones). Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, 17, 1848 (after Hale).
> Southern Killamuks, Hale in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, 218, 569, 1846 (or Yakones). Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, 17, 1848 (after Hale).
> Süd Killamuk, Berghaus (1851), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1852.
> Süd Killamuk, Berghaus (1851), Physics. Atlas, map 17, 1852.
> Sainstskla, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 325, 1850 (“south of the Yakon, between the Umkwa and the sea”).
> Sainstskla, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 325, 1850 (“south of the Yakon, between the Umkwa and the sea”).
> Sayúskla, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 257, 1882 (on Lower Umpqua, Sayúskla, and Smith Rivers).
> Sayúskla, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 257, 1882 (on Lower Umpqua, Sayúskla, and Smith Rivers).
> Killiwashat, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 325, 1850 (“mouth of the Umkwa”).
> Killiwashat, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 325, 1850 (“mouth of the Umkwa”).
X Klamath, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 475, 1878 (cited as including Yacons).
X Klamath, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 475, 1878 (cited as including Yacons).
The Yakwina was the leading tribe of this family. It must have been of importance in early days, as it occupied fifty-six villages along Yaquina River, from the site of Elk City down to the ocean. Only a few survive, and they are with the Alsea on the Siletz Reservation, Tillamook County, Oregon. They were classed by mistake with the Tillamook or “Killamucks” by Lewis and Clarke. They are called by Lewis and Clarke111 Youikcones and Youkone.112
The Yakwina was the prominent tribe of this group. It must have been significant in earlier times, as it occupied fifty-six villages along the Yaquina River, from the area of Elk City down to the ocean. Only a few remain, and they are with the Alsea on the Siletz Reservation, Tillamook County, Oregon. They were incorrectly categorized with the Tillamook or “Killamucks” by Lewis and Clarke. They are referred to by Lewis and Clarke111 Youikcones and Youkone.112
The Alsea formerly dwelt in villages along both sides of Alsea River, Oregon, and on the adjacent coast. They are now on the Siletz Reservation, Oregon. Perhaps a few are on the Grande Ronde Reservation, Oregon.
The Alsea used to live in villages on both sides of the Alsea River in Oregon and along the nearby coast. They are now located on the Siletz Reservation in Oregon, and possibly a few are on the Grande Ronde Reservation in Oregon.
The Siuslaw used to inhabit villages on the Siuslaw River, Oregon. There may be a few pure Siuslaw on the Siletz Reservation, but Mr. Dorsey did not see any of them. They are mentioned by Drew,113 who includes them among the “Kat-la-wot-sett” bands. At that time, they were still on the Siuslaw River. The Ku-itc or Lower Umpqua villages were on both sides of the lower part of Umpqua River, Oregon, from its mouth upward for about 30 miles. Above them were the Upper Umpqua villages, of the Athapascan stock. A few members of the Ku-itc still reside on the Siletz Reservation, Oregon.
The Siuslaw used to live in villages along the Siuslaw River in Oregon. There might be a few pure Siuslaw people on the Siletz Reservation, but Mr. Dorsey didn't see any of them. They’re mentioned by Drew,113 who includes them among the “Kat-la-wot-sett” bands. At that time, they were still located on the Siuslaw River. The Ku-itc or Lower Umpqua villages were found on both sides of the lower part of the Umpqua River in Oregon, extending about 30 miles upriver from its mouth. Above them were the Upper Umpqua villages, made up of the Athapascan people. A few members of the Ku-itc still live on the Siletz Reservation in Oregon.
This is a family based by Hale upon a single tribe, numbering six or seven hundred, who live on the coast, north of the Nsietshawus, from whom they differ merely in language. Hale calls the tribe Iakon or Yakones or Southern Killamuks.
This is a family based by Hale on a single tribe, consisting of six or seven hundred people, who live on the coast, north of the Nsietshawus, from whom they only differ in language. Hale refers to the tribe as Iakon or Yakones or Southern Killamuks.
The Sayúsklan language has usually been assumed to be distinct from all others, and the comments of Latham and others all tend in this direction. Mr. Gatschet, as above quoted, finally classed it as a distinct stock, at the same time finding certain strong coincidences with the Yakonan family. Recently Mr. Dorsey has collected extensive vocabularies of the Yakonan, Sayúskla, and Lower Umpqua languages and finds unquestioned evidence of relationship.
The Sayúsklan language has typically been thought to be separate from all others, and the remarks from Latham and others support this view. Mr. Gatschet, as mentioned earlier, eventually categorized it as a distinct group while also noting some strong similarities with the Yakonan family. Recently, Mr. Dorsey has gathered extensive vocabularies of the Yakonan, Sayúskla, and Lower Umpqua languages and discovered clear evidence of a relationship among them.
GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION.
The family consists of four primary divisions or tribes: Yakwina, Alsea, Siuslaw, and Ku-itc or Lower Umpqua. Each one of these comprised many villages, which were stretched along the western part of Oregon on the rivers flowing into the Pacific, from the Yaquina on the north down to and including the Umpqua River.
The family has four main divisions or tribes: Yakwina, Alsea, Siuslaw, and Ku-itc or Lower Umpqua. Each of these included many villages that were spread along the western part of Oregon on the rivers flowing into the Pacific, from the Yaquina River in the north down to and including the Umpqua River.
TRIBES.
Alsea (on Alseya River). Yakwĭ´na. Kuitc. Siuslaw. |
135 Population.—The U.S. Census Bulletin for 1890 mentions thirty-one tribes as resident on the Siletz Reservation with a combined population of 571. How many Yakwina are among this number is not known. The breaking down of tribal distinctions by reason of the extensive intermarriage of the several tribes is given as the reason for the failure to give a census by tribes.
135 Population.—The U.S. Census Bulletin for 1890 reports that there were thirty-one tribes living on the Siletz Reservation, with a total population of 571. It's unclear how many Yakwina are included in this count. The lack of a breakdown of the tribes is attributed to significant intermarriage among the different tribes.
YANAN FAMILY.
= Nó-zi, Powers in Cont. N.A. Eth., III, 275, 1877 (or No-si; mention of tribe; gives numerals and states they are different from any he has found in California).
= Nó-zi, Powers in Cont. N.A. Eth., III, 275, 1877 (or No-si; mention of tribe; provides numerals and says they are different from any he's found in California).
= Noces, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 160, March, 1877 (or Nozes; merely mentioned under Meidoo family).
= Noces, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 160, March, 1877 (or Nozes; just mentioned under Meidoo family).
Derivation: Yana means “people” in the Yanan language.
Derivation: Yana means "people" in the Yanan language.
In 1880 Powell collected a short vocabulary from this tribe, which is chiefly known to the settlers by the name Noje or Nozi. Judged by this vocabulary the language seemed to be distinct from any other. More recently, in 1884, Mr. Curtin visited the remnants of the tribe, consisting of thirty-five individuals, and obtained an extensive collection of words, the study of which seems to confirm the impression of the isolated position of the language as regards other American tongues.
In 1880, Powell gathered a brief vocabulary from this tribe, primarily known to settlers as Noje or Nozi. Based on this vocabulary, the language appeared to be different from any other. More recently, in 1884, Mr. Curtin visited the remaining members of the tribe, which numbered thirty-five people, and collected a large number of words. The study of these words seems to support the idea that the language is isolated from other American languages.
The Nozi seem to have been a small tribe ever since known to Europeans. They have a tradition to the effect that they came to California from the far East. Powers states that they differ markedly in physical traits from all California tribes met by him. At present the Nozi are reduced to two little groups, one at Redding, the other in their original country at Round Mountain, California.
The Nozi have always appeared to be a small tribe to Europeans. They have a tradition that says they came to California from the far East. Powers notes that they look quite different from all the California tribes he encountered. Currently, the Nozi are down to just two small groups: one in Redding and the other in their original homeland at Round Mountain, California.
GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION.
The eastern boundary of the Yanan territory is formed by a range of mountains a little west of Lassen Butte and terminating near Pit River; the northern boundary by a line running from northeast to southwest, passing near the northern side of Round Mountain, 3 miles from Pit River. The western boundary from Redding southward is on an average 10 miles to the east of the Sacramento. North of Redding it averages double that distance or about 20 miles.
The eastern edge of the Yanan area is marked by a mountain range just west of Lassen Butte that ends near Pit River. The northern edge follows a line from northeast to southwest, running close to the north side of Round Mountain, about 3 miles from Pit River. The western boundary from Redding going south is typically 10 miles east of the Sacramento River. North of Redding, this distance generally doubles to around 20 miles.
YUKIAN FAMILY.
= Yuki, Powers in Cont. N.A. Eth., III, 125-138, 1877 (general description of tribe).
= Yuki, Powers in Contemporary North American Ethnology, III, 125-138, 1877 (general description of tribe).
= Yú-ki, Powell in ibid., 483 (vocabs. of Yú-ki, Hūchnpōm, and a fourth unnamed vocabulary).
= Yú-ki, Powell in the same source, 483 (vocabularies of Yú-ki, Hūchnpōm, and a fourth unnamed vocabulary).
= Yuka, Powers in Overland Monthly, IX, 305, Oct., 1872 (same as above). Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 161, 1877 (defines habitat of family; gives Yuka, Ashochemies or Wappos, Shumeias, Tahtoos). Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 435, 1877. Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 566, 1882 (includes Yuka, Tahtoo, Wapo or Ashochemic).
= Yuka, Powers in Overland Monthly, IX, 305, Oct., 1872 (same as above). Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 161, 1877 (defines habitat of family; gives Yuka, Ashochemies or Wappos, Shumeias, Tahtoos). Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 435, 1877. Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 566, 1882 (includes Yuka, Tahtoo, Wapo or Ashochemic).
X Klamath, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 475, 1878 (Yukas of his Klamath belong here).
X Klamath, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 475, 1878 (Yukas of his Klamath belong here).
Derivation: From the Wintun word yuki, meaning “stranger;” secondarily, “bad” or “thieving.”
Derivation: From the Wintun word yuki, meaning “stranger;” additionally, “bad” or “thieving.”
A vocabulary of the Yuki tribe is given by Gibbs in vol. III of Schoolcraft’s Indian Tribes, 1853, but no indication is afforded that the language is of a distinct stock.
A vocabulary of the Yuki tribe is provided by Gibbs in vol. III of Schoolcraft’s Indian Tribes, 1853, but there is no indication that the language comes from a separate language family.
Powell, as above cited, appears to have been the first to separate the language.
Powell, as mentioned earlier, seems to have been the first to separate the language.
GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION.
Round Valley, California, subsequently made a reservation to receive the Yuki and other tribes, was formerly the chief seat of the tribes of the family, but they also extended across the mountains to the coast.
Round Valley, California, later established a reservation to accommodate the Yuki and other tribes. It used to be the main hub for the tribes in that family, but they also spread across the mountains to the coast.
PRINCIPAL TRIBES.
Ashochimi (near Healdsburgh). Chumaya (Middle Eel River). Napa (upper Napa Valley). Tatu (Potter Valley). Yuki (Round Valley, California). |
YUMAN FAMILY.
> Yuma, Turner in Pac. R. R. Rep., III, pt. 3, 55, 94, 101, 1856 (includes Cuchan, Coco-Maricopa, Mojave, Diegeño). Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 86, 1856. Latham, Opuscula, 351, 1860 (as above). Latham in addenda to Opuscula, 392, 1860 (adds Cuchan to the group). Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 420, 1862 (includes Cuchan, Cocomaricopa, Mojave, Dieguno). Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 156, 1877 (mentions only U.S. members of family). Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 460, 479, 1878 (includes Yumas, Maricopas, Cuchans, Mojaves, Yampais, Yavipais, Hualpais). Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 569, 1882.
> Yuma, Turner in Pac. R. R. Rep., III, pt. 3, 55, 94, 101, 1856 (includes Cuchan, Coco-Maricopa, Mojave, Diegeño). Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 86, 1856. Latham, Opuscula, 351, 1860 (as above). Latham in addenda to Opuscula, 392, 1860 (adds Cuchan to the group). Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 420, 1862 (includes Cuchan, Cocomaricopa, Mojave, Dieguno). Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 156, 1877 (mentions only U.S. members of family). Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 460, 479, 1878 (includes Yumas, Maricopas, Cuchans, Mojaves, Yampais, Yavipais, Hualpais). Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 569, 1882.
= Yuma, Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 429, 1877 (habitat and dialects of family). Gatschet in U.S. Geog. Surv. W. 100th M., VII, 413, 414, 1879.
= Yuma, Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 429, 1877 (habitat and dialects of family). Gatschet in U.S. Geog. Surv. W. 100th M., VII, 413, 414, 1879.
> Dieguno, Latham (1853) in Proc. Philolog. Soc. Lond., VI, 75, 1854 (includes mission of San Diego, Dieguno, Cocomaricopas, Cuchañ, Yumas, Amaquaquas.)
> Dieguno, Latham (1853) in Proc. Philolog. Soc. Lond., VI, 75, 1854 (includes mission of San Diego, Dieguno, Cocomaricopas, Cuchañ, Yumas, Amaquaquas.)
> Cochimi, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 87, 1856 (northern part peninsula California). Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 471, 1859 (center of California peninsula). Latham, Opuscula, 353, 1860. Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 423, 1862. Orozco y Berra, Geografía de las Lenguas de México, map, 1864. Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 476, 1878 (head of Gulf to near Loreto).
> Cochimi, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 87, 1856 (northern part of the California peninsula). Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 471, 1859 (center of the California peninsula). Latham, Opuscula, 353, 1860. Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 423, 1862. Orozco y Berra, Geografía de las Lenguas de México, map, 1864. Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 476, 1878 (head of the Gulf to near Loreto).
> Layamon, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 88, 1856 (a dialect of Waikur?). Latham, Opuscula, 353, 1860. Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 423, 1862.
> Layamon, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 88, 1856 (a dialect of Waikur?). Latham, Opuscula, 353, 1860. Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 423, 1862.
> Waikur, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 90, 1856 (several dialects of). Latham, Opuscula, 353, 1860. Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 423, 1862.
> Waikur, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 90, 1856 (several dialects of). Latham, Opuscula, 353, 1860. Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 423, 1862.
> Guaycura, Orozco y Berra, Geografía de las Lenguas de México, map, 1864.
> Guaycura, Orozco y Berra, Geography of the Languages of Mexico, map, 1864.
> Guaicuri, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 476, 1878 (between 26th and 23d parallels).
> Guaicuri, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 476, 1878 (between 26th and 23rd parallels).
> Utshiti, Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 423, 1862 (same as Ushiti).
> Utshiti, Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 423, 1862 (same as Ushiti).
> Pericú, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 88, 1856. Latham, Opuscula, 353, 1860. Orozco y Berra, Geografía de las Lenguas de México, map, 1864.
> Pericú, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 88, 1856. Latham, Opuscula, 353, 1860. Orozco y Berra, Geography of the Languages of Mexico, map, 1864.
> Pericui, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent, and So. Am.), 476, 1878 (from 23° N.L. to Cape S. Lucas and islands).
> Pericui, Keane, App. Stanford’s Comp. (Cent, and So. Am.), 476, 1878 (from 23° N.L. to Cape S. Lucas and islands).
> Seri, Gatschet in Zeitschr. für Ethnologie, XV, 129, 1883, and XVIII, 115, 1886.
> Seri, Gatschet in Journal of Ethnology, XV, 129, 1883, and XVIII, 115, 1886.
Derivation: A Cuchan word signifying “sons of the river” (Whipple).
Derivation: A Cuchan word meaning “sons of the river” (Whipple).
In 1856 Turner adopted Yuma as a family name, and placed under it Cuchan, Coco-Maricopa, Mojave and Diegeno.
In 1856, Turner took on Yuma as a family name and included Cuchan, Coco-Maricopa, Mojave, and Diegeno under it.
Three years previously (1853) Latham114 speaks of the Dieguno language, and discusses with it several others, viz, San Diego, Cocomaricopa, Cuohañ, Yuma, Amaquaqua (Mohave), etc. Though he seems to consider these languages as allied, he gives no indication that he believes them to collectively represent a family, and he made no formal family division. The context is not, however, sufficiently clear to render his position with respect to their exact status as precise as is to be desired, but it is tolerably certain that he did not mean to make Diegueño a family name, for in the volume of the same society for 1856 he includes both the Diegueño and the other above mentioned tribes in the Yuma family, which is here fully set forth. As he makes no allusion to having previously established a family name for the same group of languages, it seems pretty certain that he did not do so, and that the term Diegueño as a family name may be eliminated from consideration. It thus appears that the family name Yuma was proposed by both the above authors during the same year. For, though part 3 of vol. III of Pacific Railroad Reports, in which Turner’s article is published, is dated 1855, it appears from a foot-note (p. 84) that his paper was not handed to Mr. Whipple till January, 1856, the date of title page of volume, and that his proof was going through the press during the month of May, which is the month (May 9) that Latham’s paper was read before the Philological Society. The fact that Latham’s article was not read until May 9 enables us to establish priority of publication in favor of Turner with a reasonable degree of certainty, as doubtless a considerable period elapsed between the presentation of Latham’s paper to the society and its final publication, upon which latter must rest its claim. The Yuma of Turner is therefore adopted as of precise date and of undoubted application. Pimentel makes Yuma a part of Piman stock.
Three years earlier (1853), Latham114 talks about the Dieguno language and compares it with several others, including San Diego, Cocomaricopa, Cuohañ, Yuma, and Amaquaqua (Mohave), among others. While he seems to think these languages are related, he doesn’t suggest that they belong to a larger family, nor does he make any official family classification. However, the context isn’t clear enough to determine his exact view on their status as accurately as we would like. It’s fairly certain that he didn’t intend for Diegueño to be a family name, because in the same society's volume from 1856, he includes both Diegueño and the other tribes mentioned above in the Yuma family, which is fully explained there. Since he doesn’t refer to having previously established a family name for this group of languages, it seems pretty clear that he didn’t do so, and the term Diegueño as a family name can be disregarded. It appears that the family name Yuma was suggested by both authors in the same year. Although part 3 of vol. III of the Pacific Railroad Reports, where Turner’s article is published, is dated 1855, a footnote (p. 84) indicates that his paper wasn't submitted to Mr. Whipple until January 1856, which is also when the title page of that volume was printed, and that his proofs were going through the press during May, specifically on May 9, when Latham's paper was presented to the Philological Society. The fact that Latham’s article wasn't read until May 9 allows us to reasonably establish that Turner published first, as there likely was a significant delay between the submission of Latham’s paper and its eventual publication, which is necessary for any claims. Therefore, Turner's Yuma designation is recognized as accurate and applicable. Pimentel considers Yuma to be part of the Piman stock.
GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION.
The center of distribution of the tribes of this family is generally considered to be the lower Colorado and Gila Valleys. At least this 138 is the region where they attained their highest physical and mental development. With the exception of certain small areas possessed by Shoshonean tribes, Indians of Yuman stock occupied the Colorado River from its mouth as far up as Cataract Creek where dwell the Havasupai. Upon the Gila and its tributaries they extended as far east as the Tonto Basin. From this center they extended west to the Pacific and on the south throughout the peninsula of Lower California. The mission of San Luis Rey in California was, when established, in Yuman territory, and marks the northern limit of the family. More recently and at the present time this locality is in possession of Shoshonean tribes.
The main area where the tribes from this family are found is usually thought to be the lower Colorado and Gila Valleys. This is where they reached their peak in both physical and mental development. Aside from some small regions held by Shoshonean tribes, Yuman Indians lived along the Colorado River from its mouth up to Cataract Creek, where the Havasupai reside. They spread along the Gila River and its tributaries as far east as the Tonto Basin. From this central area, they moved west to the Pacific Ocean and south throughout the Lower California peninsula. When it was established, the mission of San Luis Rey in California was located in Yuman territory and marks the northern boundary of the family. Recently, this area is now inhabited by Shoshonean tribes.
The island of Angel de la Guardia and Tiburon Island were occupied by tribes of the Yuman family, as also was a small section of Mexico lying on the gulf to the north of Guaymas.
The island of Angel de la Guardia and Tiburon Island were inhabited by tribes of the Yuman family, along with a small part of Mexico located on the gulf north of Guaymas.
PRINCIPAL TRIBES.
Cochimi. Cocopa. Cuchan or Yuma proper. Diegueño. Havasupai. |
Maricopa. Mohave. Seri. Waicuru. Walapai. |
Population.—The present population of these tribes, as given in Indian Affairs Report for 1889, and the U.S. Census Bulletin for 1890, is as follows:
Population.—The current population of these tribes, according to the Indian Affairs Report for 1889 and the U.S. Census Bulletin for 1890, is as follows:
Of the Yuma proper there are 997 in California attached to the Mission Agency and 291 at the San Carlos Agency in Arizona.
Of the Yuma tribe, there are 997 in California connected to the Mission Agency and 291 at the San Carlos Agency in Arizona.
Mohave, 640 at the Colorado River Agency in Arizona; 791 under the San Carlos Agency; 400 in Arizona not under an agency.
Mohave, 640 at the Colorado River Agency in Arizona; 791 under the San Carlos Agency; 400 in Arizona not under an agency.
Havasupai, 214 in Cosnino Cañon, Arizona.
Havasupai, 214 in Cosnino Canyon, Arizona.
Walapai, 728 in Arizona, chiefly along the Colorado.
Walapai, 728 in Arizona, mainly along the Colorado.
Diegueño, 555 under the Mission Agency, California.
Diegueño, 555 at the Mission Agency, California.
Maricopa, 315 at the Pima Agency, Arizona.
Maricopa, 315 at the Pima Agency, Arizona.
The population of the Yuman tribes in Mexico and Lower California is unknown.
The population of the Yuman tribes in Mexico and Lower California is unknown.
ZUÑIAN FAMILY.
= Zuñi, Turner in Pac. R. R. Rep., III, pt. 3, 55, 91-93, 1856 (finds no radical affinity between Zuñi and Keres). Buschmann, Neu-Mexico, 254, 266, 276-278, 280-296, 302, 1858 (vocabs. and general references). Keane, App. Stanford’s Com. (Cent. and So. Am.), 479, 1878 (“a stock language”). Powell in Rocky Mountain Presbyterian, Nov., 1878 (includes Zuñi, Las Nutrias, Ojo de Pescado). Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 260, 1882.
= Zuñi, Turner in Pac. R. R. Rep., III, pt. 3, 55, 91-93, 1856 (finds no strong connection between Zuñi and Keres). Buschmann, Neu-Mexico, 254, 266, 276-278, 280-296, 302, 1858 (vocabularies and general references). Keane, App. Stanford’s Com. (Cent. and So. Am.), 479, 1878 (“a stock language”). Powell in Rocky Mountain Presbyterian, Nov., 1878 (includes Zuñi, Las Nutrias, Ojo de Pescado). Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 260, 1882.
= Zuñian, Powell in Am. Nat., 604, August, 1880.
= Zuñian, Powell in Am. Nat., 604, August, 1880.
Derivation: From the Cochití term Suinyi, said to mean “the people of the long nails,” referring to the surgeons of Zuñi who always wear some of their nails very long (Cushing).
Derivation: From the Cochití term Suinyi, which means “the people of the long nails,” referring to the surgeons of Zuñi who always wear some of their nails very long (Cushing).
The small amount of linguistic material accessible to the earlier writers accounts for the little done in the way of classifying the Pueblo languages. Latham possessed vocabularies of the Moqui, Zuñi, A´coma or Laguna, Jemez, Tesuque, and Taos or Picuri. The affinity of the Tusayan (Moqui) tongue with the Comanche and other Shoshonean languages early attracted attention, and Latham pointed it out with some particularity. With the other Pueblo languages he does little, and attempts no classification into stocks.
The limited linguistic resources available to early writers explain why there was so little progress in classifying the Pueblo languages. Latham had vocabularies for the Moqui, Zuñi, Acoma or Laguna, Jemez, Tesuque, and Taos or Picuri. The similarity of the Tusayan (Moqui) language to Comanche and other Shoshonean languages caught early interest, and Latham highlighted this in detail. However, he did little with the other Pueblo languages and didn't try to classify them into language families.
GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION.
The Zuñi occupy but a single permanent pueblo, on the Zuñi River, western New Mexico. Recently, however, the summer villages of Tâiakwin, Heshotatsína, and K’iapkwainakwin have been occupied by a few families during the entire year.
The Zuñi live in just one permanent pueblo, located on the Zuñi River in western New Mexico. Recently, though, a few families have been staying year-round in the summer villages of Tâiakwin, Heshotatsína, and K’iapkwainakwin.
Population.—The present population is 1,613.
Population: 1,613.
CONCLUDING REMARKS.
The task involved in the foregoing classification has been accomplished by intermittent labors extending through more than twenty years of time. Many thousand printed vocabularies, embracing numerous larger lexic and grammatic works, have been studied and compared. In addition to the printed material, a very large body of manuscript matter has been used, which is now in the archives of the Bureau of Ethnology, and which, it is hoped, will ultimately be published. The author does not desire that his work shall be considered final, but rather as initiatory and tentative. The task of studying many hundreds of languages and deriving therefrom ultimate conclusions as contributions to the science of philology is one of great magnitude, and in its accomplishment an army of scholars must be employed. The wealth of this promised harvest appeals strongly to the scholars of America for systematic and patient labor. The languages are many and greatly diverse in their characteristics, in grammatic as well as in lexic elements. The author believes it is safe to affirm that the philosophy of language is some time to be greatly enriched from this source. From the materials which have been and may be gathered in this field the evolution of language can be studied from an early form, wherein words are usually not parts of speech, to a form where the parts of speech are somewhat differentiated; and where the growth of gender, number, and case systems, together with the development of tense and mode systems can be observed. The evolution of mind in the endeavor to express thought, by coining, combining, and contracting words and by organizing logical sentences through the development of parts of speech and 140 their syntactic arrangement, is abundantly illustrated. The languages are very unequally developed in their several parts. Low gender systems appear with high tense systems, highly evolved case systems with slightly developed mode systems; and there is scarcely any one of these languages, so far as they have been studied, which does not exhibit archaic devices in its grammar.
The task involved in the above classification has been completed through intermittent work spanning over twenty years. Many thousands of printed vocabularies, including numerous larger lexicons and grammatical works, have been analyzed and compared. Alongside the printed materials, a vast amount of manuscript material has been utilized, which is now stored in the archives of the Bureau of Ethnology, and it is hoped that it will eventually be published. The author does not want this work to be viewed as final, but rather as a starting point and a preliminary effort. The task of studying hundreds of languages and drawing definitive conclusions as contributions to the field of philology is significant and requires the collaboration of many scholars. The promise of this rich discovery strongly calls for systematic and dedicated efforts from scholars in America. The languages are numerous and vary greatly in their characteristics, both grammatically and lexically. The author believes it is reasonable to state that the philosophy of language will eventually be greatly enriched from these findings. From the materials gathered and that may be collected in this area, the evolution of language can be examined from a primitive form, where words usually aren’t parts of speech, to a form where the parts of speech are somewhat distinct; and where the development of gender, number, and case systems, along with the evolution of tense and mood systems, can be observed. The evolution of thought as it seeks to express ideas, through the creation, combination, and contraction of words, and by organizing logical sentences through the development of parts of speech and their syntactic arrangement, is well illustrated. The languages are very unevenly developed in their various elements. Some languages have simple gender systems paired with advanced tense systems, while some have highly developed case systems with only slightly developed mood systems; and almost none of these languages, as far as they have been studied, is without archaic features in its grammar.
The author has delayed the present publication somewhat, expecting to supplement it with another paper on the characteristics of those languages which have been most fully recorded, but such supplementary paper has already grown too large for this place and is yet unfinished, while the necessity for speedy publication of the present results seems to be imperative. The needs of the Bureau of Ethnology, in directing the work of the linguists employed in it, and especially in securing and organizing the labor of a large body of collaborators throughout the country, call for this publication at the present time.
The author has postponed this publication a bit, hoping to add another paper on the features of the languages that have been most thoroughly documented. However, that supplementary paper has become too lengthy for this space and is still incomplete, while the urgent need to publish the current results has become crucial. The Bureau of Ethnology's requirements, in managing the work of the linguists they employ and particularly in coordinating the efforts of a large group of collaborators across the country, necessitate this publication now.
In arranging the scheme of linguistic families the author has proceeded very conservatively. Again and again languages have been thrown together as constituting one family and afterwards have been separated, while other languages at first deemed unrelated have ultimately been combined in one stock. Notwithstanding all this care, there remain a number of doubtful cases. For example, Buschmann has thrown the Shoshonean and Nahuatlan families into one. Now the Shoshonean languages are those best known to the author, and with some of them he has a tolerable speaking acquaintance. The evidence brought forward by Buschmann and others seems to be doubtful. A part is derived from jargon words, another part from adventitious similarities, while some facts seem to give warrant to the conclusion that they should be considered as one stock, but the author prefers, under the present state of knowledge, to hold them apart and await further evidence, being inclined to the opinion that the peoples speaking these languages have borrowed some part of their vocabularies from one another.
In organizing the classification of language families, the author has taken a very cautious approach. Time and again, languages have been grouped together as part of one family only to be later separated, while other languages initially thought to be unrelated have eventually been classified into a single family. Despite all this careful work, there are still several ambiguous cases. For instance, Buschmann has combined the Shoshonean and Nahuatlan families. The Shoshonean languages are among the ones the author knows best, and he has a decent conversational familiarity with some of them. The evidence provided by Buschmann and others seems questionable. Some of it comes from jargon words, some from coincidental similarities, and while some facts suggest they might belong to the same family, the author prefers, given the current state of knowledge, to keep them separate and wait for more evidence, leaning towards the view that the peoples speaking these languages have borrowed some of their vocabulary from one another.
After considering the subject with such materials as are on hand, this general conclusion has been reached: That borrowed materials exist in all the languages; and that some of these borrowed materials can be traced to original sources, while the larger part of such acquisitions can not be thus relegated to known families. In fact, it is believed that the existing languages, great in number though they are, give evidence of a more primitive condition, when a far greater number were spoken. When there are two or more languages of the same stock, it appears that this differentiation into diverse tongues is due mainly to the absorption of other material, and that thus the multiplication of dialects and languages of the same group furnishes evidence that at some prior time there existed other languages which are now lost except as they are partially preserved in the divergent elements of the group. The conclusion which has been reached, therefore, does 141 not accord with the hypothesis upon which the investigation began, namely, that common elements would be discovered in all these languages, for the longer the study has proceeded the more clear it has been made to appear that the grand process of linguistic development among the tribes of North America has been toward unification rather than toward multiplication, that is, that the multiplied languages of the same stock owe their origin very largely to absorbed languages that are lost. The data upon which this conclusion has been reached can not here be set forth, but the hope is entertained that the facts already collected may ultimately be marshaled in such a manner that philologists will be able to weigh the evidence and estimate it for what it may be worth.
After looking into the topic with the available materials, we’ve reached this overall conclusion: borrowed elements exist in all languages, and while some of these can be traced back to original sources, most can't be linked to known families. In fact, it’s believed that the many existing languages show signs of a more primitive state when many more were spoken. When there are two or more languages from the same family, it seems that their development into different languages mainly comes from the incorporation of other elements, suggesting that the increase in dialects and languages within the same group points to the existence of other, now lost languages that are only partially preserved in the varied components of the group. Therefore, the conclusion we’ve reached does not support the hypothesis with which we began this investigation, which suggested that we would find common elements across these languages. Instead, the longer we study, the clearer it becomes that the trend in linguistic development among North American tribes has been toward unification rather than diversification; that is, the numerous languages from the same family largely originate from absorbed, now lost languages. The data supporting this conclusion cannot be detailed here, but we hope that the facts we’ve gathered can eventually be organized in a way that allows linguists to assess the evidence and determine its significance. 141
The opinion that the differentiation of languages within a single stock is mainly due to the absorption of materials from other stocks, often to the extinguishment of the latter, has grown from year to year as the investigation has proceeded. Wherever the material has been sufficient to warrant a conclusion on this subject, no language has been found to be simple in its origin, but every language has been found to be composed of diverse elements. The processes of borrowing known in historic times are those which have been at work in prehistoric times, and it is not probable that any simple language derived from some single pristine group of roots can be discovered.
The view that the differences between languages within the same family mainly come from borrowing elements from other families, often leading to the disappearance of those others, has gained support over the years as research has continued. Whenever there’s enough evidence to draw a conclusion on this topic, no language has been found to have a simple origin; instead, every language has been shown to be made up of various components. The processes of borrowing observed in historical times are the same ones that have occurred in prehistoric times, and it’s unlikely that any simple language derived from a single, original group of roots can be found.
There is an opinion current that the lower languages change with great rapidity, and that, by reason of this, dialects and languages of the same stock are speedily differentiated. This widely spread opinion does not find warrant in the facts discovered in the course of this research. The author has everywhere been impressed with the fact that savage tongues are singularly persistent, and that a language which is dependent for its existence upon oral tradition is not easily modified. The same words in the same form are repeated from generation to generation, so that lexic and grammatic elements have a life that changes very slowly. This is especially true where the habitat of the tribe is unchanged. Migration introduces a potent agency of mutation, but a new environment impresses its characteristics upon a language more by a change in the semantic content or meaning of words than by change in their forms. There is another agency of change of profound influence, namely, association with other tongues. When peoples are absorbed by peaceful or militant agencies new materials are brought into their language, and the affiliation of such matter seems to be the chief factor in the differentiation of languages within the same stock. In the presence of opinions that have slowly grown in this direction, the author is inclined to think that some of the groups herein recognized as families will ultimately be divided, as the common materials of such languages, when they are more thoroughly studied, will be seen to have been borrowed.
There’s a prevailing belief that lower languages change rapidly, causing dialects and languages of the same origin to quickly evolve. However, this widely held belief isn’t supported by the findings from this research. The author has been consistently struck by the fact that primitive languages are surprisingly stable, and that a language reliant on oral tradition doesn’t change easily. The same words are passed down unchanged from one generation to the next, resulting in lexicon and grammar that evolve very slowly. This is especially true when a tribe’s environment remains constant. Migration can significantly alter a language, but a new setting tends to influence a language more through changes in the semantic content or meanings of words than through changes in their forms. Another significant factor in language change is contact with other languages. When groups are merged through peaceful or forceful means, new elements are introduced into their language, and the incorporation of these elements seems to be the main factor in the differentiation of languages within the same family. Given the opinions that have gradually developed in this area, the author suspects that some of the groups identified here as families will eventually be split apart, as a closer examination of their common elements will reveal that they have been borrowed.
142 In the studies which have been made as preliminary to this paper, I have had great assistance from Mr. James C. Pilling and Mr. Henry W. Henshaw. Mr. Pilling began by preparing a list of papers used by me, but his work has developed until it assumes the proportions of a great bibliographic research, and already he has published five bibliographies, amounting in all to about 1,200 pages. He is publishing this bibliographic material by linguistic families, as classified by myself in this paper. Scholars in this field of research will find their labors greatly abridged by the work of Mr. Pilling. Mr. Henshaw began the preparation of the list of tribes, but his work also has developed into an elaborate system of research into the synonymy of the North American tribes, and when his work is published it will constitute a great and valuable contribution to the subject. The present paper is but a preface to the works of Mr. Pilling and Mr. Henshaw, and would have been published in form as such had not their publications assumed such proportions as to preclude it. And finally, it is needful to say that I could not have found the time to make this classification, imperfect as it is, except with the aid of the great labors of the gentlemen mentioned, for they have gathered the literature and brought it ready to my hand. For the classification itself, however, I am wholly responsible.
142 In the studies conducted as a preliminary to this paper, I received significant help from Mr. James C. Pilling and Mr. Henry W. Henshaw. Mr. Pilling started by creating a list of papers I used, but his work has evolved into an extensive bibliographic research project, and he has already published five bibliographies totaling about 1,200 pages. He is organizing this bibliographic material by linguistic families, as I have classified them in this paper. Researchers in this field will find their work greatly simplified by Mr. Pilling's contributions. Mr. Henshaw began compiling a list of tribes, but his efforts have also turned into a comprehensive study of the synonyms for North American tribes, and when published, it will be a significant and valuable resource on the topic. This paper serves merely as an introduction to the works of Mr. Pilling and Mr. Henshaw and would have been published in that form, were it not for their publications becoming so extensive. Lastly, I must emphasize that I wouldn’t have been able to complete this classification, however imperfect, without the extensive work of these gentlemen, as they gathered the literature and made it readily available to me. However, I take full responsibility for the classification itself.
I am also indebted to Mr. Albert S. Gatschet and Mr. J. Owen Dorsey for the preparation of many comparative lists necessary to my work.
I also owe a big thanks to Mr. Albert S. Gatschet and Mr. J. Owen Dorsey for preparing many comparative lists that were essential to my work.
The task of preparing the map accompanying this paper was greatly facilitated by the previously published map of Gallatin. I am especially indebted to Col. Garrick Mallery for work done in the early part of its preparation in this form. I have also received assistance from Messrs. Gatschet, Dorsey, Mooney and Curtin. The final form which it has taken is largely due to the labors of Mr. Henshaw, who has gathered many important facts relating to the habitat of North American tribes while preparing a synonymy of tribal names.
The task of creating the map that goes with this paper was made much easier by the previously published map of Gallatin. I'm especially grateful to Col. Garrick Mallery for his work in the early stages of its preparation. I also got help from Messrs. Gatschet, Dorsey, Mooney, and Curtin. The final version owes a lot to Mr. Henshaw, who collected many important facts about the habitats of North American tribes while working on a list of tribal names.
FOOTNOTES
2. Adventures on the Columbia River, 1849, p. 117.
2. Adventures on the Columbia River, 1849, p. 117.
3. Report on the Queen Charlotte Islands, 1878, p. 117.
3. Report on the Queen Charlotte Islands, 1878, p. 117.
5. Powers, Cont. N.A. Eth. 1877, vol. 3, p. 109: Dawson, Queen Charlotte Islands, 1880, p. 117.
5. Powers, Cont. N.A. Eth. 1877, vol. 3, p. 109: Dawson, Queen Charlotte Islands, 1880, p. 117.
6. Travels of Lewis and Clarke, London, 1809, p. 189.
6. Travels of Lewis and Clarke, London, 1809, p. 189.
7. Dall, Map Alaska, 1877.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Dall, Map of Alaska, 1877.
8. Fide Nelson in Dall’s address, Am. Assoc. Adv. Sci., 1885, p. 13.
8. Fide Nelson in Dall’s address, Am. Assoc. Adv. Sci., 1885, p. 13.
9. Cruise of the Corwin, 1887.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Cruise of the *Corwin*, 1887.
12. Gatschet and Dorsey, MS., 1883-’84.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Gatschet and Dorsey, MS., 1883-84.
13. Dorsey, MS., map, 1884, B.E.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Dorsey, MS, map, 1884, B.E.
14. Hamilton, MS., Haynarger Vocab., B.E.; Powers, Contr. N.A. Ethn., 1877, vol. 3, p. 65.
14. Hamilton, MS., Haynarger Vocab., B.E.; Powers, Contr. N.A. Ethn., 1877, vol. 3, p. 65.
15. Dorsey, MS., map, 1884, B.E.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Dorsey, MS, map, 1884, B.E.
16. Powers, Contr. N.A. Ethn., 1877, vol. 3, pp. 72, 73.
16. Powers, Contr. N.A. Ethn., 1877, vol. 3, pp. 72, 73.
17. Powers, Contr. N.A. Ethn., 1877, vol. 3, p. 114.
17. Powers, Contr. N.A. Ethn., 1877, vol. 3, p. 114.
18. Powers, Contr. N.A. Ethn., 1877, vol. 3, p. 122.
18. Powers, Contr. N.A. Ethn., 1877, vol. 3, p. 122.
19. Cortez in Pac. R. R. Rep., 1856, vol. 3, pt. 3, pp. 118, 119.
19. Cortez in Pac. R. R. Rep., 1856, vol. 3, pt. 3, pp. 118, 119.
20. Bartlett, Pers. Narr., 1854; Orozco y Berra, Geog., 1864.
20. Bartlett, Personal Narrative, 1854; Orozco y Berra, Geography, 1864.
22. Dorsey in Am. Naturalist, March, 1886, p. 215.
22. Dorsey in The American Naturalist, March 1886, p. 215.
23. Dorsey, Omaha map of Nebraska.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Dorsey, Omaha map, Nebraska.
25. Carte de la Louisiane, 1718.
Map of Louisiana, 1718.
26. In 1719, fide Margry, VI, 289, “the Ousita village is on the southwest branch of the Arkansas River.”
26. In 1719, fide Margry, VI, 289, “the Ousita village is on the southwest branch of the Arkansas River.”
27. 1805, in Lewis and Clarke, Discov., 1806, p. 66.
27. 1805, in Lewis and Clarke, Discov., 1806, p. 66.
28. Second Mass, Hist. Coll., vol. 2, 1814, p. 23.
28. Second Mass, Hist. Coll., vol. 2, 1814, p. 23.
29. 1690, in French, Hist. Coll. La., vol. 1, p. 72.
29. 1690, in French, Hist. Coll. La., vol. 1, p. 72.
31. Dr. Boas was informed in 1889, by a surviving Chimakum woman and several Clallam, that the tribe was confined to the peninsula between Hood’s Canal and Port Townsend.
31. Dr. Boas was told in 1889 by a surviving Chimakum woman and several Clallam that the tribe was limited to the peninsula between Hood’s Canal and Port Townsend.
32. B.A.A.S. Fifth Rep. of Committee on NW. Tribes of Canada. Newcastle-upon-Tyne meeting, 1889, pp. 8-9.
32. B.A.A.S. Fifth Report of Committee on Northwest Tribes of Canada. Newcastle-upon-Tyne meeting, 1889, pp. 8-9.
33. Geografía de las Lenguas de México, map, 1864.
33. Geography of the Languages of Mexico, map, 1864.
36. Dobbs (Arthur). An account of the Countries adjoining to Hudson’s Bay. London, 1744.
36. Dobbs (Arthur). A report on the countries surrounding Hudson’s Bay. London, 1744.
38. Relacion del viage hecho por las Goletas Sutil y Mexicana en el año de 1792. Madrid, 1802, p. 172.
38. Account of the journey made by the Schooners Sutil and Mexicana in the year 1792. Madrid, 1802, p. 172.
40. American Anthropologist, 1888, vol. 1, p. 188.
40. American Anthropologist, 1888, vol. 1, p. 188.
41. New Views of the Origin of the Tribes and Nations of America. Phila., 1798.
41. New Perspectives on the Origins of the Tribes and Nations of America. Philadelphia, 1798.
45. Howe in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 1854, vol. 4, p. 163.
45. Howe in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 1854, vol. 4, p. 163.
47. Howe in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 1854, vol. 4, pp. 155-159.
47. Howe in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 1854, vol. 4, pp. 155-159.
49. Sir William Johnson in Parkman’s Conspiracy of Pontiac, app.
49. Sir William Johnson in Parkman’s Conspiracy of Pontiac, app.
50. Bancroft, Hist. U.S.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Bancroft, History of the U.S.
51. Ramsey, Annals of Tennessee, 1853.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Ramsey, Annals of Tennessee, 1853.
52. Ramsey, Annals of Tennessee, 1853.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Ramsey, Annals of Tennessee, 1853.
53. Blount (1792) in Am. State Papers, 1832, vol. 4, p. 336.
53. Blount (1792) in Am. State Papers, 1832, vol. 4, p. 336.
54. Schoolcraft, Notes on Iroquois, 1847.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Schoolcraft, Notes on Iroquois, 1847.
55. Bancroft, Hist. U.S.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Bancroft, History of the U.S.
57. Summer pueblos only.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Summer villages only.
58. Includes Acomita and Pueblito.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Includes Acomita and Pueblito.
59. Includes Hasatch, Paguate, Punyeestye, Punyekia, Pusityitcho, Seemunah, Wapuchuseamma, and Ziamma.
59. Includes Hasatch, Paguate, Punyeestye, Punyekia, Pusityitcho, Seemunah, Wapuchuseamma, and Ziamma.
60. Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., 1836, vol. II, p. 133.
60. Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., 1836, vol. II, p. 133.
62. Pike, Exp. to sources of the Mississippi, App., 1810, pt. 3, p. 9.
62. Pike, Exploration of the Sources of the Mississippi, Appendix, 1810, part 3, p. 9.
63. Annual Report of the Geological Survey of Canada, 1887.
63. Annual Report of the Geological Survey of Canada, 1887.
64. Petroff, Report on the Population, Industries, and Resources of Alaska, 1884, p. 33.
64. Petroff, Report on the Population, Industries, and Resources of Alaska, 1884, p. 33.
69. On p. 119, Archæologia Americana.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ On p. 119, American Archaeology.
70. Gatschet, Creek Mig. Legend, 1884, vol. 1, p. 62.
70. Gatschet, Creek Mig. Legend, 1884, vol. 1, p. 62.
72. D. G. Brinton in Am. Antiquarian, March, 1885, pp. 109-114.
72. D. G. Brinton in American Antiquarian, March 1885, pp. 109-114.
73. U.S. Expl. Expd., 1846, vol. 6, pp. 199, 218.
73. U.S. Exploration Expedition, 1846, vol. 6, pp. 199, 218.
75. Buschmann, Die Pima-Sprache und die Sprache der Koloschen, pp. 321-432.
75. Buschmann, The Pima Language and the Language of the Koloshans, pp. 321-432.
76. According to the U.S. Census Bulletin for 1890.
76. According to the U.S. Census Bulletin from 1890.
77. U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, p. 631.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, p. 631.
79. Allen ed., Philadelphia, 1814, vol. 1, p. 418.
79. Allen ed., Philadelphia, 1814, vol. 1, p. 418.
81. Stevens in Pac. R. R. Rep., 1855, vol. 1, p. 329.
81. Stevens in Pac. R. R. Rep., 1855, vol. 1, p. 329.
82. Lewis and Clarke, Allen ed., 1814, vol. 1, p. 34.
82. Lewis and Clarke, Allen ed., 1814, vol. 1, p. 34.
83. Pike, Expl. to sources of the Miss., app. pt. 3, 16, 1810.
83. Pike, Exploration to sources of the Mississippi, appendix part 3, page 16, 1810.
85. Powers in Cont. N.A. Eth., 1877, vol. 3, p. 369.
85. Powers in Contemporary North American Ethnology, 1877, vol. 3, p. 369.
87. Marquette’s Autograph Map.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Marquette’s Signature Map.
89. See Cheyenne treaty, in Indian Treaties, 1873, pp. 124, 5481-5489.
89. See Cheyenne treaty, in Indian Treaties, 1873, pp. 124, 5481-5489.
90. Lewis and Clarke, Trav., Lond., 1807, p. 25. Lewis and Clarke, Expl., 1874, vol. 2, p. 390. A. L. Riggs, MS. letter to Dorsey, 1876 or 1877. Dorsey, Ponka tradition: “The Black Hills belong to the Crows.” That the Dakotas were not there till this century see Corbusier’s Dakota Winter Counts, in 4th Rept. Bur. Eth., p. 130, where it is also said that the Crow were the original owners of the Black Hills.
90. Lewis and Clarke, Travels, London, 1807, p. 25. Lewis and Clarke, Exploration, 1874, vol. 2, p. 390. A. L. Riggs, manuscript letter to Dorsey, 1876 or 1877. Dorsey, Ponka tradition: “The Black Hills belong to the Crows.” That the Dakotas weren't there until this century is noted in Corbusier’s Dakota Winter Counts, in 4th Report, Bureau of Ethnology, p. 130, where it is also mentioned that the Crows were the original owners of the Black Hills.
92. Batts in Doc. Col. Hist. N.Y., 1853, vol. 3, p. 194. Harrison, MS. letter to Dorsey, 1886.
92. Batts in Doc. Col. Hist. N.Y., 1853, vol. 3, p. 194. Harrison, MS. letter to Dorsey, 1886.
94. Lawson, Hist. Carolina, 1714; reprint of 1860, p. 384.
94. Lawson, Hist. Carolina, 1714; reprint of 1860, p. 384.
97. Schoolcraft, Indian Tribes, 1855, vol. 5, p. 689.
97. Schoolcraft, Indian Tribes, 1855, vol. 5, p. 689.
98. President’s message, February 19, 1806.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ President’s message, February 19, 1806.
100. Discovery, etc., of Kentucky, 1793, II, 84-7.
100. Discovery, etc., of Kentucky, 1793, II, 84-7.
102. U.S. Ind. Aff., 1889.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ U.S. Ind. Aff., 1889.
103. Archæologia Americana, II, p. 15.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Archeology America, II, p. 15.
106. Savage Life, 312.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Savage Life, 312.
107. U.S. Census Bulletin for 1890.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ U.S. Census Bulletin 1890.
110. Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 1853, vol. 3, p. 422.
110. Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 1853, vol. 3, p. 422.
112. Ibid., p. 118.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source, p. 118.
Some browsers may not display marginal page numbers correctly. If an Index link appears to take you to the wrong page, the link is right and the visible page number is wrong.
Some browsers might not show marginal page numbers correctly. If an Index link seems to lead you to the wrong page, the link is accurate, and the page number shown is incorrect.
INDEX
A. | |
Abnaki, population | 48 |
Achastlians, Lamanon’s vocabulary of the Achastlians, Lamanon's vocabulary of the |
75 |
Acoma, a Keresan dialect | 83 |
population | 83 |
Adair, James, quoted on Choctaw villages Adair, James, quoted on Choctaw villages |
40 |
Adaizan family | 45-48 |
Adaizan and Caddoan languages compared | 46 |
Adam, Lucien, on the Taensa language | 96 |
Agriculture, effect of, on Indian population Agriculture's impact on the Indian population |
38 |
region to which limited | 41 |
extent of practice of, by Indian tribes extent of practice of, by Indian tribes |
42 |
Aht division of Wakashan family | 129, 130 |
Ahtena tribe of Copper River | 53 |
population | 55 |
Ai-yan, population | 55 |
Akansa, or Quapaw tribe | 113 |
Akoklako, or Lower Cootenai | 85 |
Aleutian Islanders belong to Eskimauan family Aleutian Islanders are part of the Eskimauan family. |
73 |
population | 75 |
Algonquian family | 47-51 |
list of tribes | 48 |
population | 48 |
habitat of certain western tribes of | 113 |
Alibamu, habitat and population | 95 |
Alsea, habitat | 134 |
Al-ta-tin, population | 55 |
Angel de la Guardia Island, occupied by Yuman tribes Angel de la Guardia Island, inhabited by Yuman tribes |
138 |
Apache, habitat | 54 |
population | 56 |
Apalaches, supposed by Gallatin to be the Yuchi Apalaches, thought by Gallatin to be the Yuchi |
126 |
Apalachi tribe | 95 |
Arapaho, habitat | 48, 109 |
population | 48 |
Arikara, habitat | 60 |
population | 62 |
Assinaboin, habitat | 115 |
population | 117 |
Atfalati, population | 82 |
Athapascan family | 51-56 |
Atnah tribe, considered distinct from Salish by Gallatin Atnah tribe, seen as separate from Salish by Gallatin |
103 |
Attacapan family | 56-57 |
Attakapa language reputed to be spoken by the Karankawa Attakapa language is said to have been spoken by the Karankawa. |
82 |
Auk, population | 87 |
B. | |
Baffin Land, Eskimo population | 75 |
Bancroft, George, linguistic literature Bancroft, George, language literature |
13 |
cited on Cherokee habitat | 78, 79 |
Bancroft, Hubert H., linguistic literature Bancroft, Hubert H., language literature |
24 |
Bandelier, A. F., on the Keres | 83 |
Bannock, former habitat | 108 |
population | 110 |
Bartlett, John R., cited on Lipan and Apache habitat Bartlett, John R., referenced on Lipan and Apache living areas |
54 |
the Pima described by | 98 |
Barton, B. S., comparison of Iroquois and Cheroki Barton, B. S., comparison of Iroquois and Cherokee |
77 |
Batts on Tutelo habitat in 1671 | 114 |
Bellacoola, population | 105, 131 |
Bellomont, Earl of, cited on the Tutelo Bellomont, Earl of, referenced on the Tutelo |
114 |
Beothukan family | 57-58 |
Berghaus, Heinrich, linguistic literature Berghaus, Heinrich, language studies |
16 |
Bessels, Emil, acknowledgments | 73 |
Biloxi, a Siouan tribe | 112 |
early habitat | 114 |
present habitat | 116 |
population | 118 |
Blount, on Cherokee and Chickasaw habitat Blount, on Cherokee and Chickasaw land |
79 |
Boas, Franz, cited on Chimakum habitat | 62 |
on population of Chimmesyan tribes | 64 |
on the middle group of Eskimo | 73 |
on population of Baffin Land Eskimo | 75 |
Salishan researches | 104 |
Haida researches | 120 |
Wakashan researches | 129 |
on the habitat of the Haeltzuk | 130 |
Boundaries of Indian tribal lands, difficulty of fixing Boundaries of Indian tribal lands, difficulty in determining |
43-44 |
Bourgemont on the habitat of the Comanche Bourgemont on the Comanche's territory |
109 |
Brinton, D. G., cited on Haumonté’s Taensa grammar Brinton, D. G., referenced in Haumonté’s Taensa grammar |
96 |
cited on relations of the Pima language cited on the relationships of the Pima language |
99 |
Buschmann, Johann C. E., linguistic literature Buschmann, Johann C. E., linguistic literature |
18, 19 |
on the Kiowa language | 84 |
on the Pima language | 99 |
on Shoshonean families | 109 |
regards Shoshonean and Nahuatlan families as one regards Shoshonean and Nahuatlan families as one |
140 |
C. | |
Cabeça de Vaca, mention of Atayos by | 46 |
Caddoan and Adaizan languages compared | 46 |
Caddoan family | 58-62 |
Caddoan. See Southern Caddoan. | |
Calapooya, population | 82 |
California, aboriginal game laws in | 42 |
Calispel population | 105 |
“Carankouas,” a part of Attacapan family “Carankouas,” part of the Attacapan family |
57 |
Carib, affinities of Timuquana with | 123 |
Carmel language of Mofras | 102 |
Cartier, Jacques, aborigines met by | 58, 77-78 |
Catawba, habitat | 112, 114, 116 |
population | 118 |
Cathlascon tribes, Scouler on | 81 |
Caughnawaga, population | 80 |
Cayuga, population | 80 |
Cayuse, habitat and population | 127, 128 |
Central Eskimo, population | 75 |
Champlain, S. de, cited | 78 |
Charlevoix on the derivation of “Iroquois” Charlevoix on the origin of "Iroquois" |
77 |
Chehalis, population | 105 |
Chemehuevi, habitat and population | 110 |
Cherokees, habitat and population | 78-80 |
Cheyenne tribe, habitat | 48, 109 |
population | 49 |
treaty cited | 114 |
Chicasa, population | 95 |
join the Na’htchi | 96 |
Chilcat, population | 87 |
Chillúla tribe | 132 |
Chimakuan family | 62, 63 |
Chimakum, habitat and population | 62 |
Chimarikan family | 63 |
Chimmesyan family | 63-65 |
Chinookan family | 65-86 |
Chippewyan, population | 55 |
Chitimacuan family, possibly allied to the Attacapan Chitimacuan family, possibly connected to the Attacapan |
57 |
Chitimachan family | 66-67 |
Choctaw Muskhogee family of Gallatin | 94 |
Choctaw, population | 95 |
Choctaw towns described by Adair | 40 |
Chocuyem, a Moquelumnan dialect | 92 |
Cholovone division of the Mariposan | 90 |
Chopunnish, population | 107 |
Chowanoc, perhaps a Tuscarora tribe | 79 |
Chukchi of Asia | 74 |
Chumashan family | 67, 68 |
Chumashan languages, Salinan languages held to be dialects of Chumashan languages, Salinan languages considered dialects of |
101 |
Clackama, population | 66 |
Clallam language distinct from Chimakum Clallam language different from Chimakum |
62 |
Clallam, population | 105 |
Classification of linguistic families, rules for Classification of language families, guidelines for |
8, 12 |
Classification of Indian languages, literature relating to Classification of Indian languages, literature relating to |
12-25 |
Clavering, Captain, Greenland Eskimo, researches of Clavering, Captain, Greenland Eskimo, research of |
72 |
Coahuiltecan family | 68, 69 |
Cochitemi, a Keresan dialect | 83 |
Cochiti, population of | 83 |
Coconoon tribe | 90 |
Coeur d’Alene tribe, population of | 105 |
Cofitachiqui, a supposed Yuchi town | 126 |
Cognation of languages | 11, 12 |
Columbia River, improvidence of tribes on Columbia River, carelessness of tribes on |
37, 38 |
Colville tribe, population | 105 |
Comanche, association of the Kiowa with Comanche, association of the Kiowa with |
84 |
habitat | 109 |
population | 110 |
Comecrudo, vocabulary of, collected by Gatschet Comecrudo, vocabulary of, collected by Gatschet |
68 |
Communism among North American Indians | 34, 35 |
Conestoga, former habitat of the | 78 |
Cook, Capt. James, names Waukash tribe | 129 |
Cookkoo-oose tribe of Lewis and Clarke | 89 |
Cootenai tribe | 85 |
Copehan family | 69-70 |
Corbusier, Wm. H., on Crow occupancy of Black Hills Corbusier, Wm. H., on the Crow living in the Black Hills |
114 |
Corn, large quantities of, raised by certain tribes Corn, large amounts of, grown by certain tribes |
41 |
Cortez, José, cited | 54 |
Costano dialects, Latham’s opinion concerning Costano dialects, Latham's thoughts on |
92 |
Costanoan family | 70, 71 |
Cotoname vocabulary, collected by Gatschet Cotoname words, gathered by Gatschet |
68 |
Coulter, Dr., Pima vocabulary of | 98 |
Coyotero Apache, population | 56 |
Cree, population | 49 |
Creeks, habitat and population | 95 |
Crows, habitat | 114, 116 |
population | 118 |
Curtin, Jeremiah, Chimarikan researches of Curtin, Jeremiah, Chimarikan researchers of |
63 |
Costanoan researches of | 70 |
Moquelumnan researches of | 93 |
Yanan researches of | 135 |
acknowledgments to | 142 |
Cushing, Frank H., on the derivation of “Zuñi” Cushing, Frank H., on the origin of “Zuñi” |
138 |
Cushna tribe | 99 |
D. | |
Dahcota. See Dakota. | |
Dahcotas, habitat of the divisions of | 111 |
Dakota, tribal and family sense of name Dakota, the significance of names in tribal and family identity |
112 |
divisions of the | 114 |
population and divisions of the | 116 |
Dall, W. H., linguistic literature | 21, 22, 24 |
cited on Eskimo habitat | 53 |
Eskimo researches of | 73 |
on Asiatic Eskimo | 74 |
on population of Alaskan Eskimo | 75 |
Dana on the divisions of the Sacramento tribes Dana on the divisions of the Sacramento tribes |
99 |
Dawson, George M., cited on Indian land tenure Dawson, George M., referenced on Indian land ownership |
40 |
assigns the Tagisch to the Koluschan family assigns the Tagisch to the Koluschan family |
87 |
Salishan researches | 104 |
De Bry, Timuquanan names on map of | 124 |
Delaware, population | 49 |
habitat | 79 |
De L’Isle cited | 60 |
De Soto, Ferdinand, on early habitat of the Kaskaskias De Soto, Ferdinand, on the early habitat of the Kaskaskias |
113 |
supposed to have visited the Yuchi | 126 |
Timuquanan towns encountered by | 124 |
D’Iberville, names of Taensa towns given by D’Iberville, names of Taensa towns given by |
96 |
Diegueño, population | 138 |
Differentiation of languages within single stock, to what due Differentiation of languages within a single stock, for what reason |
141 |
Digger Indian tongue compared by Powers with the Pit River dialects Digger Indian language compared by Powers with the Pit River dialects |
98 |
Disease, Indian belief concerning | 39 |
Dobbs, Arthur, cited on Eskimo habitat | 73 |
Dog Rib, population of | 55 |
Dorsey, J. O., cited on Pacific coast tribes Dorsey, J. O., referenced on Pacific Coast tribes |
54 |
cited on Omaha-Arikara alliance | 60 |
Catawba studies | 112 |
on Crow habitat | 114 |
Takilman researches | 121 |
Yakonan researches | 134 |
acknowledgments to | 142 |
Drew, E. P., on Siuslaw habitat | 134 |
Duflot de Mofras, E. de, cited | 92 |
Duflot de Mofras E. de, Soledad, language of Duflot de Mofras E. de, Soledad, language of |
102 |
Dunbar, John B., quoted on Pawnee habitat Dunbar, John B., quoted on Pawnee habitat |
60 |
Duncan, William, settlement of Chimmesyan tribes by Duncan, William, settlement of Chimmesyan tribes by |
65 |
Duponceau collection, Salishan vocabulary of the Duponceau collection, Salishan vocabulary of the |
103 |
Du Pratz, Le Page, cited on Caddoan habitat Du Pratz, Le Page, referenced on Caddoan living conditions |
61 |
on certain southern tribes | 66 |
on the Na’htchi language | 96 |
E. | |
Eaton, Captain, Zuñi vocabulary of | 139 |
Ecclemachs. See Esselenian family. Ecclemachs. See Esselenian family. |
|
Eells, Myron, linguistic literature | 24 |
on the Chimakuan language and habitat | 62, 63 |
E-nagh-magh language of Lane | 122 |
Emory, W. H., visit of, to the Pima | 98 |
Environment as affecting language | 141 |
Eskimauan family | 71-75 |
Eslen nation of Galiano | 75 |
Esselenian family | 75, 76 |
Etah Eskimo, habitat of | 72, 73 |
É-ukshikni or Klamath | 90 |
Everette on the derivation of “Yakona” | 134 |
F. | |
“Family,” linguistic, defined | 11 |
Filson, John, on Yuchi habitat | 127 |
Flatbow. See Kitunahan family. | |
Flathead Cootenai | 85 |
Flathead family, Salish or | 102 |
Fontanedo, Timuquanan, local names of | 124 |
Food distribution among North American Indians Food distribution among North American Indians |
34 |
Friendly Village, dialect of | 104 |
G. | |
Galiano, D. A., on the Eslen and Runsien Galiano, D. A., on the Eslen and Runsien |
75, 76 |
Gallatin, Albert, founder of systematic American philology Gallatin, Albert, founder of organized American linguistics |
9, 10 |
linguistic literature | 12, 15, 16, 17 |
Attacapan researches | 57 |
on the Caddo and Pawnee | 59 |
Chimmesyan researches | 64 |
on the Chitimachan family | 66 |
on the Muskhogean family | 94 |
on Eskimauan boundaries | 72 |
comparison of Iroquois and Cheroki | 77 |
on the Kiowa language | 84 |
on the Koluschan family | 86 |
on Na’htchi habitat | 96 |
Salishan researches | 102, 103 |
reference to “Sahaptin ” family | 107 |
on the Shoshonean family | 108 |
on the Siouan family | 111 |
Skittagetan researches | 119, 120 |
on Tonika language | 135 |
on the habitat of the Yuchi | 126 |
linguistic map | 142 |
Game laws of California tribes | 42 |
Garcia, Bartolomé, cited | 68 |
Gatschet, A. S., work of | 7 |
linguistic literature | 23, 24 |
comparison of Caddoan and Adaizan languages by comparison of Caddoan and Adaizan languages by |
46 |
on Pacific Coast tribes | 54 |
Attacapan researches | 57 |
Beothukan researches | 57 |
Chimakuan researches | 62 |
on the derivation of “Chitimacha” | 66 |
Chitimachan researches | 67 |
Coahuiltecan researches | 68 |
Mutson investigations | 70 |
Tonkawe vocabulary collected by | 82 |
on the Kitunahan family | 85 |
distinguishes the Kusan as a distinct stock distinguishes the Kusan as a unique group |
89 |
on the habitat of the Yamasi | 95 |
on the Taensa language | 96 |
on the derivation of “Palaihnih” | 97 |
on the Pima language | 99 |
discovered radical affinity between Wakashan and Salishan families discovered a strong connection between the Wakashan and Salishan families |
104 |
Catawba studies | 112 |
surviving Biloxi found by | 114 |
Takilman researches | 121 |
on the derivation of “Taño” | 122 |
classes Tonkawan as a distinct stock | 125 |
Tonikan researches | 125 |
on early Yuchi habitat | 127 |
on the derivation of Waiilatpu | 127 |
Washoan language separated by | 131 |
Wishoskan researches | 133 |
on the Sayúsklan language | 134 |
Gens du Lac, habitat | 111 |
Gibbs, George, linguistic literature | 17, 22 |
on the Chimakum language | 62 |
on the Kulanapan family | 87 |
the Eh-nek family of | 100 |
on the Weitspekan language | 131 |
Wishoskan researches | 133 |
Yuki vocabulary cited | 136 |
Gioloco language | 108 |
Gosiute, population | 110 |
Grammatic elements of language | 141 |
Grammatic structure in classification of Indian languages Grammatical structure in the classification of Indian languages |
11 |
Gravier, Father, on the Na’htchi and Taensa Gravier, Father, on the Na’htchi and Taensa |
97 |
Greely, A. W., on Eskimo of Grinnell Land Greely, A. W., on the Inuit of Grinnell Land |
73 |
Greenland, Eskimo of | 73, 75 |
Grinnell Land, Eskimo of | 73 |
Gros Ventres, habitat | 116 |
Guiloco language | 92 |
H. | |
Haeltzuk, habitat | 129, 130 |
principal tribes | 131 |
population | 131 |
Haida, divisions of | 120 |
population | 121 |
language, related to Koluschan | 120 |
method of land tenure | 40 |
Hailtzuk, population | 105 |
Hale, Horatio, linguistic literature | 14, 25 |
discovery of branches of Athapascan family in Oregon by discovery of branches of the Athapascan family in Oregon by |
52 |
on the affinity of Cheroki to Iroquois | 77 |
on the derivation of “Iroquois” | 77 |
on the “Kaus or Kwokwoos” | 89 |
on the Talatui | 92 |
on the Palaihnihan | 97 |
on certain Pujunan tribes | 99, 100 |
Salishan researches | 104 |
on the Sastean family | 106 |
Tutelo researches | 114 |
classification and habitat of Waiilatpuan tribes classification and habitat of Waiilatpuan tribes |
127 |
on the Yakonan family | 134 |
Hamilton manuscript cited | 54 |
Hanega, population | 87 |
Hano pueblo, Tusayan | 123 |
population | 123 |
Hare tribe, population | 55 |
Harrison, on early Tutelo habitat | 114 |
Haumonté, J. D., on the Taensa | 96 |
Havasupai habitat and population | 138 |
Hayden, Ferdinand V., linguistic literature Hayden, Ferdinand V., language studies |
20 |
Haynarger vocabulary cited | 54 |
Henshaw, H. W., Chumashan researches of Henshaw, H. W., Chumashan research of |
68 |
Costanoan researches of | 70 |
Esselenian investigations of | 76 |
Moquelumnan researches of | 93 |
Salinan researches of | 101 |
on Salinan population | 102 |
on population of Cayuse | 128 |
acknowledgments to | 142 |
synonomy of tribes by | 142 |
Heshotatsína, a Zuñi village | 139 |
Hewitt, J. N. B., on the derivation of “Iroquois” Hewitt, J. N. B., on the origin of “Iroquois” |
77 |
Hidatsa population | 118 |
Hoh, population and habitat | 63 |
Holm, G., Greenland Eskimo | 72 |
on East Greenland Eskimo population | 75 |
Hoodsunu, population | 87 |
Hoquiam, population | 105 |
Hospitality of American Indians, source of Hospitality of American Indians, source of |
34 |
Howe, George, on early habitat of the Cherokee Howe, George, on the early habitat of the Cherokee |
78 |
Hudson Bay, Eskimo of | 73 |
Humptulip, population | 105 |
Hunah, population | 87 |
Hunting claims | 42, 43 |
Hupa, population of | 56 |
I. | |
Iakon, see Yakwina | 134 |
Improvidence of Indians | 34, 37 |
Indian languages, principles of classification of Indian languages, principles of classification of |
8-12 |
literature relating to classification of classification-related literature |
12-25 |
at time of European discovery | 44 |
Indian linguistic families, paper by J. W. Powell on Indian linguistic families, paper by J. W. Powell on |
1-142 |
work on classification of | 25, 26 |
Industry of Indians | 36 |
Innuit population | 75 |
Iowa, habitat and population | 116, 118 |
Iroquoian family | 76-81 |
Isleta, New Mexico, population | 123 |
Isleta, Texas, population | 123 |
Ives, J. C., on the habitat of the Chemehuevi Ives, J. C., on the habitat of the Chemehuevi |
110 |
J. | |
Jargon, establishment of, between tribes Tribal jargon establishment |
7 |
Jemez, population of | 123 |
Jewett’s Wakash vocabulary referred to | 129 |
Jicarilla Apache, population | 56 |
Johnson, Sir William, treaty with Cherokees Johnson, Sir William, agreement with the Cherokees |
78 |
Johnston, A. R., visit of, to the Pima | 98 |
Joutel on the location of certain Quapaw villages Joutel on the location of certain Quapaw villages |
113 |
K. | |
Kaigani, divisions of the | 121 |
Kaiowe, habitat | 109 |
Kaiowe. See Kiowan family. | |
Kai Pomo, habitat | 88 |
Kai-yuh-kho-tána, etc., population | 56 |
Kalapooian family | 81-82 |
Kane, Paul, linguistic literature | 19 |
Kansa or Kaw tribe | 113 |
population | 118 |
Karankawan family | 82-83 |
Kaskaskias, early habitat | 113 |
Kastel Pomo, habitat | 88 |
Kat-la-wot-sett bands | 134 |
Kato Pomo, habitat | 88 |
Kaus or Kwokwoos tribe of Hale | 89 |
Kaw, habitat | 116 |
Kaw. See Kansa. | |
Keane, Augustus H., linguistic literature Keane, Augustus H., language studies |
23 |
on the “Tegua or Taywaugh” | 122 |
Kek, population | 87 |
Kenesti, habitat | 54 |
Keresan family | 83 |
K’iapkwainakwin, a Zuñi village | 139 |
Kichai habitat and population | 61, 62 |
Kickapoo, population | 49 |
Kinai language asserted to bear analogies to the Mexican Kinai language is said to have similarities with the Mexican |
86 |
Kiowan family | 84 |
Kitunahan family | 85 |
Kiwomi, a Keresan dialect | 83 |
Klamath, habitat and population | 90 |
Klanoh-Klatklam tribe | 85 |
Klikitat, population | 107 |
K’nai-khotana tribe of Cook’s Inlet | 53 |
K’naia-khotána, population | 56 |
Koasáti, population | 95 |
Koluschan family | 85-87 |
Ku-itc villages, location of | 134 |
Kulanapan and Chimarikan verbal correspondences Kulanapan and Chimarikan language ties |
63 |
Kulanapan family | 87-89 |
Kusan family | 89 |
Kutchin, population | 56 |
Kutenay. See Kitunahan family. | |
Kwaiantikwoket, habitat | 110 |
Kwakiutl tribe | 129 |
L. | |
Labrador, Eskimo of | 73 |
Labrador, Eskimo population | 75 |
Laguna, population | 83 |
La Harpe cited | 61 |
Lake tribe, Washington, population | 105 |
Lákmiut population | 82 |
Lamanon on the Eeclemachs | 75, 76 |
Land, Indian ownership of | 40 |
amount devoted to Indian agriculture | 42 |
Lane, William C., linguistic literature Lane, William C., language books |
17 |
on Pueblo languages | 122 |
Languages, cognate | 11, 12 |
Latham, R. G., linguistic literature | 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 20 |
cited on Beothukan language | 57 |
Chumashan researches | 67 |
proposes name for Copehan family | 69 |
Costanoan researches | 70 |
Salinas family of | 75 |
mention of the Kaus tribe | 89 |
on the Tonika language | 125 |
on the Weitspekan language | 132 |
Wishoskan researches | 133 |
on the Sayúsklan language | 134 |
Yuman researches | 137 |
Pueblo researches | 139 |
classification of the Mariposan family | 90 |
on the Moquelumnan family | 92 |
on the Piman family | 98 |
on the Pujunan family | 99 |
on the Ehnik family of | 100 |
on the Salinan family | 102 |
Lawson, John, on Tutelo migration in 1671 Lawson, John, on Tutelo migration in 1671 |
114 |
Lewis and Clarke cited on improvidence of Indians of the Northwest Lewis and Clark commented on the recklessness of the Native Americans in the Northwest. |
37 |
on Pacific coast tribes | 53 |
on Arikari habitat | 60 |
authorities on Chinookan habitat | 65 |
on the habitat of Kalapooian tribes | 82 |
on the Kusan tribe | 89 |
Salishan tribes met by | 104 |
on habit of Shoshonean tribes | 109 |
on Crow habitat | 114 |
on the Yakwina | 134 |
Lexical elements considered in classificacation of Indian languages Lexical elements considered in the classification of Indian languages |
11, 141 |
Linguistic classification, rules for | 8-12 |
Linguistic families of North America, paper by J. W. Powell on Linguistic families of North America, paper by J. W. Powell on |
1-142 |
nomenclature of | 7-12 |
work on classification of | 25, 26 |
number of | 45 |
Linguistic “family” defined | 11 |
Linguistic map, preparation of | 142 |
notes concerning | 25, 45 |
Lipan, habitat | 54 |
population | 56 |
Literature relating to classification of Indian languages Literature about the classification of Indian languages |
12-25 |
Loucheux classed as Athapascan | 52 |
Lower California, native population of, unknown Lower California, native population of, unknown |
138 |
Lower Spokane, population | 105 |
Lower Umpqua villages, location of | 134 |
Lummi, population | 105 |
Lutuamian family | 89-90 |
M. | |
Madison tribe, population | 105 |
Mahican, population | 51 |
Makah tribe | 129 |
habitat | 130 |
population | 130 |
Mallery, Garrick, cited on early Indian population Mallery, Garrick, mentioned in early Indian population |
33 |
acknowledgments to | 142 |
Malthusian law, not applicable to American Indians Malthusian law doesn't apply to Native Americans. |
33-34 |
Mandan habitat | 116 |
population | 118 |
Map showing Indian linguistic families, explanation of Map showing Indian linguistic families, explanation of |
26, 45 |
Marchand on the Tshinkitani | 86 |
Margry on early habitat of the Biloxi | 114 |
Maricopa population | 138 |
Mariposan family | 90-91 |
Marquette’s map, location of the Quapaw on Marquette’s map, the location of the Quapaw on |
113 |
Marriage among Indians | 35 |
Marys River tribe, population | 82 |
Maskegon, population | 49 |
Mdewakantonwan, population | 116 |
Medicine Creek treaty | 84 |
Medicine practice of the Indians, evils of Medicine practice of the Indians, evils of |
39 |
Meherrin, joined by the Tutelo | 114 |
Mendewahkantoan, habitat | 111 |
Menominee, population | 49 |
Mescalero Apache, population | 56 |
Mexican language, Kinai bears analogies to the Mexican language, Kinai has similarities to the |
86 |
Miami, population | 49 |
Micmac, population | 49 |
western Newfoundland colonized by | 58 |
Migration of Siouan tribes westward | 112 |
Migration, effect of, upon language | 141 |
Milhau on the derivation of “Coos” | 89 |
Misisauga, population | 49 |
Missouri tribe, habitat | 116 |
Miwok division of Moqueluman family, tribes of Miwok division of the Moqueluman family, tribes of |
93 |
“Mobilian trade Jargon” | 96 |
Modoc, habitat and population | 90 |
Módokni, or Modoc | 90 |
Mohave, population | 138 |
Mohawk, population | 80 |
Moki. See Tusayan. | |
Molále, habitat and population | 127, 128 |
Monsoni, population | 49 |
Montagnais, population | 49 |
Monterey, Cal., natives of | 71 |
Montesano, population | 105 |
Montigny, M. de, on the Na’htchi and Taensa Montigny, M. de, on the Na’htchi and Taensa |
96, 97 |
Mooney, James, acknowledgments to | 142 |
Moquelumnan family | 92-93 |
Muekleshoot, population | 105 |
Murdoch, John, Eskimo researches of | 73 |
Muskhogean family | 94-95 |
N. | |
Nahanie, population | 56 |
Na’htchi, Taensa and Chitimacha, supposed by Du Pratz to be kindred tribes | 65-66 |
Na’htchi, habitat and population | 96-97 |
Nahuatl, Pima a branch of the | 99 |
Shoshonean regarded by Buschmann as a branch of Shoshonean is seen by Buschmann as a branch of |
109 |
Na-isha Apache, population | 56 |
Nambé, population | 123 |
Names, population | 56 |
Nascapee, population | 49 |
Nascapi joined by the Beothuk | 58 |
Natchesan family | 95 |
Navajo, habitat | 54 |
Nelson, E. W., cited on Athapascan habitat Nelson, E. W., referenced on Athapascan habitat |
53 |
Eskimo researches of | 73 |
Nespilem, population | 105 |
Nestucca, habitat | 104 |
Newfoundland, aborigines of | 57 |
New Metlakahtla, a Chimmesyan settlement New Metlakahtla, a Chimmesyan community |
65 |
Nisqually language distinct from Chimakum Nisqually language different from Chimakum |
62 |
Nisqually, population | 105 |
Noje. See Nozi. | 135 |
Nomenclature of linguistic families, paper by J. W. Powell on Nomenclature of linguistic families, paper by J. W. Powell on |
1-142 |
Nootka-Columbian family of Scouler | 129, 130 |
Northwestern Innuit population | 75 |
Notaway tribe | 79 |
Notaway joined by the Tutelo | 114 |
Nozi tribe | 135 |
O. | |
Ojibwa, population | 50 |
Okinagan, population | 105 |
Olamentke dialect of Kostromitonov | 92 |
Olamentke division of Moquelumnan family, tribes of Olamentke division of Moquelumnan family, tribes of |
93 |
Omaha, habitat | 115 |
population | 117 |
Oneida, population | 80 |
Onondaga, population | 80 |
Orozco y Berra, Manuel, linguistic literature Orozco y Berra, Manuel, linguistic literature |
20 |
cited | 54 |
on the Coahuiltecan family | 68 |
Osage, early occupancy ot Arkansas by the Osage, early occupancy of Arkansas by the |
113 |
Osage, habitat and population | 116, 118 |
Oto and Missouri, population | 118 |
Otoe, habitat | 116 |
Ottawa, population | 50 |
Oyhut, population | 105 |
P. | |
Packard, A. S., on Labrador Eskimo population Packard, A. S., on the population of Labrador Eskimos |
75 |
Pai Ute, population | 110 |
Pakawá tribe, habitat | 68 |
Palaihnihan family | 97, 98 |
Paloos, population | 107 |
Papago, a division of the Piman family | 98 |
population | 99 |
Pareja, Padre, Timuquana vocabulary of | 123 |
Parisot, J., et al., on the Taensa language Parisot, J., et al., on the Taensa language |
96 |
Parry, C. C., Pima vocabulary of | 98 |
Patriotism of the Indian | 36 |
Paviotso, population | 110 |
Pawnee, divisions of, and habitat | 60, 61, 113 |
population | 62 |
Peoria, population of the | 50 |
Petroff, Ivan, Eskimo researches of | 73 |
on population of the Koluschan tribes | 87 |
Picuris, population | 123 |
Pike, Z., on the Kiowa language | 84 |
on the habitat of the Comanche | 106 |
Pilling, James C., work of | 142 |
acknowledgments to | 142 |
Pit River dialects | 97 |
Pima alta, a division of the Piman family Pima alta, a branch of the Piman family |
98 |
Piman family | 98 |
Pima, population | 99 |
Pimentel, Francisco, linguistic literature Pimentel, Francisco, language literature |
21 |
on the Yuman language | 137 |
Pinto tribe, habitat | 68 |
Point Barrow Eskimo, habitat | 73 |
Pojoaque, population | 123 |
Ponca, habitat | 113, 115 |
population | 117 |
Pope on the Kiowa habitat | 84 |
Population of Indian tribes discussed | 33-40 |
Pottawatomie, population of the | 50 |
Powell, J. W., paper of, on Indian linguistic families Powell, J. W., paper about Indian language families |
1-142 |
linguistic literature | 22, 23, 24 |
Mutsun researches | 70 |
Wishoskan researches | 133 |
Noje vocabulary of | 135 |
separates the Yuki language | 136 |
Powers, Stephen, linguistic literature | 22 |
cited on artificial boundaries of Indian hunting and fishing claims cited on artificial boundaries of Indian hunting and fishing claims |
42 |
cited on Pacific coast tribes | 54 |
on the Chimarikan family | 63 |
on the Meewok name of the Moquelumne River on the Meewok name of the Mokelumne River |
92 |
on the Pit River dialects | 97 |
Cahroc, tribe of | 100 |
Pujunan researches | 100 |
on Shoshonean of California | 110 |
Washoan vocabularies of | 131 |
on habitat of Weitspekan tribes | 132 |
on the Nozi tribe | 135 |
Pownall map, location of Totteroy River on Pownall map, location of Totteroy River on |
114 |
Prairie du Chien, treaty of | 112 |
Prichard, James C., linguistic literature Prichard, James C., language studies |
14 |
Priestly, Thomas, on Chinook population Priestly, Thomas, on Chinook fish population |
66 |
Pueblo languages, see Keresan, Tañoan, Zuñian. Pueblo languages, see Keresan, Tañoan, Zuñian. |
|
Pujunan family | 99, 100 |
Pujuni tribe | 99 |
Purísima, inhabitants of | 67 |
Puyallup, population | 105 |
Q. | |
Quaitso, population | 105 |
Quapaw, a southern Siouan tribe | 113 |
early habitat | 113 |
present habitat | 116 |
population | 118 |
Quarrelers classed as Athapascan | 52 |
“Queen Charlotte’s Islands,” language of, Gallatin “Queen Charlotte’s Islands,” language of, Gallatin |
119 |
Queniut, population | 105 |
Quile-ute, population and habitat | 63 |
Quinaielt, population | 105 |
Quoratean family | 100, 101 |
R. | |
Ramsey, J. G. M., on Cherokee habitat | 78 |
Rechahecrian. See Rickohockan. | |
Rickohockan Indians of Virginia | 79 |
Riggs, A. L., on Crow habitat | 114 |
Riggs, S. R., Salishan researches | 104 |
Rink, H. J., on population of Labrador Eskimo Rink, H. J., on the population of Labrador Eskimo |
75 |
Rogue River Indians | 121 |
population | 56 |
Ross, Alexander, cited on improvidence of Indians of Northwest Ross, Alexander, mentioned regarding the recklessness of Native Americans in the Northwest |
38 |
Ross, Sir John, acknowledgments to | 73 |
Royce, Charles C., map of, cited on Cherokee lands Royce, Charles C., map of, mentioned regarding Cherokee lands |
78 |
Runsien nation of Galiano | 75 |
Ruslen language of Mofras | 102 |
S. | |
Sac and Fox, population of the | 50 |
Sacramento tribes, Sutter and Dana on the division of Sacramento tribes, Sutter and Dana on the division of |
99 |
Saiaz, habitat | 54 |
Saidyuka, population | 110 |
Saint Regis, population | 81 |
Salinan family | 101 |
Salishan family | 102-105 |
Salish, population | 105 |
Salish of Puget Sound | 130 |
San Antonio language | 75 |
San Antonio Mission, Cal. | 101, 102 |
San Buenaventura Indians | 67, 68 |
San Carlos Apache population | 56 |
Sandia, population | 123 |
San Felipe, population | 83 |
San Ildefonso, population | 123 |
San Juan, population | 123 |
San Luis Obispo, natives of | 67 |
San Luis Rey Mission, Cal. | 138 |
San Miguel language | 75 |
San Miguel Mission, Cal. | 101, 102 |
Sans Puell, population | 105 |
Santa Ana, population | 83 |
Santa Barbara applied as family name | 67 |
Santa Barbara language, Cal. | 101 |
Santa Clara, Cal., language | 92 |
Santa Clara, population | 123 |
Santa Cruz Islands, natives of | 67 |
Santa Cruz, Cal., natives of | 71 |
Santa Inez Indians | 67 |
Santa Rosa Islanders | 67 |
Santee population | 116 |
Santiam, population | 83 |
Santo Domingo, population | 83 |
Sastean family | 105 |
Satsup, population | 105 |
Say, Dr., vocabularies of Kiowa by | 84 |
Say’s vocabulary of Shoshoni referred to Say’s vocabulary of Shoshoni referred to |
109 |
Sayúsklan language | 134 |
Schermerhorn, cited on Kädo hadatco | 61 |
on the Kiowa habitat | 84 |
Schoolcraft, H. R., on the Cherokee bounds in Virginia Schoolcraft, H. R., on the Cherokee boundaries in Virginia |
79 |
on the Tuolumne dialect | 92 |
on the Cushna tribe | 99 |
Scouler, John, linguistic literature | 13-14 |
on the Kalapooian family | 81 |
Skittagetan researches | 119 |
Shahaptan family of | 107 |
“Nootka-Columbian,” family of | 139 |
Secumne tribe | 99 |
Sedentary tribes | 30-33 |
Seminole, population | 95 |
Seneca, population | 80 |
Senecú, population | 123 |
Shahaptian family | 106 |
Shasta, habitat | 106 |
Shateras, supposed to be Tutelos | 114 |
Shawnee, population | 50 |
habitat | 79 |
Shea, J. G., on early habitat of the Kaskaskias Shea, J. G., on the early habitat of the Kaskaskias |
113 |
Sheepeaters. See Tukuarika. | |
Shiwokugmiut Eskimo, population | 75 |
Shoshonean family | 108-110 |
regarded by Buschmann as identical with Nahuatlan regarded by Buschmann as the same as Nahuatlan |
140 |
Shoshoni, population | 110 |
Sia, population | 83 |
Sibley, John, cited on language of Adaizan family of Indians Sibley, John, referenced on the language of the Adaizan family of Indigenous people |
46-47 |
Attacapan researches | 57 |
cited on Caddo habitat | 61 |
on the habitat of the Karankawa | 82 |
states distinctness of Tonika language | 125 |
Siksika, population | 50 |
Simpson, James H., Zuñi vocabulary | 139 |
Siouan family | 111-118 |
Sioux, use of the term | 112 |
Sisitoans, habitat | 111 |
Sisseton, population | 116 |
Sitka tribe, population | 87 |
Siuslaw tribe | 134 |
Six Nations joined by the Tutelo | 114 |
Skittagetan family | 118 |
Skokomish, population | 105 |
Slave, and other tribes, population | 56 |
Smith, Buckingham, on the Timuquana language Smith, Buckingham, on the Timuquana language |
123 |
Snohomish, population | 105 |
Sobaipuri, a division of the Piman family Sobaipuri, a part of the Piman family |
98 |
Soke tribe occupying Sooke Inlet | 130 |
Soledad language of Mofras | 102 |
Sorcery, a common cause of death among Indians Sorcery is a frequent cause of death among Indigenous people. |
39 |
Southern Caddoan group | 113 |
Southern Killamuks. See Yakwina | 134 |
Sproat, G. M., suggests Aht as name of Wakashan family Sproat, G. M., suggests Aht as the name of the Wakashan family. |
130 |
Squaxon, population | 105 |
Stahkin, population | 87 |
Stevens, I. I., on the habitat of the Bannock Stevens, I. I., on the habitat of the Bannock |
109 |
“Stock,” linguistic, defined | 11 |
Stockbridge, population | 51 |
Stoney, Lieut., investigations of Athapascan habitat Stoney, Lieut., research on Athapascan living conditions |
53 |
Superstition the most common source of death among Indians Superstition is the most common cause of death among Indians. |
39 |
Sutter, Capt., on the divisions of the Sacramento tribes Sutter, Capt., on the divisions of the Sacramento tribes |
99 |
Swinomish, population | 105 |
T. | |
Taensa, regarded by Du Pratz as kindred to the Na’htchi Taensa, considered by Du Pratz to be related to the Na’htchi |
66 |
tribe and language | 96 |
habitat | 97 |
Tâiakwin, a Zuñi village | 139 |
Takilman family | 121 |
Takilma, habitat and population | 121 |
Taku, population | 87 |
Tañoan stock, one Tusayan pueblo belonging to Tañoan stock, one Tusayan village belonging to |
110 |
Tañoan family | 121-123 |
Taos language shows Shoshonean affinities Taos language has Shoshonean similarities |
122 |
population | 123 |
Taylor, Alexander S., on the Esselen vocabulary Taylor, Alexander S., on the Esselen vocabulary |
75, 76 |
Taywaugh language of Lane | 122 |
Teaching among Indians | 35 |
Tegua or Taywaugh language | 122 |
Tenaino, population | 107 |
Tenán Kutchin, population | 56 |
Tesuque, population | 123 |
Teton, habitat | 111 |
population | 117 |
Tiburon Island occupied by Yuman tribes Tiburon Island, home to Yuman tribes |
138 |
Tillamook, habitat | 104 |
population | 105 |
Timuquanan tribes, probable early habitat of Timuquanan tribes, likely an early habitat of |
95 |
family | 123-125 |
Tobacco Plains Cootenai | 85 |
Tobikhar, population | 110 |
Tolmie, W. F., Chimmesyan vocabulary cited Tolmie, W. F., Chimmesyan vocabulary referenced |
64 |
Salishan researches | 104 |
Shahaptian vocabularies of | 107 |
Tolmie and Dawson, linguistic literature Tolmie and Dawson, language studies |
25 |
map cited | 53, 64 |
on boundaries of the Haeltzuk | 130 |
Tongas, population | 87 |
Tonikan family | 125 |
Tonkawan family | 125-126 |
Tonkawe vocabulary collected by Gatschet Tonkawe words gathered by Gatschet |
82 |
Tonti, cited | 61 |
Toteros. See Tutelo | 114 |
Totteroy River, location of, by Pownall Totteroy River, location of, by Pownall |
114 |
Towakarehu, population | 62 |
Treaties, difficulties, and defects in, regarding definition of tribal boundaries | 43-44 |
Treaty of Prairie du Chien | 112 |
Tribal land classified | 40 |
Trumbull, J. H., on the derivation of Caddo Trumbull, J. H., on the origin of Caddo |
59 |
on the derivation of “Sioux” | 111 |
Tsamak tribe | 99 |
Tshinkitani or Koluschan tribe | 86 |
Tukuarika, habitat | 109 |
population | 110 |
Turner, William W., linguistic literature Turner, William W., language studies |
18 |
discovery of branches of Athapascan family in Oregon by discovery of branches of the Athapascan family in Oregon by |
52 |
Eskimo researches of | 73 |
on the Keresan language | 83 |
on the Kiowan family | 84 |
on the Piman family | 98 |
Yuman researches | 137 |
Zuñian researches | 138 |
Tusayan, habitat and population | 110 |
Tewan pueblo of | 122 |
a Shoshonean tongue | 139 |
Tuscarora, an Iroquoian tribe | 79 |
population | 81 |
Tuski of Asia | 74 |
Tutelo, a Siouan tribe | 112 |
habitat in 1671 | 114 |
present habitat | 116 |
population | 118 |
Tyigh, population | 107 |
U. | |
Uchean family | 126-127 |
Umatilla, population | 107 |
Umpqua, population | 56 |
Scouler on the | 81 |
Unungun, population | 75 |
Upper Creek join the Na’htchi | 96 |
Upper Spokane, population | 105 |
Upper Umpqua villages, location of | 134 |
Uta, population | 110 |
Ute, habitat of the | 109 |
V. | |
Valle de los Tulares language | 92 |
Villages of Indians | 40 |
W. | |
Waco, population | 62 |
Wahkpakotoan, habitat | 111 |
Waiilatpuan family | 127-128 |
Wailakki, habitat | 54 |
relationship of to Kulanapan tribes | 88 |
Wakashan family | 128-131 |
Wakash, habitat | 129 |
Walapai, population | 138 |
Walla Walla, population | 107 |
Wars, effect of, in reducing Indian population Wars and their impact on decreasing the Indian population |
38 |
Wasco, population | 66 |
Washaki, habitat | 109 |
Washoan family | 131 |
Wateree, habitat and probable linguistic connection Wateree, habitat and likely linguistic connection |
114 |
Watlala, population | 66 |
Wayne, Maumee valley settlements described by Wayne, Maumee Valley settlements described by |
41 |
Weitspekan family | 131 |
Western Innuit population | 75 |
Whipple, A. W., Kiowan researches | 84 |
Pima vocabulary of | 98 |
on the derivation of “Yuma” | 137 |
Zuñi vocabulary | 139 |
White Mountain Apache population | 56 |
Wichita, population | 62 |
Winnebago, former habitat | 111, 112 |
Winnebago, present habitat | 116 |
Winnebago, population | 118 |
Wishoskan family | 132-133 |
Witchcraft beliefs among Indians | 39 |
Woccon, an extinct Siouan tribe | 112, 116 |
Woccon, former habitat | 114 |
Wyandot, former habitat | 78 |
population | 81 |
Y. | |
Yaketahnoklatakmakanay tribe | 85 |
Yakonan family | 133 |
Yakutat population | 87 |
Yakut or Mariposan family | 90 |
Yakwina tribe | 134 |
Yamasi, believed to be extinct | 95 |
habitat | 95 |
Yámil, population | 82 |
Yamkallie, Scouler on | 81 |
Yanan family | 135 |
Yanktoanans, habitat | 111 |
Yankton, habitat | 111 |
population | 116 |
Yanktonnais, population | 117 |
Yonkalla, population | 82 |
Youikcones or Youkone of Lewis and Clarke Youikcones or Youkone of Lewis and Clark |
134 |
Youkiousme, a Moquelumnan dialect | 92 |
Ysleta, Texas, population | 123 |
Yuchi, habitat and population | 126, 127 |
Yuchi. See Uchean family. | |
Yuit Eskimo of Asia | 74 |
Yukian family | 135-136 |
Yuman family | 136-138 |
Yurok, Karok name for the Weitspekan tribes Yurok and Karok are the names for the Weitspekan tribes. |
132 |
Z. | |
Zuñian family | 138-139 |
Problems of Transcription
The phonetic symbol ⁿ has been expressed as superscript n.
The phonetic symbol ⁿ is represented as superscript n.
In the printed text it was not clear whether the author intended hacek (Unicode “caron”) ˇ or breve ˘. Breve was chosen as it is phonetically plausible and the characters are more widely available.
In the printed text, it wasn't clear whether the author meant hacek (Unicode "caron") ˇ or breve ˘. Breve was selected because it makes phonetic sense and the characters are more commonly available.
The spelling “Lewis and Clarke” was used consistently in the original text, as was “Zuñi” with tilde.
The spelling "Lewis and Clarke" was used consistently in the original text, as was "Zuñi" with a tilde.
All parenthetical references to “obvious typographical error,” “evident misprint” and the like are retained from the original text.
All parenthetical references to “obvious typographical error,” “evident misprint,” and similar terms are kept from the original text.
Download ePUB
If you like this ebook, consider a donation!